The URL can be used to link to this page

HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS - 05-0063-UT .., ie CONSTRUCTION GROUPS CG C041816 UG C053963 Diversified . Inc. . GENERAL CONTRACTING GROUP . ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRUCTION GROUP . UNDERGROUND UTILITIES GROUP January 7,2008 Attn: Glen L. Bahnick, Jr. Assistant Director of EngineeringlProduction City of Clearwater Municipal Services Building 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Suite 220 Clearwater, Florida 33756 727/562-4750 Re: Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements (05-0063-UT) Dear Mr. Bahnick: LEITER OF TRANSMIITAL Weare sending you _X_Attached _Under separate cover via: _Shop Drawings _Specifications _Prints _Purchase Order Plans _Change Order _Samples Other These are transmitted as checked below: _For signature _Approved as Submitted _For your use _Approved as noted _Returned for Corrections, Please resubmit _Pay Request _X_As requested For Review This Transmittal contains: Copies 5 ea. 5 ea. 5 ea. No. Description Executed Contracts Insurance Certificates Corporate Resolution Joanne Lamberson Vice-President Chrono CORES 0723 MAIN OFFICE. 271917TH STREET EAST. PALMETTO. FL 34221 .941-722-0621 · FAX 941-722-1382 EAST COAST. 7233 SOUTHERN BOULEVARD. B-1 · WEST PALM BEACH. FL 33413. 561-478-2025. FAX 561-478-7159 .., Ie CONSTRUCTION GROUPS CG C041816 UG C053963 Diversified . Inc. . GENERAL CONTRACTING GROUP . ENVIRONMENTAL CONSTRUCTION GROUP . UNDERGROUND UTILITIES GROUP CORPORATE RESOLUTION December 28, 2007 RE: Authority to Sign Legal Documents TO WHOM IT MAY CONCERN: TLC Diversified, Inc., being a legal Corporation organized under the Laws of the State of Florida in April, 1985, and having 100% of the outstanding shares of said Corporation owned by Mr. Thurston Lamberson since March of 1989 declares the following as a matter of record. Mr. Thurston Lamberson, being the sole proprietor of TLC Diversified, Inc., shall have full power and authority to sign any and all Legal and Binding Documents and make all commitments of whatever nature for TLC Diversified, Inc. Signed this 28th day of December, 2007 ~~- Thurston Lamberson President ~~ Sworn to and subscribed before me Thurston Lamberson whom I know this 28th day of December, 2007. /c1f~ ~CUnningham Notary Public I'....y'~ KAY L Cl}NNINGHAM ~ W~ MY COMMISSION # 00302744 1'~OFt\'ll'l' EXPIRES: March 23, 200ll My Commission Expires: MAIN OFFICE. 271917TH STREET EAST. PALMETTO. FL 34221 .941-722-0621 . FAX 941-722-1382 EAST COAST. 7233 SOUTHERN BOULEVARD · B-1 · WEST PALM BEACH · FL 33413 · 561-478-2025 . FAX 561-478-7159 '- I I I I -I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) FOR BIDDING Prepared for: CITY OF CLEARWATER Prepared by: JONES, EDMUNDS & ASSOCIATES, INC. 324 South Hyde Park Avenue, Suite 250 Tampa, Florida 33606 Jones Edmunds Project No. 03720-022-01 Certificate of Authorization # 1841 October 2007 ~~~ #6/Z8~ /Oft1ft'1 ADDENDUM NO.4 HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST. MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES lAPCF'S) PROJECT CLEARWATER. FLORIDA City Proiect No. OS-0063-UT DATE: November 8, 2007 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 4 to the Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF's) Project TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned This Addendum No.4 reflects corrections, revisions and clarifications to the Contract Plans and Bidding Document for the subject project as follows: SPECIFICATIONS CLARIFICATIONS: 1. PART IV - OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, SECTION V, SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT The addition to the PART N, SECTION V is as follows: ADD - SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT (attached herewith) - Insert after the last page under PART N, SECTION V - REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (See ADDENDUM I). Contractors shall submit this completely filled form along with the REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL. ENCL: ATTACHMENT 1: SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 November 8, 2007 Addendum 4 ------ - --- - ~~ --~ (ATTACHMENT TO REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL) SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT The CONTRACTOR proposes that the items of major equipment named herein will be supplied by the Manufacturers and Suppliers set forth below as written by the Contractor, unless changes are specifically authorized by the Owner. If Manufacturers and Suppliers have not been determined, list all potential Manufacturers and Suppliers. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by Manufacturer's name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the specifications covering the equipment. MAJOR EQUIPMENT SECTION TITLEIDESCRIPTION APCF MANUFACTURER MODEL 11325 GRIT CLASSIFICATION NORTHEAST EQUIPMENT 11330 STAIR/STEP NORTHEAST MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN w/W ASH PRESS 11330 STAIR/STEP EAST MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN w/W ASH PRESS 11331 FRONT RAKE FRONT MARSHALL RETURN STREET MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN w/W ASH PRESS 11332 SHAFTLESS SCREW NORTHEAST CONVEYOR Submitted By: (Name of the individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture) Signed By: Name and Title: Section V.doc Page 18 SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT ADDENDUM NO.3 HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST. MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES lAPCF'S) PROJECT CLEARWATER. FLORIDA City Proiect No. OS-0063-UT DATE: November 6, 2007 SUBJECT: Addendum No.3 to the Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF's) Project TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned This Addendum. No. 3 reflects corrections, revisions and clarifications to the Contract Plans and Bidding Document for the subject project as follows: GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS: 1. SECTION I, ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS- The modification to the SECTION I - Page 2 of 2, is as follows: DELETE - "Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasintl Manal!er. at the Purchasinl! Office. located at the MunicioaJ Services Bld1!.. 100 So. Mvrtle Ave.. 3'" Floor. Clearwater. non. 33756-5520. until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, NOVEMBER, 08, 2007, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for HEAD WORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACIUTIES (APCFs) CONTRACT NUMBER 05-0063- UT." INSERT - "Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasinl! MaolU!er. at the Purchasiol! Office. located at the MuniciDal Services Bid!!.. 100 So. Mvrtle Ave.. 3nl Floor. Clearwater. Florida 33756-5520. until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, NOVEMBER, 15,2007, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for BEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTRACT NUMBER OS-0063-UT." 03720-022-0 I November 6, 2007 Addendum 3 SPECIFICATIONS CLARIFICATIONS: 1. SECTION 02060, DEMOLITION- The modifications to the SECTION 02060 are as follows: DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.I DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.2 DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.3 DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.4 DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.S INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.I: To Read 1. Northeast APCF headworks including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit classifier), remove existing roof as shown in contract drawings and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.2: To Read 2. Marshall Street APCF headworks including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.04, Paragraph A.3: To Read 3. East APCF headworks including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 03720-022-0 I November 6, 2007 2 Addendum 3 ADDENDUM NO.2 HEAnWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST. MARSHALL STREET AND EAST AnV ANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCF'S) PROJECT CLEARWATER. FLORIDA City Proiect No. 05-0063-UT DATE: November 5, 2007 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 to the Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF's) Project TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned This Addendum No.2 reflects corrections, revisions and clarifications to the Contract Plans and Bidding Document for the subject project as follows: GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS: Question 1: Answer 1: "Is there a bypass required at Northeast APCF and Marshall Street APCF " The ENGINEER does not anticipate any pumped bypass requirement for either the Northeast APCF or Marshall Street APCF to install new screens and new grit removal equipment. At Northeast APCF, it was anticipated that the channel wells upstream and downstream of the mechanical bar screens can be coffer-dammed to perform channel-coating work and slide gates repairs/replacement. This work should be coordinated with the mechanical screen replacements, and slide gate repair and/or replacements. See SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. for more details. Pumping Bypass should not be required for the Marshall Street APCF since the sluice gates upstream of the bar screens are currently being repaired by the City under a separate contract. See SECTION 01100 - SUMMARY OF WORK. for more details. 03720-022-0 I November 5, 2007 Addendum 2 SPECIFICATIONS CLARIFICATIONS: 1. SECTION 11325, GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT- The modifications to the SECTION 11325 are as follows: DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.01, Paragraph A ("Grit-Mitt by WesTech, Salt Lalce City, UT") INSERT - New: Part 2, Section 2.01, Paragraph A: To Read A. Model GSXOl Grit Classifier by WesTech, Salt Lake City, UT 2. SECTION 11331, FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN WITH WASH PRESS- The modifications to the SECTION 11331 are as follows: ADD - Part 2, Section 2.01, Paragraph B 2. Cleanwash as manufactured by WesTech, Inc. 3. Approved Equal 03720-022-0 I November. 5, 2007 2 Addendum 2 ADDENDUM NO.1 HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST. MARSHALL STREET AND EAST AnV ANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCF'S) PROJECT CLEARVVATER.FLORIDA City Proiect No. 05-0063-UT DATE: November 2, 2007 SUBJECT: Addendum No. I to the Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF's) Project TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned This Addendum No. 1 reflects corrections. revisions and clarifications to the Contract Plans and Bidding Document for the subject project as follows: GENERAL CLARIFICATIONS: Question 1: "Does the City or the Engineer have the information on the make and model for the Slide gates at all three City of Clearwater APCFs?" Answer 1: The information (Make and Model) regarding the Slide gates is not available. Question 2: "It is not clear in the Conh'act Documents what is wrong with the existing gates that is causing them to be frozen and it is not possible to trouble shoot the gates pre-bid. Are the operators broken? Are the stem threads stripped? Are the gates themselves damaged or frozen thus preventing the operators .from working? It is impossible to provide competitive pricing for repair of the existing gates at this point when we don't know what is wrong with them. " Answer 2: The Slide gates are corroded and not operable. Question 3: "Operation of the existing gates is imperative to construction operations on the project. Repair of the gates are being bid as alternates, if the alternates are not chosen by the city, the work sequence specified in Section 011 DO-I. 04 will need to be changed drastically and the cost for performing contract work will be increased significantly. " Answer 3: See attached herewith the REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM I as well as revised MEASUREMENT ANDPA YMENT (Section 01200), 03720-022-01 Addendum] November 2, 2007 Question 4: "We suggest the Owner stipulate an allowance for the repair of existing gates that would be paid for based upon receipt of invoices (similar to the PLC allowance) and include this allowance in the Base Bid" Answer 4: See attached herewith the REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM I as well as revised MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (Section 01200). Question 5: "Note 7 on Drawing NE-M-03 for the Northeast project call to "Provide Chemical coating on walls on influent well, screen channels, and channel connecting the screem; up to existing parshall flume n. What is the coating limits on the influent well? Are we to only coat the walls of the influent channel./i'om EL 65.25 and up? !fit is required to coat the channelfrom El. 55,17 to EL 65.25, it will be necessary to set up a bypass operation outside of the structure and there is not enough information currently given in the drawings to account for this. .. Answer 5: The coating requirement in the influent well is as per the drawing NE-M-03. The coating shall be on the influent well walls from EL 65.25. SPECIFICATIONS CLARIFICATIONS: 1. SECTION 01200, MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT- The modifications to the SECTION 01200 are as follows: DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.01, Item A.9, INSERT - New: Part 2, Section 2.01, Item A.9: To Read Item A.9 - 5% Contingency of Total ofItem Al through A.7 1. Payment under this item shall be made for unforeseen items of work not included in the other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on plans, The cost of this additional work shall be a!!:reed upon in writine: and APPROVED bv the OWNER or his AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE prior to starlin!!: work under this item. 2. The lump sum bid for contingency shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the total bid for Items Al through A. 7. The Additive Alternate shall not be included in the contingency value. In case of mathematical error on the bidder's part, calculating the contingency, the items will be adjusted up or down to equate to five percent (5%) of the total of Bid Items No. A.1 through A.7. 3. Payment shall me made under Item A.9 - 5% Contingency of Total of Item Al through A.7 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 2 Addendum I ADD - Part 2, Section 2.0 I, Item A.II Item A.II - Northeast APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates Upstream and Downstream of Mechanical Screens 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perfonn all work necessary to repair the existing screen slide gates - upstream and downstream of mechanical screens. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item A.ll - Northeast APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates Upstream and Downstream of Mechanical Screens DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-1 INSERT - New: Part 2, Section 2.02, Item I-I: To Read NOT USED ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-2 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 1-2 - Northeast APCF - Replacement of Existing Slide Gate Upstream and Downstream of Mechanical Screens ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-3 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3, Payment shall be under Item 1-3 - Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless Screw Conveyor System for Mechanical Screens ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-4 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit price basis, price per sq.yd., in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 1-4 - Northeast APCF - Strip Existing Ceiling Paint and Apply New Coating 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 3 Addendum I ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-5 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit price basis, price per sq.yd., in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 1-5 - Northeast APCF - Prepare and Paint Walls ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-6 2. . Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 1-6 - Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install Aluminum Roll-up door and removable railing ADD - Part 2, Section 2.02, Item 1-7 Item 1-7 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) I. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure wash and keep the channel dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply the new channel lining (Spectrashield) and allow it to cure. Apply the channel lining (Spectrashield) in accordance with Section 03180 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 1-7 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) ADD - Part 2, Section 2.03, Item B,l 0 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.l 0 - 5% Contingency of Total of Items B.1 through B.8 ADD - Part 2, Section 2.03, Item B.12 Item B.12 - Marshall St APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates Located in Grit units Upstream, Downstream and bypass channel 1. Description: Under this item dle Contractor shall perform all work necessary to repair the existing grit unit slide gates - upstream of grit units, bypass channel and grit unit effluent channel slide gate. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 4 Addendum ) 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item B.12 - Marshall St APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates Located in Grit units Upstream, Downstream and bypass channel ADD - Part 2, Section 2.04, Item II-I 2, Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item II-I - Marshall St APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless Screw Conveyor System for Mechanical Screens DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.04, Item II-2 INSERT - New; Part 2, Section 2.04, Item II-2: To Read NOT USED ADD - Part 2, Section 2.04, Item 11-3 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item 0-3 - Marshall St APCF - Replacement of Existing Slide Gates Located in Grit Units Upstream, Downstream and Bypass channel ADD - Part 2, Section 2.04, Item 0-4 Item II-4 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) I. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure wash and keep the channel dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply the new channel lining (Spectrashield) and allow it to cure. Apply the channel lining (Spectrashield) in accordance with Section 03180 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item II-4 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) 03720-022-01 November 2. 2007 5 Addendum ] ADD - Part 2, Section 2.05, Item C.Il 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.Il - 5% Contingency of Total of Items C.I through C.9 ADD - Part 2, Section 2.05, Item C.B Item C.B - East APCF- Repair of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate Downstream of Grit Influent Channel I. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perfonn all work necessary to repair the existing slide gates - upstream of mechanical screens and in the grit unit bypass channel. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item C.13 - East APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate Downstream of Grit Influent Channel DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.06, Item Ill-I INSERT -New: Part 2, Section 2.06, Item ill-I: To Read NOT USED ADD - Part 2, Section 2.06, Item I11-2 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a unit quantity basis, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item m-2 - East APCF - Replacement of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate Downstream of Grit Influent Channel ADD - Part 2, Section 2.06, Item Ill-3 Item I11-3 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure wash and keep the channel dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply the new channel lining (Spectrashield) and allow it to cure. Apply the channel lining (Spectrashield) in accordance with Section 03180 03720-022-0 I November 2, 2007 6 Addendum ] 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under Item ill-3 - Concrete Channel Coating (Using Spectrashield) 2. SECTION 03180, CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING- The modifications to the SECTION 03180 are as follows: DELETE - Part 1, Section 1.03, Paragraph C INSERT - New: Part 1, Section 1.03, Paragraph C: To Read The corrosion-resistant polymer lining shall be Sewergard Trowelable No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen; or Spectmshield System as manufactured by CCI Spectrum or ENGINEER approved equal. The ENGINEER's lining system selection will be final. DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.01, Paragraph B.4 DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph C.I INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph C.I: To Read I. According to corrosion-resistant lining Manufacturer's instructions. DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph C.2 DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.4 INSERT - New: Palt 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.4: To Read Installation - Corrosion-resistant polymer lining is applied to manufacturer's specified thickness by trowel, or sprayed. Corrosion-resistant polymer lining must be applied by an experienced applicator of this type of lining. Coverage may vary depending upon substrate conditions. DELETE - Pa113, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.5 INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.5: To Read Curing - According to corrosion-resistant lining Manufacturer's instructions. DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.6 INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph 0.6: To Read The lining is to be finished to a pinhole free resin-rich surface by roller or spraying in specific accordance with the Manufacturer'sinstmctions to provide a sealed surface. DELETE - Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph E.3 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 7 Addendum I INSERT - New: Part 3, Section 3.01, Paragraph E.3: To Read Manufacturer shall certify in writing 10 days after installation that the lining system is installed in accordance to the Manufacturer's direction, meets the manufacturer's criteria, and is warranted for ten (10) years. 3. SECTION 11320, VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT As Per Specifications 4. SECTION 11325, GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUlPMENT- The modifications to the SECTION I 1325 are as follows: ADD - Part 2, Section 2.01 C. Hydrogritter as manufactured by Wemco, Salt Lake City, UT 5. SECTION 11331, FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN WITH WASH PRESS- The modifications to the SECTION 11331 are as follows: DELETE - Part 2, Section 2.02, Paragraph A.3 INSERT - New: Part 2, Section 2.02, Paragraph A.3: To Read 3. The side frames shall extend fully from the channel invert to the top of the unit. The frame shall be designed to clear all fixed screenings receiving devices when the screen is pivoted out of the channel for maintenance. The side frames shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 3/16- inch. 6. SECTION 15210, SLIDE GATES- The modifications to the SECTION 15210 are as follows: ADD - Part 2, Section 2.01, Paragraph A 3. Hydrogate, Denver, Colorado. 7. SECTION.V, BIDDER'S PROPOSAL The modifications to the SECTION V are as follows: DELETE - BIDDER'S PROPOSAL (SECTION V - Pages 15, 16 and 17) 03720-022-0 I November 2, 2007 8 Addendum 1 INSERT -REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM 1 (attached herewith) ADD - SUMMARY OF OWNERS DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS (attached herewith) - Insert after the last page under SECTION V - OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) Fonns. ENCL: ATTACHMENT 1: REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL ATTACHMENT 2: SUMMARY OF OWNERS DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS 03720-022-0 I November 2, 2007 9 Addendum ] REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM 1 PROJECT #05-0063-UT: HEAD WORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) ITEM I DESCRIYfION EST. UNIT PRICE I TOTAL NO. UNIT QTY BASE BID NORTHEAST APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS Al Demolition - Existing Screens and Structures I LS A.2 Roof Removal and Modifications I LS A3 Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with I LS Wash Press AA EauiDlnent Purchase ~rit Classifier 1 LS A5 Concrete Channel Coating (Using Sewerguard Troweable 115 SY No. 210 as manufactured bv Sauereisen) A6 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Stair/Step Screens with Wash Press and Grit Classifier installation, 1 LS Conveyer system modification and relocation, and Odor Control Vents modifications A.7 Grit Removal From Influent Well, Mechanical Screen Channels and Mechanical Screen Channel up to Parshall 120 CY Flwne AS Mobilization & Demobilization I LS A.9 5% Contine:encv on Total of Item A.I through A 7 1 LS A.IO PLC Allowance 1 LS $25,000 $25,000 A.I I Northeast APCF - Repair of existing slide gates upstream 6 EA and downstream of mechanical screens A Nortbeast APCF Headworks ImDrovements - Subtotal ADDITIVE AL TERNA TES I-I NOT USED 1-2 Northeast APCF - Replacement of existing gates upstream 6 EA and downstream of mechanical screens . 1-3 Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless I LS Screw Conveyor Svstem for Mechanical Screens 1-4 Northeast APCF - Strip Existing Ceiling Paint and Apply 585 SY New Coatin,g 1-5 Northeast APCF - Prepare and Paint Walls 585 SY 1-6 Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install Alwninwn Roll up I EA door and railine: (for oDenine: north of mechanical screens) 1-7 Concrete Channel Coatine: lUsinl! Soectrashield) 115 SY I Northeast APCF Headworks Additive Alternates Improvements - Subtotal Nortbeast APCF Headworks ImDrovements (A+n - TOTAL MARSHALL STREET APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS 8.1 Demolition - Existin,g Screens and Structures I LS B.2 Equipment Purchase - Two New Front Rake Front Return I LS Screens with Wash Press Section V .doc Page 15 Revised: 11/02/2007 ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT PRICE TOTAL NO. UNIT OTY B.3 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Front Rake Screens with Wash Press installation, and Conveyer system I LS modification and relocation B.4 Demolition - Existing: Grit System & Structures I LS B.5 Sole Source Grit Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pwnps, Grit Classifier, Field I LS $1,049,31 I $1,049,311 Testing: of Equipment ($20,000 Allowance), etc. B.6 Concrete Channel Coating (Using Sewerguard Troweable 275 SY No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen) B.7 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit system 1 LS Equipment and Structures B.8 Grit Removal From Mechanical Screen Channels and Grit 40 CY Influent and Effluent Channels . B.9 Mobilization and Demobilization 1 LS B.IO 5% Cont~ency on Total ofItem B.I through B.3 1 LS B.II PLC Allowance I LS $25,000 $25,000 B.J2 Marshall Street APCF - Repair of existing slide gates located in grit units upstream, downstream and bypass 3 EA channel B Marshall Street APCF Headworks Imorovements - Subtotal ADDITIVE ALTERNATES 11- I Marshall Street APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless I LS Conveyor System for Mechanical Screens II-2 NOT USED 11-3 Marshall Street APCF - Replacement of existing slide gates located in grit units upstream, downstream and bypass 3 EA channel 11-4 Concrete Channel Coating (Using: Soectrashield) 275 SY II Marshall Street APCF Headworks Additive Alternates ImDrovements - Subtotal Marshall Street APCF Headworks ImDrovements (B+m - TOTAL EAST APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS C.I Demolition - Existin.e; Screens I LS C.2 Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with 1 LS Wash Press C.3 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Stair/Step Screens with Wash Press installation, and Conveyer system I LS modification and relocation C.4 Demolition - Existin.e; Grit System and Structures ] LS C.5 Sole Source Grit Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps, Grit Classifier, Field I LS $789,681 $789,681 Testine: of Eauipment ($20,000 Allowance), etc. C.6 Grit Channel By-Pass PwnDine: I LS C.7 Concrete Channel Coating (lJsing Sewerguard Troweable 320 SY No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisenl C.8 Instiillation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit systems I LS installation and Gate reoairs C9 Grit Removal From Mechanical Screen Channels and Grit 35 CY Influent and Effluent Channels UP to Parshall Flwne C.IO Mobilization and Demobilization I LS SectionVdoc Page 16 Revised: 11/0212007 ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT PRICE TOTAL NO. UNIT QTY C.Il 5% Continl!ency on Total ofItem C. I through C.9 I LS C.l2 PLC Allowance 1 LS $25,000 $25,000 C.13 East APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate 3 EA Downstream of Grit Influent Channel C East APCF Headworks Improvements - Subtotal ADDITIVE ALTERNATES I1I- I NOT USED III-2 East APCF - Replacement of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate 3 EA Downstream of Grit Influent Channel III.3 Concrete Channel Coatinl! (Usinl! Spectrashield) 320 SY III East APCF Headworks Additive Alternates Improvements - Subtotal East APCF Headworks Improvements (C+III) - TOTAL CONTRACTOR: GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID (A+B+C) $ GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID (A+B+C) $ (Numbers) (Words) GRAND TOTAL -ADDITIVE ALTERNATES (1+11+111) $ (Nwnbers) GRAND TOTAL -ADDITIVE ALTERNATES (I+II+III) $ (Words) GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID PLUS ADDITIVE AL TERNA TES $ (Numbers) GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID PLUS ADDITIVE ALTERNATES $ (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. TillS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV.doc Page 17 Revised: 11102/2007 SUMMARY OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast. Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities CAPCF's) Proiect CLEARWATER. FLORIDA City Proiect No. 05-0063-UT Item Descri tion Location Quanti Unit I Grit Removal System (all Marshall Street APCF I Each inclusive - sole sourced and Headworks: 3 -12ft. diameter re-negotiated rice Item) grit units ( roposed) 2 Grit Removal System (all East APCF Headworks: 2- Each inclusive - sole sourced and 12ft. diameter grit units re-ne otiated rice Item ( ro sed 3 Screens and Northeast APCF Headworks "2 Each Wash Press Building 1 Each 4 Screens and Marshall St. APCF 2 Each Wash Press Headworks Buildin 1 Each 5 Screens and East APCF Headworks 2 Each Wash Press I Each 6 Grit Classifying Equipment Northeast APCF Headworks 1 Each Buildin 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 Addendum ) Attachment 2 ---- ~l ~ '1 ] ~I 1 1 I 1 I I I I I I I I I HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTENTS PARTI - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS SECTION II INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS PART II - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS PARTIII - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SECTION IV A SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 01040 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION 01100 SUMMARYOFWORK 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01220 PROJECT MEETINGS 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 01340 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01590 FIELD OFFICES o 1600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01660 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION 01700 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT 01710 FINAL CLEANING 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01800 TRAINING -.: HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL Il\1PROVEMENTS FOR THE oNORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTENTS (continued) 11 IT 02060 DEMOLITION 0 11 11 II Ij I"; DIVISION 2 - SITE CONSTRUCTION DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03180 CORROSION-RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03300 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL DIVISION 5 - METALS 05120 05500 05910 STRUCTURAL STEEL MISCELLANEOUS METALS GALVANIZING 101 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS I"j I, II II II II II II II II DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07501 BUILT-UP ROOFING RENOVATIONS DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS DIVISION 9 - FINISHES 09900 PAINTING 09901 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09902 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING DIVISION 11- EQUIPMENT 11314 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS 11320 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 11325 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT 11330 STAIR/STEP MECHANICAL FINE SCREENING wi WASH PRESS 11331 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN MECHANICAL FINE SCREENING wi WASH PRESS 11332 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTENTS (continued) DIVISION 13-INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 13401 PROCESS INSTRU1\1ENTATION AND CONTROLS DIVISION 15- MECHANICAL 15060 PIPING SYSTEM GENERAL 15063 WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS AND PENETRATIONS 15064 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15075 PROCESS EQUIP:MENT, PIPING, AND VALVE INDENTIFICATION 15100 PROCESS VALVES 15101 DUCTILE IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS 15103 POL YVINYLCHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15104 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE 15107 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPES 15121 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES 15122 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 15144 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 15210 SLIDE GATES 15220 SLUICE GATES DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16401 LOW -VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK-GENERAL REQUIRE:MENTS PART IV - OTHER CONTRACT DOCUMENTS SECTION V CONTRACT BOND CONTRACT CONTRACT AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT -(CORPORATION FORM) PROPOSAL BOND AFFIDA VIT NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT PROPOSAL ADDENDUM SHEET BIDDERS PROPOSAL ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE PROCEDURES REFERENCE DOCUMENTS: INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADDENDUM TO CONTRACT ADDENDUM TO CONTRACT - OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE REQUEST TO REQUISITION - STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER PROCEDURES FOR SALES TAX SAVINGS, REQUESTS TO REQUISITION AND RECEIVING/INVOICING I. I II I II Ii Ii Ii II II I I II 1.1 Ii Ii II I I .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part I Bidding Requirements I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOV AL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTRACT # 05-0063-UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this project are available for inspection and/or purch~e by prospective bidders at the Municipal Services Bldg., Engineering Office, 2nd Floor, Room 220, 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida, between the hours of 8:30 a.m. and 4:30 p.m. Monday tbru Friday, from MONDAY, OCTOBER, 15,2007, until no later than close of business three days preceding the bid opening. A charge of $100.00, none ofwbich will be refunded, will be made for each set. The work for which proposals are invited consists of construction to improve the mechanical screening and grit removal system for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF). Improvements for the Northeast APCF consists of demolition of the existing mechanical bar screens, grit classifier, remove and replace portions of headworks building roof, installation of new mechanical screens, new grit classifiers along with corresponding piping, conveyor and wash press unit, installation of new rollup door and railing, fixing slide gates, painting of headworks building, cleaning and coating the channels with corrosion resistant lining, new additions to the SCADA and electrical systems to support the new equipment, and other related improvements. Improvements for the Marshall Street APCF consists of demolition of the existing mechanical bar screens, grit removing system along with classifier, installation of new mechanical screens, new grit removal system and classifiers along with corresponding piping and stop plate, conveyor and wash press unit,. installation of walkway and railings, fixing slide gates, cleaning and coating the channels with corrosion resistant lining, new additions to the SCADA and electrical systems to support the new equipment, and other related improvements. Improvements for the East APCF consists of demolition of the existing mechanical bar screens, grit removal system along with classifier, installation of new mechanical screens, new grit removal system and classifiers along with corresponding piping and stop plates, conveyor and wash press unit, installation of walkway and railings, fixing slide gates, cleaning and coating the channels with corrosion resistant lining, new additions to the SCADA and electrical systems to support the new equipment, and other related unprovements. A MANDATORY PRE-BID CONFERENCE for all prospective bidders will be held at 10:00A.M., WEDNESDAY, OCTOBER, 24, 2007, in ROOM #130, Municipal Services Building, 100 So. Myrtle Ave., Clearwater, Florida. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this project. A mandatory site visit to all three City of Clearwater APCFs to review the work is required as a part of the PRE-BID :MEETING. S ectionI. doc Page I of2 Revised: 9/12/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasin!! Mana!!er, at the Purchasinl! Office, located at the Municioal Services BId!!.. 100 So. Myrtle Ave.. 3rd Floor. Clearwater. Florida 33756- 5520, until 1:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, NOVEMBER, 08, 2007, and publicly opened and read at that hour and place for HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOV AL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) CONTRACT NUMBER 05- 0063- UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available only to City pre-qualified contractors in the construction category of WASTEWATER FACILITIES with a minimum pre-qualification amount of $4.000.000.00. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be interested as a possible subcontractor, supplier, etc., may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and pay items worksheet A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. J The City of Clearwater, Florida George McKibben, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4634 SectionI.doc Page 2 of2 Revised: 9/12/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: SECTION II ........... ........................... .... ................. .......... ............ ........ ........... ............................... i 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS.......................................................................... 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS .................................................................................. 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE .................................1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDEND A....................................................................... 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND .................................................................................... 3 6 CONTRACT TIME ........................................... .............. ..... ...... ... ................................... 3 7 LIQ IDDA TED DAMAGES ............................................................................................. 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQIDPMENT ......................................................... 3 9 SUB CONTRACT 0 RS ................. ..................................................................................... 3 10 BID/PRO POSAL FORM ......................................... ........................................................ 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS .................................................................................................. 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS ....................................................:; 13 REJECTION OF BIDS .................................................................................................... 5 14 D ISQ U ALIF'I CATION OF BIDDER.............................................................................. 5 15 0 PENIN G OF BID S .................................................................."'........................... ........... 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES ........................................... 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE ............................. 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT............................................................................................... 7 19 B ID PROTEST ...... ............................................ ....... ..... .............. ............. ......................... 7 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT ................................................................................................. 8 SectionII.doc Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Docunlents are available for the SlUTI stated in the Advertisement for Bid from the Office of the Purchasing Manager. This amount represents reproduction costs and is non-refundable. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid/proposal form is available only to pre-qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre-qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub-bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre-qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, fmancial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre- qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, Engineering Services Division at P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758- 4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756-5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562-4750. All qualification data must be completed and delivered to the Director of Engineering at the above address not later than fourteen (14) days prior to the time set for the receipt of bids. Bidders currently pre-qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non-technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical SectionIl.doc Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section I1- Instructions to Bidders data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to UndergrOlll1d Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, either by mail or facsimile transmission, to all parties recorded by the Purchasing Manager as having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received less than ten (to) days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. SectionlLdoc 2 Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10%) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashiers check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Commission, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50%) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed SectionlLdoc 3 Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract. Agreement to the City Commission, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Commission will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. The Bidder must state in the BidIProposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the BidIProposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice- president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. to.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in the bid envelope provided with the bid documents. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the SectionlI.doc 4 Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non-Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionII.doc 5 Revised: 9114/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section Il- Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDSNENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug-free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug-free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug-free' workplace program. In order to have a drug-free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug-free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be inlposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. (3) Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug-free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does/does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. SectionII.doc 6 Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of histber complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposal. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid/request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, which ever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five business days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully SectionlLdoc 7 Revised: 9/1 4/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II - Instructions to Bidders coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he/she may then submit in writing within five business days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten work days of receipt of the appeal. 19 .3 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60-553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. SectionILdoc 8 Revised: 9/14/2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part II Contract Documents I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: SECTION III .......................................................................... ............... ..... .................................... i GENERAL COND ITI ONS ................................... ...................................................................... i 1 DEFINITIONS .. ................................................................................................................ 1 2 PRE L IMI'N AR Y MA. TTERS. ... ...... ... ... ..... ...... .... ........ ..... ....... ........ ..................... ........... 4 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE ............................ 4 2.2 COPIES OF DOCU11ENTS ................... ........ ................... ............. ........ .............. ........... 4 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIMEINOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT ............ ................,........... ......... ............ .... ... ... ......... ....... .... ........... ........... 4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION .......:............................................................. 5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE .......................... ..... .......... ............................... 5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT ......................................................................... 5 INTENT....................... ............. ....................................................................................... 5 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES .................................................. 6 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; 2.4 2.5 3 3.1 3.2 4 REFERENCE POINTS... ...... .... ..... ...... ....... .......... ... ....... ....... ........... ............... ................ 6 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS......................................................................................... 6 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS ............................................................................ 6 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES ..................................... 7 4 .4 REFERENCE POINTS............................. .................................................... ................... 7 5 BONDS AND INSURAN CE ............................................................................................ 7 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND............................... 7 5 .2 INSURANCE................................................................................................................... 8 5.2.1 WORKERrs COMPENSATION INSURANCE.............................,............................. 9 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE.......................,...... 9 5.2. 3 COMPREHENSIVE A UTOMOBILE LIABILITy,................................................... 10 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS .................................................................................................. 10 6 CONTRACTORS RESPO NSffiILITIES .................... ...................................... ........... 11 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE ............................................................. 11 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................... 11 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS .............................................................. 12 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS........ 12 6.5 USE OF PREMISES ............. ....................... .......... ...... ...... ............ ......... ..... ....... ........... 13 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES ................................... 14 6. 7 LAWS AND REGULA TIONS..................................,................................................... 14 6.8 PERMITS....................................................................................................................... 14 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION ..................................................................................... 15 6.10 EMERGENCIES......... ............ ........... ..... ........ .............. ................................ ....... .......... 15 6.11 DRAWINGS ....... ........ .............. ....... ......... .......... ........................ ............ ................ ....... 16 SectionIIl.doc Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.11.1 SHOP DRA WINGS AND SAMPLES ....................................................................... 16 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRA WINGS........ ............................. ............ ......... ............... ................... 17 6.11. 3 CAD STANDARDS..................................................... ............. ................................. 19 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES:........................................................... ......................................... 20 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE........................... 21 6.13 CONTINUWG THE WORK ........................................................................................ 21 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION.......................... .................... ........................ ............. ................. 21 7 OTIlER W 0 R.K .. .......... ....... ..... ... ..... .......... ... ......... ............... ....................... ~... ..... ..... .... 22 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE ........................................................................................ 22 7 .2 COORDINATION ....................... ................. ............ ..... .... ..... ..... .................... .... ...... .... 23 8 0 WNERS RESPONSIBILITY .................................................. .............. ...................... 23 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION .............................................. 23 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE .................................. .......... ....................................... 23 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND WTERPRETATIONS........................................................ 24 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................................................24 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS .................................. 24 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES ..................................................... ....... ...... ............ ....... ... 24 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES ...........................................25 10 CHAN" G ES IN TIlE W 0 R.K.........................................~................................................ 25 11 CHAN"GES IN TIlE CONTRACT PRICE................................................................... 26 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE.................................................................... 26 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT ....................... 27 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK ....................................................................................................27 12 CHAN"GES IN TIlE CONTRACT TIl\1E .................................................................... 28 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK.... ..... ..................... .......................................... ....................... 28 13.1 TESTS AND WSPECTION .................. ........ ..... ...... ........ ............ .............. ....... ............ 28 13.2 UN"COVERmG THE WORK ............ .............. .............. ....................... ................ ......... 29 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK ........................................................................ 29 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK ........................................ 30 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD ...................................................................... 30 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK ................................................................... 30 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK .......................................................30 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION ......................................... 31 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT ........................................................... 31 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE ...............................................................32 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS................................ 32 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION ........... .................... ............ ...... ..... ............ ........... ............... 33 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION.. ....................................... ..... ..... .......... ..... ............................ ..... 33 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT ...................................................................33 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE................................................................... 34 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS .............. ........ ..... ..... ........ ......... ....... ....... ............ .............. ........ 34 SectionIILdoc ii Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION .................................................... 35 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK...................................................................... 35 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE ....................................................................................... 35 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE ........................................... 36 16 DISPUTE RESO L UTI 0 N .............................................................................................. 36 17 MISCELLANEO US ... ................................................. ................................................... 37 17 .1 SUBMITTAL AND DOClTh1ENT FORMS ................................................................. 37 17.2 GIVING NOTICE. ........................ ............. ....... ....................... ................. ..................... 37 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM ..... .......... ............... ......... ............ ................... .......... ...... ............... 37 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED..................................... 37 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT .................................................................................37 17 .6 RENEWAL OPTION ......... ................. ............. ..................... ..... ....... ..... ................. ...... 37 SectionIII.doc Revised: 5/11/2005 111 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agreement . The written contract between OWNER and CONTRACTOR covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by ENGINEER which is to be used by CONTRACTOR in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Docum~nts. Approve The word approve is defmed to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Florida Contract Documents . The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post-Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. SectionlII.doc Revised: 5/1ll2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. Day A calendar day of twenty-four hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of fmal payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer or his duly appointed representative. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. Furnish The words "furnish", "furnish and install", "install", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place anq. ready for service". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseemg. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the fmal completion date. SectionIII.doc 2 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Notice to Proceed A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida Person A natural person or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. SectionIII.doc 3 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Perfornlance or Payment Bond. Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor four copies of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to nm.. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date which the Contact Time commences to run. Sectionill.doc 4 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent or employee of Owner or Engineer, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Engineer may schedule a conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well- known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Engineer. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code (whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents) shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor or Engineer, or any of their agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by Engineer. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be SectionIII.doc 5 Revised: 5/1l/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary Conditions, General Conditions, Drawings, Teclmical Specifications. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Docum~nts or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Engineer in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. 4 AVAilABiliTY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAilABILITY OF LANDS Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights-of-way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Teclmical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify Engineer in writing of any s~bsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer fmds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the SectionIILdoc 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I .1 I I I I. I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documel,1ts with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by professionally qualified personnel. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND/CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Payment Bond, each in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These bonds shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when fmal payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on SectionIll.doc 7 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. The Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to the Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation,' disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) City of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims-made basis, shall remain in SectionIII.doc 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions effect for at least two years after fInal payment. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at fmal payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise/Operations;' Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products/Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with $1,000,000. Annual $1,000,000. Annual employment exclusion deleted Aggregate Aggregate SectionIII.doc 9 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IIl- General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non-owned vehicles: Contract A ward Amount Contract A ward Amount Under $1,000,000. $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property" insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. The Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from the Owner. Lon!!:shore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self-insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditioris to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that "in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub-contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the SectionIlLdoc 10 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to Owner's property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or, other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBiliTIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspeCt and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction, but Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to Owner and Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever Engineer shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of Engineer. Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner's normally approved holidays. At Owner's option, overtime costs may either be deducted from the Contractor's monthly payment request or deducted from the Contractor's retention prior to release of final payment or the Engineer may elect to receive a monthly check from the Contractor in the amount of the overtime costs. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $40.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, layout and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good SectionIlLdoc 11 Revised: 5/1 1/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without Owner's consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without te.sting. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualifY as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Engineer and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a SectionIILdoc 12 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to payor to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not payor employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right-of-way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction SectionIII.doc 13 Revised: 5/l1l2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold hannless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws .and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Engineer shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. SectionIILdoc 14 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site;, and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Engineer may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education aI).d training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to the Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall. erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or Engineer, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer SectionIIl.doc 15 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the. Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of SectionIII.doc 16 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section II1- General Conditions submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. 6.11.2 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As-Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked-up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As-Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer at all times during the progress of the Project. The As-Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the City Inspector for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As-Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked-up blueline prints do not conform to the "As- Built Drawings" requirements. As-Built Drawings shall be submitted to the City Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The City's acceptance of the "As-Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As-Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor/Consultant shall prepare an "AS-BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 61GI7-6, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. Two hard copies of signed and sealed as-builts and an AutoCAD file will be provided for this purpose. Definition: 61 G 17-6.002(8)(a) As-Builts Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and/or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also know as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As-Bttilt Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the City of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the City will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the City with the required As-Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the SectionIILdoc 17 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as-built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as-built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, I-line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As-Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the City the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the City of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As-Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 61 G 1 7 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as-built survey it is the requirement of the City to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As-Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. SectionIII.doc 18 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 6.11.3 6.11.3.1 6.11.3.1.1 CAD STANDARDS Layer Naming Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefIx denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefIx denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) -line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text - use for all text, no matter the prefix 61131 2 L N D fi .ti . . . . a' er ammg e m. ons: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, fInished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOES LOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs SectionIILdoc 19 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of swale CORNER property comers, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. . All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 00, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.50, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELlVERABLES: The as-built survey shall be produced on stable based Mylar or vellum material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1" = 20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format with all project data in Land Development Desktop (LDD) Rl or later, including all associated dependent files. When LDD is not available, upon approval by the City of Clearwater Project Manager, a standard ASCII file can be delivered with all associated drawing and dependent files. The ASCII file shall be a comma or space delimited containing code, point number, northing, easting, elevation and description for each data point. Exainple below space delimited ASCII file: POINT # 284 NORTlllNG 1361003.838 EASTING 264286.635 ELEV 25.00 DESC BCV or Comma Delimited ASCII File: 284,361003.838,264286.635,25.00, BCV (PNEZD) An AutoCAD Release 2000 drawing or later drawing file shall be submitted. NOTE: If approved deviation from Clearwater or Pinellas County CAD standards are used the consultant shall include all necessary information to aid in mai:ripulating the drawings including either PCP, CTB file or pen schedule for plotting. The drawing file shall include only authorized fonts, shapes, line types or other attributes contained in the standard AutoDesk, Inc. release. All block references and references contained within the drawing file shall be included. SectionlII.doc 20 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727)562-4762 or email address TomMahony@myClearwater.com 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non-execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and fmal acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in. accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Engineer, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Engineer, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or SectionlII.doc 21 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, Of employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub-contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 7 OTHER WORK 7 .1 RELATED WORK AT SITE Owner may perform other work related to the Project at the site by Owner's own forces, or let other direct contracts therefore which shall contain General Conditions similar to these, or have other work performed by utility owners. If the fact that such other work is to be performed was not noted in the Contract Documents, then: (i) written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work, and (ii) Contractor may make a claim therefore if Contractor believes that such performance will involve additional expense to Contractor or requires additional time and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract and each utility owner (and Owner, if Owner is performing the additional work with Owner's employees) proper and safe access to the site and a reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work and shall properly connect and coordinate the work with theirs. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting and patching of the work that may be required to make its several parts come together properly.and integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering their work and will only cut or alter their work with the written consent of Engineer and ,the others whose work will be affected. The duties and responsibilities of Contractor under this paragraph are for the benefit of such utility owners and other contractors to the extent that there are comparable provisions for the benefit of Contractor in said direct contracts between Owner and such utility owners and other contractors. Should the Contractor cause damage to any other contractor on the Project, the contractor agrees, upon due notice, to settle with such contractor by agreement or arbitration, if he will so settle. If such other contractor sues the Owner on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner shall notify the Contractor, who shall defend such SectionIII.doc 22 Revised: SIll/200S I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions proceedings at his own expense, and if any judgment against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall payor satisfy the judgment and pay all costs incurred by the Owner. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor's work depends upon work performed by others under this Article. Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to Engineer in writing any delays, defects or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor's work. Contractor's failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor's work except for latent or nonapparent defects and deficiencies in such other work. 7.2 COORDINATION If Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Proj ect at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the act~vities. among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBiliTY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all communications to Contractor through Engineer. Owner shall furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they' are due as provided in these General Conditions. Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Susp.ension of Work and Termination deals with Owner's right to tenninate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. The Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE Engineer will be Owner's representative during the construction period. The duties and the responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner's representative during SectionIlI.doc 23 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents (in the form of Drawings or otherwise) as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Engineer believes to be defective, or that Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Engineer's authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES Engineer will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Engineer in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Engineer and the other party to the Agreement promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Engineer and the other party within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Engineer allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Engineer and the claimant within thirty days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal (unless Engineer allows additional time). Engineer will render a formal decision in writing within thirty days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Engineer's written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Engineer's decision is taken within thirty days of the Engineers decision, or the appeal time SectionIII.doc 24 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between the Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Engineer's written decision is delivered by Owner or Contractor to the other and to Engineer within thirty days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Engineer with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Engineer's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Engineer to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Engineer will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Engineer's Consultants and assistants. 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work SectionIILdoc 25 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section Ill- General Conditions involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Engineer covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Engineer pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after the start of such occurrence or event (unless Engineer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not SectionIIl.doc 26 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establis~ unit prices for the Work. 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Engineer. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or Owner believes that Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, the Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a fmalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. SectionlIl.doc 27 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Engineer promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty days after such occurrence (unless Engineer allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim) and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Engineer. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fIres, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. . Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of 'the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. SectionIILdoc 28 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all City Building Departments and City Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, City permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix ' designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any W ork (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Engineer has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, it must, if requested by Engineer, be uncovered for Engineer's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Engineer or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Engineer's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3 ENGINEER MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of Engineer to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Engineer or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Engineer stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. SectionIII.doc 29 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in accordance with Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and . replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner prefers to accept it, Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be approved by Engineer as to reasonableness). If any such acceptance occurs prior to Engineer's recommendation of [mal payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Engineer's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to Owner. 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Engineer in accordance SectionIlLdoc 30 Revised: 5/1112005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, take possession of Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's representatives, agents and employees, Owner's other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the.25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is require~ by the Engineer and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5%) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work completed to date will be held until fInal completion and acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Engineer may require the Contractor to produce for the Owner, within fIfteen days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and/or payment affIdavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. SectionIILdoc 31 Revised: 5/1l/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section 1lI - General Conditions 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear ofliens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subj ect to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by Owner to Contractor, and Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS Engineer will within twenty days after receipt of each Application for payment, either indicate a recommendation of payment and present Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor indicating Engineer's reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application~ Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to the Owner. Engineer may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Engineer's opinion to protect Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Engineer because: (i) claims have been made against Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended, or (iv) Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor immediate notice of refusal to pay with a copy to the Engineer, stating the reasons for such actions, and the Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, SectionIlLdoc 32 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions or any adjustment thereto agreed to by Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by Owner at Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the Work which Owner ~elieves to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Engineer to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the article"s for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Engineer will make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Engineer and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, marked-up record documents as may be required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The fmal Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (I) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, SectionIlLdoc 33 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section ill - General Conditions services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner or Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for [mal payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Engineer so confirms, Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's [mal Application for payment and recommendation of Engineer, and without terminating the Agreement, make paYment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Engineer with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Engineer's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Engineer's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Engineer will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon Engineer will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, Owner shall, within sixty-five days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Engineer. 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of [mal payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after [mal inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations Under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. SectionIlLdoc 34 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section ill - General Conditions 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Engineer may suspend the Wark or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fIxed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of anyone or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Engineer; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereU11der is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Engineer certifies in writing to Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is fInished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by Engineer as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Engineer incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability . SectionIII.doc 35 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions Upon seven days' written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP. WORK OR TERMINATE If, through, no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within sixty days after it is submitted or Owner fails for sixty days to pay Contractor any sum fmally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven days' written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of the Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty days after it is submitted, or Owner has failed for thirty days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven day's written notice to Owner and Engineer stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reache~ subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. SectionIII,doc 36 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section III - General Conditions 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Engineer subject to the approval of the Owner. 17.2 GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of the Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through Public Works Administration may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the City and the ContractorN endor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the City, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by Public Works Administration. SectionIlI.doc 37 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part III Technical Specifications I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: S ECTI ON IV ................................ ..... ... ..... ..... ...... ..... ... ..... ................... ... ..... ... .... ......... ... ............... i TECHNICAL SPECIFI CATIONS............................................................................................... i 1 SCOPE OF W 0 RK................................................................................... ........................ 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION ......... ........ .................. ..... ....... ........ ...... ............. .......... ............. 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST .................................................................................. 2 2 LINE, GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS................................................................ 4 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR ............... 4 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITy................................. 4 3 D EFINITI ON OF TERMS ......................................................................................... ...... 4 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK ................................................................ 5 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK.......................................................... 5 6 CON eRE TE ........ ... ..... .... ... ...... ........ .......... .................... ..... ........ ....... ..... .......................... 6 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK .......................................... 7 7 .1 EXCAVATION ............. .............. .................................. ..... ........ ...................... ........ ........ 7 7.2 FORMS ....... .... .................... ...... ................. .... .... ... ..... ....... ........ ............... ... .............. ...... 7 8 REINFORCEMENT........ ...... ....... ... .......... ...................... .................. ........... ............... ..... 7 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ......... ........ ................... ........ ....... ........ .......... ............... ............... 7 9 0 BSTR U CTI 0 NS ..................................................................................................... ........ 7 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT ............................................................................................ 8 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS .................................................................. 8 12 DEW ATERIN G ................................................................................................................. 9 13 SANITARY MANHOLES ........................................................................................ ........ 9 13.1 BUlL T UP TypE............................................................................................................ 9 13.2 PRECAST TYPE ...... ............ .... ........ ........ ...... .............. ............... ........ ............. ............ 10 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) ...........,............................ 10 13.3 DROP MANHOLES ................ ........... ............. ....... ....... ................. ....... ................ ....... .11 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS .............................................................................................11 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS. ............ .................... ................................. ............... ..... ....... ..11 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES ..............................................................................11 14 BACKFILL.... .... ..... ..... ........ ...... .......... ........ ....... ... ........................... ... .... ...... ............. .... ..11 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. ....................................................................................... 12 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE S TR U CTURES........ ......... ........ ... ..... ........... ......... ..... .... .... .................. .......... ......... ......... 12 SectionNadoc Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........ ............................... ........... ..... ............... ...................... ..... 12 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL ..................................................................... 12 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 12 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 12 18 UND E RD RA.IN S .... ..... ................ ........................ ....... ..... .................. ..... ... .......... ... ......... 12 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ............;.............. ............................. .............................. 13 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ............ ...... ...................... ......................................................... 13 19 STO RM SEWERS .......................................................................................................... 13 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION.......... ................. ........ ............................ ........... .......... ..... 13 19.2 TESTING ........... .... ............................................ ................................. ..... ...... ...... .... ..... 14 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................ ..................... ...................... .... ...... ...... ...... 14 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS.............................................................. 14 20.1 MATERIALS......... ...... ................................................... .............................................. 14 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIP E... .,................... ........... ................................ ...... ...... ......... 14 20.1. 2 FORCE MAIN PIPE........ ...............,.............. ......................... .............................. 14 20.2 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................... 15 20.2.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE........................................................................................ 15 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE................................................................... .......................... 15 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS .............................. ....................... ....................................... ... 15 20.4 TESTING ....................... ..... ................. ............................... ........ .................... ........... ... 15 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS .............. ................................... ....................... 15 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS..,........................................... ............................ ..... 16 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........... ........................... ............................. .......................... .... 16 20.5.1 GRA VITY SEWER PIPE..,.......... ..............................................................,............ 16 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE................................................................ ............................. 16 21 DRAINAGE ..................................................................................................................... 16 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE.......................................................................... 16 22.1 BASE.................... ..................................................................... ................................... 16 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE ................... 18 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE............................... 18 22.2 SUBGRADE ............................. ... .... ... .., ... ......... ......................... ..... ...................... ... .... 18 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT... ............ .......... ..... ................. .......... ................. ...... 19 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAyMENT............................................................................................ 19 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS ................................................................... 19 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE. ................................. ...... ...................... ............ ................. 19 23.1.1 AGGREGATE......................................,................. ........... ..................................... 19 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS.......................... ........ ..... .......................................... 19 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE... .... ..... ................ ... .... ........................... .............................. 19 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TypES.................................................................... 20 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS............................... 20 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 21 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION .............................................................. 21 SectionIVadoc ii Revised: 5/11/2005 I Ii II I II II Ii II II Ii II I II II I II Ii Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.6.1 CRA CKS,..............................................................................,................................ 21 23.6.2 POTHOLES. ..,..". ...... .......... ...... ................". ......,. ..,..., ....... ...... .... ......... ....... ......... 22 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES ............................................................................... 22 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS............................................................ 22 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE .................................................................... 23 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ...................................................................................... 23 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................................................................. 24 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT .................................. 24 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................. 24 25 .1 IRRIGATION.................... ................ ............................................ ........ .......... .... .... ...... 24 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION.. ..................,..., ........ ........,...,.............. ....... ............. ......., .... ."...,.. 24 25.1.2 PRODUCTS .....,........................ ...... ........... ........ .., ........,.,., .,.... ...,. ... ....... ....... ....... 26 25,1.3 EXECUTION.... .........., ......., ...........,........ ........,.... ..... ................" ... ....., ..".."......., 30 25.2 LANDSCAPE. .... .............................. ................. ................. ............. ............. ...... ...... .... 33 25. 2.1 GENERAL......................,...,........................... ................., "... .,..,..,. .,.. ...,.. .., ..,. ...... 33 25.2. 2 PRODUCTS....................................................................,....................,..........".,., 38 25,2.3 EXECUTION....,..................................,.......,.."....,.,......,...................................... 41 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING................................................... 48 26.1 INTENT........................................................................................................................ 48 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTORlINSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy........................ 48 26.3 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 48 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 49 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ....... ..................... ..... ........... ........... ................................ 49 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION .... .............................. .... .................. ................ ........... .... ...... 50 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ..................................................................................... 50 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION ................................. ................ ........................ .............. 50 26.9 PAYMENT................................................. ................................................................... 50 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS ........................................................................................... 50 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT.......................................................................... ....... ..... 51 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT .......... ....................................... ................................. ............... 51 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS ................................ 51 2 9 CONCRETE CURBS ..................................................................................................... 51 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ..... ................................. ............ ............................ ........ 51 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ........... ...... ............................. ................ ........... ...... .................. 51 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAyS......................................................... 52 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS ....................................... ... ...... ............................. ............. 52 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS.. ............................................. ...... ......... ........... ................ 52 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT ....................... ........... ............ ......... ............. .................. 52 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT .................................................... ............... ............... ............... 52 31 SOD D IN G ........................................................................................................................ 52 32 SEED IN G.................. .... ... ........ ......... ....... ...... ....... ... ....... .... ... ........ ....... ... ............. ...... ..... 53 SectionIV a.doc iii Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURE S....... .... ... ..... ... ..... ............... .... ................ ......... ......... .... ........... ............ ..... 53 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES ................................................................................ 53 33.2 PRECAST TYPE. ................. ............ .......... .... .......................................... ......... ........... 54 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT ..... .............................. .............................. ............ ......... ........... 54 34 MATERIAL U SED .. ...... ... ...... ....... ........ .......... ........ ... ... .... ...... ..... ....... ..... ...... ... ........ ..... 54 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ...................................... 54 36 S TRE E T SI G N S .... ....... ..... ...... ...... ..... .... .... ............ .................. ............ ..... ... ... ................ 54 37 AUDIOIVIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS ................................................................. 55 37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY 55 37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR........................................................................................................... 55 37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPAREAUDIO/VIDEO TAPE...............................,.......... 55 37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIOIVIDEO TAPE........................................................... 55 37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAP HERS ............................... .................................. 55 37.2.4 EQUIPMENT.................................. ...............................,....,................................. 55 37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, A UDIO'...................... .......,.......... ....................... 55 37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO ........................ ........................... .............. 55 37.2. 7 VIEWER ORIENTATION..... ................ ..... ............... ............................................. 56 37.2.8 LIGHTING............:.....,......................................................................................... 56 37.2, 9 SPEED OF TRA VEL...................................,............,..............................,.,........... 56 37. 2.1 0 VIDEO LOG/INDEX.... .............................,.,........,.......................... ..............,....... 56 37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE......................................................................................... 56 37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SER VICES............................................................................. 57 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL ................................................................... 57 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS ................................................................. 57 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES ............................. 57 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SySTEMS.................................... 57 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES........................................................................ 57 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS ................................................... ................ ...... .............. 57 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES ...................... 58 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS ....,............................................................... 58 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION ....................................................... 58 38.9 MAINTENANCE......................................................................................................... 58 38.10 COMPLIANCE... ..................... ......... ........... .............................. ......................... ..... ..... 58 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING ................................................................. 62 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE.................... 62 41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES ................................................................ 63 41.1 SCOPE............................................................ .......................... ......................... ........... 63 41.2 MATERIALS................................................................................................................. 63 41.2.1 GENERAL..................,................................................................................,......... 63 41.2.2 PIPE Jv1ATERlALS AND FITTINGS .......... .............................. ............. ................ 63 41.2.3 GATE VAL VES...................................................................................................... 65 SectionIV adoc iv Revised: 5/11/2005 ,II I -II II II II II Ii Ii Ii Ii I II II II I Ii II II II , I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES... ......... .....,. ........... .... ............. .....................................,.. ......" ....,.. 65 41.2,5 HYDRANTS............, ......... ....... ........... ...., ................. ..................................... ........ 65 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES......... ........... .......... .............. ......... .................. .............. ........ 66 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS................. ............ ....................... .............. 67 41.2.8 BACKFLOW P REVENTERS ................... ........... ....... ........ ............ .... ................... 67 41. 2. 9 TAPPING SLEEVES......................................,...................................................... 68 41.2.10 BLO W OFF HYDRANTS............. ......................................................................... 68 41.3 CONSTRUCTION ............................. ................................ ........... ........ ..... ....... ............ 68 41. 3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING............................... ........................................................ 68 41.3. 2 PIPE LAyING....................................................................................................... 68 41.3.3 SEITING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FIITINGS......................................... 70 41,3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES............................................................... 70 41.4 TESTS........................................................................................................................... 71 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS...... ......,............................................................................ 71 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST...........,.....,....................... ...... ...... ............,............. ...,...,..,., .,.. 71 41.5 STERILIZATION.. ................................................. ................. ..................... ................ 71 41.5.1 STERILIZING A GENT.... ...................................................................................... 71 41.5.2 FLUSHING SySTEM........... ................................................................................. 71 41,5,3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE ......................,................................................... 71 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS................. ............................................... ............ 71 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS...,............................................................................,............. 72 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ........................................................................... 72 41.6,1 GENERAL......................................... ....... ........,.....,... ............ ............... ..... ...... ..... 72 41. 6. 2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS........................................................... 73 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS................................................................... 73 41.6.4 FURNISHANDINSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND CO VERS.....,..............,......................................................,...........................,........ 73 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS....................................................... 73 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 74 43 TENNIS CO URTS ................................................................................................ .......... 74 43 .1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS .............. ................. ........ ........ .............. ............................. 74 43,1,1 SOIL TREATMENTS..................................................................... ........................ 74 43.1.2 BASE COURSE.. ......... ...... .............................. ......... ............................................. 74 43.1. 3 PRIME COAT ... ................... ................................................................................. 74 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE..........................,..... .,.........................,............. ... ....,.... ....... 74 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE....................................... .................... .................................. 74 43,1,6 COLOR COAT.. .......................... .......................................................................... 75 43 .2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS ................................ ............................. ................. ... ........... 76 43.2.1 GENERAL..............,............................................................................................., 76 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION.....,...........................,.........................".....,........,...".,.,.,.,." 77 43.2,3 SLOPE...."".,.,............,.,.......,....,.,..,.,....,...,...".,....,.......,..",..............................,... 77 43.2.4 BASE CONSTR UCTION..............................................................................,....... 78 43,2. 5 PERIMETER CURBING.......,...................,............,.............,....,.....,...,........,.....,., 78 43.2.6 SURFA CE COURSE............................................................................................, 78 43.2. 7 ROOT BARRIER ............................................ .............. ......................................... 78 43.2.8 FENCING ............ ....... ... ............................. ......,................ ......... ....... ... ..... .........,. 79 43,2.9 WINDSCREENS.,.....,..,................ ...... .......,..................... .....,........ ..... .,.,..,.. .....,.... 79 SectionIV a.doc v Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT.. .,....,..., ............. ..,.., ,........... .................. ................. ........... 79 43.2.11 SHADE STR UCTURE.................................,...,..................................................... 81 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable)...........................................................................,...... 81 43.2.13 CONCRETE.............................................................................. ............................ 81 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING........................,........................ 81 43.2.15 WATER COOLER............................................................................................,..... 82 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION......... ...."... ............ ................................ ... ............. .....,.......... 82 43.2.17 WARRANTy............,...........................................................".....,.......................... 82 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......................................................................... 83 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ......... 83 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN .............................................................. 83 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY......................................................,.................................. 83 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES ..................................... .................................. 84 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAyS............................. .............................. ........................ ....,. ... ....... 84 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS................. 84 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS........... .............,.. ....................., ........ 84 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS............................................................,........................,...,... 84 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN................................... 85 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION .................... 85 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL ............................................. 85 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR............ 85 45 CURED-IN - PLACE PIPE LINING.............................................................................. 86 45.1 INTENT ...... .......................... ... ...................... ............. .................. ................ ...... .......... 86 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITy........................ 86 45.3 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 86 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION ................................................................... 86 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION ................. ................................... .........l.. ...... ................. 87 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION ...................................... ..................... .............. ... ................. 87 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION ........................ .............. ............................................... 87 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................................87 45.9 PAYMENT.................................................................................................................... 88 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING..................................... 88 46.1 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 88 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS..........;. ..........,.................... .................... ............................ 88 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL...................................................,............. .......................... 88 46.1. 3 SAMPLES.............................................................................................................. 88 46.1.4 REJECTION..............................,..............................,........................"..........,....... 89 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS..................................................................................................... 89 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES ....... ............. ........ .................. ......... .......... ......... ....... 89 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE...... ..................... ....................... ,......... ........,., ...... ...... ........ 89 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS.................................................................... 89 46.3. 3 PIPE JOINING.............................,........................ ........................,.............. ........ 89 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE................................................ ............................. 89 46.4 SLIPLININ G PROCEDURE........................................................................................ 89 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS...................................................... 89 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION................... ........ ............ ............ ........ .... ...... ..... 90 SectionIV a,doc vi Revised: 5/1l/2005 Ii II II II II II Ii II I; II II II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS................,...........................,.........,... 90 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER. ............... ........... ............. ...... .....,............ ........ ........ 90 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES .................... ............,.,. ........ .......................... 91 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED................................................ 91 46.4.7 BACKFILLING ........... ................. ............ ....................... ............., ........... ............. 91 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR.......................................................................................,............. 91 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS ...... ..................... ..... ................. ..................... ............. 91 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE...................... 91 47.1 SCOPE.......................................................................................................................... 91 47.2 MATERIALS..................... ........................................................................................... 92 47.3 PIPE......................................................... ..... ................................................................ 92 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM ................................. ..... ....... ........... .......... ............ ...... .................. 92 47.5 FITTINGS..................................................................................................................... 92 48 G UNITE SPECIFI CA TI 0 NS ........................................................................................ 92 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT ................................................................................ 92 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE ................. 92 48.3 CO MPOSITI ON ........................................................................................................... 93 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 93 48.5 MATERIALS................................................................................................................ 93 48.6 WATER ......................................................................................................................... 93 48.7 REINFORCEMENT ............................... .............. ....... ................. ................... ............. 93 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS... .............. ................ ... ....... ... ....... ............ ...... ... ............. 94 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION .........................................................................................94 48.1 0 PROPORTIONING....................................................................................................... 94 48.11 MIXING... ... ... .............. .......... ....................... ......... ............ ........................ ................... 94 48.12 APPLICATION ... .................... ..... ....................................... ...... .... ........ ........................ 95 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS ................................. ........................................ ................ 95 48.14 SURFACE FINISH... ........ ........ ......................................... ........... ............ ........ ............ 95 48.15 CURING........................ ............................................................................................... 96 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION ..................................................................... 96 48 .17 INSPECTION............................................................................................................... 96 48.18 EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................... 96 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION ...........................97 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT ..................................... ........ .................... ....... ....... ...... ............ 97 49 .2 PAYMENT..................................... ...................... ......................................................... 97 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS ............................................... ................ ....... ...... 97 49,3.1 MATERIALS.......................................................................................................... 97 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................... ................ .......... ...... 98 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ................................................ 98 49.4.1 MATERIALS. ......... ........ ........................ ..... .... .... ... ........ ......... ........ ............... ...,.... 99 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL............... ................. ... ............. ... ...... ........... .... .... ....... ..... 99 49.6 GROUTING MIX ......................................................................................................... 99 49.7 LINER MIX ................ ................. ................................................................................. 99 49.8 WATER ....................................................................................................................... 100 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS ................ .............. ........ ........................ ..... .......... ...... ............. 100 49.10 EQUIPMENT......... .................................................... ................................................ 100 SectionIV a.doc vii Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION ....................................................................... 10 1 49.11.1 PREPARATION............... ................... ........................... ................. ........ ............. 101 49.11.2 MIXING...................................................................................................... ......... 101 49.11.3 SPRAyING............................................................. ............................................. 101 49.11. 4 PRODUCT TESTING ....... .................,........ ...,..................... ....................., ..,...... 102 49.11.5 CURING,............... ................................................,............................................. 102 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE...................................................... 102 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM ....... 102 49.12.1 SCOPE................................................. ...................................................,........... 102 49.12.2 MATERIALS.. .............. ...................................... .........................,... ........ ............. 102 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION .................................................................. 105 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS .......................................................................... 107 50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE ............................................................................................ 107 50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE............................................... 107 50.3 FIXED SIGN ......................................... ................... .................................................. 107 50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS ........................... .... ... ........................................... ....................... 107 50.5 SIGN COLORING...................................................................................................... 107 50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT ............................ .................. .............................................. ....... 108 50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE ...... ..... ..... ...... ....................................... .............. .................. 108 50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN. ............................................................................... ........ 108 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM ............................................................ 108 51.1 SCOPE ............. ...................................................................... .......... ........................... 108 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS ................. ...... ............... ...................................... ......... 109 51.2.1 ASPHALT.......,...... ............... ...........,....,...... .,. ...... ........................... ...... ......... ..... 109 51.2.2 CONCRETE.....................................,.,.............................. .................................. 109 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX...................................................... ..................... 109 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT......................................................... 109 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE.......................................................... 109 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION .....................................................................................110 51.6 PLAYING LINES ........................................................................................................110 51.7 GENERAL.. ................. .................................... .............................. ........................... ...11 0 51. 8 LIMITATIONS........................ .................................................................................. ...110 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION ..........................111 52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY............................................ 111 52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR ..........................111 53 G ABI 0 NS AND MATTRESSES ..................................................................................112 53.1 MATERIAL .............................. ........................................ ...........................................112 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL...... ........................................... ..112 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: ...............................................115 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE..................................................... .......................................... .115 53.1. 4 GEOTEXI'ILE FABRIC...................................................................................... ..115 53.2 PERFORMANCE .......................................................... ..............................................115 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFI CATIONS ...........................................................116 54.1 SCOPE....................................................................................................................... ..116 SectionIV adoc viii Revised: 5/11/2005 II I: Ii Ii Ii Ii Ii Ii I Ii Ii II Ii II II II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK.........................................................................................117 54.3 WORK METHODS.... .............................. ....... ..... ....................... ........... .......... ......... ..117 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING ...... ..........., ........................... ........ ......... ......., ..117 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT..............,........",.....,.,......,.........................,...,.....117 54.4 LITTER...................................................................................................................... ..117 54 .5 VISUAL CHECK...................................................................................................... ..11 7 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING ...........................................................117 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.)...... 118 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL ....... ................. ..................... ....................... ......... ........ ............. .118 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL.. ................ ........................ ........ ............. ........................... .......118 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETy..... ............................ ......... ......... ......... ................. ........... .....118 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION ...........................................................................................118 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA..........................................................118 54.13 MULCH CONDITION ............................. ............ ....... ....... ..... ..... ........................... ....118 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR .....................................................................119 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL...................................................... 119 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION.. ........... ....... ........... ............. ........... ...... ..................... ......... ..119 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION .............................................................................................119 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE................. ................... ............ ........... ........... ............ ........ ..... ...119 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK ........................ ....................... ...... ......... ...................... ....119 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL ........................ ........ ........................................... ... 120 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS .... ...... ....... .................... ........ ........................ ............ .......... 120 55 MILLING OPERA TI 0 NS ........................................................................................... 120 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE...................................... 120 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 120 55 .3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS ...... ......... ......................... ..... ........ ....... ...... ............... 121 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS ....... .................... .......... ....... ........ ................................. 121 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES .................. 121 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES ............................................................ 122 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING ................ ............... ........ .............................. ........................... 122 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS ................................................ .............................. 122 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT. ........................... ............................. ....... ..... ............... 122 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................................................... ............................. ............... 122 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING ................................................................................... 122 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT .............................................................. ................. ..... 123 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ................. ............ ........ ................. ................ ............... .......... 123 57 RIP RAP ........................ ................ .......... ..... ........... ....................................................... 123 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT........... ................ ..... ............... .......................... ........... 123 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT ... ...... ............ ................. ......... ....... ........ .................... ............. 123 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY ................................................................................ 123 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL.. ................................. ..... .............................. .................. ..... 123 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING ................................................................ 124 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS........................................... 124 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 124 SectionIV adoc ix Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 60 SI GNIN G AND MARKIN G ......................................................................................... 124 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 125 61 ROADWAY LI G HTIN G .............................................................................................. 1'25 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT ....................................................... 125 62 TREE PROTECTION .................................................................................................. 125 62.1 TREE BARRICADES. ...............;......... ......... ........... ............. ..................................... 125 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ........... ............................... ...... .... ....... .......... .......................... ........ 126 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING .......... ............ ........ ...... ........ .............. ............. ...... ........... 127 63 PROJECT WEB P A G ES....(I......................................................................................... 127 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN. ............. ..... ............................. ............. .......................... ........ 127 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ........ ........................... .................................. 128 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 128 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS ................................. ............................................ .............. 128 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS .................. ...... ......... ...................................... .................... 128 63 .6 POSTING.................................................................................................................... 128 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES.... ............ ............ .............. .......................................... ........ 128 SectionIVadoc Revised: 5/11/2005 x I II II II Ii Ii II Ii II II II II II Ii I) II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section N - Technical Specifications 60 SI GNIN G AND MARKIN G ......................................................................................... 124 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT....................................................... 125 61 ROADWAY LI G HTIN G .............................................................................................. 125 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAyMENT....................................................... 125 62 TREE PR OTECTI ON .................................................................................................. 125 62.1 TREE BARRICADES .............................. .................................. ...................... .......... 125 62.2 ROOT PRUNING ...... ........ .................................................. ....... ..................... ........... 126 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING ........................................ ............. ....... ................... ......... 127 63 PROJECT WEB P A G ES.............................................................................................. 127 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN ...... ........ ............................................. .............................. ...... 127 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES ................................. .......... ..... ..................... 128 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE ....................................................... 128 . . 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS .... ............................... ....... ............... .............. ..... ............... 128 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS .................................. ................ ......... .......... ........... ........... 128 63 .6 POSTING.................................................................................................................... 128 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES ........... ............ ......... ......................... ............................. ...... 128 SectionIVa.doc x Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF s Project Number: 05-0063-UT Scope of Work: See Specification Sections 01000 - Project Requirements and 1100 - Summary of Work for detailed information on this project. SectionIV adoc Page I Revised: 5/1 1/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast. Marshall Street and East APCFs Project Number: 05-0063-UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 D Scope Of Work 2.1 [g] Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by Contractor 2.2 [gJ Line, Grade And Record Drawings - by City 3 [g] Definition Of Terms 4 [gJ Order And Location Of The Work 5 Excavation For Underground Work 6 Concrete 7 D Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 D Reinforcement 9 D Obstructions 10 [gJ Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 D Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 D Dewatering 13 Sanitary Manholes 14 Backfill 15 D Street CrossingS, Etc. 16 Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 Unsuitable Material Removal 18 D Underdrains 19, D Storm Sewers 20 D Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 Drainage 22 Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 D Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 [ General Planting Specifications 26 D Hdpe Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 [ Plant Mix Driveways 28 [ Reporting Of Tonnage. Of Recycled Materials 29 D Concrete Curbs 30 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 Sodding 32 [gJ Seeding 33 D Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 D Material Used 35 X Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 Street Signs 37.1 [gJ AudioMdeo Tape Of Work Areas - by City 37.2 [gJ AudioNideo Tape Of Work Areas - by Contractor SectionIV a.doc Page 2 Revised: 5/1ll2005 I II II I I I I I I I Ii I: I Ii II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 38 0 Erosion And Siltation Control 39 0 Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 0 Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 0 Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 0 Gas System Specifications 43 0 Tennis Courts 44 0 Work Zone Traffic Control 45 0 Cured-In-Place Pipe Lining 46 0 Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 [ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 0 Gunite Specifications 49 0 Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 ~ Project Information Signs 51 In-Line Skating Surfacing System 52.1 0 Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by City 52.2 [ Resident Notification of Start of Construction - by Contractor 53 0 Gabions and Mattresses 54 0 Lawn Maintenance Specifications . 55 [ Milling Operations 56 0 Clearing and Grubbing 57 Riprap 58 :x Treatment Plant Safety 59 0 Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 Signing And Marking 61 Roadway Lighting 62 Tree Protection 63 0 Project Web Pages TIME: 375 DAYS SectionIV adoc Page 3 Revised: 5/1l/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 2 LINE. GRADE AND RECORD DRAWINGS 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR Benchmarks to be used shall be those as shown on the plans. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. Contractor shall submit cut sheets for all underground work 24 hours in advance of commencement of the work for checking. Checking of cut-sheets does not relieve the Contractor of any responsibilities for any errors or conflicts whatsoever. Cut sheets shall be submitted in triplicate. The Contractor shall provide three complete sets of Record construction drawings prior to [mal payment being made. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of$100.00 per hour. Tune shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one-hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications the following definition of terms shall apply: City City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, FL. Engineer The City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. Contractor The person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Inspector An authorized representative of the City Engineer of Clearwater, assigned to make official inspections of the material furnished and the work performed by the Contractor. RD. 0. T. The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as Specifications issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). A.A.SHT.o. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. A.WS. American Welding Society SectionIV adoc Page 4 Revised: 5/11/2005 II II II Ii I; I II II I I: I I] II ) Ii II I II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications A.STM American Society for Testing Materials A.SA. American Standards Association A.NS.I American National Standards Institute A.WWA. American Water Works Association o.SHA. Occupational Safety & Health Administration A.C.l American Concrete Institute Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre-construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Estimated Quantities The Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the fmal quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. . 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for SectionIVa.doc Page 5 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench-shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its' length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type land shall conform to AASHTO M-85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C-33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C-94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement ofless than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set. of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion SectionIV a.doc Page 6 Revised: 5/11/2005 II II II I II I I Ii II II I II II I II I II I II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thorougWy compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall. be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or spnngmg. 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA-A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM A185). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M-86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. SectionIVa.doc Page 7 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS. CURBS. SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2", if over 6", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10/1 0 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre- SectionIV adoc Page 8 Revised: 5/11/2005 I Ii II Ii II II I I Ii I II I II I I II Ij Ii I I) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. SectionIVa.doc Page 9 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) I. All grade adjustments of manhole frame and cover assemblies shall be completed utilizing the following: High Density Polyethylene Grade Adjustment Rings - Comply with ASTM Standard D-1248 for recycled plastic. a. Material properties shall be tested and certified for usage by the following ASTM methods: b. Property Test Method Acceptable Value c. Melt Flow Index ASTM DI238 0.3 to 30 g 110 min. d. Density ASTM D792 0.94 to 0.98 g 1 cm3 e. Tensile Strength ASTM D638 2.00 to 5 x 103 lb 1 in 2 f. Polyethylene adjusting rings shall not be used when they are exposed to heated hot mix asphalt pavement. g. Tapered configuration: When used in a single configuration tapered adjusting ring thickness will range from 0.5 inch to 3.0 inch. h. Grade adjustment rings are to be installed on clean flat surfaces according to the manufacturer's recommendations with the proper Butyl Rubber sealant/adhesives. SectionIV adoc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 10 I I I II II II I II II II I I II Ii I I II Ii II ! II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. The inside diameter of the adjustment ring shall not be less than the inside diameter ofthe manhole frame. 3. Manholes shall be constructed with at least two adjustment rings. 4. Maximum height of adjustment ring stack: 12 inches max. for new manholes and 16 inches max. on existing manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic black solution 300 M as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc. or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior and interior of all precast manholes shall be coated with at least 15 mils dry thickness of PROCO EP 214 351 Epoxi Mastic as manufactured by Protective Coatings Inc. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thorougWy compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. SectionIV a.doc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 11 Section IV - Technical Specifications 15 STREET CROSSINGS. ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER. STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off- site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall either be shown on the plans, or determined in the field by the Engineer in conjunction with the City's Materials Tester. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub-surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non-degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl cWoride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F-758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M-189 SectionIVa.doc Page 12 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I' II II Ii I Ii II I II II II II Ii II Ii I I! I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications described in FDOT Section 948-4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A-2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949-93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non-perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly-cWoride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140-N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number oflineal feet of 8" Sub-drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean-outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before fmishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) SectionIV adoc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 13 Section IV - Technical Specifications 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfi1tration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl cWoride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 12.5 feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "poly1ined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl cWoride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile SectionIVa.doc Page 14 Revised: 5/11/2005 -II Ii II II II Iii I II II II I I I II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl cWoride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited tothe minimum practicable width allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS . The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level SectionIV adoc Page 15 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltra- tion. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.1. for one hour, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and sub grade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and sub grade items. SectionIV adoc Page 16 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I II II Ii I II I II II II II II II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The sub grade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as ,shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 ofFDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confIrm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. SectionIV adoc Page 17 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the fmished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 6 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330-11, and for soil cement per Section 270-5 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half-inch (V2"). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract SectionIVa.doc Page 18 Revised: 5/11/2005 I II Ii Ii Ii Ii I Ii II II Ii II I II Ii Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161-6.4 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per FDOT Section 160-7.2. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, sub grade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S- Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality controVassurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons SectionIV adoc Page 19 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction/gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330-11 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330-13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of W' or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330-15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (2000 edition). In addition, for excesses of Y-i" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Proiect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. NO RECLAIMED ASPHALT PAVEMENT (RAP) MATERIAL SHALL BE ALLOWED IN THE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MIXES. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) Type S-I Type S-I with Type S-III FC-3 Type S-III Type S-I Type S-III with FC-3 with FC-3 Top Layer Top Layer Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1~ 1~ SectionIV adoc Page 20 Revised: 5/11/2005 I II Ii II II 11 II I I II Ii I I II II I II II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2 1~ % * 1 1 2~ 1~ 1~ 1~ 1 1~ 1 3 1~ 1~ 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S-III is acceptable for use on residential streets Additional Notes: 1. Type S-III shall be limited to the fmal (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S-III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as fmal riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC-3 friction course per section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 ofFDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. SectionIVadoc Page 21 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A-36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of AS.T.M. A-36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is ~ot permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturers specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each nser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the rims manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over, It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. SectionIV adoc Page 22 Revised: 5/11/2005 II I II II Ii II II II II II Ii II II 11 II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be W' above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections A through H above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition): 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67-22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. SectionIV adoc Page 23 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and/or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published montWy by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com.Itis underthe section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850-414-4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The montWy billing period for contract payment will be the same as the montWy period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and/or specified. Work noted as "NIC", "existing", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turfflandscape areas except at road/paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be SectionIV a.doc Page 24 Revised: 5/11/2005 I: I I I I I I I I I Ii I Ii I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and addressees) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four-hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two-hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until fmal acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be SectionIV a.doc Page 25 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: SectionIVa.doc Page 26 Revised: 5/11/2005 I II 1 Ii I' I I 1 I 1 I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. 200-250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded-Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non-Shock Safe- T-Shear Stem 5. Safe-T-Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company, Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 2%" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. A WWA-C-509 2. 200 lb. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance-pressure across-the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25-30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one-piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal J.D. tags numbered to match drawings. SectionIV a.doc Page 27 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36- T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6") economy turf box with #182002 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. TecWine shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch (1/2") low-density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self-cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12", 18", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self- flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.1 0.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7-70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15-45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow/reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. TecWine pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7". B. For on-surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub-surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIRNACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an AirNacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. SectionIV a.doc Page 28 Revised: 5/11/2005 .1'1 Ii Ii Ii II I I, I I: Ii I Ii I I I I: Ii Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/-6%. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high- impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS SectionIV a.doc Page 29 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven-key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., G1endora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES-B, GB, ofEFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. SectionIV a.doc Page 30 Revised: 5/11/2005 I Ii II I Ii Ii Ii II I Ii I II I II II II II I II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFilLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFilLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" offill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fme granular material with no foreign matter larger than ~ in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 ofFDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non-pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. SectionIV adoc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 3 1 Section IV - Technical Specifications C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. INSTAllATION, 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and/or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup/curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: SectionIV a.doc Page 32 Revised: 5/11/2005 I: I II I Ii I) Ii I I I I II II 1\ II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having SectionIVa.doc Page 33 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and/or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single fIrm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non-compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1-800-432-4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. SectionIV a.doc Page 34 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I II I II Ii! I I I Ii I: I I I I I: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions/alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions/alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS/DEFINITIONS OA. or NT.: The over-all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. C.W: Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. SPR.: Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. ST TR.: Straight trunk. MIN. : Minimum. GAL.: Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. Oc.: On center, distance between plant centers. SectionIV a.doc Page 35 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications DIA.: Diameter. L Vs.: Leaves. D.B.H: Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL. : Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. B&B: Balled and bur1apped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. PPP: Plants per pot. FG: Field grown. STD.: Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owner S Representative: Owner's on-site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. SectionIV a.doc Page 36 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I: I Ii I I Ii I I I I I II I II I II II II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form sabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name.' H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty-four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub-grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after fmal grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. SectionIV a.doc Page 37 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completiQn with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy to the Owner's Representative and/or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. R If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and/or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). SectionIV a.doc Page 38 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I II I I I I I I Ii Ii II Ii I] II II II 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non-available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an avai.lable source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and/or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container-grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice-versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as/if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, fresWy mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade "B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thorougWy mixed with a pre-emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. SectionIV a.doc Page 39 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20-10-5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1: 1 or 2: 1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than ~ the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - %" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants; Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1 ". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 - 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SectionIVa.doc Page 40 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I Ii II II Ii I II I Ii Ii Ii I II II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra-Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - ~ feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and/or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SectionIV a.doc Page 41 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed/turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre-emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round-Up" or "Rodeo", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - ~ inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native sub grade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (113), sandy loam (113), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round-Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub- grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. ThorougWy work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. SectionIV adoc Page 42 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I Ii II II II II II Ii II II II II II I] II II Ii I 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well- drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0- 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant SIzes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20-10-5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: SectionIV a.doc Page 43 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each W' (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7 - 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back-filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie-down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water-in before bringing the back-fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. ThorougWy water-in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed-free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6-6-6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-112 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thorougWy and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to sub grade. SectionIV a.doc Page 44 Revised: 5/11/2005 I) II Ii II II II Ii I! Ii II Ii II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling-in dips and voids and thorougWy washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two ~ inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed-free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non-mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. SectionIV a.doc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 45 Section IV - Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune aily broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN-UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean-up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a fust class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash-out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under SectionIVadoc Page 46 Revised: 5/11/2005 I II Ii II II Ii Ii II II II Ii I I' I Ii II II I II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and/or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and/or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after fmal acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under-specified plant materials. No SectionIV adoc Page 47 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees fumishedunder this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trencWess restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless,continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi . Elasticity Modulus E=1l3,000 psi SectionIV a.doc Page 48 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I Ii I Ii II Ii I: I I II I: II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft-lb/in Flexure Modulus E=136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c=0.009 in/in/deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5-foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1-800-344-3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. SectionIV adoc Page 49 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. SectionIV adoc Page 50 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I II Ii Ii Ii Ii II Ii I I: II Ii Ii Ii IJ Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replace ment shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS The State of Florida has imposed strict requirements on Solid Wastes Handlers to decrease the generation of solid waste products and in particular to increase the amount of recycle products. In this regard, the City is required to determine the montWy total tonnage of all construction debris which is recycled in this contract. A recycled material is any material reused in any manner which diverts its alternative disposal to a publicly assessable landfill or by incineration. If a material, such as clean earth, is not normally disposed to a landfill or incineration, then it is not to be considered a recyclable material. The Contractor is required to include in each request for payment the total tonnage of materials which were recycled by the contractor during the contract period for which the payment request is made. Any cost to the contractor for the development and submittal of this information is to be included in the contract items provided in the original contract proposal. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Proj ect Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. SectionIVa.doc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 51 Section N - Technical Specifications 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as, shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4 '). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4"), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform fmished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod SectionIV a.doc Page 52 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I II I I I I I I I I I II I Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thorougWy watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and/or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and/or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES. INLETS. CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. SectionIVa.doc Page 53 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. 33.2 'PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Whenever a conflict appears between the plans and specifications, the more stringent requirement shall apply. If a conflict is of such a nature as to require a decision, then a written request for clarification must be made prior to starting that phase of construction. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. SectionIV a.doc Page 54 Revised: 5/11/2005 I 'I I I Ii II I: Ii I Ii I Ii II II Ii Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 37 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREAS 37.1 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF WORK AREA SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CITY This project will not require the preparation of an audio/video tape of work areas by the Contractor. 37.2 AUDIONIDEO TAPE OF ALL WORK AREAS SHALL BE PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR 37.2.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO TAPE Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio/video tape recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights-of-way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre-construction conditions. 37.2.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO TAPE The video recordings shall not be made more than 21 days prior to construction in any area. 37.2.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial fIrm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre-construction color audio-video tape documentation. 37.2.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio videotape coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.2.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each tape shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each videotape shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.2.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time SectionIV adoc Page 55 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom-in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.2.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 37.2.8 LIGHTING All taping shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.2.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 37.2.10 VIDEO LOG/INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering surveyor coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.2.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, II II J SectionIVadoc Page 56 Revised: 5/11/2005 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at anyone time. 37.2.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after fmal grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on-site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and/or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. SectionIV adoc Revised: 5/11/2005 Page 57 Section IV - Technical Specifications The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of contain-ing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work. area during land alteration, development and/or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. Silt curtains or other filter/siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at anyone time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel,. road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and/or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and/or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order". SectionIV adoc Page 58 Revised: 5/11/2005 I: Ii I I I II Ii I Ii I I I II I Ii II II I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SectionIV a.doc Page 59 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Public Works Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a Planning & Development Services Inspector or a Public Works Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1 st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence $32 reinspection fee 3rd occurrence $80 reinspection fee 4th occurrence Stop work order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Public Works Administration Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a Public Works inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction at 462-6126 or Planning & Development Services at 562-4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Public Works Administration with specific questions at 562-4750. SectionIV adoc Page 60 Revised: 5/11/2005 I: II Ii II I II 11 II I I I I Ii: Ii I I I I I ------------------- Section IV - Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3-701 (DIVISION 7 - EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Reinspection Fee $80.00 Reinspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562-4741 & PUBLIC SERVICES/CONSTRUCTION 727 462-6126 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings ofthe inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SectionIVa.doc Page 61 Revised: 5/11/2005 Section IV - Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The. tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6" x 3" and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4" X 2" and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed, which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 - General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within consecutive calendar days. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Assistant Public Services Director, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Three Hundred Twenty Dollars ($320.00) per eight-hour day for each Inspector given such assignment. SectionIVadoc Page 62 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I I I Ii I Ii II Ii II Ii Ii I: II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 41 WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness Rated Water Working Pressure (In.) (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance withANSI/AWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest reVISIon. SectionIVa.doc Page 63 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) Pipe 4" through 8" shall be in accordance withANSI/AWWA C900 81 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl CWoride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: Size Dimension Ratio Rated Water Working Pressure Laying Length (ODffhick.) (PSI) (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8" shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4" through 8" when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4" and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl cWoride pipe shall be laid with an insulated 12 gauge AW.G. solid strand copper wire wound around the pipe forming one complete spiral per joint of pipe. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by methods approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4" through 16" in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AWWA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI/AWWA Clll/A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI/AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. SectionIV adoc Page 64 Revised: 9/22/05 Ii I I I Ii II Ii Ii I: I II II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated. Valves three inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left ( counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Smaller than two inch: Gate valves less than two inches in diameter shall be of brass and shall conform to Federal Specification WW V 54, Type 1 or 11 with screwed joints. Valves for interior piping shall be Type 11, wedge disc, rising stem, inside screw type. Valves for buried service shall be Type 1, wedge disc, nonrising stem. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves in conformance with ANSI/AW.W.A. Standard Specification C509 80 or latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509-80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistent bronze nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal and internal cast iron parts coated with corrosion resistent coating. Larger than sixteen inch: Gate valves larger than 16" shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be iron body, bronze mounted, double disc type with 0 ring seals. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. 41.2.5 HYDRANTS Fire hydrants used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater water system shall be the following hydrants: . Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, . Mueller Centurion Fire Hydrant Catalog Number A 423 SectionIV a.doc Page 65 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications . U.S. Pipe Metropolitan No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above fire hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the A WW A Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. Basic design will be the dry barrel type which prevents the operating threads from coming in contact with the service water. It will be of the compression type, opening against the pressure and closing with the pressure. 2. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an "0" ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 3. Hydrant barrel will be of the "Breakable Type" made in two sections with the flange or break feature located approximately 2" above the ground line. 4. Main valve opening of the hydrant will be not less than 5 1/4". 5. Hydrant nozzles will consist of two 2 1/2" hose nozzles and one 4 1/2" pump nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. 6. The hydrant will be so designed to permit the removal of all working parts from the hydrant up through the barrel without disturbing the earth around the hydrant or disassembling the barrel. 7. Main valve seat will be made of bronze and threaded into a bronze retaining ring. Or it may be threaded into a heavy bronze bushing in the hydrant base. 8. Hydrant will be designed with an anti friction bearing so located that it will reduce the torque required to operate the hydrant. 9. There will be a minimum of two bronze or brass drain outlets. 10. Hydrants shall be painted with one coat of primer and one coat of yellow paint at the factory and one finish coat of yellow paint after installation. All paints shall comply with A WWA Standard C502-85 or its latest revision. 11. The main valve stem will be made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 12. Hydrants shall be left open (counter clockwise) and shall have a National Standard 11/2" pentagon operating nut. 13. Hydrant base outlet will be 6" and will be mechanical joint with fittings. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. ' All fire hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4" P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4" main shall be 1 1/2". Service saddles shall be used on all 2" service SectionIVadoc Page 66 Revised: 9/22/05 I I Ii I 11 I I,: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications connections to 6" and larger mains. Service saddles shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 78 or its latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. Since installed devices must be tested annually and may be maintained by the City of Clearwater, following are the approved models of devices allowed for installation by customers of the City of Clearwater Water Distribution system: DOUBLE CHECK VALVE 2" and Smaller Laroer than 2" Conbraco 40100 Conbraco 40100 Hersey Beeco Model FDC Hersey Beeco No.2 Watts Model 709 or 007 Watts Model 709 or 007 FEBCO Model 805Y Ames 2000 SS SectionIV a.doc Page 67 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications REDUCED PRESSURE TYPE 2" and Smaller Larl!er than 2" Ames 5000 SS Conbraco 40200 Conbraco 40200 Hersey Beeco Model FRP II Hersey Beeco Model 6CM FEBCO Model 825Y Watts Model 909 or 009 Watts Model 909 or 009 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412; C10w Corporation 3460; or equal. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4" bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs shall be box hydrants having a 2" main valve, closing with the water pressure. These flush mounted hydrants shall have a 2" FIP inlet, with the outlet being a 2 1/2" bronze male nozzle. With all working parts also of bronze, these hydrants will open to the left and have a removable bronze seat, which seals against a seat rubber of no less durometer than 85. All hydrants shall be as manufactured by Kupferle Foundry, St. Louis, Mo., Model #35B or approved equal. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30" and a maximum of 42" below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SectionIV a.doc Page 68 Revised: 9/22/05 I Ii II II I Ii I, Ii I: I I II Ii I I I' II II I: Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTAllATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in fmal position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipelaying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600-82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SectionIV a.doc Page 69 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. The valve box shall not transmit shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the fmished pavement or such other level as may be directed. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall b.e located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans or specified in the field by the Engineer. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. SectionIV a.doc Page 70 Revised: 9/22/05 ,II I II II II II Ii II Ii I I II II II I Ii I Iii I Ii II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of one hour. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater Water Division 48 hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thorougWy sterilized. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid cWorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypocWorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "PercWoron" . 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thorougWy flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the closest point available to the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum cWorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual cWorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual cWorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. SectionIV a.doc Page 71 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thorougWy flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the Florida State Board of Health prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure final approval of the bacterial samples from the Florida State Board of Health before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL 1. Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. 2. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. 3. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: a) Clearing and grubbing b) Excavation, including necessary pavement removal c) Shoring and/or dewatering d) Structural fill e) Backfill f) Grading g) Tracer wire h) Refill materials i) Joints materials j) Tests and sterilization k) Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SectionIV a.doc Page 72 Revised: 9/22/05 II Ii Ii II I) Ii Ii I: I II I I II I Ii I II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSI/AWWA CllO/A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust anchorage, 6 inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. SectionIV a.doc Revised: 9/22/05 Page 73 Section IV - Technical Specifications 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 pounds active ingredient per 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags shall be retained and turned into the Engineer's Office. 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1" leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut-back Asphalt Grade RC-70 or RC-250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A.Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S-III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1 n of Type S- III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will be approved. If a deficiency of more than W' exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. SectionIV a.doc Page 74 Revised: 9/22/05 I 11 II Ii II I Ii I I I: II Ii II Ii II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and/or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thorougWy cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. ' Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty-eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SectionIVa.doc Revised: 9/22/05 Page 75 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 Degree's F and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and lor the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub-surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub-surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SectionIVa.doc Page 76 Revised: 9/2V05 I Ii II Ii II Ii Ii Ii I I: Ii I: II Ii II II II Ii I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.1.6 BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed. " 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub-grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub-grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub-grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB-GRADE The sub-grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub-grade elevation. The sub-grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The fmal grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the fmal grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation oftesting to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SectionIV adoc Revised: 9/22/05 Page 77 Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub-grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one-quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one-quarter (2-1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub-surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB I Ii 11 II Ii Ii II Ii Ii I Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one-quarter (1/4) to one-half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. II 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one-eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo-tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub-surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SectionIV a.doc Page 78 Revised: 9/22/05 II II II II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT-25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2-1/2" Ameristar HT-25 pipe; top rails 1-5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. '43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1-3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom-type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger-bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges - Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, and offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Provide one and one-half (1-1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high- density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty-six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty-two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty-three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven- eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel fmish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SectionIV a.doc Page 79 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications the net a height of forty-two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be fIrmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design - Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one-half (2 - 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride-on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR-I Roller, automatic forward-neutral-reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3-horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4-1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction-driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction" Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (l each) - six-foot length aluminum. SectionIV a.doc Page 80 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I II Ii Ii II I I I I I II I I Ii II II I i I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" - 8'10ng x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., I-inch maximum size aggregate, 3-inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re-aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE-LAMP The Contractor shall re-lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight-(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887-0770 fax (336) 887-0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SectionIV adoc Page 81 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w/existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually to the existing light pole, it is suggested the Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing pole locations and utilize existing conduits. New conduits will be required for the three (3) new light poles and the Contractor shall include the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating of the new light poles. 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series - water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. SectionIV a.doc Page 82 Revised: 9/22/05 I I Ii II Ii Ii Ii I Ii I; I; I II II Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and lor workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB-SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub-surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and/or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and/or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives:- . Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. . Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. . Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. . Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. . Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). . Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. . Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and/or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only SectionIV a.doc Page 83 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction 102-5 Traffic Control: 102-5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C- View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. SectionIV adoc Page 84 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I II I Ii I Ii I: II II Ii Ii Ii I: Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Office of the Traffic Engineer, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562-4772, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Office of the Traffic Engineer may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non-specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and/or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24-hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day-to-day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24-hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. SectionIVa.doc Page 85 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45 CURED-IN-PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trencWess restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength ASTM D638 3,000 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D790 4,500 psi Flexural Modulus of Elasticity ASTM D790 300,000 psi Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D2290 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS-20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe.' Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305-979-0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and/or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING/SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the ContraCtor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thorougWy clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of SectionIV adoc Page 86 Revised: 9/22/05 I: I Ii I I' II Ii I I I I II I I I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed-circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight-hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. SectionIV adoc Page 87 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. SectionIV adoc Page 88 Revised: 9/22/05 I Ii I Ii I I I II I II Ii I I Ii I I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and/or the scope of work. 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLlPLlNING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15-inch existing sewer. 16-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18-inch existing sewer. 18-inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21-inch existing sewer. 21 'ii-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24-inch existing sewer. SectionIV a.doc Page 89 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 28-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30-inch existing sewer. 34-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36-inch existing sewer. 42-inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48-inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION I I: Ii The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or I i insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to II inserting the liner. 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2: 1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12-hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. SectionIVa.doc Page 90 Revised: 9/22/05 I] I: II I: I I I 11 II I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre-fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backfilled using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and/or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right-of-ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right-of-ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl cWoride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. SectionIV adoc Page 91 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl CWoride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter". The pipe and fittings shall be made ofPVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not. more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and/or spigot configurations compatible. with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 ( one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C 150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. SectionIVadoc Page 92 Revised: 9/22/05 I! I' II Ii I Ii II II I' I: I, I Ii I Ii II Ii . , II I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28-day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve Passing No.4 Sieve Passing No.8 Sieve Passing No. 16 Sieve Passing No. 30 Sieve Passing No. 50 Sieve Passing No. 100 Sieve 100% 95% to 100% 80% to 100% 50% to 85% 25% to 60% 10% to 30% 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and/or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for SectionIVa.doc Page 93 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets, shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by a air/water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thorougWy moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thorougWy mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as SectionIVa.doc Page 94 Revised: 9/22/05 II Ii II Ii I II II I I: Ii I: I II I II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless other wise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not fmal set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45-degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thorougWy cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozz1eman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. SectionIV adoc Page 95 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Compo Cap Max. Hose Dia. Max. Size Nozzle Min. Air Press. (elm) (In.) (In.) (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 21/2 21/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. SectionIV a.doc Page 96 Revised: 9/22/05 I I II I II Ii I: II I I II II I I II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made-in-place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and/or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing manhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. SectionIV a.doc Page 97 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No.8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS-2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory SectionIV adoc Page 98 Revised: 9/22/05 II Ii Ii II II II I II I! Ii Ii II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications training. The applicator/contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C-109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C-596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C-952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C-109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C-952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong-Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi SectionIVa.doc Page 99 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2%) by weight. Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50-51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65%-75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth fmish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump. capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. SectionIV a doc Page 100 Revised: 9/22/05 Ii II II II II II I: II Ii II II Ii II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and/or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the fmal1iner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING F or each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozz1eman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the fust application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth fmish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush fmish may be applied to the fmished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. SectionIVa.doc Page 101 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLlNE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam-injected through wall of manhole to fill voidsandlor b. Hydrophilic gel-injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of /2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of30dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The SectionIV a.doc Page 102 Revised: 9/22/05 I II II II Ii II II II II II II II Ii II Ii II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 1-3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574-86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574-86 Bonding Strength 250-300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole-to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75-9.171bs/gal Tensile Strength 150 psi Elongation 250% Shrinkage Less than 4% Toxicity Non Toxic ASTM D-3574 ASTM D- 412 ASTM D-3574 ASTM D-1042 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components-two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,2001,800 psi SectionIV a.doc Page 103 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) at 100% RH at 50% RH 8.lxlO llcm/sec to 7.6x10 cm/sec 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: CalCium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days 28 Days Astm C 495 Compressive Strength, Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity - <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze-Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4-5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1116 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPOXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (parts A:B), by volume Color (other colors available on request) Pot Life, hrs Tensile Strength, psi, min Tensile Elongation, % Water Extractable Substances, mg./sq. in., max Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1:1 Light Gray 1 2,000 10 -20 5 1,800 SectionIV a.doc Page 104 Revised: 9/22/05 I II II II Ii Ii II II Ii II II II II I Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3%), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10%), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3%), Gasoline, Com Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3%), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTAllATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and/or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and/or sand blast structure. d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious/crystallization waterproofmg agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and/or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1-5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty-four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and/or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing! crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. SectionIV a.doc Page 105 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING/CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiftbrush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24-hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPOXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and SectionIV a.doc Page 106 Revised: 9/22/05 I I Ii II Ii I I; Ii I II I II II Ii II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repaif steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 50.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The City desires to inform the general public on the City's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at alllocation(s) of active work. 50.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be lump sum for the entire project. The number of and type of signs will be stated in the Scope of the Work section of the contract documents. Lump sum item will be included in the bid proposal for signs. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 50.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4' by 8' in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2". Sign shall be attached to a minimum of three pressure treated 4" by 4" below grade pressure treated wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24" above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 50.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24" by 30" in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080" or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. 50.5 SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. SectionIV a.doc Page 107 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 50.6 SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the City's right-of-way, the signs will be placed in the right-of-way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 50.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. 50.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN PROJECT NAME A CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT PROJECT FUNDING: CONTRACTOR: CONSTRUCTION COMPLETION: CITY PROJECT MANAGER: PHONE 51 IN-LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In-Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex . System. t 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In-line Skating Surfacing System . 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer . 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave . 2 Coats of Plexiflor . Plexicolor Line Paint SectionIV adoc Page 108 Revised: 9/22/05 I I I I II I: I: II I Ii I II II Ii Ii I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80-100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer 55 gallons Water (Clean and Potable) 20-40 gallons Sand (60-80 mesh) 600-900 pounds Liquid Yield 112-138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non-coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti-Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix must be applied within 3 hours of the TiCoat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05-.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons SectionIV a.doc Page 109 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1 ) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats ofPlexiflor at a rate of .04-.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In-Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any' other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 500F or more than 1 40oF. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In-line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to I hour at 700P with 60% relative humidity. SectionIV adoc Page 110 Revised: 9/22/05 I 'Ii If I I II Ii II II Ii I, I II I, I II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In-Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 52.1 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CITY See below for Resident Notification performed by the Contractor. 52.2 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and/or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and/or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 ~ by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than 7 days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper 7 day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non-specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. SectionIV a doc Page III Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: I / --- PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right-of-way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of 7 days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right-of-way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and/or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right-of-way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right-of-way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Superintendent at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GASION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GAB IONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non-raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ-W-461H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A-641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A-90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or SectionIV a.doc Page 112 Revised: 9/22/05 I Ii I I I I I: Ii II I II Ii II Ii Ii ,Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B-6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four I-minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A-239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 Y2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 Y2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confme the required selvedge wires. Tiger- Tite Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A-313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A-641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D-2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D-142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D-412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D-746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D-2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: SectionIV a.doc Page 113 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HCl (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B-117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D-1499 and ASTM G-23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D-2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigraJe. SectionIV adoc Page 114 Revised: 9/22/05 I I II I II II Ii .Ii I II I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than + 18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: . Absorption, maximum 5% . Los Angeles Abrasion (FM 10T096), maximum loss 45% . Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM I-TI04), maximum loss 12% . Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gab ions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs./sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs.lsq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D-2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses SectionlVa.doc Page 115 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one-half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor( s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: · Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; · Trash and debris removal from the job site; SectionIV adoc Page 116 Revised: 9/22/05 I' II Ii II II I Ii II I Ii Ii Ii II II II Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications . Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; . Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; . Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); . Irrigation service and repair; . Mulch replacement; . Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the . Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants SectionIV a.doc Page 117 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRISREMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20-6-12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid-February, early June, and mid-September, for the fIrst two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his/her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. SectionIVa.doc Page 118 Revised: 9/22/05 I II II Ii II II I Ii I, I I I II Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freezelfrost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freezelfrost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the . sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty-four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in placed as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11 :00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on-site work at the contracted rate per man-hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze/frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a SectionIVa.doc Page 119 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. - 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. - 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads/fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or hislher employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. SectionIV adoc Page 120 Revised: 9/22/05 I Ii II I II Ii Ii II II I I] II II I If II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre-wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the contract surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections ofthe road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S- Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562-4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility SectionIVa.doc Page 121 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge - This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width - This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line/edge of pavement to curb line/edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns). are to be milled and repaved to restore and/or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall. include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and/or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified hi the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off-site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. SectionIV a.doc Page 122 Revised: 9/22/05 I II Ii II Ii II Ii II II II II II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand-cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (lastest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand- cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand-cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand-cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on-site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: . An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe bums to the skin and eyes. At the pre-construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub-contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. SectionIVa.doc Page 123 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: . Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. . The date of the training, and I . The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 690), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary. equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, and removal of existing traffic signal equipment. All mast arms signal installations shall meet the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm poles shall be chestnut bronze, with the color approved by the City prior to placement. All traffic signal indicators shall be LED's, approved by both the City and FDOT. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineatorslflex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked-out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No SectionIV adoc Page 124 Revised: 9/22/05 I 'Ii II Ii II Ii II II II II II II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked-out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and/or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and/or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer speCIes. 3. At or greater than two-thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two-inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four-inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No SectionIV adoc Revised: 9/22/05 Page 125 Section IV - Technical Specifications equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and/or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Public Works projects for root Pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562-4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be preformed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and/or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the trunk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. 1. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. SectionIVadoc Revised: 9/22/05 Page 126 ,II II II Ii IJ II I II II I II Ii Ii Ii II Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV - Technical Specifications J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until fmal backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and/or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be preformed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations - Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance - Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A-300. B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion-tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. SectionIV a.doc Page 127 Revised: 9/22/05 Section IV - Technical Specifications 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: htt{J:I Iwww.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT-19990505/ http://www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable-width tables, user-adjustable/relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design/aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity Issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up-to-date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. SectionIV a.doc Page 128 Revised: 9/22/05 .1 Ii II If II II II I) II II II II II Ii II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section IV A Supplemental Technical Specifications I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01000 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Work to be done consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials, and equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. The summary of the Work is presented in Section 01100: Summary of Work. B. Work Included: 1. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant power, light, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies, and means of construction necessary for proper performance and completion of the Work. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary local building permits. The Contractor shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all Work and pay all costs incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 2. The cost of incidental work described in these Project Requirements, for which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices for the various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 3. The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modem plant, tools, and equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the Work required by this Contract. Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his workmanship, materials, and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer notwithstanding. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01000-1 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS C. Public Utility Installations and Structures: Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, vaults, manholes, and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodies, or privately owned by individuals, firms, or corporations, used to serve the public with transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, water, or other public or private property which may be affected by the Work shall be deemed included hereunder. 1. The Contract Documents contain data relative to existing public utility installations and structures above and below the ground surface. These data are not guaranteed as to their completeness or accuracy and it is the responsibility of the Contractor to make his own investigations to inform himself fully of the character, condition, and extent of all such installations and structures as may be encountered and as may affect the construction operations. 2. The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from damage during the Work. Access across any buried public utility installation or structure shall be made to avoid any damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities damaged by the Contractor shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his expense. No separate payment shall be made for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 3. The Contractor shall, at all times in performance of the Work, employ acceptable methods and exercise reasonable care and skill so as to avoid unnecessary delay, injury, damage, or destruction of public utility installations and structures; and shall, at all times in the performance of the Work, avoid unnecessary interference with, or interruption of public utility services, and shall cooperate fully with the owners thereof to that end. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01000-2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS I III II II II II I II II I Ii II II , II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.1 0 DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL A. Drawings: When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used in preference to scaled dimensions, and large-scale drawings in preference to small-scale drawings. B. Supplementary Drawings: 1. When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more fully the Work to be done or to illustrate the Work further or to show any changes which may be required, drawings known as Supplementary Drawings, with specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the Engineer, and the Contractor will be furnished one (1) complete set of reproducible contract drawings (24 inches by 36 inches) and one (1) reproducible copy of the specifications. 2. The Supplementary Drawings shall be binding upon the Contractor with the same force as the Contract Drawings. Where such Supplementary Drawings require either less or more than the estimated quantities of Work, credit to the Owner or compensation therefore to the Contractor shall be subject to the terms of the Agreement. C. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data: 1. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities, and details shown on the Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications, or other Data received from the Engineer, and shall notify him of all errors, omissions, conflicts, and discrepancies found therein. Failure to discover or correct errors, conflicts, or discrepancies shall not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for unsatisfactory work, faulty construction, or improper operation resulting there from, nor from rectifying such conditions at his own expense. He will not be allowed to take advantage of any errors or omissions, as full instructions will be furnished by the Engineer, should such errors or omissions be discovered. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01000-3 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 2. All schedules are given for the convenience of the Engineer and the Contractor and are not guaranteed to be complete. The Contractor shall assume all responsibility or the making of estimates of the size, kind, and quality of materials and equipment included in work to be done under the Contract. D. Specifications: The Technical Specifications consist of three (3) parts: General, Products, and Execution. The General part of a Specification contains General Requirements which govern the Work. The Products and Execution parts modify and supplement the General Requirements by detailed requirements for the Work and shall always govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. If conflict arises between the City's specification and Engineer's specification, the more stringent specification will prevail or as directed by Owner's field representative. E. Intent: 1. All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in the complete and proper execution of the Work, is required and shall be performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or described. 2. The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the best quality is to be used, the interpretation of these Specifications shall be made upon that basis. 1.11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Manufacturer: 1. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall be through the Contractor, including ODP items, unless the Contractor shall request and at the Engineer's option, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor from his full responsibility under this Contract. 2. Any two (2) or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type, or classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by the same manufacturer. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01000-4 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS I I Ii II II I: I: Ii Ii II II Ii I Ii II If II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. Delivery: 1. The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to ensure the most speedy and uninterrupted progress of the Work to complete the Work within the allotted time. 2. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in order to avoid delay in, or impediment of the progress of, the work of any related Contractor. C. Tools and Accessories: 1. The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, furnish with each type, kind, or size of equipment, one (1) complete set of suitably marked high grade special tools and appliances which may be needed to adjust, operate, maintain, or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled, and equipped with good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 2. Spare parts shall be furnished as specified herein and as recommended by the manufacturer necessary for the operation of the equipment, not including materials required for routine maintenance. 3. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, year of manufacture, serial number, weight, and principal rate data. D. Service of Manufacturer's Engineer: 1. The Contract Prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test, and place in operation, the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. After the equipment is placed in permanent operation by the Owner, such engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by the Engineer to prove that such equipment is in proper and satisfactory operating condition, and shall instruct such personnel as may be designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such equipment. 01000-5 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1.12 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: 1. For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall make the necessary inspections and tests, and the reports thereof shall be in such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract Documents. Five (5) copies of the reports shall be submitted, and authoritative certification thereof must be furnished to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or equipment. 2. If, in the making of any test of any material or equipment, it is ascertained by the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the Contract Documents, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly from the site or from the Work and replace it with acceptable material, without cost to the Owner. 3. Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be conducted in accordance with the recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment during testing and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim for damage which may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner formally takes over the operation thereof B. Costs: 1. All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be provided by the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly specified. 2. The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the Contractor, and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Price. 3. Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as the equivalent to those specifically named in the Contract may be tested by the Owner for compliance. The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in making such tests of materials and equipment which are rejected for non-compliance. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01000-6 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS I I I I Ii Ii Ii II I Ii Ii Ii I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C. Certificate of Manufacture: 1. Contractor shall furnish to Engineer authoritative evidence in the form of a certificate of manufacture that the materials to be used in the Work have been manufactured and tested in conformity with the Contract Documents. 2. These certificates shall be notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on similar products ofthe manufacturer. D. Shop Tests: 1. Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, performance, function, or special'requirements are specified shall be tested in the shop of the maker in a manner which shall conclusively prove that its characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Five (5) copies of the manufacturer's actual test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company and/or independent laboratory, shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. 3. The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Start-up Tests: 1. As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, and instruments and shall make start-up tests of equipment. 2. If the start-up tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract which does not comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall, prior to demonstration tests, make all changes, adjustments, and replacements required. The furnishing Contractor shall assist in the start-up tests as applicable. Demonstration Tests: 1. Prior to Contractors request for a Substantial Completion inspection, all equipment and piping installed under this Contract shall be subjected to demonstration tests as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 01000-7 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1.13 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I I 2. The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water, and all other materials, equipment, and instruments necessary for all demonstration tests, at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor shall assist in the demonstration tests as applicable. II Ii LINES AND GRADES A. Grade: I: 1. All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full responsibility for keeping alignment and grade shall rest upon the Contractor. Ii Ii 2. The Engineer will establish benchmarks and baseline controlling points. Reference marks for lines and grades as the Work progresses will be located by the Contractor to cause as little inconvenience to the prosecution of the Work as possible. The Contractor shall so place excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him contrary to this provision. II Ii II Ii B. Surveys: 1. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes, and other such materials. 2. The Contractor shall check such reference marks by such means as he may deem necessary and, before using them, shall call the Engineer's attention to any inaccuracies. II II Ii I I I I I 3. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, establish all working or construction lines and grades as required from the reference marks set by the Engineer, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. He shall, however, be subject to the check and review by the Engineer. C. Safeguarding Marks: 1. The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments, and bench marks made or established on the Work, bear the cost of re establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without authorization such established points, stakes, and marks. 01000-8 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 PART 3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property comers, monuments, and marks adjacent to but not related to the Work and shall bear the cost of re-establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01000-9 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01040 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall coordinate Work with that of other construction projects insofar as they apply to its Work. B. Before starting Work and from time to time as its Work progresses, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall examine the work and materials installed by others insofar as they apply to its own work and shall notify the Engineer immediately in writing if any conditions exist which will prevent satisfactory results in the installation of the system. Should the Contractor or Subcontractor start its work without such notification, it shall be construed as an acceptance of all claims or questions as to the suitability of the work of others to receive its Work. The Contractor shall remove and/or replace, at its own expense, all work under this Contract, which may have to be removed because of such defects or omissions. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements B. Section 01220 - Progress Meetings C. Section 01310 - Progress Schedule D. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance E. Section 01700 - Project Close-Out 1.03 SUBMITIALS A. Submit drawings, product data, and samples in accordance with Project Submittals and Acceptance, Section 01340. Ensure compliance with Contract Documents and field dimensions and clearances. B. Submit requests for interpretation of Contract Documents in a timely fashion to ensure no disruptions with the Work as scheduled. Obtain instructions through the Engineer to resolve all queries. C. Process requests for substitutions and Change Orders through the Engineer. D. Deliver closeout submittals to the Engineer. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01040-1 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 1.10 03720-022-01 October, 2007 II WORK SEQUENCE I II A. Submit a preliminary Progress Schedule, in accordance with Section 01310, to the Engineer. After review, revise and resubmit the Progress Schedule to comply with requested revisions. B. Submit a preliminary Sequence and Method Design for each facility, the Northeast, Marshall and East APCF as described in Section 01100 - Summary of Work. After review, revise and resubmit the Sequence and Method Design with requested revisions. Ii Ii REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) II Ii I I I I I I QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) WARRANTIES (NOT USED) DELIVERY, HANDLING, AND STORAGE (NOT USED) QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) CONSTRUCTION MOBILIZATION A. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in allocation of mobilization areas on site for field offices and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Engineer. B. Comply with the Engineer's procedures for intra-project communications: submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities/conflicts. C. Comply with the Engineer's instructions for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. D. Coordinate field Engineering and layout work under instructions of the. Engineer. Ii E. Coordinate scheduling, submittals and work of the various Sections of Contract Documents to insure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items to be installed later. II F. Coordinate sequence of Work to accommodate the Owner occupancy as specified in the Contract Documents. II G. In addition to Progress Meetings specified in Section 01220, hold pre- construction conferences with personnel and Subcontractors to assure coordination of Work. The Engineer shall be informed of such meetings and shall be allowed to attend. Ii II II 01040-2 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I H. Coordinate the Work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing equipment, connecting equipment, and placing such equipment in servIce. 1. Coordinate use of project space and sequence of installation of civil, architectural, mechanical, structural, instrumentation, systems, and electrical work. Follow practicable routings for pipes, ducts, and conduits, with due allowance for available physical space; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, maintenance, and repaIrs. J. The Contractor shall coordinate Work at existing facilities to minimize disruption of the Owner's operations. K. Assemble and coordinate closeout submittals specified m Project Close-Out, Section 01700. 1.11 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Provide information required by the Engineer for preparation of coordination drawings. B. Review drawings prior to submittal to the Engineer. 1.12 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURES A. Notify the Owner when Work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. B. Comply with the Owner's instructions to correct items of Work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion. C. Notify the Owner when Work has reached Final Completion. D. Comply with the Owner's instructions for completion of items of Work found incomplete in the Engineer's fmal inspection. E. Comply with Project Closeout, Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All vehicles on the property or easement must be operative. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01040-3 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION II II B. All personnel on the property or the easement are to be informed of line voltage and necessary changes. II II 3.02 UTILITIES Coordinate the activities of all utility companies with equipment in the construction area with the Contractor's and Subcontractor's Work. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING Ii No cutting and patching of new Work will be accepted. All Work must be new and continuous in its fmal form. II I END OF SECTION II II II II Ii II Ii II Ii Ii 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01040-4 CONSTRUCTION COORDINATION II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01100 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, the Work must be performed in accordance with best modem practice, with materials and workmanship of the highest quality to the satisfaction of the Owner. A. The Project title is "Headworks Improvements - Screening and Grit Removal for the Northeast, Marshall Street, and East APCFs." B. The Work of this project generally consists of replacement of screening and grit removal systems with some minor modifications at all three sites. C. The owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. D. The contract bid proposal contains additive bid items. The OWNER reserves the right and can have the contractor perform this work, as necessary, or suspend this work based on project costs or other reasons. E. The specification divisions and drawings are an integrated part of the contract documents and, as such, will not stand alone if used independently as individual sections, divisions, or drawing sheets. The drawings and specifications establish minimum standards of quality for this project. They do not purport to cover all details entering into the design and construction of materials and equipment. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 CONTRACT METHOD AND TIME A. The Work described in the Contract Documents will be constructed under a Lump Sum Contract with three separate items, one for each site. Additive alternate items mayor may not be required work, and will be determined by the OWNER/ENGINEER during construction. B. Work will commence no later than five (5) calendar days from written Notice to Proceed. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01100-1 SUMMARY OF WORK C. Contract time from Notice to Proceed to Substantial Completion is 330 consecutive calendar days and 45 consecutive calendar days from Substantial Completion to Final Completion. The total contract time from Notice to Proceed to Final Completion for all work at the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF is 375 consecutive calendar days. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE The following sequence of construction is intended to illustrate the requirements for demolition, construction, and installation of the Headworks Improvements - Screening and Grit Removal at the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF. This is not intended to be a complete list of all required construction activities but a guideline for the sequencing of work. The installation of support systems such as electrical or site improvements are not included in this description. The exact sequence of construction shall be determined by the CONTRACTOR and subject to the subsequent requirements. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a sequence of construction plan to the ENGINEER for approval within four weeks after NOTICE TO PROCEED. This is to ensure that all critical unit processes are kept in proper operation and interruption to the treatment process will be minimized. A. Northeast APCF 1. The CONTRACTOR must maintain the operation of the treatment plant's process flow as well as the flow during construction of improvements to all process elements. 2. As noted on the drawings and specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents; a part of the roof structure has to be removed to facilitate removal of the existing mechanical screens and the installation of the new mechanical screens. The CONTRACTOR shall take all precautions to ensure that the integrity of the remaining roof structure is not compromised. Prior to the removal, provide the Engineer with a comprehensive demolition plan; signed and sealed by a structural engineer. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all plant, electrical work etc is moved and protected from inclement weather during roof construction. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall ensure the new roof system is leak proof as specified. 4. Removal of the existing mechanical screens and installation of the new mechanical screens in the headworks building will require the CONTRACTOR take individual channels offline. These can be achieved by closing the slide gate upstream of the mechanical screen in the channel and coffer damming it to prevent any leaks. Draining of the channels must 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01100-2 SUMMARY OF WORK I I II II I II I: Ii I I I I II Ii Ii II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. be coordinated with the OWNER. At no time shall more than one mechanical screen channel be taken offline. 5. Once the existing mechanical bar screen is taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have the new mechanical screen installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy as specified in the Contract Documents within a 30 days time period. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the collection of screenings from both the existing and new mechanical screens during the removal and installation of mechanical screens and during the modifications to the existing conveyor system. Removal of the existing grit removal system and installation of the new grit classifiers in the headworks building will require the CONTRACTOR take individual grit classifier offline. These can be achieved by closing the upstream valve of the grit classifier. At no time shall more than one grit classifier be taken offline. Once one of the existing grit classifier is taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have the new grit classifier installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy as specified in the Contract Documents within a 15 days time period. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sequencing the removal of the existing grit classifier system while installing the new grit classifier and washpress to maintain facility operations. These activities should be coordinated with the modifications to the existing conveyor system. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean and repair concrete channel walls and floor before applying special concrete corrosion coating to the mechanical screen channel and influent welVchamber as part of the headworks repair. Each channel must be filled and the new mechanical screen or grit system operating to the Owners satisfaction before another channel is taken offline. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean and repair concrete channel walls and floor downstream of the mechanical screens upto the parshall flume before applying special concrete corrosion coating to the channel walls and floor. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide all required 01100-3 SUMMARY OF WORK 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. equipment, including properly sized pumps and piping, to pump down the influent chamber and screen channels as well as remove any grit from the well and channels. 14. A sequence must be followed to decrease the process downtime. The sequence and method for executing mechanical screening removal and replacement, headworks room roof removal and replacement, grit classifier removal and replacement and other associated elements must be designed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER for approval: Work shall not commence until sequence and methods have been approved by the ENGINEER. Marshall Street APCF 1. The CONTRACTOR must maintain the operation of the treatment plant's process flow as well as the headworks flow during construction of improvements to all process elements. 2. Removal of the existing. mechanical screens and installation of the new mechanical screens in the headworks will require the CONTRACTOR take individual channels offline. This shall be done by closing the mechanical screen upstream sluice gate and coffer damming on the downstream side of the mechanical screen channel. Draining of the channels must be coordinated with the OWNER. At no time shall more than one mechanical screen channel be taken offline. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall take all necessary measures to protect the interior of the screen structure from inclement weather when skylights are removed for mechanical screen replacement and ensure the roof skylight system is leak proof upon completion of the mechanical bar screens installation. 4. Once the existing mechanical bar screen is taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have the new mechanical screen installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy within a 30 days time period. 5. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for coordinating the collection of screenings from both the existing and new mechanical screens during the removal and installation of mechanical screens. 6. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sequencing the modification of the existing conveyor while installing the new washpress to maintain facility operations. 01100-4 SUMMARY OF WORK I II II II II I Ii Ii II I Ii II II Ii II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 13. 14. 7. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean, and repair concrete mechanical screen channel walls and floor before applying special concrete corrosion coating to the channel walls and floor following the removal of the existing screens and prior to the installation of the new mechanical screens. 8. Installation of the new grit removal system in the Grit Removal Structure will require the CONTRACTOR take corresponding channels offline. Draining of the channels must be coordinated with the OWNER. At no time shall more than one existing grit unit be taken offline. 9. All structural modifications including but not limited to structural support for the existing grit influent channel as shown in Contract Documents must be completed to ensure structural stability of the the structure. Prior to any modifications to the grit structure, provide the Engineer with a comprehensive plan; signed and sealed by a structural engineer. 10. The flow to the grit unit could temporarily be bypassed using the bypass channel on the grit structure and closing the influent slide gate to the grit structure. The weir in the grit influent channel shall then be demolished and once this is accomplished the bypass slide should be closed and the normal flow through the grit units shall be restored. 11. The farthest (from the grit channel influent slide gate) three grit units shall be removed first and two new grit units shall be installed. A temporary stop plate as well as coffer dam shall be used to ensure the entire waste water flow flows through the existing first grit unit. 12. Once all work for the two new units is completed, the wastewater flow shall then be temporarily bypassed using the bypass channel. The last of the existing grit unit shall now be removed and replaced with the the new grit unit. Once the last existing grit unit is taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have all the new grit units installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy within a 14 days time period. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sequencing the removal of the existing grit classification system while installing the new grit classifier to maintain facility operations. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean and repair screen and grit units (influent and effluent) concrete channel walls and floor before applying special concrete corrosion coating. o II 00-5 SUMMARY OF WORK 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 15. The two grit units fIrst installed must be filled and the new grit system operating to the Owners satisfaction before the last unit is taken offline and replaced with the new unit. I I II II 16. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide all required equipment, including properly sized pumps and piping, to pump down the screen and grit channels. 17. A sequence must be followed to decrease the process downtime. The sequence and method for executing mechanical screening removal and replacement, grit units removal and replacement (including. grit classification unit removal and replacement) and other associated elements must be designed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Work shall not commence until sequence and methods have been approved by the ENGINEER. II Ii C. East APCF II II I 1. The CONTRACTOR must maintain the operation of the treatment plant's process flow as well as the headworks flow during construction of improvements to all process elements. Ii 2. Removal of the existing mechanical screens and installation of the new mechanical screens in the headworks will require the CONTRACTOR take individual channels offline. This shall be done by closing the mechanical screen upstream slide gate and coffer damming on the downstream side of the mechanical screen channel. Draining of the channels must be coordinated with the OWNER. At no time shall more than one mechanical screen channel be taken offline. II II 3. Once the existing mechanical bar screen is taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have the new mechanical screen installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy within a 30 days time period. Ii Ii 4. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sequencing the modification of the existing conveyor while installing the new washpress to maintain facility operations. II 5. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean, and repair concrete mechanical screen channel walls and floor before applying special concrete corrosion coating to the channel walls and floor following the removal of the existing screens and prior to the installation of the new mechanical screens. II o II 00-6 SUMMARY OF WORK II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 6. Installation of the new grit removal system in the Influent Structure will require the CONTRACTOR take corresponding channels offline. Draining of the channels and bypass pumping must be coordinated with the OWNER. The existing grit units are not in service and can be removed simultaneously, but a temporary bypass pumping will have to be installed to bypass the wastewater flow from downstream of the mechanical screen to downstream of grit units. This temporary bypass pumping system shall be installed and will run until all grit units are installed. 7. All structural modifications including but not limited to structural support for the existing grit influent channel as shown in Contract Documents must be completed to ensure structural stability of the the structure. Prior to any modifications to the grit structure, provide the Engineer with a comprehensive plan; signed and sealed by a structural engineer. 8. Once the existing grit units are taken out of service, the CONTRACTOR must have the new grit units installed, operational and under beneficial occupancy within a 45 days time period 9. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for sequencing the removal of the existing grit classifier system and installing the new grit classifier. 10. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to drain, clean and repair concrete channel walls and floor before applying special concrete corrosion coating to the mechanical screen and grit system's influent and effluent channels. 11. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to provide all required equipment, including properly sized pumps and piping, to pump down the screen and grit channels. 12. A sequence must be followed to decrease the process downtime. The sequence and method for executing mechanical screening removal and replacement, grit units removal and replacement (including grit classification unit removal and replacement) and other associated elements must be designed by the CONTRACTOR and submitted to the ENGINEER for approval. Work shall not commence until sequence and methods have been approved by the ENGINEER. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 03 720-022-0 1 October, 2007 01100-7 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 WORKING HOURS 2.01 GENERAL Workdays shall consist of ten (10) hours maximum, between 6:00 am and 6:00 pm., Monday through Friday. City inspection services are 7:30 am to 3:30 pm excluding weekends and holidays. Inspection services required in addition to normal work hours will be paid for by the Contractor. 2.02 SAFTY PROCEDURES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to take all appropriate safety precautions to meet whatever conditions of hazard may be present during the performance of the work, whether reasonably foreseeable or not. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all safety procedures and maintaining a safe work place in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, in addition the Contractor shall review and comply with the City of Clearwater Emergency Action Plan and all Safety Procedures for Advanced Pollution Control Facilities. The Contractor shall also prepare and submit a Site Specific Hurricane Preparedness Plan for all three locations. The Contractor shall submit the name (s) of an employee (s) assigned on-site responsibility to enforce compliance with contractor's safety program, and all federal, state, and local safety regulations. This person (s) shall have current certification showing the completion of a 10 hr OSHA Basic Safety Course. The Contractor shall also supply the name and contact information of the Corporate Safety Director. The compliance of the above does in no event relieves the Contractor of its sole duty and responsibility to ensure a safe work environment and place. 2.03 ACCIDENT REPORTS Accidents shall be reported immediately to the Owner's Site Representative by messenger, telephone or other communication devices available. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01100-8 SUMMARY OF WORK I I II II 11 I II I I I I I II II II II II 11 Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I All accidents shall be documented and a full detailed written report shall be submitted to the Owner's representative after each accident. 2.04 CONTRACTOR'S DAILY REPORTS The Contractor shall submit daily reports of construction activities, including non- working days. The report shall include: 1. Activity work referencing the CPM activity number. 2. Manpower, on each project location, specify number and trade. 3. Equipment on each project location, specify whether in use or idle. 4. Major deliveries 5. Problems, conflicts, errors, interference with planned operations or delays PART 3 ABBREVIATIONS 3.01 ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS, STANDARDS, AND CODES Reference in the specifications to known standards, codes, specifications, etc., promulgated by professional or technical associations, institutions, and societies, is intended to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted and published as of the date of the Advertisement for Bid on this project except where otherwise specifically indicated. Each such standard referred to shall be considered a part of the specifications to the same extent as if reproduced herein in full. The following is a list of applicable documents that apply to this contract. . American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Formerly (AASHO) . American Concrete Institute (ACI) . American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) . American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) . American Standards Association (ASA) . American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) . American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM) . American Water Works Association (A WW A) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01100-9 SUMMARY OF WORK . American Welding Society (A WS) . American National Standards Institute (ANSI) . Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) . Building Officials and Code Administrators International, Inc. (BOCA) . Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) . Federal Specification (FS) . Florida Department of Transportation (FDOT) Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, Latest English Edition (Standard Specifications) . FDOT Roadway and Traffic Design Standards Latest English Edition (FDOT Index) . National Bureau of Standards (NBS) . National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) . National Fire Protection Association (NFP A) . Portland Cement Association (PCA) . Occupational Safety and Health Act (Public Law 91-596), U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA) . Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) . Southern Standard Building Code (SSBC) . Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) . United States of America Standards Institute (USASI) . Regulations of Florida Industrial Commission Regarding Safety . All local, state, county, or municipal building codes requirements of the Owner's Insurance END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01100-10 SUMMARY OF WORK I I II II II II Ii I I I Ii II II I Ii II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01200 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A completed, quality project, as intended by the general nature of the drawings and specifications, shall be produced whether or not any particular wording or direction is inadvertently omitted. Pay items listed on the Bid Form are for comparison of bids and may be used as a method of determining the value of work performed for partial payment requests. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELNERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 LUMP SUM QUANTITIES Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the quantities of each lump sum pay item necessary to complete the Work as required by the Contract Documents. When lump sum items are broken into components, the sum of the components shall be the total Contract Price for the Work. The lump sum price stated on the Bid Form shall constitute full compensation for each pay item completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. No other payments will be made to the Contractor except as specifically authorized by change order. 1.11 UNIT PRICE QUANTITIES All estimated quantities stipulated in the Unit Price portion of the Bid Form or other Contract Documents are approximate and are to be used only (a) as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the Work and (b) for the purpose of comparing the bids submitted for the Work. The actual amounts of work done and materials furnished under unit price items may differ from the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-1 !v1EASURE!v1ENT AND PAYMENT estimated quantities. The basis of payment for unit price work and materials shall be the actual amount of work done and materials furnished. Contractor agrees that he shall make no claim for damages, anticipated profits, or otherwise on account of any difference between the amounts of work actually performed and materials actually furnished and the estimated amounts thereof. The City is tax exempt, and may choose to purchase items listed in the bid form to avoid paying taxes on these materials. Under these situations, the contractor will still order, store and install the materials, and therefore the contractor shall include the overhead and profit in the installation bid item to cover these costs. PART 2 PAY ITEM DESCRIPTIONS The descriptions provided in the following paragraphs are to be used by the Bidder in preparation of his bid proposal. They generally indicate how the major work scope items and their respective costs are to be separated into the line items listed in the Lump Sum Schedule. These descriptions are not fully representative nor all inclusive of the work required to complete the project in accordance with the Contract Documents. It is the Bidder's responsibility to include costs within the most appropriate line item(s) of the Lump Sum Schedule. The following descriptions are ordered in the same numeric sequence of the Lump Sum Schedule. 2.01 NORTHEAST APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS Item A.l - Demolition of Existing Equipment and Structures 1. . Description: Under this item, the Contractor shall include the following: Compliance with OSHA Standards Coordination with Owner and Local Utility Companies. Demolition as required for the removal of existing mechanical bar screens from concrete channels; removal of existing grit classifiers and other equipment; and removal of all piping, electrical and instrumentation associated with the existing mechanical bar screens and grit classifiers as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item A.1 - Demolition of Existing Equipment and Structures Item A.2 - Roof removal and Modifications 1. Description - Under this item, the Contractor shall disassemble portion of 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-2 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I Ii II I: II Ii I: Ii II II Ii II Ii II Ii Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the existing roof to be replaced without damaging the rest of the roof structure. The Contractor shall then remove this part of the existing roof and replace it with the new roof with removable skylights. Before dissembling the roof, the Contractor shall move any items that may be affected by this removal of roof. The new roof shall comply as specified in the Contract Documents and as shown in the Contract Drawings. The Contractor shall then relocate the items to their original location that was moved during the roof removal and modification process. 2. Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item A.2 Roof Removal and Modifications Item A.3 - Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with Wash Press 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase the two new stairlstep screens with wash press as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item A.3 - Equipment Purchase - Two New StairlStep Screens with Wash Press Item AA - Equipment Purchase -Grit Classifier 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase a new grit classifier as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item A.4 - Equipment Purchase -Grit Classifier 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Item A.5 - Concrete Channel Coating 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure wash and keep the channel dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply new epoxy lining and allow it to cure. Apply the epoxy lining in accordance with Section 03180 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer's verification. 3. Payment shall be under item A.5 - Concrete Channel Lining. Item A.6 - Installation, Modifications, and Repairs - Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work contained in the Contract Documents not specifically identified in other bid item for Northeast APCF. This item includes but is not limited to the following: Headworks modifications and improvements including: installation of new mechanical bar screens with wash press and appurtenances; modification and relocation of existing screenings conveyer belt for use with new screens and wash press; convert existing opening into screening discharge chute; installation of new grit classifier and appurtenances; re-piping of existing grit discharge to new grit classifier; connect new grit classifier to existing discharge chute; repair and coating of existing concrete channel surfaces; evaluation and repair of existing slide gates; installation of related system piping; required electrical work; and run conduit and wires to existing SCADA system, all in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis, measured in place, in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. Payment shall be pro-rated based on project completeness. 3. Payment shall be made under Item A.6 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - Equipment and Structures 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I II II II Ii II Ii II II II Ii Ii II II II II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Item A7 - Grit Removal- Influent Well and Screen Channel up to Parshall Flume 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall remove grit collected in the influent well, mechanical screen channel, and channel downstream of the mechanical screens up to parshall flume. Once the grit is removed the influent well and channels need to be cleaned before channel lining is done. All of this work shall be performed in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a per cubic yard basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 2. Payment shall be made under Item A 7 - Grit Removal - Influent Well and Screen Channel up to Parshall Flume Item A8 - Mobilization & Demobilization 1. Description - Under this item, the Contractor shall perform preparatory and clean up work and operations in mobilizing and demobilizing for beginning and closing of work on the project, including, but not limited to, those operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site locations and for the establishment of temporary offices, sanitary and other facilities. This item shall also include demobilization work for closing of work on the project including leaving the site in its original or better condition. The bid price shall not exceed three (3.0) percent of the total Northeast APCF bid. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made in accordance to the following Percent of Original Allowable Percent of the Contract Amount Earned Mobilization Lump Sum 5 30 10 50 25 80 50 100 3. Payment shall be made under Item A8 - Mobilization & Demobilization. Item A9 - 5% Contingency of Total ofItem A.1 through A7 1. Payment under this item shall made for unforeseen items of work not 03720-022-01 October, 2007 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01200-5 included in the other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on plans. The cost of this additional work shall be a2reed upon in writin2 and APPROVED bv the OWNER or his authorized representative prior to startin2 work under this item. 2. The lump sum bid for contingency shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the total bid for Items Al through A.6. The Additive Alternatives shall not be included in the contingency value. In case of mathematical error on the bidder's part, calculating the contingency. The item will be adjusted up or down to equate to five percent (5%) of the total of Bid Items Nos Al through A 7. Item A.l 0 - PLC Allowance 1. Description: Under this bid item the Contractor shall coordinate the integration of the new PLC at the previously negotiated and stipulated pnce. 2. Payment: Payment for PLC integration services will be paid upon receipt of invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of service. Payment shall be made for submitted invoice amounts. Payment to the Contractor for coordination, obtaining, and submitting documents shall be included in other Bid Items associated with the work. The payments for this Bid Item shall be deducted from an initial allowance of $25,000 as shown in the Bid Form. 3. Payment shall be made under Item Al 0 - PLC Allowance 2.02 ADDITIVE ALTERNATES The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the OWNER, as follow: Item I-I: Slide Gates Repair 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to repair the existing screen slide gates - upstream and downstream of mechanical screens. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. Item I-2: Slide Gate Replacement (Only if I-I does not fix the gates and make them operable) 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Ii I II II II I II I I I I I I Ii II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I necessary to remove the existing screen slide gates - upstream and downstream of mechanical screens, repair the channel and install new slide gates of equal size per Contract Documents and Drawings. Item I-3: Purchase and Install New Conveyor System 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to remove the existing screenings conveyor system, repair the concrete and install new conveyor system sized for the new screens per Contract Documents and Drawings. Item I-4: Strip Existing Ceiling Paint and Apply New Coating 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to strip the existing Headworks ceiling paint, repair the ceiling and recoat with specified corrosion coating. Apply the epoxy lining in accordance with Section 09901 (System 31) Item I-5: Prepare and Paint Walls 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to prepare the existing Headworks walls and apply specified coating. Apply the. Paint in accordance with Section 09901 (System 31). Item I-6: Purchase and Install Roll-up Door 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to remove the items necessary to install the new aluminum roll- up door and railing, repair walVconcrete and install new roll-up door of appropriate size per Contract Documents and Drawings. The location of this roll-up door is in the headworks room as shown in Contract Drawings. 2.03 MARSHALL STREET APCF HEAD WORKS IMPROVEMENTS Item B.l - Demolition - Existing Screens Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include the following: Mobilization I Demobilization; Compliance with OSHA Standards; Coordination with Owner and Local Utility Companies; Demolition of existing screens; removal of existing mechanical bar screens from concrete channels; and removal of all piping, electrical and instrumentation associated with the existing mechanical bar screens as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 01200-7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.l - Demolition of Existing Equipment and Structures Item B.2 - Equipment Purchase - Two New Front Rake Front Return Screens with Wash Press 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase two new front rake front return screens with wash press as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.2 - Equipment Purchase - Two New Front Rake Screens with Wash Press Item B.3 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Front Rake Front Return Screens Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include the following: Headworks modifications and improvements including: installation of new mechanical bar screens with wash press and appurtenances; modification of existing screenings conveyer belt for use with new screens and wash press; repair and coating of existing concrete channel surfaces; installation of related system piping; required electrical work; and run conduit and wires to existing SCADA system, ~l in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. Payment shall be pro-rated based on project completeness. 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.3 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - Screens Equipment and Structures Item B.4 - Demolition - Existing Grit System Equipment and Structures 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I I: II I Iii II Ii II II II II II II II II II II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include to the following: Demolition of existing grit removal systems; removal of existing weirs from grit influent concrete channels; and removal of all piping, electrical and instrumentation associated with the existing grit removal system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.4 - Demolition of Existing Grit System Equipment and Structures Item B.5 Sole Source Grit Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps and Grit Classifier and Field Testing of Equipment 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase the new grit removal system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. Also under this bid item the Contractor shall coordinate with the Vortex Grit System Manufacturer for the performance testing of the Grit Units upon installation at the previously negotiated and stipulated sole source price. No "Or Equal" shall be reviewed or accepted. Contractor shall issue a purchase order for this equipment before date listed under Terms and Conditions of specifications and manufacturer's proposal. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with the specifications and the Terms and Conditions in the manufacturer's proposal and upon Engineer verification. Payment for testing services will be paid upon receipt of testing service invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of test. Payment shall be made for submitted testing service invoice amounts. Payment to the Contractor for coordination, obtaining, and submitting testing analyses and results shall be included in other Bid Items associated with the tested work. The payments for this Bid Item shall be deducted from an initial allowance of $20,000 as shown in the Bid Form. 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.5 - Sole Source Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps and Grit Classifier Item B.6-Concrete Channel Coating 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure 01200-9 l\.1EASUREl\.1ENT AND PAYMENT wash and keep the screen and grit channel dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply new epoxy lining and allow it to cure. Apply the epoxy lining in accordance with Section 03180. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with a percent completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 3. Payment shall be under item B.6 - Concrete Channel Lining. Item B.7 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit System Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work contained in the Contract Documents not specifically identified in other bid item for Marshall Street APCF. This item includes but is not limited to the following: Grit System modifications and improvements including: installation of new grit removal systems with grit pumps and grit classifier and appurtenances; modification of existing dumpster area for use with new grit classifier and screening wash press; repair and coating of existing concrete channel surfaces; evaluation and repair of existing slide gates; installation of related system piping; required electrical work; and run conduit and wires to existing SCADA system, all in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. Payment shall be pro-rated based on project completeness. 2. Payment shall be made under Item B. 7 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit System Equipment and Structures Item B.8 - Grit Removal- Screen and Grit Influent and Effluent Channels 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall remove grit collected in the screen and grit influent and effluent channels. Once the grit is removed the screen and grit influent and effluent channels need to be cleaned before channel lining is done. All of this work shall be performed in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I Ii II Ii II II II II II Ii II Ii II II II II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a per cubic yard basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 2. Payment shall be made under Item B.8 - Grit Removal - Mechanical Bar Screen and Grit Influent and Effluent Channels Item B.9 - Mobilization and Demobilization 1. Under this item, the Contractor shall perform preparatory and clean up work and operations in mobilizing and demobilizing for beginning and closing of work on the project, including, but not limited to, those operations necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site locations and for the establishment of temporary offices, sanitary and other facilities. This item shall also include demobilization work for closing of work on the project including leaving the site in its original or better condition. The bid price shall not exceed three (3.0) percent of the total Marshall Street APCF bid. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made in accordance to the following Percent of Original Allowable Percent of the Contract Amount Earned Mobilization Lump Sum 5 30 10 50 25 80 50 100 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.9 - Mobilization & Demobilization. Item B.1O - 5% Contingency of Total ofItem B.l through B.8 1. Payment under this item shall made for unforeseen items of work not included in the other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on plans. The cost of this additional work shall be a2reed upon in writin2 and APPROVED bv the OWNER or his authorized representative prior to startin2 work under this item. 2. The lump sum bid for contingency shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the total bid for Items B.l through B.8. The Additive Alternatives shall not be included in the contingency value. In case of mathematical error on the 01200-11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT bidder's part, calculating the contingency. The item will be adjusted up or down to equate to five percent (5%) of the total of Bid Items Nos B.1 through B.8. Item B.ll - PLC Allowance 1. Description: Under this bid item the Contractor shall coordinate the integration of the new PLC at the previously negotiated and stipulated pnce. 2. Payment: Payment for PLC integration services will be paid upon receipt of invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of service. Payment shall be made for submitted invoice amounts. Payment to the Contractor for coordination, obtaining, and submitting documents shall be included in other Bid Items associated with the work. The payments for this Bid Item shall be deducted from an initial allowance of $25,000 as shown in the Bid Form. 3. Payment shall be made under Item B.ll - PLC Allowance 2.04 ADDITIVE AL TERNA IE The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the OWNER, as follow: Item II-I: Purchase and Install New Shaftless Conveyor System 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to remove the existing screenings conveyor system, repair the concrete and install new conveyor system sized for the new screens. Item II-2: Slide Gates Repair 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to repair the existing grit unit slide gates - upstream of grit units, bypass channel and grit unit effluent channel slide gate. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. Item II-3: Slide Gate Replacement (Only if II-2 does not fix the gates and make them operable) 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to remove the existing grit units slide gates (upstream and 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I II I: II Ii II Ii I I II II II II II II Ii Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I downstream) and bypass channel slide gates, repair the channel and install new slide gates of equal size per Contract Documents and Drawings. 2.05 EAST STREET APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS Item C.l - Demolition - Existing Screens Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include the following: Mobilization I Demobilization; Compliance with OSHA Standards; Coordination with Owner and Local Utility Companies; Demolition of existing screens; removal of existing mechanical bar screens from concrete channels; and removal of all piping, electrical and instrumentation associated with the existing mechanical bar screens as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.l - Demolition of Existing Screens Equipment and Structures Item C.2 - Equipment Purchase -' Two New Stair/Step Screens with Wash Press 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase two new stair/step screens with wash press as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.2 - Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with Wash Press Item C.3 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Stair/Step Screens Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include the following: Headworks modifications and improvements including: installation of new mechanical bar screens with wash press and appurtenances; modification 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT of existing screenings conveyer belt for. use with new screens and wash press; repair and coating of existing concrete channel surfaces; evaluation and repair of existing slide gates; installation of related system piping; required electrical work; and run conduit and wires to existing SCADA system, all in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. Payment shall be pro-rated based on project completeness. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.3 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Screens Equipment and Structures Item CA - Demolition - Existing Grit System Equipment and Structures 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall include to the following: Demolition of existing grit removal systems; removal of existing weirs from grit influent concrete channels; and removal of all piping, electrical and instrumentation associated with the existing grit removal system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification 3. Payment shall be made under Item CA - Demolition of Existing Grit System Equipment and Structures Item C.5 - Sole Source Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps and Grit Classifier 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall purchase the new grit removal system as specified in the Contract Documents and shown in the Contract Drawings. Also under this bid item the Contractor shall coordinate with the Vortex Grit System Manufacturer for the performance testing of the Grit Units upon installation at the previously negotiated and stipulated sole source price. No "Or Equal" shall be reviewed or accepted. Contractor shall issue a purchase order for this equipment before date listed under Terms and Conditions of specifications and manufacturer's proposal. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-14 tvlEASUREtvlENT AND PAYMENT I II Ii II I) II I I II I II Ii I II I I II II I II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with the specifications and the Terms and Conditions in the manufacturer's proposal and upon Engineer verification. Payment for testing services will be paid upon receipt of testing service invoices (copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of test. Payment shall be made for submitted testing service invoice amounts. Payment to the Contractor for coordination, obtaining, and submitting testing analyses and results shall be included in other Bid Items associated with the tested work. The payments for this Bid Item shall be deducted from an initial allowance of $20,000 as shown in the Bid Form. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.5 - Sole Source Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps and Grit Classifier Item C.6 - Grit Channel By Pass Pumping 1. Description - Under this item the Contractor shall provide by-pass pumping to avoid disruption of plant operations during the installation of the new grit units and repair of the existing grit influent concrete channel. 2. Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.6 - Grit Channel By-pass pumping. Item C.7 - Concrete Channel Lining 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall drain, clean, pressure wash and keep the screen and grit channels dry. Examine the concrete surface and repair as necessary under the direction of the engineer and in accordance with Divisions 03300; 03720 and 03740. Apply new epoxy lining and allow it to cure. Apply the epoxy lining in accordance with Section 03180. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a SY basis, measured in place, in accordance with a percent completion, in accordance with the Contractor's approved schedule of the bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 3. Payment shall be under item C.7 - Concrete Channel Lining Item C.8 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit system Equipment and Structures 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work contained in the Contract Documents not specifically identified in other bid item for East APCF. This item includes but is not limited to the following: Grit System modifications and improvements including: installation of new grit removal systems with grit pumps and grit classifier and appurtenances; modification of existing dumpster area for use with new grit classifier and screening wash press; repair and coating of existing concrete channel surfaces; evaluation and repair of existing slide gates; installation of related system piping; required electrical work; and run conduit and wires to existing SCADA system, all in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a lump sum basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. Payment shall be pro-rated based on project completeness. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.8 - Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit System Equipment and Structures Item C.9 - Grit Removal - Screen and Grit Influent and Effluent Channels up to Parshall Flume 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall remove grit collected in the screen and grit influent and effluent channels up to Parshall Flume. Once the grit is removed the screen and grit influent and effluent channels need to be cleaned before channel lining is done. All of this work shall be performed in accordance with Division 1 through 16 of the Contract Specifications and Drawings 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made on a per cubic yard basis in accordance with a percentage of completion, in accordance with Contractor's approved schedule of bid item breakdown and upon Engineer verification. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.9 - Grit Removal- Mechanical Bar Screen and Grit Influent and Effluent Channels up to Parshall Flume Item C.l 0 - Mobilization and Demobilization I. Under this item, the Contractor shall perform preparatory and clean up work and operations in mobilizing and demobilizing for beginning and closing of work on the project, including, but not limited to, those operations necessary 03 720-022-0 I October, 2007 01200-16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I I II Ii II II Ii II I Ii II Ii II Ii II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidentals to the project site locations and for the establishment of temporary offices, sanitary and other facilities. This item shall also include demobilization work for closing of work on the project including leaving the site in its original or better condition. The bid price shall not exceed three (3.0) percent of the total East APCF bid. 2. Payment: Payment for this item shall be made in accordance to the following Percent of Original Allowable Percent of the Contract Amount Earned Mobilization Lump Sum 5 30 10 50 25 80 50 100 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.l 0 - Mobilization & Demobilization. Item C.ll - 5% Contingency of Total of Item C.l through C.9 1. Payment under this item shall made for unforeseen items of work not included in the other bid items but necessary for accomplishing the work and shall apply only to extra work or additional items over and above those specified or shown on plans. The cost of this additional work shall be aueed upon in writine: and APPROVED bv the OWNER or his authorized representative prior to startine: work under this item. 2. The lump sum bid for contingency shall not exceed five percent (5%) of the total bid for Items C.l through C.9. The Additive Alternatives shall not be included in the contingency value. In case of mathematical error on the bidder's part, calculating the contingency. The item will be adjusted up or down to equate to five percent (5%) of the total of Bid Items Nos C.l through C.9. Item C.12 - PLC Allowance 1. Description: Under this bid item the Contractor shall coordinate the integration of the new PLC at the previously negotiated and stipulated pnce. 2. Payment: Payment for PLC integration services will be paid upon receipt of invoices ( copies) clearly identifying the type, nature, time, and place of service. Payment shall be made for submitted invoice amounts. Payment 01200-17 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT to the Contractor for coordination, obtaining, and submitting docuemnts esults shall be included in other Bid Items associated with the work. The payments for this Bid Item shall be deducted from an initial allowance of $25,000 as shown in the Bid Form. 3. Payment shall be made under Item C.12 - PLC Allowance 2.06 ADDITIVE AL TERNA TES The following work will be done based on the sole decision of the OWNER, as follow: Item III -1: Slide Gates Repair 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to repair the existing slide gates - upstream of mechanical screens and in the grit unit bypass channel. The sizes and location of these gates are as shown in Contract Drawings. Item III-2: Slide Gate Replacement (Only if III-l does not fix the gates and make them operable) 1. Description: Under this item the Contractor shall perform all work necessary to remove the existing mechanical screens slide gates (upstream and downstream) and bypass channel slide gate, repair the channel and install new slide gates of equal size per Contract Documents and Drawings. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01200-18 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT I II I) Ii Ii I: I II Ii f Ii I II II II I II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01220 PROGRESS MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PRE CONSTRUCTION MEETING The Engineer shall schedule a meeting after NOTICE OF AWARD; this meeting shall be attended by the Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and Major Subcontractors. The agenda shall be: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates (if not previously provided) 2. The introduction of personnel representing the parties in this Contract. Establishing lines of communication, including, contact methods, phone numbers, E-mail addresses and emergency contact information for all parties. 3. A review of Contract administration procedures including but not limited to processing field decisions, submittals, substitutions, schedule of values, payment applications, cut-off dates, proposal requests, request for information, change order procedures, contractor's work plan, project CPM schedule, as built record maintenance and contract closeout procedures. 4. Owner direct purchase (ODP) requirements and procedures. 5. Review of additive alternate bid items. 6. Review of sole-source vortex grit removal equipment purchase order. 7. Submission of list of Subcontractors and major suppliers. 8. General issues including but limited to; site offices location, temporary utilities lay down / storage areas, sanitary facilities, , review of working hours, project signage, site access, housekeeping I general cleanup, security etc. 9. Establish Meeting Schedule 1.02 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING. 1. The Owner's site representative will schedule a meeting with the Contractor, at the project sites prior to Contractor's occupancy. This meeting is to be held 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01220-1 PROJECfMEETINGS 1.04 A. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 to confirm the designated locations for site offices, temporary utilities hookup sanitary facilities, storage and contractor's lay down areas. 1.03 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Progress Meetings will be required to review project progress, to ensure correct interpretation of these documents, and to maintain general coordination between the Owner's, Engineer's and Contractor's project personnel. The agenda will serve to indicate which project members should be present at each meeting. B. The Engineer shall: 1. Schedule and administer regular Progress Meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals, preferred weekly meetings by Contractor's site superintendent and City's Resident Project Representative. 2. Make physical arrangements, prepare agenda, and distribute notice of each meeting to participants four working days in advance of meeting date. 3. Attendees for the Progress Meetings shall include the Contractor, job superintendent, subconsultants, subcontractors, and suppliers as appropriate to agenda. 4. Agenda shall include, but not be limited to, the following items: a.. Approval of minutes of previous meetings. b, Review of Work progress. c. Field observations, problems, and decisions. d. Maintenance of Progress Schedule. e. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals f. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules g. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. h. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 1. Planned progress during succeeding work periods. J. Coordination of projected progress. k. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 1. Other business relating to the Work. PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCES When required in individual specification Section or requested in field, Engineer shall convene pre-installation conferences at Work sites prior to commencing the Work of the Section or item 01220-2 PROJECfMEETINGS I Ii Ii I II II I Ii I II Ii II II II II II II II II I I, I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 PART 3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. Require attendance of entities directly affecting, or affected by, Work. C. Engineer shall notify participants four working days in advance of meeting date. D. Engineer shall prepare agenda, preside at conference, record minutes, and distribute copies within one week after conference to participants. E. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures, and coordination with related Work and manufacturer's representative services. PRODUCTS (NOT USED) EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 01220-3 PROJECI'MEETINGS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01310 PROGRESS SCHEDULE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. All work of this contract shall be scheduled and monitored by Contractor using Critical Path Method (CPM) techniques. Contractor shall prepare all schedules and all monthly updates described in this section. Revisions of the schedule to reflect changes in Contractor's plan of performance or changes in the work will be prepared by Contractor and submitted to the Engineer for acceptance. Engineer's acceptance of the scheduling documents is done for the purpose of determining that all CPM Scheduling documents prepared by Contractor are in conformance with the Contract Documents and specifications described herein. Such acceptance will not impose on Engineer or Owner the responsibility for the schedule, or for the sequencing, scheduling or progress of the work, nor will such acceptance interfere with or relieve Contractor of full responsibility for the schedule and the means, methods, procedures and sequence of construction. B. Contractor shall utilize the latest version of Primavera Scheduling software, or an approved equal, for all CPM Scheduling applications. C. Contractor shall prepare and maintain a detailed progress schedule throughout the construction of the project. The schedule shall be Contractor's working schedule and used to plan, organize and execute the work, record and report actual performance and progress, and show how Contractor plans to complete the work. The schedule will be in the form of an activity oriented network diagram (Critical Path Method). The principles and defmition of the terms used herein shall be as set forth in the Associated General Contractors of American (AGC) publication, "Construction Planning and Scheduling", Copyright 1994. In the event of discrepancies elsewhere in the Contract Documents, this section shall govern the development and utilization of the progress schedule. D. When the CPM Schedule is approved by Contractor and accepted by Engineer, it shall become part of the Contract Documents, and will be used by Contractor and Engineer to monitor the progress of the project. The CPM Schedule may be revised to show changes in the Contractor's method or manner of performance; delays, or authorized changed in the work. All changes to the schedule will be made in accordance with section 1.14 of this section. E. This Contractor acknowledges that float belongs to the project and can be shared by Owner and Contractor. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01310-1 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 01340 - Project Submittals, one (1) electronic copy and five (5) hard copies of the Progress Schedule. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall employ or retain to services of a Project Scheduler for the CPM scheduling of this project. The Project Scheduler will have a minimum of five (5) years verifiable experience as the person primarily responsible for preparing and maintaining detailed CPM project schedules on projects similar size and nature as this project. The Contractor shall submit the name; company employment history, project scheduling experience with corresponding contract values, and verifiable references with phone numbers, and contact for the Project Scheduler. The Engineer shall have the right to approve or disapprove employment of the Project Scheduler. The Engineer will notify the Contractor within seven (7) calendar days from receipt of the Project Scheduler's statement of Qualifications, of his decision. In case of rejection, the Contractor shall resubmit another Project Scheduler's Statement of Qualifications for consideration. Approval, disapproval, of the project scheduler does not release the Contractor from his Contractual obligations. C. The Project Scheduler shall attend all meetings pertaining to scheduling, progress of the work, and be ready to discuss alleged delays and time impacts. 1.10 PRELIMINARY 120-DA Y CPM SCHEDULE A. The Contractor shall develop a 120-Day CPM Schedule within ten (15) days after the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. This schedule shall be a computerized 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01310-2 PROGRESS SCHEDULE I' I II II II II I II I Ii Ii II I I Ii II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CPM Schedule showing only the early start, early finish of each work activity. The 120-Day Schedule shall contain work activities over the first 120 days, and the estimated durations for each work activity shall be ten (10) workdays or less. The balance of the job shall be shown in summary log. The 120-Day Schedule shall include, but not be limited to, mobilization, site work, asbestos removal, demolition, key mechanical, electrical, and plumbing work, particularly the work requiring coordination with the OWNER and other Contractors. In addition, any other work that will occur during the fIrst 120 days. The Schedule shall also show detailed procurement activities (showing submittal durations, approval durations, fabrication and delivery durations). This 120-Day Schedule shall become part of the Detailed CPM Schedule. 1.11 DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The Detailed Network Diagram shall provide sufficient detail and clarity of form and technique so that the Contractor can plan, schedule and control his work properly and Engineer can readily monitor and follow the progress for all portions of work. The Detailed Network Diagram shall comply with the Contract Times of the Agreement and various limits imposed by the Contract Documents, including required sequencing of portions of the work described in the Summary of Work section. The degree of detail shall be to the satisfaction of Engineer, but the following factors shall have a bearing on the required depth of activity detail: 1. The structural breakdown of the proj ect. 2. Project Phasing and/or Milestones. 3. The type of work to be performed and the labor trades involved. 4. All purchase, manufacture and delivery activities for all major materials and equipment. 5. Maintenance of Facilities in Operation. 6. Submittal and approval of shop drawings and material samples. 7. Plans for all subcontract work. 8. Crew flows and sizes. 9. Assignment of responsibility for performing all activities. 10. Access and availability to work areas. 11. Identification of interfaces and dependencies with preceding, concurrent and follow-on subcontractors and contractors. 12. Testing and start up of systems. 13. Planning for phased takeover by Owner. B. Activities shown shall be in working days and shall have a maximum duration of ten (10) days, except in the case of non-construction activities such as procurement of materials and delivery of equipment. All durations shall be the result of definitive manpower and resource planning by the Contractor. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01310-3 PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.12 1.13 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C. The Detailed Network Diagram shall be prepared using a computer plotter. COMPUTERIZATION OF THE DETAILED CPM SCHEDULE A. The mathematical analysis of the detailed network Diagram shall be made by computer, and a tabulation for each activity shall include the following: 1. Unique event numbers. 2. Activity descriptions. 3. Durations in work days for each activity. 4. Earliest start date (by calendar date). 5. Earliest finish date (by calendar date). 6. Latest start day (by calendar date). 7. Latest finish day (by calendar date). 8. Slack or total float in work days. 9. Percentage of activity completed. B. The following computer outputs shall be prepared as part of the initial schedule submission and each update thereafter: 1. Activity file sort. 2. Eight (8) week "Look Ahead" detailed bar chart. 3. Summary bar chart. 4. Additional computer sorts as required by the Owner. 5. Electronic copy of all computer files. 6. Items 1 through 4 above, submit four (4) copies of each. COMPLETION REQUIREMENT A. The 120-Day Schedule shall be completed within fifteen (15) calendar days after the date contained in the Notice to Proceed. B. The Detailed CPM Schedule shall be prepared within thirty (30) calendar days after the date contained in the Notice to Proceed. C. In the event the Contractor fails to provide the required CPM scheduling documents to Engineer within the time prescribed and/or revisions thereof within the required time, Contractor shall be in default of the Contract requirements and Engineer may withhold approval of progress payments until such time as the Contractor submits the required information. D. Notwithstanding the implementation of the Progress Schedule, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time of completion required by the Contract. 01310-4 PROGRESS SCHEDULE I, I' II I Ii I Ii II 11 I I: I: II I II Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.14 UPDATINGS A. The 120-Day CPM Schedule shall be updated monthly until Engineer accepts the Detailed CPM Schedule. B. The first update of the Detailed CPM Schedule shall take place sixty (60) calendar days after the Notice to Proceed with subsequent updates performed monthly at the jobsite for the duration of the contract. C. The Contractor shall update the Detailed CPM Schedule on a monthly basis, using a cutoff/data date agreeable to both the Contractor and Engineer. This cutoffldata date shall be consistent from month to month. The update information shall include but not be limited to: 1. Actual start dates. 2. Actual completion dates. 3. Activity percent completion. 4. Remaining duration of activities in progress. D. The Contractor shall update all the scheduling documents and submit same to Engineer within five (5) workdays of the cutoff/data date. E. As part of the normal CPM update, the Contractor shall prepare a written narrative report highlighting the progress during the past update period. The written narrative report shall include but not be limited to the following information: 1. Summary of work accomplished during the past update period. 2. Milestone Comparison Chart. 3. Analysis of Critical Path(s). 4. Analysis of Secondary Critical Path(s). Secondary Critical Path is defined as float within ten (10) W.D. of Critical Path. 5. Analysis oftime lost/gained during the update period. 6. Identification of problem areas. 7. Identification of change orders and/or any delay that IS currently impacting!delaying the project schedule. 8. Solutions to current problems. F. The Contractor is required to attend and participate in a CPM update review meeting with Engineer. Attendance is mandatory. This meeting will take place seven (7) work days after the cutoff/data date. The purpose of this meeting is to review past progress, current status, problem areas and future progress. The Contractor's narrative report will be reviewed at this meeting. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01310-5 PROGRESS SCHEDULE G. All schedule update information outlined above will be reviewed and accepted by Engineer. 1.15 RECOVERY SCHEDULE A. If Contractor fails to achieve the planned progress, as indicated in the approved/updated detailed CPM Schedule and Contractor's lack of progress delays the Critical path and/or an intermediate milestone by more than ten (10) work days (monthly or cumulatively); Contractor shall submit to Engineer for review and acceptance a proposed Recovery Schedule indicating how the Contractor will recover the time lost. B. If Contractor fails to submit a Recovery Schedule and/or fails to cooperate with Engineer in the Recovery Schedule process, Owner can immediately order the Contractor to accelerate completion of the late activities which have been delayed by whatever means necessary without any additional costs to the Owner. Owner can withhold future progress payments until the Contractor's progress is in compliance with the contract schedule or until the Owner has approved by Change Order, propose adjustments to the contract milestones, extension of contract time or modification of the Contract Schedule. 1.16 CHANGE ORDERS, DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME A. When proposed Change Orders, approved Change Orders, or any delays are experienced and the Contractor believes the Change OrderIDelay is causing delay to an intermediate contract milestone or to the project completion, the Contractor shall submit to Engineer a Time Impact Analysis, explaining the influence of each Change OrderIDelay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The Contractor shall prepare a "Fragnet" (network analysis) of each Change OrderIDelay on the current updated Contract CPM Schedule. The analysis will demonstrate the time impact based on the date the change is given to the Contractor, the status of construction at that point in time, and the event time computation of all effected activities. The event times used in the analysis shall be those included in the latest update copy of the detailed CPM Schedule, closest to the time of delay or as accepted by the Engineer. B. For the Contractor to be entitled to an extension of Contract time to an intermediate contract milestone and/or to the project completion, the Time Impact Analysis must show that the Change OrderIDelay impacts the intermediate contractual milestone date and/or the updated CPM Schedule's Critical Path, thereby directly impacting the project completion date. Change OrderslDelays that do not impact intermediate contractual milestones and/or the critical path and 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01310-6 PROGRESS SCHEDULE I Ii II Ii I! II Ii Ii Ii I I I I Ii II I: II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 impact activities with float, will not be considered as a delay to the project and no extension of time will be granted. The Contractor must submit a written analysis within seven (7) calendar days after a delay occurs or authorized change in work is given to the Contractor. In the event the Contractor does not submit a written analysis for specific Change Order(s) or Delay(s) within the specified period oftime, then it is mutually agreed that the particular Change Order of Delay has no time impact on the Project CPM Schedule and no time extension is required. Acceptance or rejection of each Time Impact Analysis by the Engineer will be made within fourteen (14) calendar days after submission, unless subsequent meetings and negotiations are necessary. Upon the Engineer's acceptance, fragnets illustrating the influence of the Change Orders and Delays will be incorporated into the Detailed CPM Schedule by the Contractor during the first update after agreement is reached. END OF SECTION 01310-7 PROGRESS SCHEDULE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01340 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 OBJECTNES A. Documentation that describes the Work to be performed under the Contract shall be prepared and submitted by the Contractor as required in this Section. This documentation will be for the Engineer's review and use. The documentation furnished by the Contractor must enable the Engineer to verify the Contractor's performance and compliance with Contract requirements. Documentation shall cover all services and deliverables required and secured by the Contract. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. The Contractor shall prepare documentation and submittals required by other sections of the Contract. The format of documents and submittals required by other sections shall conform to the requirements of this Section 01340. 1. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements 2. Section 01700 - Project Close-Out 3. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents 4. Section 01730 - 0 & M Manuals 5. Section 01800 - Training 6. All Sections and Divisions that require submittal of documents described in this Section. 1.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. The Contractor shall prepare, assemble, and submit all documents necessary to complete the Work. The Contractor shall submit certification that the documents it has prepared conform to the Contract requirements and will result in a complete and operable project. The Engineer will review the Contractor's documents for conformance to the Contract requirements and may comment on the documents. B. The Contractor shall approve and certify all project documents. The Contractor's failure to certify the documents, or failure to provide documents that demonstrate conformance to the Contract requirements, are grounds for default. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all costs for proceeding with any part of the Work that fails to meet the Contract requirements. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01340-1 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 1.04 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C. Submittal of documents for the Engineer's review will be for the purpose of keeping the Owner informed of the Contractor's progress. It shall in no way relieve the Contractor offull responsibility for providing a complete, safe, reliable, operating and coordinated Work (system/equipment/facilities) which is in compliance with these Contract documents. I I II DOCUMENT A nON SUBMITTALS Ii A. General: II II I 1. The Contractor shall submit all documentation necessary to ascertain compliance with technical/contractual provisions. 2. Shop drawings: Drawings, schedules, diagrams, and other data prepared specifically for this Contract, by the Contractor or through the Contractor by way of subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, distributor, or other lower tier contractor, to illustrate a portion of the Work. II 3. Product data: Preprinted materials such as illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, manufacturer's descriptive literature, catalog data, and other data to illustrate a portion of the Work, but not prepared exclusively for this Contract. Ii II II 4. Samples: Physical examples of products, materials, equipment, assemblies, or workmanship that are physically identical to portions of the Work, illustrating portions of work, or establishing standards for evaluating appearance of finished work or both. I II 5. Administrative submittals: Data presented for reviews and approval to ensure that administrative requirements of the project are adequately met but not to ensure directly that work is in accordance with the design concept and in compliance with Contract Documents. Ii B. Coordination: Drawings and schedules shall be checked and coordinated with the Work of all trades involved, before they are submitted and shall bear the Contractor's stamp of approval as evidence of such checking and coordination. Drawings or schedules submitted without this stamp of approval. shall be returned to the Contractor for resubmission. Ii II I! I II C. Start ofW ork: Within ten (10) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Contract Data Requirements List which defmes all data to be submitted under this Contract. Included in this list shall be the names of all proposed manufacturers furnishing specified items to the extent known. Review of this list by the Engineer shall in no way relieve the Contractor from providing 01340-2 PROJECT SUBJ.\.1lTT ALS AND ACCEPTANCE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I materials, equipment, systems, and structures fully In accordance with the Specifications. 1.05 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS AND PROCEDURES A. Direct submittals to Engineer's Field Representative at the following address unless otherwise specified: Jones Edmunds and Associates 324 S. Hyde Park Ave, Suite 250 Tampa, FL 33606 B. Transmit each required submittal using Engineer accepted form. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Resubmittals shall have original number with an alphabetic suffix. C. Drawing Formats and Requirements 1. Drawings - All Drawings and Shop Drawings shall be prepared on 24 x 36 inch (60.96 x 91.44 cm) paper and shall have a blank area of 3 x 4 inches (7.62 x 10.16 cm), located in the lower right hand comer, above the title block. Each drawing shall indicate the following information in the title block: a. Title and Drawing Number. b. Date of Drawing or Revision. c. Name of Building or Facility. d. Name of Contractor or subcontractor. e. Drawing contents and locations. f. Spectext Section and Subsection Numbers. 2. Drawing Media -All drawings shall be generated per direction of the Engineer. 3. Required Copies - All drawings submitted shall have a minimum of five (5) copIes. D. Product Data: 1. Requirements - Product data shall include all catalog cuts, performance surveys, test reports, equipment lists, material list, diagrams, pictures, and descriptive material. All product data shall be submitted on either 8.5 x 11 inches (21.59 x 27.94 cm) or folded 11 x 17 inches (27.94 x 43.18 cm) size paper of20 lb. (9.072 kg) weight. The submittal information shall show the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01340-3 PROJECT SUBMITIALS AND ACCEPTANCE 03720-022-01 October, 2007 II standard and optional product features, as well as all performance data and II specifications. 2. Required Copies - A minimum of five (5) copies of each product information data sheet shall be submitted to Engineer for review. Ii E. Samples: The Contractor shall furnish, for review by the Engineer, samples required by the Contract Documents. Samples shall be delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed. Ii II 1. All samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate clearly the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. The samples shall show the full range of color, texture and pattern. II Ii Ii I: 2. The Contractor shall submit a mtnlmum of two (2) samples of item submitted. All samples shall be marked with required submittal information, as specified above. F. Color, Texture, and Pattern Charts: 1. The Contractor shall submit color, texture, or pattern charts of all required finishes. II 2. A minimum of three (3) charts of each item shall be submitted. II G. Submittal Information Requirements: II I 1. When used in the Contract Documents, the "Submittal Information" shall be considered to mean the following information, as a minimum: a. b. Contract Name Contract Number Location within Facility Date Submitted Ii II c. d. 2. Drawings - The Contractor shall mark submittal information on all drawings in the left half of the 4 x 3 inch (10.16 x 7.62 cm) block as described above. Ii 3. Product Data and Manufacturer's Literature The Contractor shall mark all product data and manufacturer's literature with submittal information and note which item is being furnished. The Contractor shall mark the option and supplies to be furnished with item. At least one original manufacturer product data sheet must be submitted, the balance can be Ii II II Q1340-4 PROJECT SUBl'vIITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I copied. Do not submit manufacturer's general catalog: submit only items being installed or delivered. When manuals are being submitted, the Contractor shall mark submittal information on both the cover and title page. If manuals being submitted contain more thanjust one item, each item must be marked and only Contract name and number is to be marked on cover and title page. H. Training, Operational, and Maintenance Manual: The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review and approval manufacturer's installation, operational, lubrication, maintenance, spare parts list, and training manuals for all equipment installed or delivered under this Contract. All manuals shall have submittal information marked on front cover, title page, and three places inside manual. If the manual being submitted is for different components, mark front cover and title page only. Each component section must be marked with spectext section and subsection numbers. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to requirements defined in Sections 01730 and 01800. 1.06 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit for review all specified shop drawings, working drawings, product data sheets, catalog cuts, manufacturing manuals, and all other items which would affect the performance or operation of the equipment or system. Final (As-Built) documentation shall be provided for all drawings and documents required by the Contract Documents. B. Process Instrumentation and Control Submittals: 1. Product Data - The Contractor shall submit the following instrumentation and control product data: a Material Data Sheets b. Instrument Data c. Component Fabrication Drawings d. Certification Data e. Test Procedures f. Test Reports g. Operation and Maintenance Manuals h. Recommended Spare Parts Lists 2. Equipment, materials and installation specifications 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01340-5 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I C. Architectural and Structural Submittals: II II Ii Ii This section specifies general procedural requirements for contractual submittals for the following architectural and structural schedules, product data, samples, and manufacturer's certificates. 1. Product Data - The Contractor shall provide product data for all architectural and structural items, options and other data; provide supplemental manufacturer's standard data for information unique to the Work and installation. The submittals shall reflect all items delivered or installed under this Contract. II 2. Samples - The Contractor shall provide all samples required under this specification including color charts and product samples. Ii I: Ii I 3. Material, equipment, and installation and demolition specifications Mechanical and Electrical System Submittals: This section specifies general procedural requirements for mechanical schedules, performance data, control diagrams, and other submittal data. 1. The Contractor shall submit the following: a. Performance Data. II b. Power and Riser Diagrams - Single line riser, power diagrams, and all conduit runs shall be provided for all equipment and facilities. Ii c. Wiring Diagrams - Elementary controls diagrams and separate wiring diagrams for mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem. Drawing for starting and shutdown of equipment including controls shall be provided, including a comprehensive description of operation. Finished Data - Complete surface preparation and fInished data for all mechanical and electrical unit/subsystems shall be provided, including a complete list of cleaning instructions. I d. II e. Factory Testing - Detailed description of factory testing procedures, reporting procedures and criteria for test passing or failing shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units/subsystems. Testing shall comply with General Requirements and Technical Requirements Sections. II II II Ii II 01340-6 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I f. Site (Field) Testing and Acceptance - Detailed description of site testing and acceptance tests including descriptions of procedures, testing equipment, reporting procedures, and criteria for test passing or failing shall be provided for all mechanical and electrical units/subsystems. Testing shall comply with General Requirements and Technical Requirements. g. Factory Test Report - After fabrication and testing, the results oftests shall be submitted. No shipment of any mechanical and electrical unit/subsystem shall be allowed without the written certification from the Contractor that the equipment conforms to the Contract requirements. h. Site Test and Acceptance Report - Site test and acceptance report shall be submitted to Engineer. 1. Operations and Maintenance Manuals - The Contractor shall furnish manuals for all mechanical and electrical equipment specified under this Contract. Each manual shall include as a minimum: description of equipment, record shop drawing, operation and maintenance instructions, part lists, equipment ratings, valve list, and lubrication instructions. Compliance with this section does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with the requirement of Section 01730- Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.07 SUBMITTALREVIEW A. Review of the Contractor's documents by the Engineer shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to meet all of the requirements of the Contract or of the responsibility for the correction of the documents furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall have no claim for additional cost or extension in time on account of delays due to revisions of the documents that may be necessary for ensuring compliance with the Contract. B. The Engineer will review a submittal once and one re-submittal (if required) once, after which the cost of Engineer's review will be borne by the Contractor. The cost of Engineering review shall be equal to the Engineer's full cost, not to exceed $100 per hour. C. No partial submittals will be reviewed. A submittal or re-submittal not complete will be returned to the Contractor for re-submittal. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01340-7 PROJECT SUBMITI ALS AND ACCEPTANCE I D. Documents submitted by the Contractor for approval by the Engineer will be returned bearing a project-specific stamp bearing the dated signature of the reviewer and one of four boxes checked: Ii II 1. ACCEPTED - This indicates that the submittal appears to be in compliance with the requirements of the performance specifications and that the Work may proceed. II 2. II AS CORRECTED - This indicates that the reviewer has added a minor correction to the submission and that the Work (modified per the correction comment) may proceed. The Contractor shall accept the responsibility of the modified document and resulting Work with no additional compensation. I) 3. REVISE AND RESUBMIT - This indicates that the submittal will require contractor modifications, based on the reviewer's comments that accompanied the return submittal. The Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this review status. I Ii 4. REJECTED - This indicates that the submittal is not in conformance with the requirements of the performance specifications and cannot be modified to gain compliance. A new submittal will be required in the instance of a "reject" status and the Contractor will be cautioned that work may not proceed under this condition. II I: PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) Ii PART 3 EXECUTION Ii 3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Prior to submittal for the Engineer's review, the Contractor shall review the documentation for conformance to the Contract requirements. Submittals shall be complete and comprise a logical division of the Contract Work. II Ii B. All documentation submitted by the Contractor to the Engineer shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal, and shall be submitted in a sequence that allows the Engineer to have all of the information necessary for checking and accepting a particular document at the time of submittal. II II C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all drawings, data, and samples prepared before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Any deviations from the drawings or substitutions of materials shall be identified as such. Each and every copy of the Drawings and data shall bear the Contractor's stamp showing that they have been checked. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the II II 01340-8 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Contractor's stamp will be returned to the Contractor for conformance with this requirement. D. Each submittal shall bear a stamp indicating that the Contractor has satisfied the Contractor's obligations and the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal as illustrated below. (OWNER'S NAME) (pROJECT NAME) (pROJECT NUMBER) (SHOP DRAWING NO : ) (SPECIFICATION SECTION: DRAWING NO: ) WITH RESPECT TO THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE, I HAVE DETERMINED AND V ARIFIED ALL QUANTITIES, DIMENSIONS, SPECIFIED PERFORMANCE CRITERIA, INTALLATIONREQUIREMENTS, MATERIALS, CATALOG NUMBERS, AND SIMILAR DATA WITH RESPECT THERETO AND REVIEWED OR COORDINATED THIS SHOP DRAWING OR SAMPLE WITH OTHER SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES AND WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE WORK AND THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. NO VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS VARIATION FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AS SHOWN (CONTRACTOR'S NAMEO (CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS) BY: DATE: AUTORIZED SIGNATURE TITLE: 3.02 DOCUMENTATION CONTROL AND SUBMITTAL SEQUENCING A. A documentation control procedure shall be established by the Contractor for all project documentation. Within ten (10) calendar days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the Engineer a "Contract Documentation Requirements List and Submittal Log" which defines all documentation to be submitted under this Contract. The list shall be updated and resubmitted to the Engineer monthly, throughout the duration of the Contract. This list shall identify the Contractor's submittal number, proposed and actual submittal date, Contract Specification Section Number, Paragraph, Item of the Work, and type of document. B. The Contractor shall work with the Engineer to provide a regulated flow of submittals that allows the Engineer to review the submittals in the defined time frame without undue delays. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a schedule of the approximate 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 01340-9 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE quantities and delivery dates for all submittals due for the next 120 days with each monthly report. 3.03 FINAL AS-BUlL T DRA WINGS A. The Contractor shall submit the Final As-Built Drawing Package to the Engineer for review 120 days after the acceptance of the Work. The Final As-Built Drawing Package shall contain one (1) set of optical media written on CD and three (3) sets of xerographical black line prints on 20 lb (9.072 kg) bond paper of all drawings. Prints shall be black line on a white background. 3.04 REQUIREMENTS FOR SUBMITTAL A. Additional documents, drawings, interface data, and other pertinent project submittal data are listed in specific sections of this Contract. 3.05 RECORD PRINTS A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer three (3) sets of all record prints within 60 days after submitting "Certificate of Substantial Completion". The record print or project records shall include catalog cut, drawing, calculations, test reports, manufacturer's data, maintenance manuals, installation instructions, and operating manuals. All "record prints" shall be delivered to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01340-10 PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE II II II II 11 Ii II II I Ii II II II Ii Ii II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01370 SCHEDULE OF VALUES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Standard General Conditions of the Construction Contract are included in Section III. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer a proposed Schedule of Values allocated to the various portions of the Work, in accordance with Section 01000, Project Requirements, and Section 01200, Measurement and Payment. B. Upon request of the Engineer, support the values with data which will substantiate their correctness. C. The accepted Schedule of Values shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. D. Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values when Change Orders affect the listing or when actual performance of Work involves necessary changes of substance to values previously listed and approved. E. Schedule Of Values 1. Submit typed schedule on EJCDC 1910-8-E forms provided by Engineer. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered. 2. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement. 3. Format - Utilize schedule of prices in Bid Proposal. Show cost breakdown for each lump sum item. Lump sum breakdown shall, at a minimum, utilize the Table of Contents of this manual outline. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification section. Identify site mobilization and demobilization, bonds and insurance, record drawings, photographs, operations and maintenance manuals, etc. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01370-1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 4. For unit cost allowances, identify quantities taken from Contract Documents multiplied by the unit cost to achieve the total for the item. 5. Include within each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. 6. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application for Payment. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Allowances - Cost of product to Contractor or Subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts; and applicable taxes. B. Costs Not Included in the Allowance, But Included in the Contract Price - Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of Products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing. C. Contractor Responsibilities 1. Execute purchase agreement with designated supplier. 2. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 3. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit claims for transportation damage. D. Differences between allowance amounts and actual costs will be adjusted by Change Order prior to final payment. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 01370-2 I I II II I: Ii II II I II II II Ii II IJ Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01380 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 GENERAL Photographically document all phases of the project including preconstruction, construction progress, and post construction. 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. The Contractor shall have digital pictures, photographs and DVD' s made of the Work from views and at such times as directed by the Engineer. These photographs shall represent a visual history of the Project, from Contract Award through Contract Completion. Digital or 35mm camera may be used, but all film development and photographic production shall be on photographic paper done by a commercial photographic laboratory B. Electronic digital photography shall also be used to record and facilitate resolution of on-site issues through the transmission of electronic photographs bye-mail from the site to the Engineer's and Owner's offices. Format shall be minimum resolution 1152 x 864 pixels and 24-bit, millions of color 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements B. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents 1.03 PHOTOGRAPHY REQUIRED A. Photographs and digital pictures shall be in color. Provide one (1) copy of each digital picture on each of three (3) CD's and provide one (1) print of each photograph in two (2) separate albums. B. Provide photographs taken at each of the major items during construction. Particular emphasis shall be directed to structures and equipment both inside and outside the work area C. Provide up to twelve (12) digital photographs, per site, of views randomly selected by Owner's representative, taken prior to any construction and prior to each scheduled Application for Payment. D. Deliver electronic images, prints, and negatives to the Engineer. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Each print shall be single weight paper with glossy finish and the overall dimension shall be 7-1/2 x 10 inches (19.05 x 25.4 cm). The print shall be clear, sharp and free of distortion after the enlargement from the negative. B. Provide loose-leaf albums for each set of photographs to hold prints with a maximum of 50 leaves per binder. C. Each print shall be protected by flexible, transparent acetate or plastic sheet protector leaves with metal reinforced holes. Two extra leaves shall be provided in each binder. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 VIEWS REQUIRED A. Photograph shall be from locations to illustrate condition of construction and state of progress adequately. B. The Contractor shall provide before and after photographs of each portion of the site. The below ground facilities shall include all equipment, walls, floor, piping, supports and entrance. At major locations, photographs shall include before, during, and after prints and all prints shall be placed in binders in ascending date order to show the Work as it progresses. 3.02 DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION A. Each photograph shall have a permanent title block on the back and shall contain the typed information and arrangement as follows: CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA NORTHEAST/MARSHALL STREET/EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITY BID No. XXXX-XXX Jones Edmunds No. 03720-022-01 CONTRACTOR: (Name of Contractor) DATE: (When photo was taken) PHOTO NO.: (Consecutive Numbers) PHOTO BY: (Firm Name of Photographer) LOCATION: (Description of Location and View) 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 CONSlRUCTlON PHOTOGRAPHS 01380-2 I I I I I: I, I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I I. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written description of each photograph. This description shall be included in the binders and a copy shall be submitted with the CD's. The field Engineer shall approve the description. 3.03 DIGITAL PHOTO DOCUMENTATION A. Catalog and manage Electronic images of photographs in a secure digital photo management system capable of being linked to the project schedule and document management database. Add captions, descriptions, and key words. Transfer a copy of all digital photos with their related notes, keywords, captions and activity ID's to the Engineer on a weekly basis. B. All prints shall be clear, sharp and free of distortion after enlargement from the negative. Each photograph shall have a permanent title block in the lower right-hand comer which shall be 2 1/2 inches high by 6 inches wide and shall contain the lettered and arrangement as described in paragraph 3.02(A) above. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01380-3 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01400 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. General 1. The purpose of this Section is to define minimum requirements for the Quality Assurance (QA) program to be provided by the Contractor. The deliverable documents are defined, along with the method of execution of the QA program. 2. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit the Contractor's Quality Control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Definitions 1. Quality Assurance services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with Contract requirements. 2. Quality Control services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. C. Payment Separate payment will not be made for providing and maintaining an effective Quality Assurance and Quality Control program, and all costs associated therewith shall be included in the applicable unit prices, lump-sum prices, or allowances contained in the Contract Price Breakdown. 03 720-022-0 1 October, 2007 01400-1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1\ I 1.02 RELATED WORK 1.03 1.04 1.05 1.06 1.07 1.08 1.09 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements Ii B. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Acceptance II II C. Respective Specification Sections SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) WORK SEQUENCE I II Ii 1\ ,Ii II I I II A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date for receiving bids, except where a specific date is established by code. B. For products or workmanship specified by association, trades, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable code. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials and equipment shall be installed in a neat and first-class workman- like manner. B. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal and replacement of any items which, in his opinion, do not present an orderly and reasonably neat or workman-like appearance, provided such an orderly installation can be made using customary trade methods. The removal and replacement shall be done when directed in writing by the Engineer at the Contractor's own expense and without additional expense to the Owner. I: WARRANTIES (NOT USED) II II I DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 01400-2 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.10 TOLERANCES A. Monitor tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Engineer before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place. 1.11 FIELD SAMPLES A. Furnish field samples at the site as required by individual Specifications Sections for review. B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area after field sample had been accepted by Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor is responsible for quality control and shall establish and maintain an effective quality control system in compliance with the Contract Documents. The quality control system shall consist of plans, procedures, and organization necessary to produce an end product which complies with the Contract requirements. The system shall cover all Work and shall be keyed to the proposed design and construction sequence. The project QC Officer will be held responsible for the quality of work on the job and is subject to removal by the Engineer for non-compliance with quality requirements specified in the Contract. The project QC Officer in this context shall mean the individual with the responsibility for the overall management of the project quality. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01400-3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3.02 03720-022-01 October, 2007 TESTS I I I II II A. Testing Services: 1. All tests to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall be performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to the Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall be staffed with experienced technicians, properly equipped, and fully qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specified standards. 2. Testing services provided by the Owner are for the sole benefit of the Owner; however, test results shall be available to the Contractor. Testing necessary to satisfy the Contractor's internal Quality Control Procedures shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. II Ii I 3. The Contractor shall interrupt its Work for Owner sampling and testing, when necessary. The Contractor shall have no Claim for increase in Contract Price or Contract Time due to such interruption. The Contractor shall cooperate in these testing activities, as needed. II I: Ii II I 4. Testing, including sampling, will be performed by the testing firm's laboratory personnel, in the general manner indicated in the Specifications. B. Transmittal of Test Reports: Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by the Contractor for the Engineer's review shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings. C. Manufacturer's Field Services: 1. Manufacturer's field services will be specified in the respective equipment Sections and in Table 01600-1 in Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment. Ii 2. II An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer of each item of equipment for which field services are indicated shall visit the Site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case the manufacturer's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall revisit the Site as often as necessary until any and all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of the Engineer. II II II II 01400-4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to the Owner, through the Engineer, a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactory. 3.03 COMPLETION INSPECTION A. Final Completion Punch List: Near the completion of all Work the QC Officer shall conduct an inspection of the Work and develop a "punch list" of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Such a list of deficiencies shall be included in the QC documentation and shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. The QC Officer or staff shall make a second inspection to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished the Contractor shall notify the Engineer that the Facility is ready for the Engineer's final inspection. B. Final Inspection and Acceptance: The Contractor's Quality Control Officer and the Engineer will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Engineer personnel may also be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Engineer when all punch list deficiencies have been corrected. Notice will be given to the Engineer at least 14 days prior to the final inspection and must include the Contractor's assurance that all punch list items will be complete and acceptable by the date scheduled for the final inspection. Failure of the Contractor to have all Contract Work acceptably complete for this inspection will be cause for noncertification of final payment by the Engineer. 3.04 NOTIFICATION OF NONCOMPLIANCE A. The Engineer will notify the Contractor of any detected noncompliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action after receipt of such notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders shall be made the subject of claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor. 3.05 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, the Contractor shall repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01400-5 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. The Contractor shall protect all construction exposed by or for Quality Control service activities. II II II II II I I Ii C. The repair and protection are the Contractor's responsibilities, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for Quality Control services. END OF SECTION Ii 01400-6 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Ii II II Ii II Ii I: Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 RESPONSIBILITY This section specifies the minimum requirements for temporary facilities, utilities, and controls required to provide an adequate and safe work site at every stage during construction of the project. The Contractor is solely responsible for the requirements set forth in this section. 1.11 ONSITE TEMPORARY Except as otherwise indicated, the Contractor may, at his option, furnish stand-alone utility plants to provide needed services, in lieu of connected services from available public utilities, provided such stand-alone plant facilities comply with all governing regulations. The Contractor will, prior to availability of temporary utility services, provide trucked-inltrucked-out containerized or unitized services for start up of construction operations at the site. 1.12 COSTS Except as otherwise indicated, the costs of providing and using temporary utility services are included in the contract sum. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-1 PART 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 2.01 GENERAL The types of utility services required for general temporary use at the project site include the following (other specific services may be required for specific construction methods of operations): A. Electrical Power Service B. Water Service (potable for certain uses) C. Sanitary D. Storm Sewer or Open Drainage/Run-off Control E. Telephone Service 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Power: 1. Electric power will be available at or near site. Determine type and amount available and make arrangements for obtaining temporary electric power service, metering equipment, and pay all costs for electric power used during contract period, except for portions of the Work designated in writing by ENGINEER as substantially complete. 2. Cost of electric power will be born by CONTRACTOR. B. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting to meet applicable safety requirements to allow erection, application, or installation of materials and equipment, and observation or inspection of the Work. 2.03 TEMPORARY WATER A. Potable Water: 1. Is available on site. Secure written permission for connection and use from water department and meet requirements for use. Notify fire department before obtaining water from fire hydrants. 2. Include costs to connect water in Contract Price. B. OWNER will provide a place of temporary connection for drinking water at site. Provide temporary facilities and piping required to bring water to point of use, and remove when no longer needed. Install an acceptable metering device and pay for water used at OWNER's current rate. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01500-2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS I II - I Ii II II II Ii II Ii II II I II II I I II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Provide a means to prevent water used for testing from flowing back into source pipeline. 2.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain facilities for CONTRACTOR's employees, Subcontractors, and all other onsite employers' employees. Service, clean, and maintain facilities and enclosures. B. Use of OWNER's existing sanitary facilities by construction personnel will not be allowed. C. The Contractor shall provide separate sanitary facilities for the Engineer and Engineer's Field Representative's use. 2.05 F. TELEPHONE SERVICE: A. CONTRACTOR: Arrange and provide onsite telephone service for use during construction. Pay costs of installation and monthly bills. B. ENGINEER: Arrange and provide onsite telephone system for use during construction. Pay for all installation and basic monthly billing charges. CONTRACTOR shall pay ENGINEER's long distance charges. C. No incoming calls allowed to OWNER's plant telephone system. 2.06 FIRE PROTECTION: A. Furnish and maintain on site adequate fire fighting equipment capable of extinguishing incipient fires. Comply with applicable parts of National Fire Prevention Standard for Safeguard Building Construction Operations (NFP A No. 241). 2.07 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES The Contractor shall maintain the sanitary facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all times and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on the site of the work, on the lands of the Owner, or on adjacent property. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-3 2.08 TERMINATION AND REMOVAL The Contractor shall, at the time the need for a temporary utility service has ended, or has been replaced by use of permanent services, or not later than the time of fmal completion, promptly remove the installation, unless requested by the Engineer to retain it for a longer period. Any work which may have been delayed or affected by the installation and. use of the temporary utility, including repairs to construction and grades and restoration and cleaning of exposed surfaces shall be completed at this time. Replace any work damaged beyond acceptable restoration. PART 3 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 3.01 NOISE CONTROL The Contractor shall provide adequate protection against objectionable noise levels caused by the operation of construction equipment. 3.02 DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against raising objectionable dust clouds caused by moving construction equipment, high winds, or any other cause. 3.03 WATER CONTROL The Contractor shall provide for satisfactory disposal of surplus water and shall submit a plan to the Engineer for his review prior to initiation and implementation of the plan. Prior approval shall be obtained from the proper authorities for the use of public or private lands or facilities for such disposal. 3.04 POLLUTION CONTROL The Contractor shall provide for adequate protection against polluting any public or private lands, lakes, ponds, rivers, streams, creeks, and other such areas by the disposal of surplus material in the form of solids, liquids, gases, or from any other cause. 3.05 ADVERSEIMPACT The Contractor shall evaluate and assess the impact of any adverse effects on the natural environment which may result from construction operations and shall operate to minimize pollution of air, ground, or surface waters vegetation, and afford the neighboring community the maximum protection during and up to completion of the construction project. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01500-4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS II II Ii II II I I: II Ii Ii II Ii Ii Ii II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.06 STREAMS, LAKES, AND OTHER BODIES OF WATER The Contractor shall take sufficient precautions to prevent pollution of streams, lakes, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium chloride, or other harmful materials. He shall conduct and schedule his operations so as to avoid or otherwise prevent pollution of siltation of streams, lakes, and reservoirs and to avoid interference with movement of migratory fish. 3.07 CHEMICALS All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of other classification, must show approval of either EP A or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with instructions. 3.08 EROSION CONTROL The Contractor shall not expose, by construction operations, a larger area of erosive land at any one time than the minimum necessary for efficient construction operations, and the duration of exposure of the uncompleted construction to the elements shall be as short as practicable. Erosion control features shall be constructed concurrently with other work and at the earliest practicable time. PART 4 STORAGE FACILITIES 4.01 GENERAL All products, materials, and equipment shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. Products subject to damage by the elements shall be stored in the weathertight enclosures. Temperature and humidity shall be maintained within the ranges required by the manufacturer's instructions. Fabricated products shall be stored above the ground on blocking or skids. Products which are subject to deterioration shall be covered with impervious coatings with adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. Loose granular materials shall be stored in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. Any products which will come in contact with water shall be stored off the ground so as to prevent contamination. 4.02 INSPECTION Storage shall be arranged in such a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Periodic inspections shall be made of all stored products to assure that they are maintained under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500-5 4.03 TEMPORARY PROTECTION After installation, Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to installed products to protect from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. Coverings shall be removed when no longer needed. . PART 5 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY 5.01 ADJACENT TO WORK Preserve from damage all property along the line of the work, or which is in the vicinity of or in any wise affected by the work, the removal or destruction of which is not called for by the plans. Wherever such property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 5.02 REMEDY BY OWNER In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property, or make good such damage or injury, the Owner may, after forty-eight (48) hours notice to the Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary and the cost thereof will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to the Contractor under this contract. 5.03 PROTECTION FROM DAMAGE The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of property, in the areas in the vicinity of the project; and for the protection of his equipment, supplies, materials and work, against any damage resulting from the elements, such as flooding, by rainstorm, wind damage, or other precautions against any such damage occurrence, and shall be responsible for damage resulting from same. The Contractor shall provide adequate drainage facilities, tie-downs, or other protection, throughout the contract period, for the protection of his, the Owner's, and other properties from such damage. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01500-6 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS I I: II IJ II Ii I Ii Ii Ii Ii II I Ii II II II - I II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01590 FIELD OFFICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain a field office (s) for his use during the entire construction period. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove all field offices, sheds, and other storage facilities and restore the areas to pre construction or better condition. The Contractor's field office (s) shall be the size required for his use; plus an adequate open area to accommodate a Conference table, with a minimum of 6 chairs to comfortably seat a minimum of 6 people for Project Meetings. A separate trailer or separate room with lockable door shall be required for Engineer's office as specified in article 2.04. B. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain storage and work sheds at all active work sites as needed or required for the construction. . C. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all permits required to install and maintain the field offices. D. The Contractor's and Engineer's field office shall be located at only one of the City's three APCF's. Final location shall be based upon mutually agreed upon location with City and Contractor. E. Field Office should be brought to site and maintained based on Contractor's schedule of field work and equipment installation 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01590-1 FIELD OFFICES 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) PART 2 MISCELLANEOUS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION FIELD OFFICE The Contractor shall provide, at minimum, in the Engineer's field office: 2.02 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 A. Electric lights (50 foot candles at desk top height) and power supply outlets. B. Two (2) private telephone lines with a facsimile/answering machine. C. One (1) direct line for Computer with DSL access for internet connection D. Air Conditioning and Heating System, sufficient to maintain comfortable conditions. E. Acceptable toilet facilities, including sink and mirror (shared with Engineer's Personnel and Visitors.) F. Fire extinguisher (Halon type, minimum 4 lb. capacity). G. Water cooler, bottled water and paper cups, Coffee Maker, Portable Refrigerator, Microwave Oven for the duration of the Contract Period. (Shared with Engineer's Personnel and Visitors.) H. Office furnishings, as described below. 1. Table for viewing Project Drawings. J. Computer systems and software, as described below. K. Suitable file cabinet(s) and plan racks containing a copy of the complete Project Record documents 1. Standard Office Supplies. OFFICE FURNISHINGS: A. The furniture shall be delivered and placed as directed by the Engineer. B. Desks: Flat top, double pedestal, with one box and one file drawer in each pedestal, 60-inches by 30-inches. 01590-2 FIELD OFFICES I II II II II Ii Ii II Ii Ii II Ii II Ii Ii II II 11 II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Chairs: Desk-type chairs, adjustable heights, on rollers, with armrests. D. Conference Table and Chairs: One (1) table, Six (6) meeting-type chairs. E. Drawing Table: One (1) plywood or standard drawing tables, 3-feet by 6-feet, with all required appurtances. One (1) extended height stools suitable for use at the drawing tables. F. Printer: One (1) printer with capability to copy, scan, and print pages up to and including 11 inch by 17 inch networked to computer systems as described herein. All warranties, maintenance and servicing for the duration of the Work. Sufficient appropriate ink/toner cartridges and paper for the duration of the Work. G. Copier: One (1 ) photocopy machine capable of sorting and producing the following copies: 8 12 xli, 8 12 x14, and 11 x17. H. Fax machine: One (1) plain paper fax machines, with dedicated telephone line, including paper and maintenance for the duration of the Work. 2.03 COMPUTER SYSTEMS AND SOFTWARE: A. Complete HP or Dell Desktop Computers B. Intel Core 2 Duo Processor; 2.13GHz/1066 MHZ/4MB L2 Dual CoreNT processor speed; C. 1.0 GB, 667 MHz DDR2 SDRAM memory, (1 DIMM) upgradeable to 4 GB memory D. 250 GB, SATA 3.0 Gb/s and 8 MB Data Burst Cache hard drive capacity, E. 256MB Video Card, PCIe x 16 N Vidia Quatro, FX 3450, dual DVI F. Optical Drive capable of handling Window Vista Business System G. Windows Vista or Windows XP Professional Operating System, including a warranty to cover the duration of the Work. H. Dell or HP 19" LCD, wide screen flat panel monitors, including a warranty to cover the duration of the Work. 1. Provide Microsoft wireless mouse, including a warranty to cover the duration of the Work. J. Surge protectors, monitor wipes, and compressed gas duster. K. The Contractor shall supply the latest version of Windows software, as required, for the operation of each of the computer systems. The software shall include the latest versions of 1. Microsoft Office Professional (Word, Excel, Access, PowerPoint, Publisher, Outlook, etc.), M. Visio Professional, N. Adobe Acrobat Version 8.0, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01590-3 FIELD OFFICES O. Norton Virus Protection (with annual renewal of updates), P. Audio and DVD Player, Q. Scheduling Software compatible with Contractor's scheduling program. Q. Expedition or other Project Management Software compatible with Contractor's Management Plan and an Internet Browser with internet access. 2.04 ENGINEER'S OFFICE Engineer's office and utilities shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be no less than 7'-6" x 9'-0". The Engineer's office may be a separate room in conjunction with the Contractor's office. The Contractor shall provide the following for the Engineer's use: one (1) standard desk; one (1) office chair; one (1) telephone with connection; and one (1) computer system with dedicated internet access. The Engineer's Office furnishings and supplies shall conform to the descriptions in articles 2.02 and 2.03. If construction at the three plants proceeds simultaneously, one (1) Engineer's office shall be provided at one of the three sites. If construction is sequential, an Engineer's office shall be provided at each site. 2.05 CLEANLINESS OF FACILITIES The Contractor shall maintain the facilities in a satisfactory and sanitary condition at all times and shall enforce their use. He shall rigorously prohibit the committing of nuisances on the site of the work, on the lands of the Owner, or on adjacent property. PART 3 INSTALLATION The field office shall be installed on a dean, graded, well-drained area of suitable size. Installation of the field office shall meet all local building codes and ordinances. Where no such apply, the Contractor shall as a minimum install the structure on a level foundation and secure it against 100 mph winds. Office shall be provided with structurally sound and safe steps and landings for each door. Office shall be designated a "No Smoking Area." PART 4 REMOVAL AT COMPLETION OF CONTRACT On the completion of the contract, the Contractor shall remove the office, storage, sheds and all such temporary facilities from the site. Remove foundations and debris, grade site to required elevations, grass disturbed area, and dean and remove trash and debris. END OF SECTION 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 01590-4 FIELD OFFICES the I II Ii Ii I 11 II II Ii II Ii II II 11 II Ii II Ii I] I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01600 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. Materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be new and shall not have been in service at any other installation unless otherwise approved. It shall conform to applicable specifications approved in writing by the Engineer. B. Manufactured and fabricated products shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with the best engineering and shop practices. Like parts of duplicate units shall be manufactured to standard sizes and gauges to be interchangeable. C. Quantities of items that are identical shall be by the same manufacturer, regardless of the Design Package breakdown. D. Any product furnished by the Contractor shall be suitable for service conditions. E. Equipment sizes, capacities, and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. F. Materials and equipment shall not be used for any purpose other than that for which it is designed or specified. G. Where materials or equipment, if specifically shown or specified to be reused in the Work, special care shall be used in removal, handling, storage, and reinstallation, to assure proper function in the completed work. H. Material and equipment incorporated into the work: 1. Conforms to applicable specifications and standards. 2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified, or as specifically approved in writing by the Engineer. 3. Manufactured and fabricated products: a. Rotating machinery shall be designed and fabricated to provide satisfactory operation without excessive wear and without excessive maintenance during its operating life. Rotating parts shall be statically 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT and dynamically balanced and shall operate without exceSSIve vibration. 1. Salvage Materials - In the absence of special provisions to the contrary, salvaged materials, equipment, or supplies related to the demolition of existing Headworks Screens and Grit Units become the property of the Contractor and the Contractor shall properly dispose of these materials. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Conditions of the Contract B. Section 01000: Project Requirements C. Section 0171 0: Final Cleaning and Protection D. Section 01730: Operation and Maintenance Manuals E. Section 01740: Warranties and Bonds F. Section 01800: Training 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Only new materials and equipment shall be incorporated in the Work. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the inspection and acceptance of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the work that does not meet the Contract Specifications. B. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit consideration and acceptance before materi~ls are necessary for incorporating in the work. Any delay of acceptance resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claim against the Owner C. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the approved samples or other data. D. If requested, the Contractor shall be required to submit to the Engineer ample evidence that each and every part of the materials, machinery, and equipment to be furnished are of a reliable make and of a type that has been in successful operation within the continental United States. No equipment will be considered unless the manufacturer has designed and manufactured equipment of a comparable type and size for at least three (3) years. An installation of any experimental or untried type of material, or machinery will not be allowed by the Engineer and Owner. 01600-2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I I Ii II II II II II II Ii II Ii I I II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. The equipment specified herein shall be carefully designed and installed to ensure that all required functions shall be adequately performed within the specified degree of precision. Each unit shall operate with each of the other parts of the equipment to provide a completely integrated system that shall operate to the satisfaction of the Engineer and Owner. F. All equipment, machinery, parts, and assemblies thereof, entering into the work shall be tested as specified. Unless waived in writing by the Engineer, all field and operating tests shall be made in the presence of the Engineer or its authorized representative. When such a waiver is issued, sworn statements in duplicate of the tests made and the results thereof shall be furnished to the Engineer by the Contractor or manufacturer. G. The Contractor shall submit copies of welding procedures for all welding. Welders and welding operators shall be in accordance with the qualification requirements of the A WS Code. Welders and welding operators for stainless steel shall pass qualification tests using stainless steel filler metal and procedures developed for stainless steel. Procedures, welder, and operator qualifications shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory retained and paid by the Contractor. H. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of the work until the Contractor receives written acceptance of the proof of welding procedures from the Engineer for each type of weld. 1. The Contractor shall submit copies of mill certificate for each type of rolled steel and as required in the specifications. The Contractor shall not start fabrication of the work until the Contractor receives written acceptance of all mill certificates fromthe Engineer. 1.04 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION A. The equipment installation details shall suit the existing and furnished equipment and are subject to Engineer acceptance. B. Any changes or revisions made necessary by the type and dimensions of the equipment furnished shall be made at the expense of the Contractor and it shall furnish detailed drawings showing such changes or revision for the acceptance of the Engineer. C. The installation of all work shall comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. The Contractor shall obtain and distribute copies of such instructions to parties involved in the installation including two (2) copies to the Engineer for distribution. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-3 One complete set of instructions shall be maintained at the job site during installation and until completion. I Ii II II D. All products and equipment shall be handled, installed, connected, cleaned, conditioned, and adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and specified requirements. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions, such conflicts shall be called to the Engineer's attention for resolution and revised instructions. II I E. Perform work according to manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents. 1.05 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT Ii 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. The cost of the Work shall include the cost of competent manufacturers' representatives of all equipment to supervise the installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment and to instruct the Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. I I I I II II B. A certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the unit has been satisfactorily tested, is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication, and care of the unit shall be submitted before Substantial Completion. C. The Contractor shall furnish the service of competent manufacturers' representatives for Contractor or Owner furnished equipment, when evident malfunction or over- heating makes such services necessary or as determined by the Engineer. All such equipment shall be installed by skilled mechanics and in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment with particular reference to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric drives. These units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified millwrights after their sole or base plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened against the shims. After the manufacturer has approved the foundation alignments, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked after securing to the foundations, and after confIrmation of all alignments, the sole or base plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping, and under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. II I I I I II 01600-4 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, grout, or other materials necessary to properly align, level, and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper alignment after erection shall be done at the expense of the Contractor. F. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary materials and construct suitable concrete foundations or pads for all equipment installed by him, even though such foundations or pads may not be indicated on the drawings. The tops of foundations shall be at such elevations as will permit grouting. G. In setting pumps, motors, and other items of equipment customarily grouted, the Contractor shall make an allowance of at least I-inch (2.54 cm) for grout under the equipment bases. Shims used to level and adjust the bases shall be steel. Shims may be left embedded in the grout, in which case they shall be installed neatly and so as to be as inconspicuous as possible in the completed work. Unless otherwise permitted, all grout shall be a suitable non-shrinking grout. 1. Grout shall be mixed and placed in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Where practicable, the grout shall be placed through the grout holes in the base and worked outward and under the edges of the base and across the rough top of the concrete foundation to a peripheral form so constructed as to provide a suitable chamber around the top edge of the finished foundation. 2. Where such procedure is impracticable, the method of placing grout shall be as permitted. After the grout has hardened sufficiently, all forms, hoppers, and excess grout shall be removed, and all exposed grout surfaces shall be patched in an approved manner, if necessary, given burlap-rubbed finish and painted with at least two coats of an acceptable paint. 1.06 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY, AND HANDLING A. Materials and equipment shall be loaded and unloaded by methods affording adequate protection against damage. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent injury to the material or equipment during transportation and handling. Suitable power equipment will be used and the material or equipment shall be under control at all times. Under no condition shall the material or equipment be dropped, bumped or dragged. When a crane is used, a suitable hook or lift sling shall be used. The crane shall be so placed that all lifting is done in a vertical plane. Materials or equipment skid loaded, palletized or handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against material or equipment already unloaded. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-5 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT B. Material and equipment shall be delivered to the job site by means that will adequately support it and not subject it to undue stresses. Material and equipment damaged or injured in the process of transportation unloading or handling shall be rejected and immediately removed from the site. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the delivery of all materials, including those furnished by the Owner. He shall be responsible for the proper transport, handling, and storage of all materials, and they shall be protected to ensure their expected performance. Delivery schedules shall be coordinated by the Contractor, in advance, such that timely prosecution of the work will be effected. D. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with construction schedules, coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 1. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging. 1.07 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall furnish on-site a covered, weather-protected storage structure providing a clean, dry, non-corrosive environment for mechanical equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation equipment, and special equipment for work which is in progress. B. Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. Corroded, damaged, or deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a payment estimate. C. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 1. Store products. subj ect to damage by the elements in weather-tight enclosures. 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-6 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I I II II Ii I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids to prevent soiling or staining. Cover products that are subject to deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, and provide adequate ventilation to avoid condensation. 4. Store loose granular materials in a well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with foreign matter. D. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, theft, or damage of any kind to the material or equipment. E. Cement and sand shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and shall be kept completely dry at all times. All structural and miscellaneous steel and reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of standing water and to minimize rusting. Beams shall be stored with the webs vertical. Pre-cast concrete beams shall be handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulation of dirt, standing water, staining, chipping, or cracking. Brick, block, and similar masonry produ,cts shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, chipping, cracking, and spalling to a minimum. F. All materials which, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the damaged material or its removal. G. Contractor shall arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection and make periodic inspections of stored products to assure that products are maintained under specified conditions, free from damage or deterioration. H. Contractor shall provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products from traffic damage and subsequent construction operations and shall remove covering when no longer needed. 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to fmal inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without additional cost to the Owner. 01600-7 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT J. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of equipment supplied under this Contract, within seven (7) days after written notice to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, Engineering, and any other costs associated with making the necessary corrections. K. Locate on-site storage facilities in areas accepted by the Engineer. 1.08 SPECIAL TOOLS A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish two (2) sets of any special tools (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal adjustment, operations and maintenance, and disassembly, together with instructions for their use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and instructions in good order before completion of the Contract. Tools shall be high- grade, smooth, forged, alloy, tool steel. Grease guns shall be lever-type. B. Special tools are considered to be those tools which because of their limited use are not normally available, but which are necessary for the particular equipment. C. Special tools shall be delivered at the same time as the equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor shall properly store and safeguard such special tools until completion of the work, at which time they shall be delivered to the Owner. 1.09 LUBRICATION SYSTEM A. The minimum design criteria for lubrication of moving parts of the equipment shall include one week of continuous operation during which no lubricants shall be added to the system. B. The system shall be designed to receive lubricants whether in operation of shut down, and shall not leak or waste lubricants under either condition. The manufacturer's recommendations of grade and quality and a supply of the lubricants so recommended in quantities sufficient to conduct start up and testing operations shall be furnished with the equipment. 1.10 TESTS AND TEST REPORTS When used in the Contract Documents, "Factory/Fabricating Shop Performance, Evaluation, Certification, and/or Acceptance Tests and Test Reports" shall be considered to mean the corresponding manufacturers, fabricator's and/or other builder's official tests and tests reports of same. Included in these test reports are appropriate substantiating documentation/data ascertaining 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-8 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I' Ii II Ii Ii Ii Ii I I I I I II Ii Ii II I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I the correct and complete manufacture, fabrication, and "shop performance" (to greatest extent normally practicable) of the particular material, equipment, system and/or facilities proposed for eventual delivery. These are subdivided into three (3) significant tests and test report types, namely: 1) "Certification Tests and Test Reports", 2) "Factory Tests and Test Reports", and 3) "Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports". Minimal requirements are described below: A. Certification Tests and Test Reports 1. Standard specifications, code references, etc. for minimum quality and workmanship levels are indicated in the Contract Documents and Construction Documents. Statements, certificates, other substantiating reporting data, hereinafter "Certification Test Reports" of tests conducted on previously manufactured materials or equipment identical to that proposed for use shall be compiled by the Contractor. 2. As a minimum, all Certification Test Reports shall contain an official analysis of sufficient material composition or show evidence of meeting or exceeding the specified material standard(s) referenced, e.g., ASTM, ASME, other designations. All reports shall also indicate from whom the material was/will be purchased. 3. The Contractor shall pay all costs of certification tests and test reports. B. Factory Tests and Test Reports 1. Additional tests and reports performed on material or equipment by the manufacturer or fabricator to ascertain quality or workmanship are referred to herein as "Factory Tests and Test Reports". 2. Prior to the delivery of any Factory Test Report, the Contractor shall first submit for review and approval, a detailed description of the proposed testing including reporting procedure and criteria. Such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the fIrst submission of the technical submittal. 3. Materials and equipment used in the performance of the Work under this Contract are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. If Work to be accomplished away from the construction site is to be inspected on behalf ofthe Owner during its fabrication or manufacture, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the place and time where such fabrication or manufacture is to be done. Such notice shall be in writing and delivered to the Engineer not less than thirty (30) days prior to such event so that the necessary arrangements for the particular factory inspection tests can be made. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-9 MATERIALS AND EQUIP!\t1ENT D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C. 4. Upon completion of the factory inspection tests and immediately following manufacture or fabrication, the Contractor shall compile a complete Factory Test Report per the approved format above. All such reports shall be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of the technical submittal corresponding to such tested material or equipment. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests and Tests Reports 1. Material and equipment used in the performance of the Work of this Contract are also subject to the evaluation and testing after the complete, full-scale assembly into major equipment and/or systems. Shop Performance/Evaluation Tests, i.e., tests of simulated Startup, steady state, variable loading, and other normal operating conditions, for such assembled equipment/systems shall be accomplished in strict accordance with the standard testing practices specified or otherwise accepted by the Engineer. 2. Prior to the delivery of any Shop Performance/Evaluation Test Report, the Contractor shall submit for review, a detailed description of the proposed performance/evaluation tests, including anticipated reporting procedures, data reduction, and criteria used. Where appropriate, such descriptions shall also be delivered to the Engineer for review as part of a first or subsequent submission of the technical submittal. 3. Should such performance/evaluation tests be accomplished away from the construction site, the Contractor shall give prior notice to the Engineer of the places and times where such tests will be accomplished. Such prior notice shall be in writing and delivered not less than thirty (30) days prior to such events so that necessary arrangements for the particular tests can be made. 4. The requirements above pertaining to Factory Tests and Test Reports, shall be incorporated herein for shop Perfonnance/Evaluation Tests and Test Reports. Unless factory tests are coincident with shop performance tests and vice versa for the same material or equipment, a minimum of fifteen (15) days shall be scheduled between such multiple equipment tests, where extended travel is required. Cost of Performance Shop Tests 1. The Contractor shall conduct shop performance full-scale tests at its expense on all equipment as specified. Each piece of equipment shall be tested completely assembled and the shop tests performed by the equipment manufacturer until successful tests are achieved. 01600-10 MATERIALS AND EQUlPl\1ENT I I I I II I I ,I II I' I I I II I II I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. In the event the performance tests are conducted outside the continental United States the Contractor shall pay all transportation expenses incurred by the Owner's representatives in witnessing the tests at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.11 FIELD TESTING A. Field-testing shall be conducted when called for in the Technical Specification Sections and on all completed systems in general. An independent testing facility approved by the Owner shall conduct all field testing in accordance with the Technical Specifications. All costs associated with these field tests shall be paid by the Contractor. B. . After completion of the installation, the Contractor, in the presence ofthe Engineer, under actual operating conditions, shall test the system. Tests shall be performed according to manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall include with its bid the services of the equipment manufacturer's field service technician for a period necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the Owner. D. This service shall be for the purposes of checkout, initial start-up, certification, and instruction of facilities personnel. E. A written report covering the technician's findings and installation approval shall be submitted to the Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. 1.12 ACCEPTANCE OF INSTALLATION A. The Engineer may accept an equipment system installation as ready for Substantial Completion when: 1. The Engineer has accepted all factory tests and all other component testing. 2. The Engineer has accepted all performance shop tests. 3. All components of the system are installed and tested, including without limitation hydrostatic tests, leak tests, continuity tests, insulation resistance tests, phase rotation tests, bump tests, stroke testing, calibration, adjustment for proper operation, and all other component tests as appropriate. 4. Field start-up activities have been completed and approved by the Engineer. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-11 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 5. The appropriate certificates have been submitted. 6. All equipment has met the performance requirements. 7. The Engineer has accepted integrated system tests and adjustments performed by the Contractor to demonstrate that the system as a whole functions in a reliable manner and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component or of the system as a whole. 8. The Engineer has accepted integrated facilities tests performed by the Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative to demonstrate that the entire system functions together reliably as a integrated facilities, and meets the performance requirements, in manual and automatic modes, without failure, fault, or defect of any component. 9. The Engineer has accepted facilities performance tests which demonstrate that the design criteria and performance criteria are met. 10. The Engineer has accepted the O&M Manuals. 11. All required Owner personnel have been trained. 12. All other Contract requirements for Substantial Completion have been satisfied. 1.13 VORTEX GRIT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST A. Vortex Grit System performance tests shall be coordinated by the Contractor and conducted by an independent third party, Grit Solutions, LLC, 2402 E 2659th Rd., Marseilies, IL 61341. B. All Vortex Grit System testing shall be done in accordance with the testing protocol in the Technical Specifications. All costs associated with these field tests shall be paid by the Contractor using the previously negotiated and stipulated allowance listed in the bid form. C. In-situ performance tests shall be for the purposes of verifying the grit units meetthe performance criteria as specified in Section 11320 - Vortex Grit Collection Equipment. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-12 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Ii Ii II II 11 II ,Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Grit Solutions, LLC shall provide a written report of the performance test results to the Manufacturer. A written report covering the technician's findings shall be submitted to the Engineer covering grit unit performance results and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted and corrective actions / modifications by Manufacturer to achieve performance. 1.14 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for start-up and testing of equipment shall be furnished with the respective equipment, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break-in of the equipment, which shall be no greater than 30 days. 1.15 ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS A. Obtain and install all necessary guides, bearing plates, anchor and attachment bolts, working drawings for installation, templates and all other appurtenances necessary for the installation of the equipment specified. Subcontractors fumishingequipment shall also furnish anchors and templates to the General Contractor. B. Anchor bolts shall be of size and strength suitable for purpose intended and shall be in accordance with Section 05500, and the individual specification sections. C. Pipe sleeves or other means of adjusting anchor bolts shall be provided where indicated or needed. Equipment shall be leveled by first sitting nuts on the anchor bolts and then filling the space between the equipment base and concrete pedestal with grout. Where equipment bases (Le. pumps) are installed with grout holes, subsequent to field testing, those bases shall be totally filled with grout. D. Provide grout as required by Section 03300. E. Provide concrete equipment pads or 4-inch high housekeeping pads for all mechanical, heating and ventilating, plumbing and electrical equipment. Coordinate with other contractors before pad placement to confirm dimensions, location and anchor requirements. 1.16 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES A. All items of electrical equipment that are furnished with process, heating, ventilating, or other equipment shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the specifications. Enclosures for electrical equipment, such as 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-13 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT switches and starters, shall conform to the requirements specified under the appropriate electrical sections of the specifications. 1.17 ELECTRIC MOTORS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Unless otherwise specified or permitted, all electric motors furnished and installed by the Contractor shall conform to the requirements hereinafter set forth. 1. Ratings of Motors a. Every motor shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment under all load and operating conditions without exceeding its rated nameplate current or power or its specified temperature limit. b. When the horsepower rating is specified for a motor, the motor furnished shall meet the requirements of the output specified. When the horsepower rating is not specified, the motor shall have sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment as given in the detail specifications. c. For voltage rating of motors, the requirements of this specification section shall apply. d. Motors shall have a service factor of 1.15 unless otherwise noted or specified. 2. Type of Motors a. All motors shall be of a type having starting characteristics and ruggedness as may be necessary under the actual conditions of operation and, unless otherwise specified, shall be suitable for full voltage starting. b. Motors shall be manufactured by General Electric Co.; Reliance Electric; U.S. Electrical Motors; or be acceptable equivalent products. c. All motors shall have Class B or Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise in accordance with NEMA Standards for Motors and Generators and based on a maximum ambient temperature of 40 0 C. d. Explosion-proof motors shall comply with all requirements of Class 1, Division I, Group D, Electrical Code and with all other codes pertaining thereto. 3. General Design of Motors a. Motors shall comply with the latest NEMA Standards for motors and generators, M G 1, unless otherwise specified. Motor windings shall be braced to withstand successfully the stresses resulting from the method of starting. The windings shall be treated b. 01600-14 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Ii I II Ii I: I Ii Ii I I: I I I Ii II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 thoroughly with acceptable insulating compound suitable for protection against moisture and slightly acid or alkaline conditions. c. Bearings shall be of the self-lubrication type, designed to ensure proper alignment of rotor and shaft and to prevent leakage of lubricants. The motors shall be lifetime lubricated with silicone grease. d. Vertical motors shall be provided with thrust bearings adequate for all thrusts to which they can be subjected in operation. e. Vertical motors of the open drip-proof type shall be provided with drip of acceptable shape and construction. When the drip hood is too heavy to be easily removed, provision shall be made for access for testing. 4. Single-Phase Motors Auxiliary Devices Single-phase motors requiring switching devices and auxiliary starting resistors, capacitors, or reactors shall be furnished as combination units with such auxiliaries either incorporated within the motor housings or housed in suitable enclosures mounted upon the motor frames. Each combination unit shall be mounted upon a single base and shall be provided with a single conduit box. 5. Motor Terminal Boxes and Leads Motors shall be furnished with over size conduit terminal boxes to provide for making and housing the connections. Motors shall also have flexible leads of sufficient length to extend beyond the face of the box for a distance of not less than four (4) inches (10.16 cm). The size of cable terminals and conduit terminal box holes shall be as permitted by the Engineer. An acceptable type of solderless lug shall be furnished. Total-enclosed and explosion-proof motors shall have cast-iron terminal boxes. 6. Special Motors Hoists and other devices complying with special safety codes shall be furnished complete with their control equipment and with all accessories and safety devices for code-approved, safe, and efficient operation. 7. Control Data The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with two (2) certified copies of characteristic curves for each motor furnished (except 115-volt motors) and all other data required for designing the control equipment. 01600-15 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 8. Motor Shop Tests a. Motor shop tests shall be made in accordance with the IEEE Test Code as specified in the NEMA Standards for Motors and Generators MG I. NEMA report-of-test forms shall be used in submitting test data. Motor efficiency shall be determined by use of IEEE 112, Test Method B, and by use of MG 1-12.53 a and b. b. For induction motors larger than 100 hp., complete tests of each motor furnished shall be made and certified tests data sheets shall be submitted, unless witness shop tests are required by the detail specifications pertaining to the equipment. Each motor shall be tested for efficiency and power factor at 50, 75, and 100 percent of,its rated horsepower for temperature rise, torque, starting current, and dielectric strength, and for compliance with all specified performance requirements. c. For induction motors 5 hp. up to, and including, 100 hp, copies of routine test reports of electrically duplicated motors shall be furnished. d. For motors 3 hp. or less, no test data need be furnished. e. Additional tests on individual motors shall be as specified in the detail specifications for the motor-driven equipment. f. Motors shall be given a shop application of paint filler or enamel sealer, a flat coat of undercoat for enamel, and two coats of enamel or, in lieu of this treatment, other suitable treatment customary with the manufacturer. B. Unless otherwise specified, motors with ratings in excess of 1/3 hp, shall be rated 460-volt (nameplate rating), three-phase, 60-Hertz. Motors of 1/3 hp, or less shall be rated 115-volt, single-phase, 60-Hertz. 1.18 EQUIPMENT DRIVE GUARDS A. Screens, guards, or cages shall be provided for all exposed rotating or moving parts in accordance with accepted practices of applicable governmental agencies. Guards shall be constructed of galvanized sheet steel or galvanized woven wires or expanded metal set in a frame of galvanized steel members. Guards shall be secured in position by steel braces or straps, which will permit easy removal for servicing the equipment. 1.19 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces so as to eliminate direct contact and any resultant electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous impregnated felt, heavy 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-16 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I I Ii I I II II II I Ii I I I I: II I; I I' II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or washers; or other acceptable materials. 1.20 NAMEPLATES A. Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate of stainless steel, securely attached in place and clearly and permanently inscribed with the following: manufacturer's name, catalog and/or model, or type designation, serial number principle rated capacities, electrical or other power characteristics, and similar information as appropriate. B. Each process valve shall be provided with a substantial tag of non-corrodible metal securely fastened in place and inscribed with an identification number in conformance with the Valve Identification Schedule furnished later by Engineer. 1.21 CONCRETE INSERTS A. Concrete inserts for hangers shall be designed to support safely, in the concrete that is used, the maximlJID load that can be imposed by the hangers used in the inserts. Inserts for hangers shall be of a type which will permit adjustment of the hangers both horizontally (in one plane) and vertically and locking of the hanger head or nut. All inserts shall be galvanized. 1.22 SLEEVES A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, opening for the passage of pipes through floors and walls shall be formed of sleeves of standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe. The sleeves shall be of ample diameter to pass the pipe and its insulation, if any, and to permit such expansion as may occur. Sleeves shall be of sufficient length to be flush at the walls and the bottom ofthe slabs and to project 2- inchs above the finished floor surface. Threaded nipples shall not be used as sleeves. B. Sleeves in exterior walls below ground or in walls to have liquids on one or both sides shall have a 2-inch (5.08 cm) annular fm of lI8-inch (0.3175 cm) plate welded with a continuous weld completely around the sleeve at about mid-length. Sleeves shall be galvanized after the fms are attached. C. All sleeves shall be set accurately before the concrete is placed, or shall be built-in accurately as the masonry is being built. 1.23 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. The Contractor shall arrange for a qualified service representative from each company manufacturing or supplying certain equipment as listed in this Section 03720-022-01 October, 2007 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 01600-17 II o 1600 (or in the respective technical specification sections) to perform the duties herein described. Ii II Ii II I Ii I; II II I Ii Ii B. After installation of the listed equipment has been completed and the equipment is presumably ready for operation, but before it is operated by others, the representative shall inspect, operate, test, and adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include, but not be limited to, the following points as applicable: 1. Soundness (without cracked or otherwise damaged parts). 2. Completeness in all details, as specified. 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, relative arrangement of various parts. 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing, and lubricants. C. The operation, testing, and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the equipment is left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under the conditions specified. D. On completion of its work, the manufacturer's or supplier's representative shall submit in triplicate to the Engineer a complete, signed report of the result of its inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustment made, quantitative results obtained, if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be taken to ensure proper maintenance. The report also shall include a certificate that the equipment conforms to the requirements of the Contract and is ready for permanent operation and that nothing in the installation will render the manufacturer's warranty null and void. E. After the Engineer has reviewed the reports from the manufacturer's representatives, the Contractor shall make arrangements to have the manufacturer's representatives present when the field acceptance tests are made. II F. The Contractor, as a minimum, shall arrange for the service of qualified service representatives from the companies manufacturing or supplying the equipment listed in Table 01600-1 and as required in the Technical Specifications: II I) PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. END OF SECTION II 1,1 II II PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01600-18 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01660 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCFs B. Initial Operation. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements B. Section 01100 - Summary of Work C. Section 01040 - Construction Coordination D. Section 01220 - Progress Meetings E. Section 01340 - Project Submittals and Accep~ance F. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements G. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS Prior to equipment start-up, the Contractor shall have completed each of the following: A. Verification that all final acceptance tests have been performed. B. Certification of equipment compliance as required under Section 01600. C. Verification that all required lubrication equipment and materials are provided. D. Verification that all piping and valves have been properly. E. Verification that existing plant personnel agree that other plant components are ready for start-up. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION 01660-1 F. Submit a written report in accordance with Sections 01340 and 01400 that all equipment has been properly installed and is ready for plant start-up. G. Verification that all safety equipment is installed and fully functional. H. Verification that all indicating and annunciating systems are installed and fully functional. 1. Verification that all utilities are operable. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE I II II II II II To maintain treatment plant process flows as stated in Section 01100 - Summary of Work, only one screen or grit system shall be installed at a time. The equipment shall be fully tested and in I i service before proceeding to the next screen or grit removal system. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 EQUIPMENT START-UP A. Phase I - 1. Contractor shall successfully operate the first new screen and/or Vortex Grit System for 48 hours prior to removing the second existing screen and/or grit system from service. The sequencing of equipment installation and removal shall be coordinated with the City management and operations staff to prevent treatment disruptions.. 2. The Contractor shall implement the tagging system described in Article 1.11 of this specification. B. Phase II - Following the complete installation of all screens and grit systems at all plants and the completion of Phase I activities, Phase II shall commence. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01660-2 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION II II Ii I! I II I! II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Contractor shall coordinate final grit system tests for Marshall Street and East APCF as described in Section 01600 Materials and Equipment, Article 1.13 - Grit Unit Performance Test. 2. Following the completion of Phase II activities, the Work shall be substantially complete. 1.11 TAGGING SYSTEM A. During Phase I, a tagging system shall be used to establish prerequisites for equipment start-up. The tagging system shall be as follows: 1. Preliminary check completed ("Field Testing" in Section 01600) and red tags shall be placed on the system. 2. Red Tag shall remain on system until receiving or passing "Acceptance of Installation" per Section 01600. B. Tags will be signed and dated by the Engineer upon acceptance, and shall remain attached to the item until ordered removed by the Engineer. C. Phase II Vortex Grit System Testing shall not commence until all equipment required for use or listed in Table 01600-1 in Section 01600 have been cleared of Red Tags. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Instructional visits by manufacturer's representatives (Table 01600-1 in Section 01600), shall be scheduled during the initial equipment start-up and initial operation period. Submit tentative schedule of instructional visits to Engineer for review with Owner's operating personnel two weeks prior to proposed start-up date. An equipment manufacturer who has supplied several items of equipment may combine instructions on two or more items on the same day, with follow-up visits within six months, so that the total number of days is in accordance with the specifications. Instruction from more than one equipment manufacturer shall not be permitted on a given day. Items requiring instructional visits are listed in the individual specification sections and/or Section 01600. 1.13 COORDINATING CONFERENCE A. At least 14 days prior to equipment start-up, a coordinating conference shall be held to establish start-up procedures which are to be followed, to determine the status of all equipment, and generally coordinate all aspects of this phase of the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01660-3 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION I project. Representatives of the Owner, Engineer, and Contractor(s) shall attend I the conference. All shop drawings, manuals of instruction and maintenance for equipment, and the Contract Documents shall be made available for reference by II. the Contractor. END OF SECTION Ii II I) II I] Ii Ii II II PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) II 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01660-4 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION I II Ii II Ii 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01700 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK (NOT USED) 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Administrative provisions for Substantial Completion and for Final Acceptance. B. General Conditions of the Contract C. Section 01000 - Project Requirements D. Section 01710 - Final Cleaning and Protection E. Section 01730 - O&M Manuals 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. When the Contractor considers the Work or designated portion of Work is Substantially Complete, submit written notice with list of items to be completed or corrected. B. Should the Engineer's inspection find the Work is not substantially complete, it will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01700-1 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT C. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of Substantial Completion. D. When the Engineer finds the Work is Substantially Complete it will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion. 1.11 FINAL COMPLETION A. B. C. D. When the Contractor considers the Work, or designated period of the Work, is complete, submit written certification: 1. 2. 3. Contract Documents have been reviewed. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents, and deficiencies listed with Certificates of Substantial Completion have been corrected. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. When all required shop dr~wings, catalog cuts, maintenance manuals, instruction manual, test reports, samples, operational manuals and all other submittals have been submitted and reviewed by the Engineer. All deliverables have been delivered or placed as accepted by the Engineer. 4. 5. 6. Should the Engineer's inspection reveal the Work incomplete, it will promptly notify the Contractor in writing listing observed deficiencies. The Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second certification of Final Completion. When the Engineer finds the Work IS complete, it will consider close-out submittals. 1.12 REINSPECTION FEES Should status of completion of Work require more than one re-inspection by Engineer due to failure of Work to comply with the Contractor's claims on initial inspection, the Owner will deduct from final payment to the Contractor the amount of the Engineer's compensation for additional re-inspection services. 1.13 CLOSE-OUT SUBMITTALS A. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Certificate of Occupancy. 01700-2 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT I II II II II Ii II II II II Ii II II Ii Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. All required Certificates ofInspection. B. Project Record Documents: Under provisions of Section 01720. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Under provisions of Section 01730. D. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens: In accordance with Conditions of the Contract. E. Consent of Surety to Final Payment. 1.14 STATEMENT OF ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS A. Submit final statement reflecting adjustments to total Contract Price, indicating: 1. Original total Contract Price 2. Previous change orders 3. Changes under allowances 4. Changes under unit prices 5. Deductions for uncorrected Work 6. Penalties and bonuses 7. Deductions for liquidated damages 8. Deductions for re-inspection fees 9. Other adjustments to total Contract Price 10. Total Contract Price as adjusted 11. Previous payments 12. Sum remaining due B. The Engineer will issue a final Change Order reflecting approved adjustments to total Contract Price not previously made by change orders. 1.15 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT Submit application for final payment in accordance with provisions of Conditions of the Contract. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01700-3 PROJECT CLOSE-OUT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01710 FINAL CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of the work and at the completion of the work as required by General Conditions. 1.02 RELATED WORK (NOT USED) 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.1 0 ENVIRONMENTAL CONCERNS (NOT USED) Cleaning and disposal operations shall comply with codes, ordinances, regulations, and anti- pollution laws. PART 2 MATERIALS The Contractor shall: A. Use only those cleaning materials which will not create hazards to health or property and which will not damage surfaces. B. Use only those cleaning materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of the surfaces recommended by manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. C. Use cleaning materials only on surfaces recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. 03 720-022-01 October, 2007 FINAL CLEANING 01710-1 PART 3 DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall: A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep the work, the site, and adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and windblown debris. B. Provide onsite containers for the collection of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. C. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from the site periodically and dispose of at legal areas away from the site. PART 4 DUST CONTROL The Contractor shall: A. Clean interior spaces prior to the start of finish painting and continue cleaning on an as-needed basis until painting is finished. B. Schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants resulting from cleaning process will not fall on wet or newly coated surfaces. PART 5 FINAL CLEANING The Contractor shall: A. Employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. B. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces. C. Broom clean exterior paved surface; rake clean other surfaces of the grounds. D. Prior to final completion or Owner occupancy, Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight-exposed interior and exterior surfaces, and all work areas, to verify that the entire work is clean. END OF SECTION 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 01710-2 FINAL CLEANING I I: I I I Ii I II I: I II Ii I I II 11 Ii I .... I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. This Section details the minimum requirements for the Contractor for maintenance and recording of Record Documents. B. The Contractor shall label and file Record Documents and samples in accordance with the corresponding Specification Section number. Each document shall be labeled "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Record Documents shall be maintained in a clean, dry, and legible condition. Record documents shall not be used for construction purposes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements 1.03 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES A. Store documents and samples in the Contractor's field office apart from documents used for construction. 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 2. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples. B. The Contractor shall institute a computerized record control program. C. Documents and samples shall be available at all times for inspection by the Engineer. 1.04 RECORDING The Contractor shall record construction information as follows: A. Record and update daily "as-built" information from field notes and on set of opaque drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colors for each major system, for recording information. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720-1 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C. Record information concurrently (daily) with construction progress. Work shall not be concealed until required information is recorded. I! I I Ii D. CAD Requirements for As-Built Drawings: Contractor shall provide the Engineer a complete set of as-built drawings in AutoCAD 2004 or later format upon completion of the Work. Contractor shall utilize the AutoCAD 2004 drawings furnished by the Engineer for this purpose. It is the Contractor's sole responsibility to ensure the as-built drawings conform to the following CAD requirements: Ii 1. Drawings may be submitted to the Engineer on CD-ROM at the Contractor's option. Each disk or CD shall be clearly labeled with the appropriate project number, Owner's name, date, and file names included on each disk or CD. If files are compressed, a description of the compression software must be included along with a copy of the appropriate uncompressing software. I: II I I I I Ii 2. All changes to drawings must be done in accordance with the appropriate scale of the drawing revised and shall be delineated by placing a "cloud" around the areas revised and adding a revision triangle indicating the appropriate revision number. 3. Each drawing must have the revision block completed to indicate the revision number, date, and initials of the person revising the drawing. The description of the revision must say "Project Record." This procedure must be followed for every drawing even when no changes are made to the drawing. 4. All revisions to drawings must be put on separate layers with the layer names prefixed "as-built" followed by the appropriate existing layer name. The colors and line types of the appropriate existing layers shall be adhered to when creating new layers. Ii 5. The Contractor shall supply one (1) full set of hard copies E. As-built Drawings: The construction drawings shall be marked to reflect: I I I I I I 1. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances referenced to three permanent surface improvements. 2. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 3. Field changes of dimension and detail. 4. Changes made by Modifications. 01720-2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. Details not on original construction drawings. F. Specifications and Addenda-Legibly mark each Section to record: 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Change Order. G. The Contractor shall have the Licensed Land Surveyor certify the as-built drawings as being correct and complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. At Contract closeout, Contractor shall transmit Record Documents and samples with cover letter to the Engineer, listing: 1. Date 2. Project title and number 3. Contractor's name and addresses 4. Number and title of each Record Document 5. Signature of Contractor or its authorized representative 6. Contract Section and Subsection numbers 7. Location B. Prior to assembly and submittal, the Contractor shall review for completeness the records maintained by its subcontractors. C. Tracings of all Construction Documents and Shop Drawings made by the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers of materials or equipment shall be corrected to show the Work as actually completed or installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01720-3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01730 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for the Owner's maintenance and operation of products furnished under the Contract. One O&M Manual shall be provided for each APCF. 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section and as referenced in other pertinent sections of the Specifications. The data presented in the O&M Manuals shall be specifically related to this Contract and application. 2. Incorporate maintenance and operation data furnished by the Owner, if any. B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items to supply and deliver, to the Engineer, O&M Manuals for the Work in accordance with the requirements of this Section. C. The Contractor shall provide O&M Manuals for all equipment, including instrumentation, electrical, and process control system equipment and software for the entire Facility. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Section 01000 - Project Requirements B. Section 01720 - Project Record Documents C. Section 01800 - Training 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In general, the manuals shall have two (2) levels: facilities-wide systems level and individual component level. 1. The facilities-wide systems level shall: a. Describe the facilities-wide systems, including diagrams. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01730-1 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 2. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 1. B. Format: 1. 2. I I: b. Explain start-up, shutdown, normal operations and malfunction of the facilities-wide systems. I) c. Tabulate a lubrication schedule for the facilities-wide systems. II d. Describe preventive maintenance checking procedures for the facilities-wide systems. II e. Include a cross reference to all individual component manuals. The individual component level shall contain: Ii I, I I I II If Storage requirements. Installation instructions. Alignment instructions and tolerances. Operating instructions. Troubleshooting instructions. Lubrication requirements. Maintenance instructions. Parts list. Recommended spare parts list and how to obtain same. II Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm). I White paper: 20-1b (9.072 kg) minimum. II 01730-2 I I I I 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly word-processed. 4. Drawings: a. Provide reinforced, punched binder tab, bind in with text. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages but not larger than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x43.18 cm). c. All drawings shall be placed at end of each section and drawing shall be printed on one side only. 5. Provide a flyleaf for each separate product, or each piece of operation equipment. a. Provide word-processed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. b. Provide indexed tabs. 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title, "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", listing: a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure as applicable c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual C. Media 1. Original word processed CD shall be delivered to the Engineer. 2. All word processing must be done using the latest version of Microsoft Word or as directed by the Engineer. 3. All drawings except control system configuration drawings must be submitted on CD using AutoCAD. D. Binders 1. Filled to not more than 75 percent capacity. 2. When multiple binders are used, arrange the data into related consistent groupmgs. E. The Contractor shall submit the following: 1. Equipment Manuals. Five (5) copies of the O&M Instruction Manual for each piece of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer with delivery 01730-3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS II of the equipment. O&M manuals will not include manufacturer's test I ' results and as built specifications. 2. Systems O&M Manuals. Five (5) copies of the systems O&M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer no later than180 days prior to Facilities Phase I start-up. Systems O&M Manuals will be complete except for field results and refinements added as result of demonstration 3. Final O&M Manuals. Five (5) copies of the Final Equipment and Systems O&M Manuals, bound and indexed and submitted to the Engineer prior to the Substantial Completion under this Contract 4. The cost of these Manuals submitted shall be included in the total Contract Price. Copies supplied under item "2" will not be included under item "3". F. Any modifications required after fmal O&M submission shall be made to the manuals by issuance of addenda in the form of change pages to the manual. The addenda will identify where the new data is to be inserted, what data is to be removed, and new index sheets as necessary and list of shop drawings and submittals. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Florida Administrative Code, 62-555.350, "Operation and Maintenance of Public Water Systems" 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 3. Skilled as a technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data. 4. Skilled as a draftsman competent to prepare required drawings. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01730-4 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS II I I Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I ,I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME A. Neatly word-processed table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order, to include the following: 1. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address, fax number, and telephone number. 2. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume. 3. List, with each product, name, address, fax number and telephone number of: a. Subcontractor or installer. b. A list of each product to be included, indexed to content of the volume. c. Identify area of responsibility of each subcontractor or installer, if more than one. d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. e. Manufacturer. 4. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in the Contract Documents. B. Product Data 1. Include only those sheets that are pertinent to the specific product. 2. Annotate each sheet to: a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed b. Clearly identify data applicable information 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01730-5 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS c. Delete references to inapplicable information C. Drawings . 1. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to illustrate clearly: a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems b. Control and flow diagrams c. Include Owner Tag Numbers 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. 3. Project Record Documents shall not be used as maintenance drawings. D. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: 1. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 3. Describe how complete system is to operate. E. Copy of pertinent information related to warranty, bond, and service Contract issued. 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel, give: a. Proper procedures in event of failure b. Instances that might affect validity of warranties or bonds F. Training manuals used in training courses will become part of this Manual. 1.11 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Content, for architectural products, applied materials, and finishes: I. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Catalog number, size, composition. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01730-6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS I 1 II Ii Ii I: I, Ii I I Ii II I I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I b. Color and texture designations. c. Information required for re-ordering special-manufactured products. 2. Instructions for care and maintenance. a. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods. b. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to product. c. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. B. Content, for moisture-protected and weather-exposed products: 1. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition. c. Details of installation. 2. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair. C. Additional requirements for maintenance data as required by other sections of the Specifications. 1.12 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication system, as appropriate: 1. Make a table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of the control or instrument. 2. Description of system and component parts a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for both the system, sub-system and the component parts 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01730-7 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. Performance curves, Engineering data and tests c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts 3. Circuit directories of panel boards a. Electrical service b. Controls c. Communications 4. As-installed color-coded wiring diagrams 5. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. a. An electrical schematic for each item. b. A chart listing the controls/instruments in a loop identifying the equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and serial number. 6. Operating procedures a. Routine and normal operating instructions b. Sequences required c. Special operating instructions 7. Maintenance procedures a. Routine operations b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" c. Disassembly, repair and re-assembly d. Alignment, adjustment and checking 01730-8 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS I I II II I I, I! Ii Ii I I I I I II II Ii I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 8. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions 9. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage 10. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications 11. Abnormal and emergency operations a. Potential overloads b. Procedures for equipment breakdown c. Action to be taken in a power outage d. Identify alarms by equipment location and action to correct e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards 12. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming B. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: 1. Description of unit and component parts a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions b. Performance curves, Engineering data and tests c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts d. Model number and name plate data for each piece of equipment e. Assembly drawings f. List of all special tools required to service equipment and/or systems including where they are stored 2. Operating procedures a. Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions 01730-9 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. I Ii I Regulation, . control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions c. Summer and winter operating instructions d. Ii Special operating instructions e. Control settings and ranges I] 3. Maintenance Procedures a. Identify type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment Ii b. Guide to "trouble-shooting" II I I c. Disassembly, repair, and re-assembly d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking 4. Servicing and lubrication schedule a. List of lubricants required II b. Period between lubrications I I I I 5. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. (This is not to be a generalized catalog of the entire product line.) 6. Description of sequence of operation 7. Original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear 11 b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts 8. As-installed control diagrams I I Ii I 9. Each Contractor's coordination drawings 10. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage 01730-10 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 11. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications 12. Charts of equipment, instrument and valve tag numbers with location and function of each piece of equipment, instrument or valve a. Reference drawing which shows equipment, instrument or valve location b. Manufacturer's model and serial number c. Valve actuator type (manual, hydraulic, electric or pneumatic). 13. Local services (process water and air, drains, HV AC, natural gas and steam) C. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of the Owner's personnel. D. Additional Requirements for O&M Data required by sections of Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 O&M MANUALS A. Binders: The manuals shall be supplied in binders that are the same as those provided in paragraph 1.04 D. above. B. Electronic Version: Word-processed portions of the manuals shall also be provided on word processor diskettes. The electronic version manuals must be capable of being read, edited and printed with Microsoft Word or that which is congruent file format with word processing in Document Control at time of transmittal of documents. The format will be provided to the Contractor upon request. All drawings shall be generated using personal computer and plotter with the software package program from AutoCAD. PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 01730-11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Compile specified warranties and bonds. B. Co-execute submittals when so specified. C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. D. Submit to the Engineer for review. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract B. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and subcontractors. B. Number of original signed copies required: two (2) each. C. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in sequence of the Specifications. Provide completion information for each item as follows: 1. Product or work item 2. Firm, address, telephone, fax and E-mail number, and name of principal 3. Scope 4. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract 5. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: a. Proper procedure in case of failure 03720-022-01 October, 2007 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740-1 b. Instances that might affect the validity of warranty or bond 7. Contractor, with address, telephone, faxes and E-mail numbers, and the name of responsible principal D. Submittal of warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts shall be included in submittals for review and prior to Final Completion with actual dates included. E. The Contractor's obligation to correct defective or nonconforming Work shall run for a period of 12 months (or such longer period of time as may otherwise be specified in the Contract Documents) commencing from the date Substantial Completion is achieved. 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE (NOT USED) 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE (NOT USED) 1.07 WARRANTIES A. All mechanical and electrical equipment, together with devices of whatever nature and all components, which are furnished and/or installed by the Contractor shall be guaranteed. B. The guarantee shall be against the manufacturing and/or design inadequacies, materials, and workmanship not in conformity, improper assembly, hidden damage, failure of devices and/or components, excessive leakage, or other circumstances which would cause the equipment to fail under normal design and/or specific operating conditions for a period of 12 months or such longer period as may be shown and/or specified from and after the date of Substantial Completion. C. Each piece of equipment, device or component which shall fail within the above specified term of the guarantee shall be replaced and installed with reasonable promptness by the Contractor without increase in the Contract Price. Failure of the Contractor to provide timely repairs as specified herein shall result in a claim being issued by the Owner against the Contractor's Bond. In some instances, if approved by the Owner, the Contractor may be allowed to repair the equipment. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01740-2 WARRANTIES AND BONDS I II II Ii II II Ii Ii II II II II II II II Ij II II I II I I 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) I PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) I PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 01740-3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS October, 2007 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 01800 TRAINING PART I GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of the equipment and systems supplied and/or installed under this Contract. B. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment manuals, and start-up Engineering and training assistance. C. Ensure that system suppliers provide a qualified training instructor to assist the Contractor in training the Owner's employees in the proper operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems. D. Furnish training videos and manuals during the training program. E. Include in the total Contract Price, the cost for training equipment; preparing training manuals; conducting classroom instructions; performing field, factory, and hands-on training; and coordinating and incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as determined by the Owner. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. General Conditions B. Section 01000 - Project Requirements C. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment D. Section 01730 - Operation and Maintenance Manuals 1.03 SUBMITTALS (NOT USED) 1.04 WORK SEQUENCE A. All factory training programs, if required, shall be completed prior to start-up of the Owner's system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01800-1 TRAINING B. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the approved schedule. C. Individuals requiring training shall be trained in small groups during Mondays through Fridays. The Contractor will normally provide training during the eight hour day shift. D. The hands-on training shall be conducted with a maximum of ten (10) students per instructor. E. Thirty (30) days prior to the first training event, the Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the Engineer. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS (NOT USED) 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be performed by personnel: I. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment and systems installed under this Contract. 2. Familiar with training requirements of the Owner. B. Furnish resumes, including three outside references, for each instructor to be used in the training program. C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based upon the review of resumes, and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training program. If the proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit resumes of another candidate within a reasonable time. 1.07 WARRANTIES (NOT USED) 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (NOT USED) 1.09 QUALIFICATIONS (NOT USED) 1.10 TRAINING PLAN A. The Contractor shall, at the completion of the Work, provide a competent and experienced person, thoroughly familiar with the Work, for a period of not less 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01800-2 TRAINING I II II I: Ii I I I! II I Ii II I Ii Ii I II I II Ii I II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I than three (3) days to instruct permanent operating personnel in operation of equipment and control systems. B. At least 120 days prior to training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, a detailed training plan including: 1. Title and objectives 2. Training schedule 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, Engineers, operators, maintenance staff) 5. Course description and outline of course content 6. Duration 7. Location (e.g., training center or site) 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self-study, demonstration, hands-on) 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements 1.11 FORM OF TRAINING MANUALS A. Prepare training packages in the form of an instruction manual for use by the Owner's personnel. At least 30 days prior to training, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer training packages for acceptance. B. Format 1. Size: 8 1/2 x 11 inch (21.59 x 27.94 cm). 2. Paper: 20-1b (9.072 kg) minimum, white, for typed pages. 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly word processed, including: a. Table of contents b. Pretest c. Learning objectives 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 01800-3 TRAINING d. General operations, theory, specific equipment information 4. Drawings a. Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text. b. Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages, not larger than 11 x 17 inch (27.94 x 43.18 cm). 5. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "Headworks Improvements - Screening and Grit Removal for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCFs" a. Title of Project b. Identity of separate structure or system as applicable c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual d. Locations C. Binders 1. Commercial quality three-post binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers 2. Maximum post width shall be 3 inches (7.62 cm) 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the information into related consistent groupings 1.12 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL A. Produce or provide video training material, subject to approval of the Owner. B. Furnish four (4) copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, the Owner's name, and time on label in a clear plastic sleeve. C. All costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs shall be borne by the Contractor. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01800-4 TRAINING I I Ii Ii II II Ii 1\ Ii II I] Ii Ii II II II II. II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.13 INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall, at the completion of Work, provide a competent and experienced person, thoroughly familiar with the Work, for a period of time as directed by the Owner to instruct permanent operating personnel in the operation of equipment and control systems. B. The Contractor shall furnish four (4) complete sets of operating instructions applying to each piece of equipment installed in conjunction with this Contract. C. An "As Installed" diagram of all control wiring and operating instructions shall be mounted in a water tight pocket on the inside door of the control panel of each unit. D. Unless otherwise specified, provide engraved metal, plastic tags, or instructions on any valve, switch, control, pipe or other piece of equipment which is not self evident as to its function or mode of operation. This includes, but is not limited to, all exposed piping and all switches. This shall particularly apply to operations which must be manually sequenced. PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 01800-5 TRAINING I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02060 DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition and removal of all buried piping, mechanical, structural and electrical facilities and equipment at City of Clearwater's Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF within the Limits of Demolition shown on the contract drawings. B. Site and/or facility restoration following demolition. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit asbestos and/or lead abatement plan provided by a qualified abatement contractor for removal of asbestos- or lead-containing materials, as identified and required per this Specification Section. B. Contractor shall submit Record Drawings accurately showing locations of capped utilities (i.e. piping), subsurface obstructions, and below-grade foundations that remain on-site following completion of demolition work. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, protection of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal of materials. B. Obtain permits from City building department and regulatory agencIes (as required). C. Notify affected utility companies before starting demolition operations and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, walkways, hydrants, parking areas, or buildings without required permits and/or Owner approvals. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if a hazardous environmental condition is encountered at any site. 1.04 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. If an unknown or unforeseeable hazardous environmental condition is encountered at the site, or if the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible creates a hazardous environmental condition, immediately: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition; 03720-022-01 September, 2007 02060-1 DEMOLITION 2. Stop all work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby; and 3. Notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). B. Resume work in connection with such condition or in any affected area only after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to the Contractor a written notice specifying under what special conditions Work may be resumed safely. PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fourteen days prior to performing any demolition, a coordination meeting shall be held between each of the prime Contractors, Owner, and Engineer to discuss the Contractor's Demolition Plan and related procedures. Items to be discussed shall include, but not be limited to, dust control, sequence of work, removal of material, protection of existing equipment, by-pass pumping, access and egress of material, etc. Demolition procedures must be coordinated with the Owner's operating personnel and adjusted accordingly, if necessary, to prevent an upset with facility operations. Following the coordination meeting, demolition operations shall begin after Contractor obtains written authorization to proceed from the Owner. B. Notify Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of intended start of demolition operations in each affected area. C. Erect and maintain temporary barriers, signs and security devices as required or directed by Owner or Engineer. D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions and weatherproof closures to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise in areas of continued Owner occupancy. E. Protect existing structures, equipment, appurtenances, architectural features, and materials that are not to be demolished. F. Protect existing site-related items such as pavements, walkways, parking areas, curbs, aprons, and landscaping features that are not to be demolished. G. Protect existing electrical; heating, ventilating and air conditioning; and plumbing systems, including related components, that are not to be demolished. H. Mark location of underground utilities. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 02060-2 DEMOLITION I I I I I I' I I I: Ii I I I I I Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Submit plans for abatement of asbestos and lead containing materials. 1. Submit plans for by-pass pumping. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Confme demolition operations to designated areas of the site, and within "Limits of Demolition" established in contract drawings. B. Conduct operations to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas (as appropriate). Maintain protected access and egress at all times. C. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Engineer, and do not resume operations until directed. D. All materials, equipment, piping, etc. shall become the property of the Contractor (unless otherwise requested by the Owner) and be disposed of at an approved facility . E. Grit shall be removed and disposed off at an approved facility per current FDEP and local regulations. F. Dispose of all rubble and non-metallic scrap at an approved facility. G. Conduct demolition work between the hours of7:00 AM and 5:00 PM 3.03 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Break up and remove slabs-on-grade, pavements, curbs, aprons, etc., and related items located within "Limits of Demolition" established to each site. B. Break up and remove foundation walls, footings, etc., including any below-grade concrete foundations, to a depth of 3- feet below existing grade. C. Break up and remove concrete structures and tanks, including walls, piers, base slabs, cover slabs, etc. Except where noted, for concrete tank floors/foundations greater than 3-feet below existing grade, break-up and fracture to allow drainage of water and to prevent water ponding within demolished area. D. Empty all water, grit and accumulated debris and remove buried tanks, meter pits, and associated piping. E. Disconnect and remove designated process piping systems, including valves and fittings. Plug openings in walls and floors where utilities are removed. F. Carefully disconnect, protect and remove any equipment designated for Owner's future use. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 DEMOLITION 02060-3 G. Remove and dispose of demolished materials as work progresses. Do not bum materials. Do not bury materials. H. Patch and refinish existing visible metal surfaces that are to remain and repair concrete surfaces that are to remain. 1. Paint designated metal surfaces and reinforcing steel exposed by demolition operations. J. Remove temporary barricades, partitions, SIgns, etc., upon completion of demolition operations. K. Remove and dispose of debris, trash, and other scrap. 1. Upon completion of demolition operations, leave areas in a clean condition. 3.04 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Structural and Mechanical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and remove all structures, portions of structures, pavement, process piping, and other items a~ required in this specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or as necessary to accomplish the work. The Contractor shall protect piping to remain as shown in the Contract Drawings. Electrical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and remove or relocate conduit and wires, supports and hangers, electrical panels, lighting, and other items as required in this specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or as necessary to accomplish the work. Major work items scheduled for demolition include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Northeast Headworks Building including mechanical equipment, remove existing roof as shown in contract drawings and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 2. Marshall Street Headworks Building including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 3. Marshall Street Headworks Building including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. Items undergoing demolition that contain asbestos were identified in an Asbestos/Lead-Based Paint Survey, prepared by HSA Engineers and Scientists, ,dated September 2004 (enclosed with these specifications). 4. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 02060-4 DEMOLITION I I: Ii Ii Ii I: I: Ii I Ii II II I I Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 September, 2007 Removal and disposal of these materials shall be by the following methods: a. The pipe insulation elbow and cloth vibration joint are considered to be Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials and must be abated by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor under gross abatement conditions prior to the demolition of the structures. The removed asbestos shall be collected, containerized, and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. b. The roofmg material containing Category 1 asbestos contammg materials may remain in place during demolition activities provided that it is kept adequately wet, per NESHAP regulations. The removed asbestos containing materials shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. 5. For piping to remain and for new piping to be installed, see City Technical Specifications and Approved Materials Listing. END OF SECTION 02060-5 DEMOLITION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 02060 DEMOLITION PART I GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Demolition and removal of all buried piping, mechanical, structural and electrical facilities and equipment at City of Clearwater's Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF within the Limits of Demolition shown on the contract drawings. B. Site and/or facility restoration following demolition. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit asbestos and/or lead abatement plan provided by a qualified abatement contractor for removal of asbestos- or lead-containing materials, as identified and required per this Specification Section. B. Contractor shall submit Record Drawings accurately showing locations of capped utilities (i.e. piping), subsurface obstructions, and below-grade foundations that remain on-site following completion of demolition work. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable codes for demolition of structures, protection of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control, and disposal of materials. B. Obtain permits from City building department and regulatory agencIes (as required). C. Notify affected utility companies before starting demolition operations and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct roadways, walkways, hydrants, parking areas, or buildings without required permits and/or Owner approvals. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if a hazardous environmental condition is encountered at any site. 1.04 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS A. If an unknown or unforeseeable hazardous environmental condition is encountered at the site, or if the Contractor or anyone for whom the Contractor is responsible creates a hazardous environmental condition, immediately: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate such condition; 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 02060-1 DEMOLITION 2. Stop all work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby; and 3. Notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly thereafter confmn such notice in writing). B. Resume work in connection with such condition or in any affected area only after Owner has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered to the Contractor a written notice specifying under what special conditions Work may be resumed safely. PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOTUSED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fourteen days prior to performing any demolition, a coordination meeting shall be held between each of the prime Contractors, Owner, and Engineer to discuss the Contractor's Demolition Plan and related procedures. Items to be discussed shall include, but not be limited to, dust control, sequence of work, removal of material, protection of existing equipment, by-pass pumping, access and egress of material, etc. Demolition procedures must be coordinated with the Owner's operating personnel and adjusted accordingly, if necessary, to prevent an upset with facility operations. Following the coordination meeting, demolition operations shall begin after Contractor obtains written authorization to proceed from the Owner. B. Notify Owner and Engineer at least 48 hours in advance of intended start of demolition operations in each affected area. C. Erect and maintain temporary barriers, signs and security devices as required or directed by Owner or Engineer. D. Erect and maintain temporary partitions and weatherproof closures to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise in areas of continued Owner occupancy. E. Protect existing structures, equipment, appurtenances, architectural features, and materials that are not to be demolished. F. Protect existing site-related items such as pavements, walkways, parking areas, curbs, aprons, and landscaping features that are not to be demolished. G. Protect existing electrical; heating, ventilating and air conditioning; and plumbing systems, including related components, that are not to be demolished. H. Mark location of underground utilities. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 02060-2 DEMOLITION I I I I I: I; I II Ii I Ii Ii I Ii Ii II 1\ II I I] I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Submit plans for abatement of asbestos and lead containing materials. J. Submit plans for by-pass pumping. 3.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Confine demolition operations to designated areas of the site, and within "Limits of Demolition" established in contract drawings. B. Conduct operations to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas (as appropriate). Maintain protected access and egress at all times. C. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify Engineer, and do not resume operations until directed. D. All materials, equipment, piping, etc. shall become the property of the Contractor (unless otherwise requested by the Owner) and be disposed of at an approved facility . E. Grit shall be removed and disposed off at an approved facility per current FDEP and local regulations. F. Dispose of all rubble and non-metallic scrap at an approved facility. G. Conduct demolition work between the hours of7:00 AM and 5:00 PM 3.03 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Break up and remove slabs-on-grade, pavements, curbs, aprons, etc., and related items located within "Limits of Demolition" established to each site. B. Break up and remove foundation walls, footings, etc., including any below-grade concrete foundations, to a depth of3-feet below existing grade. C. Break up and remove concrete structures and tanks, including walls, piers, base slabs, cover slabs, etc. Except where noted, for concrete tank floors/foundations greater than 3-feet below existing grade, break-up and fracture to allow drainage of water and to prevent water ponding within demolished area. D. Empty all water, grit and accumulated debris and remove buried tanks, meter pits, and associated piping. E. Disconnect and remove designated process piping systems, including valves and fittings. Plug openings in walls and floors where utilities are removed. F. Carefully disconnect, protect and remove any equipment designated for Owner's future use. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 02060-3 DEMOLITION I! 1\ G. Remove and dispose of demolished materials as work progresses. Do not bum materials. Do not bury materials. Ii H. Patch and refinish existing visible metal surfaces that are to remain and repair concrete surfaces that are to remain. I 1. Paint designated metal surfaces and reinforcing steel exposed by demolition operations. Ii J. Remove temporary barricades, partitions, sIgns, etc., upon completion of demolition operations. I. Ii K. Remove and dispose of debris, trash, and other scrap. 1. Upon completion of demolition operations, leave areas in a clean condition. 3.04 SUMMARY OF WORK Ii 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Structural and Mechanical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and remove all structures, portions of structures, pavement, process piping, and other items as required in this specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or as necessary to accomplish the work. The Contractor shall protect piping to remain as shown in the Contract Drawings. I, I Ii I I Ii II I I I I Electrical Demolition. The Contractor shall demolish and remove or relocate conduit and wires, supports and hangers, electrical panels, lighting, and other items as required in this specification and as shown on the Contract Drawings or as necessary to accomplish the work. Major work items scheduled for demolition include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Northeast Headworks Building including mechanical equipment, remove existing roof as shown in contract drawings and, all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 2. Marshall Street Headworks Building including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 3. Marshall Street Headworks Building including mechanical equipment (mechanical bar screens and grit removal system), and all associated piping, conduits and appurtenances. 4. Items undergoing demolition that contain asbestos were identified in an Asbestos/Lead-Based Paint Survey, prepared by HSA Engineers and Scientists, dated September 2004 (enclosed with these specifications). 02060-4 DEMOLITION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Removal and disposal of these materials shall be by the following methods: a. The pipe insulation elbow and cloth vibration joint are considered to be Regulated Asbestos Containing Materials and must be abated by a licensed asbestos abatement contractor under gross abatement conditions prior to the demolition of the structures. The removed asbestos shall be collected, containerized, and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. b. The roofing material containing Category 1 asbestos contammg materials may remain in place during demolition activities provided that it is kept adequately wet, per NESHAP regulations. The removed asbestos containing materials shall be collected and disposed of in accordance with Federal, State and local regulations. 5. For piping to remain and for new piping to be installed, see City Technical Specifications and Approved Materials Listing. END OF SECTION 02060-5 DEMOLITION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03180 CORROSION-RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish and install all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to supply and install corrosion resistant lining on the screen and grit removal system channels at the Northeast, Marshall Street and East APCF. B. Corrosion-resistant polymer liner shall be designed and installed to protect concrete surfaces from corrosion. 1.02 RELATED WORK (REQUIREMENTS) A. The following is a partiaIlist of, but not necessarily limited to, other sections of the specifications that are applicable to the specified equipment or structure described herein that are referred to for reference and are not included in this Section. There are other sections of these specifications that are also applicable and the CONTRACTOR is advised to review these sections and adhere to the requirements specified herein. 1. Concrete work is included under Division 3. 2. Shop and field painting are specified under Division 9. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for review, in accordance with Section 01340, complete detailed shop drawings and a coating schedule for all materials furnished under this Section. B. The manufacturer of the lining shall furnish an affidavit attesting to the successful use of its material as a lining for concrete structures for a minimum period of 5 years in wastewater conditions recognized as corrosive or otherwise detrimental to concrete. C. The corrosion-resistant polymer lining shall be Sewergard Trowelable No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen or ENGINEER approved equal. D. The lining system shall be applied by a qualified applicator trained in handling, mixing and application of the material including the required surface cleaning and preparation. A list of references of projects in Florida using the specified lining system shall be provided to the ENGINEER for review. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CORROSION RESIST ANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03180-1 I II PART 2 PRODUCTS A. Composition Ii Ii II II II II II II Ii Ii II I II II II II II 2.01 MATERIALS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. The material used in the liner shall be a combination of powder, liquid and hardener that must be mixed together as used, specially compounded to protect concrete surfaces from corrosion. B. Physical Properties 1. All cured corrosion-resistant polymer lining shall be free of cracks, cleavages, or other defects adversely affecting the protective characteristics of the material. The ENGINEER may authorize the repair of such defects by approved methods. 2. The lining shall have good impact resistance, shall be flexible, and shall have sufficient elongation to bridge hairline cracks in the concrete. 3. The lining shall be repairable at any time during the life of the structure. 4. The corrosion-resistant polymer lining shall have the physical properties as given in either Table 1 below: TABLE 1 Working Time - 700P (ASTM C-308 modified) 40- 50 minutes Initial Set Time - 700F (ASTM C-308 modified) 17 hours Bond Strength to Dry/Damp Concrete Manhole (ASTM C-478) Concrete Failed Compressive Strength (ASTM C-579) 7300 psi (6.26 x 106 Kg/M2) Density (ASTM C-905) 113pcf (1.7 x 103 Kg/M3) Flexural Strength (ASTM C-580) 4900 psi (6.5 x 106 Kg/M2) CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03180-2 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM C-580) 2.75 X 105 psi (1.8 x 108Kg/M2) Tensile Strength (ASTM C-307) 2,000 psi (2.7 x 106 Kg/M2) C. Storage of Materials 1. Store material in an approved area within a temperature range of 65-80 degrees F, for 48 hours prior to use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Condition of Working Area 1. Corrosion-resistant polymer lining shall be applied to surfaces between 65-80 of. If the surface temperature is between 50-65 of or 80-90 of, the corrosion- resistant polymer lining may be applied; however, the CONTRACTOR must contact the manufacturer for a written recommendation prior to application. 2. Concrete surfaces requiring excessive repairs beyond the economic capability of the epoxy lining shall be repaired with cementitious materials. Available in both horizontal and vertical grades, quick set concretes can be used to patch or overlay existing deteriorated concrete surfaces. a. For small areas in need of repair, repairs shall be accomplished by using Sauereisen Filler Compound No. 209 as manufactured by Sauereisen or ENGINEER-approved-equal. b. For larger areas in need ofJ,"epair, repairs shall be accomplished by using Sauereisen Underlayment No. F-120 Trowelable as manufactured by Sauereisen or ENGINEER-approved-equal. 3. The CONTRACTOR shall consult the lining manufacturer for recommendations to insure compatibility between the surface and the lining. B. Surface Preparation I. New Concrete - The compressive strength of the concrete must be at least 4,000 psi and have a minimum 28-day cure unless a quick-set, polymer type concrete is used prior to application of corrosion-resistant polymer lining. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03180-3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. All surfaces of the concrete must be either abrasive-blasted using 16- 30-mesh sand, or hydro-blasted. All surfaces must be dry prior to application. The coating manufacturer shall provide standard testing procedures, such as ASTM-D4263, to determine if excess moisture is present in the concrete. I Ii II I I I I I b. Concrete surfaces that have been cured with conventional curing compounds or are contaminated with form oils or grease must be chemically cleaned or scarified to remove these contaminants before abrasive blasting or hydroblasting is started. c. Suitably finished concrete must have a uniform surface texture exposing fme aggregate, and resembling coarse sandpaper. If surface texture is not uniform in appearance, repeat surface preparation procedure until the desired surface is obtained. d. If sandblasting is used as the method of surface preparation, remove all sand and debris by. thoroughly vacuuming the area. If hydroblasting is used, all surfaces must be surface dry without any standing water prior to application of corrosion- resistant polymer lining. If II Ii I II I! Ii I: Ii II II 2. Old Concrete - Prior to application of the corrosion-resistant polymer lining, old concrete must be examined to see that it is free of loose particles, oils, grease, chemical contaminants and previously applied paints or protective coatings. Chemical cleaning or mechanical scarifiers can be used to remove such surface contaminants. a. Concrete contaminated with acids, oils, grease, or fats - Spread powdered soda ash or trisodium phosphate on the surface and wet down with warm water. Scrub surface vigorously with power scrubber or steel bristle brushes to remove all loose cement and/or aggregate. Allow to stand 10 minutes. Flush with clean water and check pH. Repeat this procedure if necessary until a slightly alkaline surface is obtained. (A pH between 10 and 12 is ideal). Dry thoroughly. b. Concrete contaminated with alkalis - Remove excess alkalis by steam cleaning or flushing with high-pressure water. Scrub surface with a strong commercial detergent using I pound per gallon of warm water. Use power scrubber or steel bristle brushes to remove all loose . cement and/or aggregate. Flush with clean water. Dry thoroughly. CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03180-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 c. After the concrete has been treated in this manner, follow either sandblasting or hydroblasting procedures described under new concrete section above. All concrete to receive the corrosion-resistant polymer lining must be surface dry with no standing water and free of contaminants that would affect the bond of the corrosion-resistant polymer lining to the concrete. C. Expedited Curing 1. Time to final cure is directly related to temperature. Should accelerated curing using external heat sources be desired, the CONTRACTOR shall follow the proper force curing schedules as provided by the coating manufacturer. 2. The temperature at which the coating manufacturer expresses curing time should be noted. If local ambient temperatures are higher, shorter curing times should be expected. The CONTRACTOR should contact the coating manufacturer for case histories in similar climates. D. Application 1. Mixing - Corrosion-resistant polymer lining is packaged in a pre-measured, unitized container consisting ofliquid, hardener, and powder, which must be mixed together before use in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. 2. Once the compound has begun to set, it cannot be recovered by adding more liquid; such material must be discarded. 3. Never add water, Portland Cement, or any other additive or adulterant to any component or the mixed compound. 4. Installation - Corrosion-resistant polymer lining is applied at 1/8-inch thickness by trowel. Corrosion-resistant polymer lining must be applied by an experienced applicator of this type of lining. Coverage may vary de- pending upon substrate conditions. 5. Curing - Do not allow water or chemicals on the corrosion-resistant polymer lining for a minimum of24 hours at 70OP. For temperatures below 70OP, cure a minimum of 48 hours prior to water or chemical exposure. 6. The lining is to be finished to a pinhole free resin-rich surface by roller in specific accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to provide a sealed surface. CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING 03180-5 03720-022-01 October, 2007 E. 7. The finished lining shall be spark-tested by the applicator under the observation of the ENGINEER, to ensure a pinhole-free application. Any pinholes must be identified and repaired per the manufacturer's instructions. I Ii II I II II II II Ii I Ii Manufacturer's Assistance 1. Prior to job start-up, a meeting shall be held including the OWNER, ENGINEER, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, CONTRACTOR and coating manufacturer or his representative. 2. The coating manufacturer's representative shall be available to the Applicator, at the job site, for assistance at the time of initial coating application. The 'coating manufacturer's representative shall provide guidance and hands-on application demonstration to the Applicator in order to achieve a comfortable and proficient working level. 3. Manufacturer shall certify in writing final coating within 10 days after application. END OF SECTION Ii I CORROSION RESISTANT POL YMERlEPOXY LINING Ii II II II II II II II 03180-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03250 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install accessories for concrete joints as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel included in Section 03300. B. Miscellaneous Metals are included in Section 05500. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings and product data. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Standard Waterstops: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, splicing methods and conformity to ASTM standards. 2. Special Waterstops: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, location of use, storage requirements, splicing methods, installation instructions and conformity to ASTM standards. 3. Premolded joint fillers: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use and conformity to ASTM standards. 4. Bond breaker: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use and conformity to ASTM standards. 5. Expansion joint dowels: Product data on the complete assembly including dowels, coatings, lubricants, spacers, sleeves, expansion caps, installation requirements and conformity to ASTM standards. 6. Compressible joint filler: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, installation requirements, location of use and conformity to ASTM standards. 7. Bonding agents: Product data including catalogue cut, technical data, storage requirements, product life, application requirements and conformity to ASTM 03250-1 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES standards. B. Certifications 1. Certification that all materials used within the joint system are compatible with each other. 2. Certification that materials used in the construction of joints are suitable for use in contact with potable water 30 days after installation. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A675 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Hot-Wrought, Special Quality, Mechanical Properties. 2. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 3. ASTM C1059 - Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete. 4. ASTM D 1 751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types). 5. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (CRD). 1. CRD C572 - Specification for Polyvinyl chloride Waterstops. C. Federal Specifications 1. FS SS-S-21OA - Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints. D. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. 03250-2 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES I Ii II II II I! I: II Ii II II Ii II II II II I Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. All materials used together in a given j oint (bond breakers, backer rods, joint fillers, sealants, etc) shall be compatible with one another. Coordinate selection of suppliers and products to ensure compatibility. Under no circumstances shall asphaltic bond breakers or joint fillers be used in joints receiving sealant. C. All chemical sealant type waterstops shall be products specifically manufactured for the purpose for which they will be used and the products shall have been successfully used on similar structures for more than five years. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Standard Waterstops 1. Steel Plate Waterstops - Non-expansion joint. . 6-inby 1I4-in steel plate waterstops shall be fabricated from weldable carbon steel plate with a minimum yield strength of33,000 psi. 4-in by l/4-in steel plate waterstops shall be used for wall horizontal construction joints. B. Special Waterstops 1. Base Seal PV C Waterstop - The waterstop shall be made by extruding elastomeric plastic compound with virgin polyvinyl chloride as the basic resins. The compound shall contain no reprocessed materials. Minimum tensile strength of waters top shall be 1750 psi. The waterstop shall conform to CRD-C572. Waterstops shall be style 925 for expansionjoints, style 928 for control joints, and style 927 for constructionjoints by GreenstreakPlastic Products, St. Louis, MO or equal. 2. Preformed adhesive waterstops - The waterstop shall be a rope type preformed plastic waterstop meeting the requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210A. The rope shall have a cross-section of approximately one square inch unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. The waterstop shall be Synko- Flex waterstop as manufactured by Synko-Flex Products of Houston, TX or equal. Primer for the material shall be as recommended by the waterstop manufacturer. C. Premolded Joint Filler 1. Premolded joint filler - structures. Self-expanding cork, premolded joint filler shall conform to ASTM D1752, Type III. The thickness shall be 3/4-in unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 2. Premolded joint filler - sidewalk and roadway concrete pavements or where fiber joint filler is specifically noted on the Drawings. The joint filler shall be asphalt-impregnated fiber board conforming to ASTM D1751. Thickness shall be 3/4-in unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 03250-3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES D. Bond Breaker 1. Bond breaker tape shall be an adhesive-backed glazed butyl or polyethylene tape which will satisfactorily adhere to the premolded j oint filler or concrete surface as required. The tape shall be the same width as the joint. 2. Except where tape is specifically called for on the drawings, bond breaker for concrete shall be either bond breaker tape or a nonstaining type bond prevention coating such as Williams Tilt-up Compound by Williams Distributors Inc.; Silcoseal 77, by SCA Construction Supply Division, Superior Concrete Accessories or equal. E. Expansion Joint Dowels F. G. PART 3 1. Dowels shall be smooth steel conforming to ASTM A675, Grade 70. Dowels must be straight and clean, free of loose flaky rust and loose scale. Dowels may be sheared to length provided deformation from true shape caused by shearing does not exceed 0.04-in on the diameter of the dowel and extends no more than 0.04-in from the end. Bars shall be coated with a bond breaker on the expansion end of the dowel. Expansion caps shall be provided on the expansion end. Caps shall allow for at least I-1/2-in of expansion. Bonding Agent 1. Epoxy bonding agent shall be a two-component, solvent-free, moisture insensitive, epoxy resin material conforming to ASTM C881, Type II. The bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32 Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation of Lyndhurst, N.J.; Concresive Liquid (LPL) by Master Builders of Cleveland, OH or equal. Acrylic may be used if approved by the Engineer. Compressible Joint Filler 1. The joint filler shall be a non-extruded watertight strip material use to fill expansion joints between structures. The material shall be capable of being compressed at least 40 percent for 70 hours at 68 degrees F and subsequently recovering at least 20 percent of its original thickness in the first 1/2 hour after unloading. Compressible Joint filler shall be Evasote 380 E.S.P, by E-Poxy Industries, Inc., Ravena, NY , Sikaflex 1a by Sika or equal. EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Standard Waterstops 03720-022-01 October, 2007 03250-4 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES I] Ii II I I Ii I II Ii II Ii II II Ii I II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Install waterstops for all joints where indicated on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. Splices shall be made by welding. 2. Steel plate waterstops shall be spliced by either butt welding the ends of the plates together or lapping the plates and fillet welding along the full width of the plate at both ends of the lap. 3. Steel plate waterstops shall be firmly secured in position during concrete placement. 4. Horizontal waterstops in slabs shall be clamped in position by the bulkhead (unless previously set in concrete). 5. Waterstops shall be installed so that half of the width will be embedded on each side of the joint. Care shall be exercised to ensure that the waterstop is completely embedded in void-free concrete. 6. Waterstops shall be terminated 3-in below the exposed top of walls. Expansionjoint waterstop center bulbs shall be plugged with foam rubber, 1- in deep, at point of termination. B. Special Waterstops 1. Install special waterstops at joints where specifically noted on the Drawings. Waterstops shall be continuous around all corners and intersections so that a continuous seal is provided. 2. Each piece of the waterstop shall be of maximum practicable length to provide a minimum number of connections or splices. Connections and splices shall conform to the manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. 3. Waterstops shall be terminated 3-in below the exposed top of walls. C. Construction Joints 1. Make construction joints only at locations shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. Any additional or relocation of constructionjoints proposed by the Contractor, must be submitted to the Engineer for written approval. 2. Additional or relocated joints should be located where they least impair strength of the member. In general, locate joints within the middle third of spans of slabs, beams and girders. However, if a beam intersects a girder at the joint, offset the joint a distance equal to twice the width of the member being connected. Locate joints in walls and columns at the underside of 03250-5 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 floors, slabs, beams or girders and at tops of footings or floor slabs. Do not locate joints between beams, girders, column capitals, or drop panels and the slabs above them. Do not locate joints between brackets or haunches and walls or columns supporting them. I I II 3. All joints shall be perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcing steel through the joint as indicated on the Drawings. When joints in beams are allowed, provide a shear key and inclined dowels as approved by the Engineer. I I II 4. Provide sealant grooves for joint sealant where indicated on the Drawings. 5. At all construction joints and at concrete joints designated on the Drawings to be "roughened", uniformly roughen the surface of the concrete to a full amplitude (distance between high and low points or side to side) of approximately 1/4-in to expose a fresh face. Thoroughly cleanjoint surfaces ofloose or weakened materials by waterblasting or sandblasting and prepare for bonding. I: I I I I I Ii II Ii Ii I 6. Provide waterstops in all wall and slab construction joints in liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 7. Keyways shall not be used in construction joints unless specifically shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer. D. Expansion Joints 1. Do not extend through expansion joints, reinforcement or other embedded metal items that are continuously bonded to concrete on each side of joint. 2. Position premolded joint filler material accurately. Secure the joint filler against displacement during concrete placement and compaction. Place joint filler over the face of the joint, allowing for sealant grooves as detailed on the Drawings. Tape all joint filler splices to prevent intrusion of mortar. Seal expansion joints as shown on the Drawings. 3. Expansion joints shall be 3/4-in in width unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 4. Where indicated on Drawings, install smooth dowels at right angles to expansion joints. Align dowels accurately with fInished surface. Rigidly hold in place and support during concrete placement. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, apply oil or grease to one end of all dowels through expansion joints. Provide plastic expansion caps on the lubricated ends of expansion dowels. 5. Provide center bulb type waterstops in all wall and slab expansion joints in 11 II 03250-6 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 liquid containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. E. Control Joints 1. Provide sealant grooves, sealants and waterstops at control joints in slabs on grade or walls as detailed. Provide waterstops at all wall and slab control joints in water containment structures and at other locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Control joints may be sawed if specifically approved by the Engineer. If control joint grooves are sawed, properly time the saw cutting with the time of the concrete set. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates from being dislodged by the saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses have developed sufficiently to induce cracking. No reinforcing shall be cut during sawcutting. 3. Extend every other bar of reinforcing steel through control joints or as indicated on the Drawings. Where specifically noted on the Drawings, coat the concrete surface with a bond breaker prior to placing new concrete against it. A void coating reinforcement or waterstops with bond breaker at these locations. END OF SECTION 03250-7 CONCRETE JOINTS AND JOINT ACCESSORIES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 03300 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and perform all concrete work as ordered by the Engineer, as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01340, shop drawings showing locations of all joints and accessories. Submit full shop drawings and bar schedules for reinforcing steel. Submit technical data on all materials and components. Submit other data specified herein when required. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A185 - Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 4. ASTM C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates 5. ASTM C94 - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 6. ASTM C 150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. ASTM D1752 - Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: conforming to ASTM C 150, Type II. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 03300-1 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL 2.02 2.03 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. Fine aggregate: washed natural sand conforming to ASTM C33. I I I I Ii II II II I II C. Coarse aggregate: well graded crushed stone conforming to ASTM C33, size No. 57. D. Fly Ash (pozzolan): Comply with ASTM C618, Type C or F. E. Water shall be potable, clean, and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, oils, or organic matter. F. Chemical admixtures shall be free of chlorides and alkalis. All admixtures from the same manufacturer, and mutually compatible with each other and the concrete mix. 1. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. G. Reinforcing steel: conform to ASTM A615, Grade 60. H. Welded steel wire reinforcement shall be sized as shown and be in accordance with ASTM A185. 1. Bonding compound: Sikadur Hi Mod by Sika Corp., similar by Euclid Chemical Corporation; Master Builders or equal. J. Premolded Joint Filler: self-expanding cork conforming to ASTM D1752, Type III. K. Vapor Barrier: 6 mil polyethylene with a maximum perm rating of 0.3. . \ Ii CONCRETE QUALITY A. Unless otherwise specified or directed, concrete shall be designed for a minimum allowable compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days. Concrete mix requirements: Ii 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Cementitious Content (cement + pozzolan): Maximum water/cement ratio: Fly Ash, by weight: Entrained Air: Slump: 560 lbs/yd min. I. I i I 0.44 20-25% 3.5-5% 3-5in. B. Proportion admixtures per manufacturer's recommendations. . I II MIXING CONCRETE II II Ii II A. Ready-mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C94 and the requirements herein, or as otherwise approved by the Engineer. If ready-mix concrete is to be used, the manufacturer shall furnish a statement to the Engineer for his approval giving the dry proportions to be used, with evidence that these will produce concrete of the quality specified. 03300-2 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged. The mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the mixer manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for at least 1-1/2 minutes after all the materials are in the mixer. Concrete shall be placed within 1-1/2 hours of the time at which water was first added, otherwise it shall be rejected. Concrete which has been remixed or retempered, or to which an excess amount of water has been added, shall also be rejected. 2.04 FORMS A. Forms shall be free from roughness and imperfections, substantially watertight and adequately braced and tied to prevent motion when concrete is placed. No wooden spreaders will be allowed in the concrete. B. Wire ties will not be allowed. Metal ties or anchorages which are required within the forms shall be so constructed that the metal work can be removed for a depth of at least I-in from the surface of the concrete without injury to such surface by spalling or otherwise. C. Concrete surfaces which are to be painted shall be formed with hard plastic finished plywood or a similar material which does not require a form release agent unless the Contractor can substantiate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the form release agent will not remain on the formed surface after it is stripped. D. Form materials shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to use. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REINFORCING STEEL A. Fabrication of reinforcement shall be in compliance with the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. B. Cold bend all bars. C. Bend bars around a pin of minimum diameter of 6 bar diameters. D. Cut bars by shearing or sawing. No torch cutting of bars will be allowed. E. Reinforcement shall be shipped to the work with bars of the same size and shape fastened in bundles with metal identification tags giving size and mark securely wired on. The identification tags shall be labeled with the same designation as shown on submitted bar schedules and shop drawings. F. Store all bars off the ground, protect from moisture and keep free from dirt, oil, or injurious coatings. 03720"022-01 . October, 2007 03300-3 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL 3.02 3.03 3.04 03720-022-01 October, 2007 G. All splices as shown on the drawings. Additional splices must be approved by the Engineer. I' I I I I H. Splice welded wire fabric by lapping not less than 1-1/2 courses or 12-in, whichever is greater. Tie wire fabric splices together with wire ties spaced no more than 24-in on center. 1. Before being placed in position, reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of loose mill and rust scale, dirt and other coatings that reduce or destroy bond. Where there is delay in depositing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be reinspected and cleaned when necessary. J. Reinforcement which is to be exposed for a considerable length of time after being placed shall be painted with a heavy coat of cement grout, if required. II K. In no case shall any reinforcing steel be covered with concrete until the amount and position of the reinforcements have been checked by the Engineer and his permission given to proceed with the concreting. I II I, I FORM TOLERANCES A. Forms shall be surfaced, designed and constructed in accordance with the recommendations of ACE 347 and shall meet the following additional requirements for the specified finishes: 1. Formed Surface Exposed to View: Edges of all form panels in contact with concrete shall be flush within 1/32-in and forms for plane surfaces shall be such that the concrete will be plane within 1/16-in in 4-ft. Forms shall be tight to prevent the passage of mortar, water and grout. The maximum deviation of the finish wall surface at any point shall not exceed lf4-in from the intended surface as shown on the Drawings. Form panels shall be arranged symmetrically and in an orderly manner to minimize the number of seams. II Ii 2. Formed Surfaces to receive paint: Surface deflections shall be limited to 1/32- in at any point and the variation in wall deflection shall not exceed 1/16-in per 4- ft. The maximum deviation of the fmished wall surface at any point shall not exceed lf4-in from the intended surface on the drawings. II Ii Ii PREPARATION OF SURFACES A. All surfaces to receive bonding compound shall be prepared in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations before the application of the bonding compound. I Ii PLACING CONCRETE A. Reinforcement, where required, shall be accurately placed in exact positions shown, shall be secured against displacement with annealed iron wire ties or suitable clips at intersections and shall have a clear space of2-in between the steel and face of forms unless otherwise indicated. Wire ties passing through the forms for the purpose of holding the steel in proper position will not be allowed. Concrete blocks with wire ties 11 03300-4 Ii CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I cast therein may be used where approved by the Engineer for the purpose of maintaining the clearance between reinforcement and forms. B. No concrete shall be placed until forms and method of placement have been approved by the Engineer. Before depositing concrete, all debris, foreign matter, dirt and water shall be removed from the forms. The surface of concrete previously placed, such as manhole base or horizontal construction joint, shall be cleaned and brushed with cement paste. Concrete shall not be placed in water or submerged within 24 hours after placing, nor shall running water be permitted to flow over the surface of fresh concrete within 4 days after its placing. C. High frequency mechanical vibrators shall be used to the extent necessary to obtain proper consolidation of the concrete. Care shall be taken to avoid segregation of aggregates by excessive vibration. Concrete adjacent to forms and around pipe stubs shall be carefully spaded or rodded. D. Concrete walls shall be deposited in one continuous operation with concrete brought up evenly on all sides. Chutes shall be of metal, "U" shaped, and provided with abaffle plate at the end, if necessary, to prevent segregation of materials. Chutes shall be placed at an angle of not less than 25 degrees, nor more than 45 degrees from horizontal and they shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete. E. No concrete shall be mixed or placed during freezing weather without explicit permission. When placing concrete when air temperature is below 40 degrees F, the water, sand and gravel shall be heated so that the temperature of the concrete will be at least 50 degrees F. This temperature shall be maintained for 72 hours after placing. No concrete shall be placed on frozen ground. 3.05 FIELD TESTS A. Sets of three field control cylinder specimens will be taken at random during the progress of the work, in conformity with ASTM C31; the total number of specimens taken on the project shall be not less than one set of specimens on anyone day when concrete is placed. When average ultimate 28 day strength of control cylinders in any set falls below the required ultimate strength or below proportional minimum 7 day strengths where proper relation between 7 and 28 day strengths have been established by tests, proportions, water content, or temperature conditions shall be changed to secure the required strength. B. Cooperate in the making of such tests to the extent of allowing free access to the work for the selection of samples, providing heated moist storage facilities for specimens, affording protection to the specimens against injury or loss through his operation and furnishing material and labor required for the purpose of taking concrete cylinder samples, curing boxes and shipping boxes. All shipping of specimens will be paid for by the Owner. 3.06 STRIPPING AND FINISHING CONCRETE (TIE BEAMS) A. Forms shall not be stripped before the concrete has attained a strength of at least 30 03720-022-01 October, 2007 03300-5 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL percent of the ultimate design strength, except as otherwise specified. This is equivalent to approximately" 1 00 day-degrees" of moist curing. B. Care shall be exercised to prevent damaging edges or obliterating the lines of chamfers, rustications or corners when removing the forms or doing any other work adjacent thereto. C. Clean all exposed concrete surfaces and adjoining work stained by leakage of concrete, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. D. As soon as forms have been stripped, form ties, if employed, shall be removed and the recess filled. Any defects in the surface of the walls shall be chipped out and repaired in a workmanlike manner. Defective concrete where it occurs shall be cut to a minimum depth of I-in, thoroughly roughened and neat cement brushed in. The hole shall then be filled with mortar in the proportion of 1 part cement and 2-112 parts sand with a minimum of water. Mortar for filling form tie recesses shall be mixed to a slightly damp consistency Gust short of "balling"), pressed into the recess until dense and troweled smooth. Mortar in larger patches shall be applied and allowed to assume a partial set following which it shall be struck off flush with the adjoining surface. Patches shall be kept moist for several days to assure proper curing. E. Concrete to receive dampproofing and concrete not exposed in the finished work shall have off-form fmish with fins and other projections removed and tie cones and defects filled as specified. F. Rubbed Finished (Exposed Concrete) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Immediately upon stripping forms and before concrete has changed in color, all fins shall be carefully removed with a hammer. While the wall is still damp, apply a thin coat of medium consistency neat cement slurry by means of bristle brushes to provide a bonding coat within all pits, air holes or blemishes in the parent concrete; avoid coating large areas of the fmished surface with this slurry. 2. Before this slurry has dried or changed color, apply a dry (almost crumbly) grout consisting of one volume cement to 1-112 volumes of clean masonry sand having a fmeness modulus of approximately 2.25 and complying with gradation requirements of the ASTM for such a material. Grout shall be uniformly applied by means of damp (neither dripping wet nor dry) pads of coarse burlap approximately 6-in square used as a float. Grout shall be well scrubbed into the pits and air holes to provide a dense mortar in the imperfections to be patched. 3. Allow the mortar to partially harden for I or 2 hours depending upon the weather. If the air is hot and dry, keep the wall damp during this period using a fine, fog spray. When the grout has hardened sufficiently so it can be scraped from the surface with the perpendicular edge of a steel trowel without damaging the grout in the small pits or holes, cut off all that can be removed with a trowel. Grout allowed to remain on the wall too long will get too hard 03300-6 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL I: II II Ii Ii I I I.. I I I 1 Ii II I I II II Ii II -- 'i Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I and will be difficult to remove. 4. Allow the surface to dry thoroughly and rub it vigorously with clean dry burlap to completely remove any dried grout. No visible film of grout should remain after this rubbing. The entire cleaning operation for any area must be completed the day it is started. Do not leave grout on surfaces overnight. Allow sufficient time for grout to dry after it has been cut with the trowel so it can be wiped off clean with the burlap. 5. On the day following the repair of pits, air holes and blemishes, the walls again shall be wiped off clean with dry, used pieces of burlap containing old hardened mortar which will act as a mild abrasive. After this treatment, there shall be no built-up film remaining on the parent surface. If, however, such is present a fine abrasive stone shall be used to remove all such material without breaking through the surface film of the original concrete. Such scrubbing shall be light and sufficient only to remove excess material without working up a lather of mortar or change the texture of the concrete. 6. A thorough wash-down with stiff bristle brushes shall follow the final bagging or stoning operation in order that no extraneous materials remain on the surface of the wall. The wall shall be sprayed with a fme fog spray periodically to maintain a continually damp condition for at least 3 days after the application of the repair grout. 3.07 FINISHING FLOOR AND SLABS A. Floors and slabs shall be screeded to the established grades and shall be level with a tolerance of lI8-in when checked with a 12-ft straightedge, except where drains occur, in which case floors shall be pitched to drains as indicated. Failure to meet either of above shall be cause for removal, grinding, or other correction as directed by the Engineer. B. Following screeding as specified above, the concrete shall be compacted by hand or approved power tools. C. The floor or slab shall be compacted to a smooth surface and the floating operation continued until sufficient mortar is brought to the surface to fill all voids. The surfaces shall be tested with a straightedge to detect high and low spots which shall be eliminated. D. Compaction shall be continued only until thorough densification is attained and a small amount of mortar is brought to the surface. Excessive floating shall be avoided. E. After screeding and compacting procedures are accomplished, floors and slabs for particular conditions shall be finished as specified in the following paragraphs. F. Wood float areas receiving hardener maintaining surface tolerances to a perfectly smooth, hard, even fInish free from high or low spots or other defects. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 03300-7 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL G. Concrete for exterior service shall be broomed in the direction of slab drainage maintaining the surface tolerance to provide a non-slip fmish as approved. Edge trowel and score concrete in the pattern shown. H. Concrete receiving ceramic and resilient tile shall be steel troweled to a perfectly smooth, hard, even finish free from high or low spots or other defects. At ceramic tile areas, lightly broom after troweling. 3.08 BONDING COMPOUND A. Bonding compound shall be applied to the locations shown. The application of the bonding compound shall conform to all manufacturer's recommendations. 3.09 PREMOLDED JOINT FILLER A. Premolded joint fillers shall be installed at all locations shown. 3.010 MISCELLANEOUS WORK A. All bolts, anchors, miscellaneous metals or other sleeve steel work required to be set in the concrete forms for attachment of masonry, structural and mechanical equipment shall be set or installed under this Division. Be fully responsible for the setting of such materials, in the forms and shall correct all such not installed in a proper location or manner at his own expense. B. Electric conduits shall be installed in the concrete as required by the Drawings and as specified herein. Outlet boxes and fixtures shall be located in reference to the final floor, wall or ceiling finish and shall be so secured that they will not be displaced by concrete placing. C. Pipes or conduits for embedment, other than those merely passing through shall not be larger in outside diameter than 1/3 the thickness of the slab, wall or beam in which they are embedded, unless indicated on the Drawings, nor shall they be spaced closer than 3 diameters on center, nor so located as to unduly impair the strength of the construction. The Engineer shall approve the location of all conduits and fixtures. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 03300-8 CONCRETE AND REINFORCING STEEL I: Ii Ii Ii I Ii I: Ii Ii Ii II I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05120 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor and materials required and install structural steel including bearing plates, columns, beams and miscellaneous shapes and plates required to erect the structural framing as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Furnish only anchor bolts with templates to be installed under Division 3. Furnish and install nuts and washers for anchor bolts. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Miscellaneous metal is included in Section 05500. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, erection drawings, detailed shop drawings, schedules and data for all structural steel. Approval will be for strength only and shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for proper fit of members, of connections not detailed on the Drawings, or for supplying all material required by the Contract Documents. Mark numbers painted on the shop assembled pieces of steel shall be the same mark numbers used on the detailed shop and erection drawings. B. Certified mill test reports for the structural steel and the bolting materials. C. Certifications that welders are qualified, in accordance with A WS D 1.1, on the shop and field welding procedures to be used. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. AISC S302 - Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges 2. AISC S335 - Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design with Commentary. 3. AISC MO 16 - Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress Design. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05120-1 STRUCTURAL STEEL 2. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless 3. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dipped Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 4. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 5. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength 6. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes C. American Welding Society (A WS) 1. A WS A5.1 - Specification for Carbon Steel Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding. 2. A WS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code Steel. D. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation (RCSCEF) 1. Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts. E. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural steel shall be in accordance with the AISC Standard for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress Design and Plastic Design and the Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, unless otherwise specified herein. B . Welding shall be in accordance with A WS D 1.1 unless otherwise specified herein or in the AISC Standard. 1.06 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design connections not detailed on the Drawings to support loads shown on the Drawings. Calculations for these connections shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer in the State of Florida. B. Beam connections not detailed on the Drawings shall be bolted framed beam connections as shown in Table II of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design, Part 4. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05120-2 STRUCTURAL STEEL I I I I II I II Ii I Ii II II I Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Bolted shear connections shall be bearing-type connections unless otherwise shown. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials promptly so as to cause no delay with other parts of the work. B. Store materials on skids and not on the ground. Pile and block materials so that they will not become bent or otherwise damaged. C. Handle materials with cranes or derricks as far as practicable. Do not dump steel off cars or trucks nor handle in any other manner likely to cause damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Structural shapes, plates, rods and bars unless otherwise noted: ASTM A36. B. Structural tube: ASTM A500, Grade B or ASTM A501. C. Structural pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade B. D. Welding electrodes: A WS A5.1, E70XX. E. High strength steel bolts, nuts and washers: ASTM A325. When galvanized material is to be connected; use ASTM A325, mechanically galvanized to ASTM B695, Class 50, Type II. F. Anchor bolts: ASTM A307. G. Shop primer: As specified in Section 09901. H. Galvanizing: Zinc with 0.5 percent (minimum) nickel added. I. Galvanized surface primer: 95 percent zinc dust, organic vehicle primer. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Match-mark materials for field assembly. Ream unmatched holes in shop assembly of field connections. Reject and replace with new pieces any piece weakened by reaming to a point where the strength of the joint is impaired. B. Welding of parts shall be done only where shown on the Drawings or specified herein and by welders and welding operators qualified for the procedures used. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05120-3 STRUCTURAL STEEL 2.03 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP COATINGS A. Prepare and shop prime paint non-galvanized members as specified in Section 09901. Do not prime paint faying surfaces of slip critical connections. B. Galvanize members and their attachments exposed in whole or part to the weather, including beams supporting exterior masonry. Galvanize other members as indicated on the Drawings. Galvanizing shall be done after fabrication and in accordance with ASTM A123. Hardware galvanizing shall be in accordance with ASTM A153. Thoroughly clean, pickle, flux and immerse members in bath of molten zinc until their temperature becomes the same as the bath. Coating shall be 2-oz per sq ft. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install temporary bracing to provide stability during erection and to prevent distortion or damage to the framing due to wind, seismic, or erection forces. Remove temporary bracing when erection is complete. B. Use drift pins only to bring members into position and not to enlarge or distort holes. C. Make all steel to steel connections by high strength bolting except where field welding is shown or specified. Provide not less than two 3/4-in bolts per connection and use not less than 1/4-in thick clip angles, unless otherwise shown on drawings. D. Tighten bolted connections designated as bearing-type connections to the snug tight condition. Tighten all other bolted connections to full pretension by tum-of-nut or calibrated wrench tightening. E. Field welding shall be done only where shown or specified and only by welders qualified for the procedures used. No welding shall be done when surfaces are wet, exposed to rain or wind, or when welders are exposed to inclement conditions that will hamper good workmanship. F. After erection, prime paint abrasions, field welds, on galvanized surfaces with galvanized surface primer. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05120-4 STRUCTURAL STEEL I I I I I Ii I; If Ii I II II I I I II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install all miscellaneous metal complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Concrete joint. accessories are included in Division 3. B. Masonry reinforcement, ties and accessories are included in Division 4. C. Metal doors and frames are included in Section 08100. D. Painting is included in Division 9. E. Louvers are included in Division 10. F. Sluice gates, slide gates, operators and appurtenances, including wall thimbles, are included in Division 11. G. Pipe hangers and sleeves are included in Division 15. H. Equipment anchor bolts are included in the respective Sections of Divisions 11, 14 and 15. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings and product data showing materials of construction and details of installation for: 1. Shop drawings, showing sizes of members, method of assembly, anchorage and connection to other members. B. Samples 1. Submit samples as requested by the Engineer during the course of construction. C. Design Data 1. Submit calculations or test data demonstrating that the railings will resist the loads specified in the 2001 Florida Building Code at the post spacing provided. 2. Submit manufacturer's load and deflection tables for grating. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-1 MISCELLANEOUS METAL D. Test Reports I I: I. Certified copy of mill test reports on each aluminum proposed for use showing the physical properties and chemical analysis. II E. Certificates 1. Submit certification that the railing system is in compliance with OSHA requirements and the 2001 Florida Building Code. II I 2. Certify that welders have been qualified under A WS, within the previous 12 months, to perform the welds required under this Section. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS II a. M31: Mechanical Finish, Fine Satin I II II I: I 11 I A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. AA M31C22A41 b. C22: Finish, Medium Matte c. A41: Clear Anodic Coating, Class I B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A48 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 3. ASTM A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless. 4. ASTM A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold Finished, Standard Quality. Ii 5. ASTM A123 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. II 6. ASTM A153 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-2 MISCELLANEOUS METAL I II I I 7. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 8. ASTM A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 9. ASTM A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 Psi Tensile Strength. I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 10. ASTM A325 - Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/1 05 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 11. ASTM A366 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Commercial Quality. 12. ASTM A500 - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 13. ASTM A501 - Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 14. ASTM A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 15. ASTM A570 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot- Rolled, Structural Quality. 16. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 17. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 18. ASTM B429 - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. C. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI). 1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings. D. American Welding Society (A WS) 1. A WS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code Steel. 2. A WS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code Aluminum. E. Federal Specifications 1. FS-FF-B-575C - Bolts, Hexagonal and Square F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) G. 2001 Florida Building Code. (FBC) H. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The work of this Section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other Sections. Verify, at the site, both the dimensions and work of other trades adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of items herein specified. B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to be built into the work of other Sections. C. All welding shall be performed by qualified welders and shall conform to the applicable A WS welding code. Welding of steel shall conform to A WS D 1.1 and welding of aluminum shall conform to A WS D 1.2. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items to be incorporated into the work of other trades in sufficient time to be checked prior to installation. B. Repair items which have become damage or corroded to the satisfaction of.the Engineer prior to incorporating them into the work. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE REQUIREMENTS A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site, prior to fabrication of items, to verify or supplement indicated dimensions and to ensure proper fitting of all items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The use of manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. B. Like items of materials shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, maintenance and manufacturer's service. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise noted, materials for miscellaneous metals shall conform to the following standards: I. Structural Steel ASTM A36 2. Structural Steel Tubing ASTM A500, Grade B 3. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A501 or ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B Schedule 40. Use standard malleable iron fittings, galvanized for exterior work MISCELLANEOUS METAL 03720-022-01 05500-4 October, 2007 II Ii II I II II Ii II I I II II II II Ii Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. Steel Sheets ASTM A366 5. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48, Class 35 6. Ductile Iron Castings ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 7. Aluminum Extruded Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6063 T6 8. Aluminum Extruded Shapes ASTM B221, Alloy 6061 T6 9. Aluminum Sheet and Plate ASTM B209, Alloy 6061 T6 10. Stainless Steel Plates, Sheets, and Structural Shapes a. Exterior, Submerged or Industrial Use ASTM A167, Type 316 (Type 316L for welded) b. Interior and Architectural Use ASTM A167, Type 304 11. Stainless Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers ASTM A276, Type 316 12. Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs ASTM A307, Grade A (hot dip galvanized nuts and washers where noted) 13. High Strength Steel Bolts, Nuts and washers ASTM A325 (mechanically galvanized per ASTM B695, Class 50, where noted) a. Elevated Temperature Exposure Type. I b. General Application Type I or Type II 14. Galvanizing ASTM A123, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni 15. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153, Zn w/0.5 percent minimum Ni 2.03 ANCHORS, BOLTS AND FASTENING DEVICES A. Anchor bolt material shall be ASTM A307 unless otherwise noted. B. Unless otherwise noted, bolts for the connection of carbon steel or iron shall be steel machine bolts; bolts for the connection of galvanized steel or iron shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel machine bolts; and bolts for the connection of aluminum or stainless steel shall be stainless steel machine bolts. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-5 MISCELLANEOUS METAL C. Unless otherwise noted, expansion anchors shall be zinc plated carbon steel wedge type anchors complete with nuts and washers. Type 316 stainless steel, wedge type anchors shall be used where they will be submerged or exposed to the weather or where stainless steel wedge type anchors are required. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least I-in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Hilti, Kwick-bolt II; ITW Ramset; Redhead trubolt, or equal. D. Compound masonry expansion anchors shall be lead expansion sleeve type anchors complete with nuts and washers. Anchors shall be precision die-cast zinc alloy with a minimum of two lead alloy expansion sleeves. When the length or embedment of the bolt is not noted on the Drawings, provide length sufficient to place the wedge and expansion sleeve portion of the bolt at least I-in behind the concrete reinforcing steel. Expansion anchors shall be Star Expansion Industries, Star Slugin or equal. E. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be a two-part stud and capsule chemical resin anchoring system. Capsules shall contain premeasured amounts of polyester or vinyl ester resin, aggregate and a hardener contained in a separate vial within the capsule. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Adhesive capsule anchors shall be Hilti, HV A Adhesive Anchor; Molly, Parabond; Rawlplug, Rawl Chern-Stud or equal. F. Adhesive anchors, for fastening to hollow concrete block or brick, shall be a three-part stud, screen and chemical dispenser anchoring system. Adhesive cartridges shall contain premeasured amounts of resin and hardener which are mixed and deposited in a screen tube by a dispenser. Stud assemblies shall consist of an all-thread anchor rod with nut and washer. Anchors shall be Hilti, HIT C-20 System or equal. G. Automatic end welded headed anchor studs shall be flux ended studs made from cold drawn steel, ASTM A108 Grades C-lOlO through C-l020. Headed anchor studs shall be Nelson, H4L Headed Concrete Anchors or equal. H. Machine bolts and nuts shall conform to Federal Specification FF-B-575C. Bolts and nuts shall be hexagon type. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers and related appurtenances shall be Type 316 stainless steel. I. Toggle bolts shall be Hilti, Toggler Bolt or equal. 2.04 METAL GRATING A. Grating shall have rectangular, 3/16-in thick, bearing bars spaced l-3/16-in on center with cross bars spaced at 4-in on center. All grating panels shall be banded with a bar the same size as the bearing bars. 1. Grating shall not exceed the fabricator's maximum recommended span, and meet or exceed the following load and deflection criteria for the maximum span length at the opening being covered by the grating. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-6 MISCELLANEOUS METAL Ii Ii II Ii Ii Ii Ii II Ii II I! II II II II II Ii II I:) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. The grating shall produce a deflection of 1/360 of the span or less under a uniform live load of 100 lbs/sq ft on the maximum span. b. The grating shall produce a deflection of 1/360 ofthe span or less under a concentrated live load of300 lbs applied at the mid point of the maximum span. 2. Openings 2-in or greater in diameter/dimension and grating edges shall be banded with a bar of the same depth and thickness as the bearing bars. Cut bearing bars or cross bars shall be welded to the banding bar. 3. Provide trench grating with symmetrical cross bar arrangement. 4. Grating clamps, nuts, bolts, washers and other fastening devices for grating and grating supports shall be Type 316 stainless steel. All grating shall be anchored to the supporting system using saddle clips. B. Aluminum grating material shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6 with a [mill] [anodized] finish. Cross bars shall be attached to the bearing bars with interlocked swaged joints. The grating shall be Type BS by IKG Borden, Houston, TX; Type 19 SG-4 by Ohio Gratings, Inc., Canton, OH; Type 19S4 by Seidelhuber Metal Products, San Carlos, CA or equal. C. Metal frames and supports for grating shall be of the same material as the grating unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Where aluminum supports are used, they shall be fabricated from aluminum alloy 606l-T6. 2.05 RAILINGS A. Handrail and railing systems shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and FBC. B.Aluminum railing and handrail shall be a welded or mechanically fastened, seamless, extruded aluminum pipe system. Rails shall be 6063-T6 alloy. Posts shall be 606l-T6 alloy. Splice and reinforcing sleeves, brackets, end caps, toeboards, etc, shall be aluminum alloy 6063-T6 or606l-T6. Cast fittings shall be aluminum alloy No. 214. Railing system fastening hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Aluminum shall have a mill finish. After welding, aluminum shall be anodized. All railing, posts, toeboards and exposed aluminum shall be anodized with an architectural Class I satin finish providing a minimum coating thickness of 0.7 mils and a minimum coating weight of32 milligrams per square inch in compliance with AA M12C22A41. C. Railings shall be 2 rail welded railing systems, as shown on the Drawings, fabricated with l-ll2-in nominal diameter pipe. Posts shall be Schedule 80 pipe, minimum and rails and handrail shall be Schedule 40 pipe, minimum. Posts and top rails shall be continuous. Spacing of posts shall not exceed 5-ft on center and shall be uniformly spaced except as otherwise shown on the Drawings. Posts will be required on each side of structure expansion joints. All railing posts shall be vertical. D. Welds shall be circumferential welds ground smooth and even to produce a railing that is neat in appearance and structurally sound. Welding methods shall be in conformity with A WS standards for the materials being joined. All rail to post connections shall be 03720-022-01 05500-7 MISCELLANEOUS METAL October, 2007 coped and fastened by continuous welds. There shall be no burrs, sharp edges or . protrusions on any weld on any part of the handrail system. After fabrication, the welds and surrounding area shall be cleaned and hand buffed to blend with the adjacent finish. All mechanical fasteners shall be unobtrusively located in countersunk holes with the top flush with the surface of the rail. Bends in the railing shall be as indicated by the Drawings. No distortion of the circular railing shape will be allowed. Bends and terminal sections shall be made without the use of fittings. Comer bends shall be mitered and welded bends. E. Railing shall be assembled in sections as long as practical but shall not be greater than 24-ft in length. A field splice shall be used when an assembled section is to be attached to another section. Field splices shall be used in all railing panels that cross over structure expansion joints. 1. Field splices shall use internal splice sleeves located within 8-in of railing posts. The sleeve shall be welded to the rail on one side and fastened with a set screw to the rail on other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the differential expansion between the railing system and the supporting structure. 2. When the field splice occurs in a railing panel crossing a structure expansion joint, the sleeve shall be welded to the rail on one side and be free to slide in the rail on other side. The field splice shall be detailed to take the same movement as the structure expansion joint. F. The bases or supports for railing posts and handrail shall be the types indicated on the Drawings. 1. Where non-removable railing is set in concrete, the posts shall be placed in 2-ll2-in diameter formed concrete openings and firmly caulked with a nonsulphur compound, hydraulic cement equal to Por-Rok by Minwax Construction Products Division Sterling Drug, Montvale, NJ. Collars shall be placed around the post bases and fastened in place with set screws on the side of the post away from the walkway. Posts shall be placed with the centerline 4-in from the edge of the concrete except that posts shall be set at the centerline of concrete curbs. 2. Stainless steel and aluminum railing posts, which may collect condensation, shall have a 3/l6-in drain hole drilled immediately above the concrete encased area, the base flange, or supporting socket on the side away from the walking area. The bottom of the rail post between the drain hole and the bottom of the post shall be filled with an inert material such as a compressed closed cell neoprene rod. 3. Where handrail is to be fastened to walls, the rails shall be provided with screwed wall flanges fastened to the walls with three 3/8-in stainless steel flat head machine screws. G. Safety gates, for railing openings, shall be fabricated of matching pipe and rail material and configuration. The gates shall be self-closing gates with approved stop, latch and stainless steel closure spring and hinges. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-8 MISCELLANEOUS METAL II I I: I: Ii II II I: I Ii II I' I I II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I H. Barrier chains, for railing openings, shall be fabricated of stainless steel chains. Chain shall be lI4-in stainless steel links, with eleven links per foot as manufactured by Eastern Chain Works, Inc., NY; Lawrence Metal Products, Inc. or equal. Chains shall be fastened to the handrail posts at the elevation of each rail. One end of each chain shall be connected to one post with a 1/4-in diameter stainless steel eye bolt and the other end shall be connected to the other post by means of a heavy chromium plated bronze swivel eye slide harness snap and a similar eye bolt. I. Toeboards shall be provided on all railing adjacent to a drop in elevation of 4-ft or more. Toeboards are not required on the inclined portion of stairway railings or where concrete or steel curbs, 4-in or more in height, are present. Toeboards shall be 4-in high channels of the same material as the railing. The channels shall have a minimum thickness of lI8-in and have flanges of not less than 3/4-in nor more than 1-1/2-in in width. Toeboards shall be positioned with a maximum clearance of l/4-in from the floor and fastened to railing posts with 1/4-in stainless steel U-bolts, with J-bolts at comer posts and with clip angles and two lI4-in stainless steel expansion bolts at walls. J. All railings shall be properly protected by paper, or by an approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until adjacent work by other trades has been completed. After protective materials are removed, the surfaces shall be made clean and free from stains, marks, or defects of any kind. 2.06 ACCESS HATCHES A. Access hatches shall have single or double leaf doors as indicated by the Drawings. The doors shall be lI4-in aluminum diamond pattern plate with welded stiffeners, as necessary, to withstand a live load of 300 lbs/sq ft with a maximum deflection of lI150th of the span. Hatches shall have a l/4-in aluminum channel frame with a perimeter anchor flange or strap anchors for concrete embedment around the perimeter. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, use pivot torsion bars for counterbalance or spring operators for easy operation along with automatic door hold open. Hardware shall be durable and corrosion resistant with Type 316 stainless steel hardware used throughout. Provide removable lock handle. Finish shall be the factory mill finish for aluminum doors and frames with bituminous coating on the exterior of the frames in contact with concrete. Hatches shall be watertight and have a l-ll2-in drainage coupling to the channel frame. Access hatches shall be Types as indicated on the Drawings by Bilco Company, New Haven, CT or equal. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads 03720-022-01 05500-9 MISCELLANEOUS METAL October, 2007 concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Welding shall be on the unexposed side as much as possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration of the aluminum exposed surface. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous aluminum items shall include: beams, angles, closure angles, grates, hatches, floor plates, stop plates, stair nosings, and any other miscellaneous aluminum called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. D. Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc, shall be complete with welded strap anchors attached. E. Aluminum diamond plate and floor plate shall have a minimum thickness of 3/8-in. Frames and supports shall be of aluminum construction. Fastening devices and hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. Plates shall have a mill finish. F. Stair treads for aluminum stairs shall have abrasive non-slip nosing as approved. G. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be Wooster Products, Inc.; Alumogrit Treads, Type 116; similar by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco or equal. Furnish with wing type anchors and flat head stainless steel machine screws, 12-in on center. Nosing shall also be used at concrete ladder openings. Nosing shall a single piece for each step extending to within 3-in at each side of stair or full ladder width. Set nosing flush with stair tread finish at concrete stairs. Furnish treads with heavy duty protective tape cover. H. Miscellaneous aluminum items shall have a cleaned and degreased mill finish. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, straight, sharply defmed profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be dose fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous steel items shall include: beams, angles, lintels, metal stairs, support brackets, base plates for other than structural steel or equipment, closure angles, bridge crane rails, monorail hoist beams, holddown straps and lugs, door frames, splice plates, sub framing at roof openings and any other miscellaneous steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. 03720-022-01 05500-10 MISCELLANEOUS METAL October, 2007 Ii II II I: II I I I: I, I I I I I Ii II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Structural steel angle and channel door frames shall be shop coated with primer. Frames shall be fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb. E. Steel pipe pieces for sleeves, lifting attachments and other functions shall be Schedule 40 pipe unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Wall and floor sleeves, of steel pipe, shall have welded circumferential steel waterstops at mid-length. F. Lintels, relief angles or other steel supporting masonry or embedded in masonry shall be shop coated with primer. G. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all loose mill scale, rust and foreign matter and shall be given one shop coat of primer compatible with the finish coat after fabrication but before shipment. Paint shall be omitted within 3-in of proposed field welds. Paint shall be applied to dry surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints and other open spaces. H. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot-dip zinc process after fabrication. Coating shall be not less than 2 ozlsq ft of surface. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS STAINLESS STEEL A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed trueto detail, with clean, straight, sharply defmed profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. Holes shall be drilled or punched. Edges shall be smooth and without burrs. Fabricate supplementary pieces necessary to complete each item though such pieces are not definitely shown or specified. B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand the stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. Threaded connections shall have the threads concealed where practical. Welded connections shall have continuous welds or intermittent welds as specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. Grind smooth continuous welds that will be exposed. Provide holes for temporary field connections and for attachment of the work of other trades. C. Miscellaneous stainless steel items shall include: beams, angles, bar racks and any other miscellaneous stainless steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all items except those to be embedded in concrete or other masonry which shall be installed under Division 3 and Division 4 respectively. Items to be attached to concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will not be permitted. B. Abrasions in the shop primer shall be touched up im1'nediately after erection. Areas left unprimed for welding shall be painted with primer after welding. 03720-022-01 05500-11 MISCELLANEOUS METAL October, 2007 C. Zinc coating which has been burned by welding, abraded, or otherwise damaged shall be cleaned and repaired after installation. The damage area shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brushing and all traces of welding flux and loose or cracked zinc coating removed prior to painting. The cleaned area shall be painted with two coats of zinc oxide-zinc dust paint conforming to the requirements of Military Specifications MIL-P-15145. The paint shall be properly compounded with a suitable vehicle in the ratio of one part zinc oxide to four parts zinc dust by weight. D. Specialty products shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. Expansion bolts shall be checked for tightness a minimum of 24 hours after initial installation. F. Install adhesive capsule anchors using manufacture's recommended drive units and adapters and in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. G. Headed anchor studs shall be welded in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. H. All railings shall be erected to line and plumb. I II II I: II Ii I II I I. All steel surfaces that come into contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall receive I.::.. a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic applied in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. J. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of zinc-chromate primer followed by two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the dissimilar metal. K. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved alkali resistant paint to the masonry or concrete. 1. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and masonry paint to the wood. M. Between aluminum grating, aluminum stair treads, or aluminum handrail brackets and steel supports, insert l/4-in thick neoprene isolator pads, 85 plus or minus 5 Shore A durometer, sized for full width and length of bracket or support. .END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05500-12 MISCELLANEOUS METAL Ii II 11 Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 05910 GALVANIZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work Included: Hot dip galvanizing of structural steel members. B. Definitions 1. Hot Dip Galvanizing: The dipping of steel members and assemblies into molten zinc for lasting (or long-term) corrosion protection. 2. Passivating: The chemical treatment of freshly galvanized steel materials to prevent humid storage stain (white rust or white corrosion). This treatment (passivation) consists of quenching freshly galvanized steel in water to which a chromate or a chormic-acid solutions, or other proprietary solution, has been added. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards 1. American Hot Dip Galvanizers Association, Inc. (AHDGA): Publication, "Inspection Manual for Hot Dip Galvanized Products." 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. A 325 -High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints including suitable nuts and plain hardened washers. b. A 384- Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies c. A 385 - Providing High Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot Dip) d. A 386 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Assembled Steel Products e. A 563 - Carbon Steel Nuts. f. A 780 - Repair of Damaged Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings. B. Certification: Furnish Certificates of Compliance with ASTM Specifications, and Standards specified herein. Each certificate to be signed by CONTRACTOR and Galvanizer certifying that steel materials, bolts, nuts, washers, and items of iron and steel hardware conform with specified requirements. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05910-1 GALVANIZING I C. Inspections and Tests: Inspections, tests, and samples to conform with ASTM Specifications and Standards. Inspections rights and privileges, procedures, and acceptance or rejection of galvanzied steel materials to conform with ASTM A 123, A 153, or A 386, as applicable. Inspections and tests include following: Ii Ii 1. Visual examination of samples and finished products. I Ii 2. Tests to determine weight or mass of zinc coating per square foot of metal surface. 3. Tests to determine distribution and uniformity of zinc coating. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Ii A. Furnish Certificates of Compliance with certified original and two copies forwarded to the ENGINEER A. Packaging: Of type to prevent damage to galvanized surfaces and distortion of steel materials and components. II Ii 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING II B. Handling and Storage: Handle and protect galvanized materials from damage to zinc coating. To avoid humid storage stain, space surfaces of galvanized materials to permit free circulation of air. Ii A. Material for galvanizing to be geometrically suitable for galvanizing as specified in ASTM A 384 and A 385. Steel materials suitable for galvanizing include structural shapes, pipe, sheet, fabrications, and assemblies. B. Material to be chemically suitable for galvanizing. Ii II II I C. Damaged Material: Repair material showing evidence of damage to zinc coating. If not repairable, material with damaged coating will be subject to rejection. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL MATERIALS A. Conform with ASTM B 6, as specified in ASTM A 123. 03720-022-01 05910-2 October, 2007 GALVANIZING Ii 11 II II II 2.02 STEEL HARDWARE A. Bolts, nuts, washers, and items of iron and steel hardware furnished or galvanized to be suitable for hot dip galvanizing. B. Inspect iron and steel hardware before galvanizing and ascertain whether suitable for galvanizing. Replace items which are not suitable for galvanizing. 2.03 ZINC FOR GALVANIZING I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 GALVANIZING A. Steel members, fabrications, and assemblies to be galvanized after fabrication, by hot dip process in accordance with ASTM A 123 or A 386, as applicable. Weight of zinc coating to conform to requirements specified under "Weight of Coating" in ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 386, as applicable. B. Safeguard against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A 143. C. Safeguard against warpage or distortion of steel members to conform with ASTM A 384. Notify ENGINEER of potential warpage problems which may require modification in design, before proceeding with steel fabrications. D. Finish and uniformity of zinc coating and adherence of coating to conform with ASTM A 123, A 153, or A 386, as applicable. E. Bolts, nuts, and washers, and iron and steel hardware components to be galvanized in accordanced with ASTM A 153. Weight of zinc coating to conform to requirements specified under "Weight of Coating 11 in ASTM A 153. Nuts to be tapeed after galvanizing to minimum diametral amounts specified in ASTM A 563. Coat nuts with waterproof lubricant, clean and dry to touch. High strength bolts for structural steel joints to be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 325. 2.05 P ASSIV A TING A. Galvanized materials subject to extended periods of storage in open, exterior locations to be given passivating treatment or light oiling to prevent humid storage stain. Treatment, solution, and process subject to review and acceptance by ENGINEER. Chromate passivation should not be used on items galvanized after fabriction and are to be painted after erection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF STEEL MATERIALS A. Steel materials, fabrications, and assemblies are specified to be installed in various other sections under Division 5. 3.02 FIELD INSPECTION A. Inspect installed galvanized materials, fabrications, and assemblies to conform with applicable requirements of ADHGA "Inspection Manual for Hot Dip Galvanized Products," consisting of visual inspection. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 GALVANIZING 05910-3 3.03 TOUCH UP AND REPAIR A. Repair damaged galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A 780. B. Dry film thickness of applied repair materials to be not less than galvanized coating thickness required by ASTM A 120, A 123, A 153, or A 386, as applicable. C. Touch up prime-painted surface with same galvanized primer applied in shop. Clean damaged surfaces first to assure proper paint adhesion. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 05910-4 GALVANIZING I II II II II Ii I: II Ii II II II I I) II Ii I] I) Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 07501 BUILT-UP ROOFING RENOV A TIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and provide all roofing and flashing renovation work as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. The scope of work is further defined as follows: 1. Provide weathertight monolithic built-up roofing renovations and base flashing as detailed and required. 2. Remove and dispose of existing materials as required immediately prior to new materials installation. 3. Provide metal flashing as detailed and required for weathertight construction. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. Cast-in flashing reglet is installed under Division 3. Coordinate under Roofing Section to insure correct placement. B. Wood in conjunction with roofmg is included in Section 06100. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 01300, shop drawings showing details of construction and installation of built-up roofing, flashings and components and detailed technical data on all materials and insulation proposed. Provide confirmation with shop drawings that all proposed materials are compatible with the existing roofing materials. Submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Provide, with shop drawings, certification that the roofer who will execute the work is an authorized applicator of the built-up roofing system proposed. 2. Two samples each, in representative size, of all required materials and proposed fasteners. 3. The manufacturer's specifications and instructions for materials and installation of the membrane roofing systems. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 07501-1 BUILT-UP ROOFlNG RENOVATlONS 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM D4l - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofmg, Damproofing and Waterproofmg. 2. ASTM D312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 3. ASTM D1863 - Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used on Built-Up Roofs. 4. ASTM D2l78 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. Federal Specifications (Fed Spec) C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Well in advance of commencement of roofing operations, a pre-roofing conference shall be held to inspect the substrate and related work affecting the roofing work, when it is proposed to be ready to receive insulation, roofing and flashing. All parties having an interest in the roofing or work on the roofs shall be informed of the conference by the Contractor and shall be required to attend. B. The conference shall include an inspection by all parties of the substrate and its conformance with the Drawings, the approved shop drawings and the approved manufacturer's specifications and instructions. All objections to approval of the substrate shall be noted by the Engineer. The Contractor shall coordinate efforts to remedy objections and prepare substrate properly to receive the roofmg and flashing. C. Parties to the conference shall include the following: Owner, Engineer, Contractor, roofing subcontractor and his/her foreman, roofing materials manufacturer representative and a representative of any other trade classification having work on a roof and deemed by the Engineer as necessary. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. B. Store and handle insulation, roofmg felts and base sheets in a manner which will ensure that there is no possibility of significant moisture pick-up. Store in a dry, well ventilated, weather-tight place. Do not leave unused materials on the roof over night and when roofing work is not in progress. Remove wet and damaged materials from the project site. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 BUILT-UP ROOFING RENOVATIONS 07501-2 I I Ii Ii II I) Ii I Ii Ii Ii II II Ii Ii Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS OF ROOFING APPLICATOR A. The roofing system shall be installed by a licensed roofing sub-contractor approved by the manufacturer providing the guarantee. The roofing sub-contractor shall be trained and qualified to install the roofing system in strict accordance with the manufacturer's details, specifications and recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Roofing felt and vapor retarder felt shall be 12 lbs per square, asphalt saturated, fiberglass felts conforming to ASTM D2178, Type IV. B. Asphalt for masonry priming shall conform to ASTM D41. Asphalt for embedding base flashing shall be steep type conforming to ASTM D312, Type III. Asphalt for embedding roofmg felts shall conform to ASTM D312, Type I. C. Plastic roof cement shall meet Fed. Spec. SS-C-153, Type I. D. Base flashing material shall be 54lbs per square Manville Glas Tite, asphalt saturated, coated and fiberglass reinforced felt, as approved. E. Membrane and accessory materials and installation requirements by the following manufacturers, or equal, are acceptable. Manville standards have been used herein to establish quality: 1. Manville Corp. 2. Celotex Corp. 3. GAF Corp. F. Gravel surfacing shall be clean washed gravel meeting ASTMD1863. G. Two piece metal counterflashing system shall be Fry Reglet Corp., Alhambra, CA, Type CO., similar by Architectural Steel Corp., Cambridge, MA; Keystone Flashing Co., Philadelphia P A or equal, 0.020-in thick, Type 302 stainless steel. Provide factory formed comers on counterflashing. H. Screws, bolts and other accessories used for fastening metal and felt flashing shall be stainless steel. I. Auxiliary roof slopes shall be provided behind new support curbs as required using tapered edge strips of l-5/8-in by 18-in Fesco perlite board by Manville, similar by Celotex; Grefco or equal. Provide matching perlite cant strips. Provide base sheets of tapered or non-tapered perlite as required to build-up slopes as required. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 07501-3 BUlLT-UP ROOFING RENOVATIONS PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. No roofing operations shall be started until surfaces to receive the same have been inspected and approved by the roofing contractor as to quality and condition. Roofing-base materials shall be dry throughout, clean and free from depressions or projections. B. Roof deck and adjacent roofing shall be dry, clean and free from oily substances. Immediately before the application of materials, remove existing materials as required and strip gravel back l8-in from work area. Thoroughly clean the surfaces to remove loose and foreign materials. C. All materials shall be delivered to the work site in manufacturer's unbroken labeled package. D. Strip required portions of existing roofing, insulation and flashing immediately prior to installation of new components and re-roofing. Coordinate work to provide that re-roofing will occur the same day as removal. Dispose of in an approved manner off the project site all materials removed from roof. G. Commencement of the installation of any material shall be considered as acceptance of the conditions of all the surfaces to be covered, and no subsequent claim on account of previous condition of surface will be entertained. H. All surfaces shall be complete, with cants, nailers and appurtenances all in place and ready to receive finished roofing. I. Good roofing practices shall be observed at all times. All work shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No phased construction will be allowed. All base sheet, base flashing and felts shall be "broomed-in" to insure full embedment in bitumen. 3.02 INSULATION AND ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install supplementary insulation to provide required slopes. Embed in asphalt conforming to Manville Standard No. 501, similar by Celotex; GAF or equal. B. Requirements for roofing membrane from top of insulation through gravel top surface shall comply with Manville Standard No. 4GIG or equal as specified above with roofing plies shingled back into existing roofing as approved. 03720-022-01 07501-4 BUlLT-UP ROOFING RENOVATIONS October, 2007 I Ii Ii II I II I II I Ii II II Ii II I II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. The time of roofing operations with respect to adverse weather conditions, shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. During freezing weather all exposed finished surface felts shall be immediately graveled in or, if this is impossible exposed felt surface shall be glazed with a mopping of bitumen. D. Apply the roofing so that the direction of the flow of water is over and not against the laps. Roll or press all plies of felt into hot bitumen to provide a finished surface free from pockets or blisters. All moppings must completely cover the areas of application so that no felt shows through the moppings. Felt shall be dry when applied and shall be applied only to dry and frost-free surfaces. 3.03 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Base flashing shall conform to the details shown and the manufacturers requirements, Manville Standard No. FE-1 (LB) or equal as specified above. B. Apply base flashing in conjunction with roofmg membrane in conformance with the approved shop drawings and base flashing specification. Secure with approved fasteners where vertical. C. Cover top end of base flashing where vertical with heavy trowel application of flashing cement. Extend application down over heads of fasteners. 3.04 METAL FLASHING A. Surfaces to be covered with metal shall be free from defects of every description and clean of dirt and other foreign matter before sheet metal work is started. B. Provide flashings as indicated on the Drawings and in all locations where the use of flashing may reasonably be inferred as necessary to make the work of this section complete in its intent to provide leakproof conditions throughout. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 07501-5 BUlL T -UP ROOFING RENOVATIONS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 08331 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Work covered under this section includes furnishing all labor, materials and equipment to provide and install overhead coiling door at the Northeast APCF. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications, etc., m accordance with Section 01340. B. Shop drawings shall indicate elevations, construction details, hardware reinforcement and locations, metal thicknesses and wall conditions. C. Submit installation, operating and maintenance instructions for the overhead coiling door and the operator in accordance with Section 01730. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Furnish each overhead coiling door as a complete unit produced by one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. B. Insert and Anchorages: Furnish inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into masonry to install units. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions, and directions to install anchorage devices. C. Wind Loading: Design and reinforce overhead coiling doors to withstand a (110- mph) wind-loading pressure, as shown on drawings in the door schedule. D. Comply with the applicable requirements of the following specifications and standards: 1. Florida Building Code 2. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 08331-1 OVERHEAD COlLING DOORS E. Manufacturers: Overhead coiling doors shall be manufactured by Overhead Door Corporation, Atlas Roll-Lite Overhead Doors/Div. Of MASCO, The Cookson Co., or approved equal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking slats, designed to withstand required wind loading, in a continuous length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of material gage recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door required, and as follows: 1. Aluminum Door Curtain Slats: Clear Anodized Aluminum 0.04 inches thick, flat faced. B. Endlocks: Malleable iron castings galvanized after fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets. Provide locks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. C. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-112 by 118 inch thick, either stainless steel or aluminum extrusions to suit type of curtain slats, with vinyl coated astragal. 1. Provide a replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene between angles as a weather seal and cushion bumper for manually operated doors, unless shown as an overlapping joint. D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of angles, or channels and angles with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain loading. Build up units with minimum 3/l6-inch-thick steel sections, structural stainless steel, mill finish, as scheduled. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment. E. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing with a minimum of 3/8-inch bolts at not more than 30 inches o.c., unless closer spacing recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise indicated. Place anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so they are concealed when door is in closed position. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks. F. Weather Seals: Provide vinyl or neoprene weatherstripping for exterior exposed doors, except where otherwise indicated. At door heads, use lIS-inch-thick 08331-2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS II Ii Ii Ii II II II II I II Ii II Ii I II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use l!8-inch-thick continuous strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide. 2.02 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable steel helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and in a spring barrel, and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural-quality carbon steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03 inch per foot of span under full load. C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel in size required to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell mouth guide groove for curtain. F. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head and act as weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 1. Fabricate aluminum hoods for aluminum doors of 0.04 inch thick aluminum, fmished to match curtain. 2.03 PAINTING A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other contaminants. After cleaning, apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A780. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 08331-3 OVERHEAD COll..ING DOORS 1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight and complying with DED-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. B. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply manufacturer's standard 2-coat, baked enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.0254 mm) for topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of2 mils (0.05.8 mm). 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. 2.04 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS A. Chain Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain hoist operator consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and geared reduction unit with a maximum 35-lb pull for door operation. Furnish alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordination and Measurements: Measurements shall be taken at the building to assure proper erection of the work. Check all dimensions, whether or not shown on the Drawings, upon which the accurate fitting and installation of the door may depend, or which would affect the proper operation of the door. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install overhead coiling doors in accordance with the instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer and in such a manner that will prevent damage or deformation. Doors shall be stored at the job site before installation on platforms or pallets. During storage, doors shall be stored in a weathertight area, and shall be covered to protect the door from dust, dirt and damage. B. Doors shall be installed plumb, level and true to line in accordance with the details shown on the approved shop drawings. Hardware shall be applied and adjusted to achieve quiet and smooth.operation. C. Install the doors securely in appropriate frames, and adjusted for proper operation without sticking or binding. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 08331-4 OVERHEAD COll..ING DOORS Ii I II II II II II Ii Ii I I Ii I I II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, jamb, and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports in accordance with approved shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and as specified herein. E. Upon completion of installation including work by other trades, lubricate, test and adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp, twist or distortion and fitting weathertight for the entire perimeter. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect door installation from damage until the date of final acceptance. Damaged work shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of the Owner and the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 08331-5 OVERHEAD COll,ING DOORS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from paint manufacturer 0 s standard colors and fmishes available. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defmed in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte fmish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 1 5. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. SourceLimitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 2 I) I II II II II I! II Ii II II II II II Ii I' II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, lTIlxmg, and application. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Unless otherwise specified, paint materials and systems specified herein are those of Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore. Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent materials and systems by one of the following manufacturers are also acceptable: 1. Devoe and Reynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Porter Paints. 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect. 2.3 LEAD CONTENT A. The paint shall comply with the latest requirements of the Federal Government for maximum allowable lead content. Such compliance shall be stated on the MSDS and container clearly identifying the product. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 3 2.4 VOC COMPLIANCE A. The paint shall comply with the latest requirements of Federal, Florida State, City or Local Government requirements for the maximum allowable VOC content at the time of purchase. Such compliance shall be stated on the MSDS and container clearly identifying the product. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. I II Ii II II II I II 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure 1 compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. II 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. Ii I I II Ii II II C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. I i 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 4 1- I ! I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, and cement plaster surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Pressure clean existing cement plaster, concrete, and masonry surfaces with a mildewcide. Roughen as required to remove glaze. Ifhardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3 . Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 5 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the schedule. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the fmal installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Sand lightly between.each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, comers, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels fIrm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. All metal surfaces shall be sprayed except that piping, conduit, and ductwork may be brushed or rolled. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 6 II II II I) I II I: II Ii Ii II Ii II Ii II II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Exposed conduit and fittings. 2. Exterior switchgear. 3. Electrical, Mechanical storage rooms, plumbing chase. F. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. G. Prime Coats: Before applying fmish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or fmished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. H. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform fmish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free oflaps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide semi-gloss finish for final coats where indicated. J; Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fme texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. K. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 7 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. c. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. 1. Accelerated yellowness. J. Recoating. k. Skinning. 1. Color retention. m. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 8 I II II Ii Ii II II Ii II II II II II II I: Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I 1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I I 1 I I. I I B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA Pl. 3.7 PAINT SCHEDULE (INTERIOR SURFACES) A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. Note that Sherwin Williams and Benjamin Moore numbers are used as basis of design only. 1. Interior Gypsum Drywall; Epoxy Paint, Semi-Gloss at walls. a. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint. 1) PT1 - Sherwin Williams - SW7071 Gray Screen 2. Interior Concrete Surface; Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint a. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Epoxy Paint. 1) PT1 - Sherwin Williams - SW7071 Gray Screen 3. Exterior and Interior Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, and Window Frames: Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish. a. Prime Coat: Spot Prime Scratched or Abraded Areas Only - Rust Inhibitive Alkyd Metal Primer. b. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel. 1) PT2 - Benjamin Moore - Color #1680. 4. Interior Exposed Steel: High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel a. Primer: Metal Primer b. First coat: Gloss Alkyd Enamel 3.8 PAINT SCHEDULE (Exterior Surfaces) A. Provide products complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." B. Exterior CMU to receive clear water repellant: See Specification Section 07190 C. CMU Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 4.2A. a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler (MPI approved product #4). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved product #10). c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (MPI approved product #10). 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 9 2. Manufacturers: a. Sherwin Williams. b. Benjamin Moore. c. Devoe. d. Porter Paints. D. Steel Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer (MPI approved product #79). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat (MPI approved product #97). c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss) (MPI approved product #94). 2. Manufacturers: a. Sherwin Williams. b. Benjamin Moore. c. Devoe. d. Porter Paints. E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B. a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer (MPI approved product #26). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat (MPI approved product #94). c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss) (MPI approved product #94). 2. Manufacturers: a. Sherwin Williams. b. Benjamin Moore. c. Devoe. d. Porter Paints. F. Stucco Substrates; 1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.1A. a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved product #10). b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat (MPI approved product #10). c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (flat) (MPI approved product #10). 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING 09900 - 10 I; II II II II II Ii II Ii II II II II II II II II Ii I I I 2. Manufacturers: I a. Sherwin Williams. b. Benjamin Moore. c. Devoe. I d. Porter Paints. I END OF SECTION I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 PAINTING October, 2007 09900 - 11 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09901 PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes materials and application of painting and coating systems for the following surfaces associated with the walls, ceilings, process equipment, piping, valves, chemical systems, and ancillary process items: 1. Submerged metal. 2. Exposed metal. 3. Buried metal. 4. Concrete and Masonry. 5. PVC and CPVC. 6. Metals in contact with concrete. B. Refer to Section 09902 for pipe and equipment paint colors and paint systems. C. This section does not include architectural and structural cast-in-place concrete coatings and coatings for standard building construction and for standard building mechanical items such as plumbing and HV AC. Refer to Section 03180 for chemical-resistant coatings for the interior of the cast-in-place concrete Headwork channels, including screening channels, and grit channels. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING C. Section 15075 - PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAmTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-1 1.03 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit the following: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340, and the following. 8. Manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information: 1. Percent solids by volume. 2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thickness per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats. 3. Recommended surface preparation. 4. Recommended thinners. 5. Statement verifying that the specified prime coat is recommended by the manufacturer for use with the specified intermediate and finish coats. 6. Application instructions including recommended equipment and temperature limitations. 7. Curing requirements and instructions. C. Color swatches. D. Certificate identifying the type and gradation of abrasives used for surface preparation. E. Material safety data sheets for each coating. F. Current ANSI/NSF 61 listing for each coating to be used in contact or subject to contact with potable water as required herein. G. Documentation showing that the applicator has been certified or approved by the coating manufacturers to apply the coating systems. H. Documentation demonstrating the credentials of the NACE certified coatings inspector. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-2 I II II Ii II I II Ii I) II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PAINTING AND COATING SYSTEMS The following index lists the various painting and coating systems by service and generic type: Paint Coatings System Index No. Title Generic Coating Submerged Metal Coating Systems 1. Submerged Metal, Raw Water (Nonpotable) or Raw Epoxy Sewage 6. Submerged Metal, Raw Sewage or Grit Slurries EooXY resin/ceramic 7. Submerged Metal, Potable or Nonpotable Water EooXY Exposed Metal Coating Systems 10. Exposed Metal, Atmospheric or Corrosive High-build epoxy (two-coat Environment system) with polyurethane topcoat 13. Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment Epoxv with urethane topcoat 18. Exposed Metal, Organic Zinc Primer for Shop Organic zinc Coating and Field Touch-Up Buried Metal Coating Systems 21. Buried Metal EooXY 24. Buried Metal Corrosion-resisting grease 25. Buried Metal Pioing and Tubing Coal-tar taoe wrao Concrete and Masonrv Coating Systems 31. Exposed Concrete and Masonry, Corrosive Epoxy Environment (Northeast - Walls and Ceiling) PVC, CPVC, and FRP Coating Systems 41. PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exposure Polyurethane 42. PVC, CPVC, and FRP, Ultraviolet Exoosure I Acrylic latex Coating Systems for Nonferrous Metals 51. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Bituminous Steel 52. Exoosed Metal, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum Synthetic resin 54. Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Epoxy Steel These systems are specified in detail in the following paragraphs. For each coating, the required surface preparation, prime coat, intermediate coat (if required), topcoat, and coating thicknesses are described. Mil thicknesses shown are minimum dry-film thicknesses. A. Submerged Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. I-Submerged Metal-Raw Water (Nonpotable) or Raw Sewage: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. Type: Epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80%. I I II II I b. Service Conditions: For use with metal pipes or structures (such as scum troughs, sluice gates, or piping) alternately submerged in raw sewage or raw water (nonpotable) and exposed to a moist saturated hydrogen sulfide atmosphere, as in raw sewage wet wells. Minimum. temperature resistance of the coating shall be 1400F for moist heat conditions. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0. II II d. Prime Coat: ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, 8 mils; Tnemec 104-1211, 8 mils; Carboline Carboguard 691, 5-8 mils or equal. e. Finish Coat: ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, 8 mils; Tnemec 104- AB05, 8 mils; Carboline Carboguard 691,5-8 mils or equal. II Ii II II II I II I II I II 2. System No.6-Submerged Metal, Raw Sewage or Grit Slurries: a. Type: Two-component epoxy resin/ceramic having a 100% volume solids and having the following characteristics: Tensile shear adhesion (ASTM D 1002): 2,500 psi (min) Shore D hardness (minimum): 85 Abrasion resistance (ASTM 4060): 0.8 mg (max) loss per 1,000 cycles b. Service Conditions: For use as a lining for pump volutes, pump impellers, piping, valves, and heat exchanger tubes, subject to severe abrasion service. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-I0. d. Coating System: Apply two coats (of two different colors) to a minimum thickness of 10 mils per coat. Minimum total coating thickness shall be 20 mils. Product: THORTEX Cerami-Tech C.R. as applied by Western Industrial Technology, Inc., Fullerton, California, or Paragon Industries, Horsham, Pennsylvania; Belzona 1341; or equal. II J 3. System No.7-Submerged Metal, Potable Water: II II II a. Type: ANSI/NSF 61 listed Epoxy PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 0990 1-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. Service Conditions: For use with structures, valves, piping, or equipment immersed or intermittently immersed in potable water. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-lO. d. Coating System: Apply the manufacturer's recommended number of coats to attain the specified minimum coating thickness and meet the allowable thickness listed for the product in the ANSI/NSF 61 listing. Products: Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Tnemec N140 or 100, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80, PPG AQUAPON@ LT NSF Low Temperature Epoxy Coatings 95-172, Carboline Carbo guard 891, Ameron 395, or equal; minimum DFT 16 mils total. Color of topcoat: white. . Each coat shall be a different color from the one preceding it. Exposed Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 1000Exposed Metal, Atmospheric, or Corrosive Environment: a. Type: High-build epoxy intermediate coat having a minimum volume solids of 60%, with an inorganic zinc prime coat and a pigmented polyurethane finish coat having a minimum volume solids of 52%. b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pipes subjected to atmospheric conditions, water condensation; chemical fumes, such as hydrogen sulfide; salt spray; and chemical contact. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-IO. d. Prime Coat: Self-curing, two-component inorganic zinc-rich coating recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating with a high-build epoxy finish coat. Minimum zinc content shall be 12 pounds per gallon. Apply to a thickness of 3 mils. Products: Tnemec 90-96, ICI Devoe Catha-Coat 304 or 304V, Ameron 9HS, Carboline Carbozinc 11 HS, Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad II Plus, PPG METALHIDE@ 28 Inorganic Zinc-Rich Primer 97-672, or equal. e. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec 104, ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS, Ameron 385, Carboline Carboguard 890, Sherwin- Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600, PPG PITT-GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal; 5 mils. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEM.S 09901-5 03720-022-01 October, 2007 f. Finish Coat: Two-component pigmented acrylic or aliphatic polyurethane recommended by the manufacturer for overcoating a high-build epoxy coating. Apply to a thickness of at least 2 mils. Products: Tnemec Series 1075, ICI Devoe Devthane 379, Ameron 450 HS, Carboline 133HB, Sherwin-Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane B65-300, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra Gloss Urethane Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal. 2. System No. 13-Exposed Metal, Corrosive Environment: a. Type: High-build epoxy prime coat with a pigmented high-build aliphatic or acrylic polyurethane fmish coat. b. Service Conditions: For use with metal structures or pIpes subjected to water condensation; chemical fumes, such as hydrogen sulfide; salt spray; and chemical contact. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10. d. Prime Coat: Two-component high-build epoxy. Apply to a thickness of 8 mils. Products: Ameron 400, ICI Devoe 235, Tnemec 104, Carboline Carboguard 890, Sherwin- Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600, PPG PITT -GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal. e. Finish Coat: Two-component pigmented high-build polyurethane. Apply one or more coats to a total thickness of 5 mils. Products: Ameron "Amershield," ICI Devoe Devthane 359, Tnemec Series 1075, Carboline Carbothane 133 HB, Sherwin-Williams Hi-Solids Polyurethane B65-300 series, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra Gloss Urethane Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal. 3. System No. i8-0rganic Zinc Primer for Shop Coating and Field Touch- Up: a. Type: Organic zinc primer having a minimum zinc content of 14 pounds per gallon. b. Service Conditions: For use as a shop-applied primer or field touch-up primer over inorganic zinc prime coatings on exposed metal. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-6 I: I I; I Ii Ii Ii I Ii I II II i II I II Ii i II II I II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 d. Coating: Coating shall be of the two- or three-component converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type. Products: Tnemec 90-97, Ameron 68HS, ICI Devoe 313, Carboline Carbozinc 859, Sherwin-Williams Zinc-Clad III HS, PPG Durethane™ MCZ 97-679, or equal; applied to a minimum dry- film thickness of 3 mils. Organic zinc primer shall be manufactured by the prime coat manufacturer. C. Buried Metal Coating Systems 1. System No. 21-Buried Metal: a Type: High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80% (ASTM D 2697). b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as valves, flanges, bolts, nuts, structural steel, and fittings. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-10. d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Ameron 400, Tnemec 104 HS or 80, ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Carboline 890LT, Sherwin-Williams Tank Clad HS B62-80 series, or equal; 30 mils total (Carboline system - 18 mils total). Maximum thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. 2. System No. 24--Buried Metal: a Type: Corrosion-resisting grease. b. Service Conditions: Buried metal, such as bolts, bolt threads, tie rods, and nuts. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-3 or SP-6. d. Coating: NO-OX-ID GG-2 as manufactured by Sanchem, Inc. Apply to a minimum thickness of 1/4 inch. 3. System No. 25-Buried Metal Piping and Tubing: a. Type: Cold-applied coal-tar tape, hot-applied coal-tar tape. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-7 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. Service Conditions: Buried ferrous and nonferrous plpmg and tubing. c. Coat with one of the following systems: (1) Wrap with cold-applied coal-tar tape conforming to A WW A C209. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 35 mils. Apply tape with manufacturer's prime coat. Tape shall be Tapecoat CT, Protecto-Wrap 200, or equal. (2) Wrap with hot-applied coal-tar tape conforming to A WW A C203, Section 4.6. Minimum thickness of tape shall be 50 mils. Apply tape with manufacturer's recommended prime coat. Tape shall be Tapecoat 20, Protecto-Wrap 110, or equal. d. Use chloride-free primers with the above coatings when applying to stainless steel piping or tubing. e. Coat field joints of buried piping that has a shop-applied coating with primer and tape conforming to A WW A C209. Use Type 1 tape of 35-mil thickness. Products: Protection Engineering Co. Protectowrap 200 GT, Tapecoat CTlO/40W, Polyken 930-35, or equal. f. Perform electrical inspection of shop and field coating m accordance with Section 5 of A WW A C209. g. Install buried pipes with wrapped coatings by extending the wrapping to the first joint after entering a building, penetrating a slab, or 6 inches above fmished grade. Wrap joints spirally with a minimuril overlap of 50% of the tape width. D. Concrete and Masonry Coating Systems 1. System No. 31-Exposed Concrete and Masonry, Corrosive Environment: a. Type: Polyamide-cured epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 53%. b. Service Conditions: Concrete and masonry exposed to corrosive atmospheres, such as hydrogen sulfide gas, chlorine gas, or chlorinated effluent sprays in wastewater treatment plants. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-8 II II II I I] I II Ii , Ii II I II I Ii i II Ii Ii I Ii II II I II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 c. Surface Preparation: In accordance with Part 3.04. d. Prime Coat: Epoxy filler compound or epoxy masonry filler having a minimum solids volume of 60%. Apply one coat to fill voids, pores, and cracks. Products: Tnemec 54-660, International Intercryl 320WB, Amerlock 400 BF, ICI Devoe Devran 265 BHF, Sentry 610, Sherwin-Williams Kern Cati-Coat HS B42W400, or equal. e. Intermediate Coat: One coat of Tnemec N69-1211 or 166, International Interguard 760HS, Amerlock 400, ICI Devoe Bar- Rust 233 H, Carboline 890, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600 series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 6 mils. f. Finish Coat: Two coats of Tnemec N69 or 166, International Interguard 760HS, Amerlock 400, ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233 H, Carboline 890, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600 series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 6 mils per coat. E. PVC and CPVC Coating System 1. System No. 41-PVC and CPVC, Ultraviolet Exposure: a Type: Epoxy primer with a minimum volume solids of 54% and a pigmented polyurethane enamel having a minimum volume solids of 52%. b. Service Conditions: PVC or CPVC exposed to sunlight. c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-l. Then lightly abrade the surface with medium-grain sandpaper. d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series N69 Epoxoline II, Ameron 385, ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 B58 series, Carboline Carbo guard 888, PPG PITT-GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 4 mils. e. Finish Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 1075, International Interthane 990HS, Ameron 450 HS, ICI Devoe Devran 379, Carboline Carbothane 133HB or 134HB, Sherwin-Williams Hi- Solids Polyurethane B65-300 series, PPG PITTHANE@ Ultra PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-9 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Gloss Urethane Enamel 95-812 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 3 mils. Ii Ii II 2. System No. 42-PVC and CPVC, Ultraviolet Exposure: a. Type: Acrylic latex primer and topcoats with a minimum volume solids of35%. II b. Service Conditions: PVC or CPVC or FRP exposed to sunlight. II I I c. Surface Preparation: SSPC SP-l. Then lightly abrade the surface with medium-grain sandpaper. d. Prime Coat: One coat of Tnemec Series 28, Ameron 148, Carboline Carbocrylic 3358, PPG PITT-TECH@ IntlExtIndustrial DTM PrimerIFinish Enamel 90-712 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of 2 mils. II e. Finish Coat: Two coats of Tnemec Series 28, Ameron 220, Carboline Carbocrylic 3359, two coats of PPG PITT-TECH@ IntlExt High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel 90-374 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum dry-film thickness of2 mils each. II F. Coating Systems for Nonferrous Metals I I I I Ii II Ii I II I 1. System No. 51-Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel: Type: Bituminous paint having a minimum volume solids of 68% coal-tar pitch based. a. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members or aluminum fabrications, in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system. b. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean per SSPC SP-l; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust' blast. c. Prime Coat: Apply synthetic resin or epoxy primer to metal surface before finish coats. Products: International Intervinux VTA528/529, or equal. No primer required for Carboline or Tnemec. d. Finish Coat: Carboline Bitumastic 50, Tnemec 46-465, International Intertuf 100, or equal. Apply two coats to a minimum dry-film thickness of 12 mils each. Ii II PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-10 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. System No. 52-Exposed Metal, Galvanized Steel and Aluminum: a. Type: Synthetic resin or epoxy primer. b. Service Conditions: Coat galvanized steel and aluminum and copper surfaces with this system before applying topcoat. c. Surface Preparation of Galvanized Steel: Surfaces shall be flat with no protrusions. Then do the following: (1) Remove high spots and tears in the galvanizing with hand and power grinders. Comply with ASTM D 6386, paragraph 5.2.1. Do not remove the galvanized coating below the specified thickness. (2) Solvent clean galvanized surfaces per ASTM D 6386, paragraph 5.3.2. (3) Sweep blast per ASTM D 6386, paragraph 5.4.1. Use one of the abrasive materials that is described in ASTM D 6386, paragraph 5.4.1. Surface preparation for weathered and partially weathered galvanized steel shall be in accordance with ASTM D 6386, paragraphs 6 and 7. (4) Apply prime coating within one hour of the surface preparation. d. Surface Preparation of Aluminum: Solvent clean or steam clean aluminum surfaces per SSPC SP-I; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast and follow with a chemical conversion coating per MIL-C-554l, Class lA. e. Surface Preparation of Copper: Solvent clean or steam clean copper surfaces per SSPC SP-l; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. f. Prime Coat: Tnemec N69-1211, Ameron 385, ICI Devoe Devran 224 HS, Carboline Carboguard 890, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 B58-600 series, PPG PITT-GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal. Apply to a minimum thickness of 4 mils. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-11 g. Intermediate and Finish Coats: Epoxy and polyurethane as described in System No. 10. Do not include the inorganic zinc prime coat described in that system. 3. System No. 54-Aluminum Insulation from Concrete and Carbon Steel: a. Type: . High solids epoxy or phenolic epoxy having a minimum volume solids of 80% (ASTM D 2697). b. Service Conditions: Coat areas of aluminum grating, stairs, structural members or aluminum fabrications, in contact with concrete or carbon steel with this system. c. Surface Preparation: Solvent or steam clean per SSPC SP-1; do not use alkali cleaning. Then dust blast. d. Coating System: Apply three or more coats of Ameron 400, Tnemec 100, ICI Devoe Bar-Rust 233H, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy B58-600, Carboline Carbo guard 890LT, PPG PITT- GUARD@ Direct-to-Rust Epoxy Mastic Coating 97-145 Series, or equal; 30 mils total. Maximum thickness of an individual coating shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. G. Abrasives for Surface Preparation 1. Abrasives used for preparation of surfaces shall be silica free and shall meet local environmental regulations suitable to achieve surface preparation requirements of coating manufacturer. H. Organic Zinc Primer for Field Touch-Up and Shop Coating 1. Where shop-applied inorganic zinc primers cannot be used because of volatile organic compound (VOC) regulations, the organic zinc primer described in System No. 18 may be substituted for the specified inorganic zmc pnmers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WEATHER CONDITIONS A. Do not paint in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog or when steel or metal surface temperatures are less than 50F above the dew point. B. Do not apply paint when the relative humidity is above 85%. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-12 I II I II Ii II Ii ! Ii Ii I II j I II j I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Do not paint when temperature of metal to be painted is above l20oF. D. Do not apply alkyd, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints if air or surface temperature is below 400F or expected to be below 400F within 24 hours. E. Do not apply epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints on an exterior or interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 600F or expected to drop below 600F in 24 hours. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION PROCEDURES A. Remove oil and grease from metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-l. Use clean cloths and cleaning solvents and wipe dry with clean cloths. Do not leave a film or greasy residue on the cleaned surfaces before abrasive blasting. B. Remove weld spatter and weld slag from metal surfaces and grind smoothly rough welds, beads, peaked comers, and sharp edges including erection lugs in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3. Grind 0.020 inch (minimum) off the weld caps on pipe weld seams. Grind outside sharp comers, such as the outside edges of flanges, to a minimum radius of 114 inch. C. Do not abrasive blast or prepare more surface area in one day than can be coated in one day; prepare surfaces and apply coatings the same day. Remove sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter. D. Do not abrasive blast PVC, CPVC, or FRP piping or equipment. Do not abrasive blast epoxy- or enamel-coated pipe that has been factory coated, except to repair scratched or damaged coatings. E. For carbon steel, do not touch the surface between the time of abrasive blasting and the time the coating is applied. Apply coatings within two hours of blasting or before any rust bloom forms. F. Surface preparation shall conform to the SSPC specifications as follows: Solvent Cleaning SP-1 Hand Tool Cleaning SP-2 Power Tool Cleaning SP-3 White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-5 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-6 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP-7 Pickling SP-8 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-13 Near- White Blast Cleaning SP-10 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal SP-ll Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Steel and Other Hard Materials SP-12 by High- and Ultrahigh-Pressure Water Jetting Prior to Recoating Surface Preparation of Concrete SP-13 G. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning," "hand tool cleaning," "wire brushing," or "blast cleaning" or similar words are used in these specifications or in paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC (Steel Structure Painting Council), surface preparation specifications listed above. H. Dust blasting is defined as cleaning the surface through the use of very fine abrasives, such as siliceous or mineral abrasives, 80 to 100 mesh. Apply a fine etch to the metal surface to clean the surface of any contamination or oxide and to provide a surface profile for the coating. I. Brush-off blasting of concrete and masonry surfaces is defmed as opemng subsurface holes and voids and etching the surface for a coating to bond. J. For carbon steel surfaces, after abrasive blast cleaning, the height of the surface profile shall be 2 to 3 mils. Verify the surface profile by measuring with an impresser tape acceptable to the NACE inspector and City's Representative. Perform a minimum of one test per 100 square feet of surface area. Testing shall be performed by the NACE inspector and witnessed by the City's Representative. The impresser tape used in the test shall be permanently marked with the date, time, and locations where the test was made. Test results shall be promptly presented to the City's Representative. K. Do not apply any part of a coating system before the NACE inspector and City's Representative have reviewed the surface preparation. If coating has been applied without this review, remove the applied coating by abrasive blasting and reapply the coat in accordance with this specification if directed by the City's Representative. 3.03 ABRASIVE BLAST CLEANING A. Use dry abrasive blast cleaning for metal surfaces. Do not use abrasives in automatic equipment that has become contaminated. When shop or field blast cleaning with handheld nozzles, do not recycle or reuse blast particles. B. After abrasive blast cleaning and before applying coating, dry clean surfaces to be coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting. Apply the specified primer or touch-up coating within the period of an eight-hour 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-14 II I: II II I I I I I I II II II , Ii , II II I II It Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I working day. Do not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Before applying primer or touch-up coating, reclean any blast-cleaned surface not coated within said eight-hour period. C. Keep the area of the work in a clean condition and do not permit blasting particles to accumulate and constitute a nuisance or hazard. D. During abrasive blast cleaning, prevent damage to adjacent coatings. Schedule blast cleaning and coating so that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces. 3.04 PREPARATION OF CONCRETE AND MASONRY SURFACES TO BE COATED A. Surface preparation of concrete and masonry surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC SP-13 and the following. B. Do not apply coating until concrete has cured at least 30 days. Finish concrete surfaces according to Section 03300. Do not use curing compound on surfaces that are to be coated. C. Concrete and masonry surfaces on which coatings are to be applied shall be of even color, gray or gray-white. The surface shall have no pits, pockets, holes, or sharp changes of surface elevation. Scrubbing with a stiff-bristle fiber brush shall produce no dusting or dislodging of cement or sand. Sprinkling water on the surface shall produce no water beads or standing droplets. Concrete and masonry shall be free of laitance and slick surfaces. D. Detergent clean the concrete or masonry surface with trisodium phosphate per ASTM D 4258. Then sandblast surfaces (brush-off blast). Floor slabs may be acid etched in accordance with ASTM D 4260 in lieu of sandblasting. After sandblasting, wash surfaces with water to remove dust and salts, per ASTM D 4258 or D 4261. The grain of the concrete surface to touch shall not be rougher than that of No. 10 mesh sand. E. Before coating concrete, plaster, and masonry with System No. 35, determine the presence of capillary moisture according to ASTM D 4263, except as modified below. Tape a 4-foot-by-4-foot sheet of polyethylene plastic to the concrete surface to be coated. Allow the plastic sheet to remain in place at least 24 hours. After the specified time has elapsed, remove the plastic sheet and visually examine both the underside of the plastic sheet and the concrete surface beneath it. There shall be no indication of moisture on either surface. If moisture is indicated, allow additional curing time for the concrete and then retest. Provide one test sheet for every 500 square feet of concrete surface to be coated. For 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-15 walls, provide one test sheet for each 10 feet (or fraction thereof) of vertical rise in all elevations starting within 12 inches of the floor or base slab. F. Acceptance criteria for concrete surfaces shall be in accordance with SSPC SP-13, Table 1, "Severe Service." G. Do not apply coatings to concrete when the concrete is outgassing. Apply coatings only when the concrete surface temperature is stable, not nsmg. Depending upon the time of the year and the atmospheric conditions stable conditions may only occur during non-standard working hours. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the City when working non-standard working hours is necessary to comply with this specification. The Contractor shall perform this work during non-standard working hours at no additional cost to the City. 3.05 PROCEDURES FOR ITEMS HAVING SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS A. After application of primer to surfaces, allow coating to cure for a minimum of two hours before handling to minimize damage. B. When loading for shipment to the project site, use spacers and other protective devices to separate items to prevent damaging the shop-primed surfaces during transit and unloading. If wood spacers are used, remove wood splinters and particles from the shop-primed surfaces after separation. Use padded chains or ribbon binders to secure the loaded items and minimize damage to the shop- primed surfaces. C. Cover shop-primed items 100% with protective coverings or tarpaulins to prevent deposition of road salts, fuel residue, and other contaminants in transit. D. Handle shop-primed items with care during unloading, installing, and erecting operations to minimize damage. Do not place or store shop-primed items on the ground or on top of other work unless ground or work is covered with a protective covering or tarpaulin. Place shop-primed items above the ground upon platforms, skids, or other supports. E. Inorganic and organic zinc primers shall be lead free. 3.06 FIELD TOUCH-UP OF SHOP-APPLIED PRIME COATS A. Remove oil and grease surface contaminants on metal surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-l. Use clean rags wetted with a de greasing solution, rinse with clean water, and wipe dry. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-16 I Ii II II Ii II II Ii II II If Ii II I I: Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. Remove dust, dirt, salts, moisture, chalking primers, or other surface contaminants that will affect the adhesion or durability of the coating system. Use a high-pressure water blaster or scrub surfaces with a broom or brush wetted with a solution of trisodium phosphate, detergent, and water. Before applying intermediate or finish coats to inorganic zinc primers, remove any soluble zinc salts that have formed by means of scrubbing with a stiff bristle brush. Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water. C. Remove loose or peeling primer and other surface contaminants not easily removed by the previous cleaning methods in accordance with SSPC SP-7. Take care that remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with blast-cleaned edges feathered. D. Remove rust, scaling, or primer damaged by welding or during shipment, storage, and erection in accordance with SSPC SP-lO. Take care that remaining primers are not damaged by the blast cleaning operation. Areas smaller than 1 square inch may be prepared per SSPC SP-11. Remaining primers shall be firmly bonded to the steel surfaces with cleaned edges feathered. E. Use repair procedures on damaged primer that protects adjacent primer. Blast cleaning may require the use of lower air pressure, smaller nozzles, and abrasive particle sizes, short blast nozzle distance from surface, shielding, and/or masking. F. After abrasive blast cleaning of damaged and defective areas, remove dust, blast particles, and other debris by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming; then apply the specified touch-up coating. G. Surfaces that are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field touch-up of organic zinc primer per System No. 18 to cover scratches or abraded areas. H. dther surfaces that are shop primed shall receive a field touch-up of the same primer used in the original prime coat. 3.07 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. All materials of a specified painting system, including primer, intermediate, and finish coats, shall be produced by the same manufacturer. Thinners, cleaners, driers, and other additives shall be as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the particular coating system. B. Deliver paints to the jobsite in the original, unopened containers. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-17 C. Refer to Section 09902 for piping and equipment painting systems. II II 3.08 PAINT STORAGE AND MIXING II 3.09 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Store and mix materials only in areas designated for that purpose by the Construction Manager. The area shall be well-ventilated, with precautionary measures taken to prevent fire hazards. Post ''No Smoking" signs. Storage and mixing areas shall be clean and free of rags, waste, and scrapings. Tightly close containers after each use. Store paint at an ambient temperature from 500F to lOooF. II II B. Prepare multiple-component coatings using all of the contents of the container for each component as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Do not use partial batches. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life. Provide small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas. Mix only the components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even within the same generic type of coating. II I! Ii PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS Ii I A. Conform to the requirements of SSPC PA-l. Follow the recommendations of the coating manufacturer including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. II B. Stir, strain, and keep coating materials at a uniform consistency during application. Power mix components. For multiple component materials, premix each component before combining. Apply each coating evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. Use a different shade or tint on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. I I II C. Do not use thinners unless recommended by the coating manufacturer. If thinning is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. Stir coating materials at all times when adding thinner. Do not flood the coating material surface with thinner before mixing. Do not reduce coating materials more than is absolutely necessary to obtain the proper application characteristics and to obtain the specified dry-film thicknesses. II Ii II I Ii D. Remove dust, blast particles, and other debris from blast-cleaned surfaces by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming. Allow ventilator fans to clean airborne dust to provide good visibility in working area before coating applications. Remove dust PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-18 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I from coated surfaces by dusting, sweepmg, and vacuuming before applying succeeding coats. E. Apply coating systems to the specified mmrmum dry-film thicknesses as determined per SSPC P A-2. F. Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Before applying coating, reclean surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become moist. G. Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces before applying the primer and finish coat. Apply the brush coat before and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the brush coat. H. Before applying subsequent coats, allow the primer and intermediate coats to dry for the minimum curing time recommended by the manufacturer. In no case shall the time between coats exceed the manufacturer's recommendation. I. Each coat shall cover the surface of the preceding coat completely, and there shall be a visually perceptible difference in applied shade or tint of colors. J. Applied coating systems shall be cured at 750F or higher for 48 hours. If temperature is lower than 750F, curing time shall be in accordance with printed recommendations of the manufacturer, unless otherwise allowed by the City's Representative. K. Assembled parts shall be disassembled sufficiently before painting or coating to ensure complete coverage by the required coating. 3.10 SURFACES NOT TO BE COATED Do not paint the following surfaces unless otherwise noted in the drawings or mother specification sections. Protect during the painting of adjacent areas: A. Concrete walkways. B. Mortar-coated pipe and fittings unless otherwise noted. C. Stainless steel. D. Metal letters. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-19 N. P. E. Glass. F. Roofings. G. Fencing. H. Copper tubing and red brass piping. I. PVC and CPVC piping except as required for UV protection, or as noted on pipe schedule in Section 09902. J. Electrical fixtures except for factory coatings. K. Nameplates. 1. Grease fittings. M. Brass and copper, submerged. Buried pipe, unless specifically required in the piping specifications. O. Fiberglass items, unless specifically required in the FRP specifications. Aluminum handrail, stairs, and grating except for the purpose of insulating these items from concrete or dissimilar metals for corrosion protection. Q. Insulated pipe. 3.11 PROTECTION OF SDRFACES NOT TO BE PAINTED A. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 To protect surfaces that are not to be painted, the Contractor shall do the following: 1. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switchplates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. 2. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from. falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. 3. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-20 II II II II II II II II I: Ii II II II II Ii II Ii II Ii I I I I I I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I 4. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. 3.12 SURFACES TO BE COATED The exact coating to be applied in any location is not designated by the descriptive phrases in the coating system titles such as "corrosive environment," "buried metal," or "submerged metal." Coat surfaces with the specific coating systems as described below: A. Coat mechanical equipment, such as pumps, fans, and air compressors as described in the various mechanical equipment specifications. The color of finish coat shall match the color specified in Section 09902. B. Coat aboveground and exposed piping or piping in vaults and structures as described in the various piping specifications and as shown in Section 09902. The color of finish coat shall match the color specified in Section 09902. C. Coat submerged steel and steel piping and ductile iron piping in non-potable water or sewage wet wells per System No. 1 for non-potable water applications. Coat submerged steel and steel piping and ductile iron piping in potable water wet wells or tanks with System No. 7 for potable water applications. Steel or ductile iron piping inside tanks shall be coated with System No.7. D. Coat valves as described in the various valve specifications. Aboveground valves, or valves in vaults and structures, shall match the color of the connecting piping. E. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete according to System No. 51 or 54. F. Coat buried flanges,. nuts and bolts, valves, flexible pipe couplings, exposed rebar in thrust blocks, and valve boxes as specified in the particular specifications for the above items. If the particular specifications do not specify a coating system, coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt threads, and nuts according to System No. 24. 3.13 SURFACE PREPARATION OBSERVATION, COATINGS OBSERVATION AND DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING A. The Contractor shall employ the services of a NACE-certified coatings inspector to perform surface preparation inspections, coatings inspections, and wet and dry film thickness testing of field-applied coatings. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the inspections with the work. The NACE-certified inspector shall provide the City and the Engineer with signed reports of the inspection work. No coatings shall be applied until the NACE-certified inspector provides the City and 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-21 03720-022-01 October, 2007 the Engineer with a signed report indicating that surface preparation meets the requirements specified herein. B. Measure coating thickness specified for carbon steei surfaces with a magnetic- type dry-film thickness gauge in accordance with SSPC PA-2. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past six months. Provide dry-film thickness gauge as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer. C. Test the finish coat of metal surfaces (except zinc primer and galvanizing) for holidays and discontinuities with an electricaI holiday detector, low-voltage, wet- sponge. type. Provide measuring equipment. Provide certification that the gauge has been calibrated by a certified laboratory within the past six months. Provide detector as manufactured by Tinker and Rasor or K-D Bird Dog. D. Measure coating thickness specified for concrete or masonry surfaces in accordance with ASTM D 4138. Test the finish coat of concrete and masonry surfaces in accordance with NACE RP-0188-90 or ASTM D 4787. Patch coatings at the points of thickness measurement or holiday detection. E. Check each coat for the correct dry-film thickness. Do not measure within eight hours after application of the coating. F. For metal surfaces do the following: 1. Make five separate spot measurements (average of three readings) spaced evenly over each 100 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. 2. Make three readings for each spot measurement of either the substrate or the paint. Move the probe or detector a distance of 1 to 3 inches for each new gauge reading. 3. Discard any unusually high or low reading that cannot be repeated consistently. 4. Take the average (mean) of the three readings as the spot measurement. The average of five spot measurements for each such 100 square-foot area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement in any 100 square-foot area shall be less than 80% of not more than 120% of the specified thickness. One of three readings which are averaged to produce each spot measurement may underrun by a greater amount as defmed by SSPC P A-2. PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-22 I Ii II Ii 11 I] Ii II II II II II II II II II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G. For concrete surfaces, make five separate spot measurements spaced evenly over each 400 square feet of area (or fraction thereof) to be measured. The average of five spot measurements for each such 400 square-foot area shall not be less than the specified thickness. No single spot measurement in any 400 square-foot area shall be less than 80% of nor more than 120% of the specified thickness. H. Perform tests in the presence of the City's Representative. 3.14 REPAIR OF IMPROPERLY COATED SURFACES A. If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, clean and topcoat the surface'with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Sandblast or power-sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or ,abraded paint, feathering the edges. Then prime and finish coat in accordance with the specifications. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. 3.15 CLEANING A. During the progress of the work, remove discarded materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at the end of each day's work. B. Thoroughly clean brushes and other application equipment at the end of each period of use and when changing to another paint or color. C. Upon completion of painting work, remove masking tape, tarps, and other protective materials, using care not to damage fmished surfaces. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS 09901-23 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 09902 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes pipe and equipment painting and identification as required for this project. B. See Section 09901 for painting systems and requirements. C. All painting systems used on pipes and equipment coming in contact with potable water shall be NSF61 approved. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. 1. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 2. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING 3. Section 15075 - PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Apply color coding to all new plant piping, in accordance with Table 09902-1, Pipe Color and Label, and/or Engineer's instructions. Plant piping shall be painted solid colors unless otherwise specified. B. Apply pipe identification bands in accordance with this section and Section 15075. Piping Material Paint Color Le!!end # Description Pipin!! Label I Linin!! System No. (Exposed Pipin!!) I Influent Sewage Raw Sewage DIP 2277 Falcon Brown 2 From Headworks Headworks Effluent DIP 2277 Falcon Brown Falcon Brown 3 Influent Sample Line Influent Samole PVC Band Letterin.e; 4 Grit Feed Grit Feed DIP 10 Dark Gray 5 Grit Discharge Grit DIP 10 Dark Grav 5 Grit Screw Dischar.e;e Chute Grit PVC I HDPE 41 Dark Gray Dark Gray wI Red 6 Bar Screen Discharge Screenings PVC 41 Bands 7 Plant Water Plant Water DIP 522C Purple (Pantone) 8 Drains Drains DIP I PVC 10 /41 Black 03720-022-01 October, 2007 09902-1 PIPE PAINTING 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Apply color coding to all new plant equipment, in accordance with Table 09902- 2, Equipment Color, and/or Engineer's instructions. Plant equipment shall be painted solid colors unless otherwise specified. Paint Equipment Location System No. Color Mechanical Bar Screen Drive Headworks 13 Dark Gray Mechanical Bar Screen Wash Press Motor Headworks 13 Dark Gray Grit Removal System Paddle Drive Headworks 13 Dark Gray Grit Removal System Grit Pumps Headworks 10 Dark Gray Grit Removal System Classifier Motor Headworks 10 Dark Gray Slide Gate Headworks N/A N/A Sluice Gate Headworks N/A N/A PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable) END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 09902-2 PIPE PAINTING I II II Ii II II Ii 11 Ii II II II Ii I Ii Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11314 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete installation of Recessed Impeller Grit Pumps and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings for Marshall Street and East APCF and as specified herein. The pumps shall be provided by the grit removal equipment manufacturer. 1.02 RELATED WORK The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660-EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT F. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS G. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS H. Section 01800 - TRAINING I. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS J. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING K. Section 11320 - VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 1. Division 15 - MECHANICAL PIPES, VALVES, PIPE HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS M. Division 16 - MOTOR STARTERS AND ELECTRICAL WORK 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Shop drawings B. Manufacturer's certificates C. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions m accordance with Section 01730 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-1 RECESSED llvlPELLER GRIT PUMPS A. B, C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). American Water Works Association (A WW A). Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. All the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard for pumping settled grit. B. The grit pumps will be used to pump settled grit from the storage chambers of the vortex grit collection equipment to the grit classifiers. C. The grit pumping system shall include the following: Component Marshall Street East Recessed impeller centrifugal pumps 2 2 Vertical squirrel cage, totally enclosed drive 2 2 motors, belts and sheaves Fabricated steel base plates as required 2 2 D. All necessary controls and electrical starters shall be supplied by the pump manufacturer and installed in the Vortex Grit Collection Equipment Control Panel in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS The grit pumps shall be capable of pumping 250 gpm with sufficient pressure to drive the cyclone at the classifier. A. Each grit pump shall be designed and manufactured as specified for the conditions of service tabulated below: Marshall Street East Design Flow (gpm) 250 250 Design TDH - Water (ft) 8 8 Minimum Suction Size (inches) 4 4 Minimum Discharge Size (inches) 4 4 Minimum Diameter Sphere Passing (inches) 4 4 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-2 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS I II II I II II Ii II I: I I I Ii I II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A. All parts shall be properly protected so that no damage or deterioration will occur during the delay from the time of shipment until installation is completed and the units and equipment are ready for operation. B. All equipment and parts must be properly protected against any damage during storage at the site. C. Factory assembled parts and components shall not be dismantled for shipment unless permission is received in writing from the ENGINEER. D. Finished surfaces of all exposed pump openings shall be protected by wooden blanks, strongly built and securely bolted thereto. E. Finished iron or steel surfaces not painted shall be properly protected to prevent rust and corrosion. F. After hydrostatic or other tests, all entrapped water shall be drained prior to shipment, and proper care shall be taken to protect parts from the entrance of water during shipment, storage and handling. G. Each box or package shall be properly marked to show its net weight in addition to its content. 1.09 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts m clearly identified containers: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-3 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS 1. One (1) set of packing for each pump. This packing shall be in addition to that specified for installation prior to field testing of the new pumping unit. 2. One (1) complete set of gaskets, "0" -rings, etc. for each pump. 3. One (1) shaft sleeve, key, and accessory for each size pump. 4. One (1) suction piece or one (1) wear plate and wear ring assembly for each size pump. 5. One (1) set of belts for each size pump. 6. One (1) extra set of sleeves for each size pump. B. Special Tools 1. Furnish one set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate the equipment for which the tools are intended. C. Furnish a one-year supply of lubricants. Lubricants shall include summer and winter grades along with alternate references to equal products of other manufacturers including specifications such as AGMA numbers, viscosity, etc. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year by the CONTRACTOR and the Manufacturer. Warranty period shall commence as outlined in the General Conditions and Division 1. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unites) restored to service at no expense to the OWNER. C. The Manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. D. Refer to the General Conditions and Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Model CEVP by Wemco, No "OR EQUAL" is allowed 03720-022-01 October, 2007 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS 11314-4 Ii Ii II Ii I Ii II Ii Ii Ii II II II II II II II Ii I) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Grit pumps shall be of the vertical, severe duty, non-clogging, recessed impeller type. The impeller shall be of the cup-type design. The pumps and motors shall be positioned as shown on the Drawings and as later specified herein. B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein. 2.03 ACCESORIES A. The pump base shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position, precisely leveled and aligned, so that the completed installation is free from stress or distortion. All necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR and conform to the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer. Anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be of Type 316 stainless steel. Grouting under bases after the equipment is set is included as work under this Section. Pump and pump base shall have adequate provisions to collect drainage and conduct it away to nearest drain. B. The pump casing shall be two-piece, radially split type, with a separate and removable suction designed so that the impeller can be withdrawn without the need to remove the discharge casing or disturb the discharge piping. The casing shall be constructed so that it can be reversed for opposite rotation. The casing thickness shall be a minimum of %-in with normal casting tolerances. The removable suction piece shall have a minimum thickness at the area of maximum wear of 1-1/4-in with normal casting tolerance. All internal case clearances shall be equal to the discharge diameter so that all material that will pass through the discharge will pass through the pump. Suction and discharge shall be equipped with slotted flanges to receive 125 lb. ANSI Standard bolting. All cast parts shall be furnished in accordance with ASTM Specifications. C. Impellers shall be of the recessed design, constructed of the same material as the casing, and shall be mounted completely out of the flow path between the pump inlet and the discharge connection, so that the solids pumped are not required to flow through the impeller. D. The cup-type impeller shall be designed so that the blade ends are surrounded by an integral rim which shall direct the flow to the removable suction piece. The integral rim and impeller vanes shall be of the tapered design, so that the area where the highest wear occurs corresponds to the thickest portion of the taper for both the rim and the vane. The rim shall taper from the impeller and shall be of the cup-type design such that blade ends are surrounded by an integral rim which shall direct the flow to the removable suction piece. The rim shall taper from 7/8- in to ~-in. The impeller vane shall taper from l-5/8-in to 7/8-in. The impeller shall be babbitted to tapered shaft and secured by an impeller bolt or approved 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-5 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS equal locking device. A removable wearplate ofNi-Hard or Hi-Chrome Iron shall be provided in back of the impeller designed to direct flow from behind the impeller to the center of the volute for maximum protection to the casing. E. The parts exposed to abrasive wear including case, removable suction piece, impeller, and wearplate shall be of all Ni-Hard or Hi-Chrome Iron material conforming to ASTM Designation A532-75 Class I or Class III, Type A, and be a minimum of 650 Brinell hardness for maximum wear resistance. Brinell values below this are not acceptable. F. Shaft shall be ASTM A108 Grade 1141 (or equal) steel, and shall be protected throughout the packing area by a removable 11 to 13 percent chrome hardened stainless steel shaft sleeve. G. The cast iron stuffing box shall have a machined fit to the rear liner complete with a confined "0" ring seal. It shall be of sufficient size to contain at least five (5) rings of packing and a split Teflon lantern ring. Packing shall be Chesterton, Type 1727. The stuffing box shall be provided with a 3/8-in NPT seal water connection. The split stuffing box gland shall be 316 stainless steel or bronze including bolts and nuts. A o/.i-inch NPT connection shall be supplied on the bearing frame for seal water drainage. H. Radial and thrust bearings shall be provided, which shall safely carry all radial and thrust loads. Lubrication shall be oil bath. The oil reservoir shall be sealed at either end to prevent the entrance of foreign material. The bearing housing shall be equipped with a pressure venting device, and oil fill, level, and drain taps. A built-in sight glass shall be furnished to check proper oil level. Bearings shall be designed for a minimum BlO service life of 100,000 hours. The bearing housing shall be constructed of Cast Iron, ASTM A-48, CL-25 or better. I. Pump Suction and Discharge Gauges: Furnish and install pump suction and discharge gauges for each pump in tapped holes in the suction and discharge plpmg. J. Two (2) 4-inch quarter turn plug valves shall be provided with each pump to isolate the grit pump on both the suction and discharge sides. 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVES Drive motors shall be vertical, squirrel cage, totally enclosed, fan cooled, conforming to NEMA Standards, with Class B insulation, a 1.15 service factor, and designed for operation in a 40 degree C ambient temperature. Drive motors shall be designed for operation on a 460V, 3 phase, 60 Hz power supply as specified in Division 16. The speed and horsepower of each motor shall be as specified in Paragraph 2.02B. However, the rated horsepower shall be such that the motors will not be overloaded nor the service factor reduced when the pumps are operated at any point on the design performance curve. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-6 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS I II II II I Ii Ii Ii II Ii II II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.05 CONTROLS In accordance with Division 16, the grit pumps shall be operated from the Vortex Grit Collection Equipment Control Panel to be furnished by the grit system manufacturer. The controls for each grit pump shall interlock with the solenoid valves that provide grit fluidization. The grit pump controls shall also interlock with the grit piping flushing system solenoid valves to flush the discharge piping upstream and downstream of the check valve after the grit pumping cycle, and interlock with the grit classifiers as specified in Section 11320 and as shown on the Drawings. See Section 11320 and Loop Diagrams on I-sheets for details of control system. 2.06 SHOP TESTING The equipment shall be shop assembled and tested to ensure compliance with these specifications. 2.07 PAINTING Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process System. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contracts Documents. A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendation and in the locations shown. on the Drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchor bolts shall be set in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Supply all anchor bolts, temporary lift equipment, power, water, labor, and all other incidentals required for the proper installation of the pumps. 3.02 TESTING A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the Vortex Grit Collection Equipment and Grit Classification Equipment. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-7 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation. D. After all pumps have been completely installed, and working under the direction of the manufacturer, conduct, in the presence of the OWNER, and ENGINEER, such tests as are necessary to indicate that pump efficiency and discharge conform to the Specifications. Field tests shall include all pumps included under this Section. Supply all electric power, water or wastewater, labor, equipment, and incidentals required to complete the field test. E. If the pump performance does not meet the Specifications, corrective measures shall be taken, or pumps shall be removed and replaced with pumps that satisfy the conditions specified. A 24-hour operating period of the pumps will be required before acceptance. F. The pumps and motors shall be designed and constructed to avoid the generation of objectionable heat, noise, or vibration. The sound pressure level at full load shall not exceed 90 (A Scale) decibels above 300 cycles, when measured at a point not exceeding 5 ft from the motor. Mufflers or external baftles will not be accepted. When operating at any point between no-load and full-load, the vibration measured in a horizontal plane above the pump and motor shall not exceed the limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute Standards. G. Submit six copies of certified test results upon satisfactory completion of testing. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's (supplier's) services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer tofumish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11314-8 RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMPS I II II II Ii Ii II II I I: II II II Ii II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11320 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete procurement and installation of vortex grit collector equipment and appurtenances at the Marshall Street and East APCF as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT F. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS G. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS H. Section 01800 - TRAINING I. Section 09901 - PIPING AND COATING- PROCESS SYSTEMS J. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING K. Section 11314 - RECESSED IMPELLER GRIT PUMP 1. Section 15100 - PROCESS VALVES M. Division 15 - Mechanical Pipes, Valves, Pipe Hangers, and Supports N. Division 16 - Motor Starters and Electrical Work 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Shop drawings 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. 2. General arrangement and dimensional drawings of the grit removal system. 3. Written recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up of the equipment. B. Data on performance testing, service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, upon request, for use in determining that the grit removal system offered meets the intent of the contract, performance requirements and criteria stated in these specifications. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-1 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT C. Manufacturer's certificates 1. The equipment supplier warrants that the grit removal system to be supplied shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the Contract Specifications. D. The manufacturer shall be required to furnish a performance bond made payable to the Owner for 100% of the total equipment cost presented within 15 days of the Notice of Award and valid through Grit Unit Performance Tests and Final Acceptance as defined by this Contract. Performance shall include, but not be limited to, conformance to specified criteria. The Manufacturer shall be allowed forty five (45) calendar days to demonstrate compliance with all of the performance criteria. Should the equipment fail to meet the performance criteria after the allotted time, the Manufacturer shall forfeit part or all of the bond to the Owner according to the following schedules: 1. At Marshall Street APCF, the Manufacturer shall forfeit $7,500 for each percentage point below the specified removal efficiency up to 15 percentage points. 2. At East APCF, the Manufacturer shall forfeit $4,700 for each percentage point below the specified removal efficiency up to 15 percentage points. E. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01730 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C. Hydraulic Institute Standards D. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) E. American Welding Society (A WS) Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The grit collection equipment shall be of the "vortex" type, provided with all necessary equipment and accessories. The equipment shall be designed to remove grit from the raw wastewater and plant recycles, and deposit the grit into a storage chamber. The system shall be self-activating and shall not require instrumentation, moving parts or external power. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-2 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT Ii II II II II Ii Ii II Ii II II I I 1.[ II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I B. The settled grit shall be pumped from the storage chamber to grit classification equipment for washing and dewatering. The frequency of grit pumping and removal shall be controlled by an adjustable timer. C. The complete grit removal system shall be supplied by the Vortex Grit Collection Equipment Manufacturer. The grit removal system is comprised of a primary grit separator and grit classifier as Specified herein, and grit pumps, controls and appurtenances as specified in Section 11314. D. The grit removal system and all appurtenances shall be supplied by a single supplier. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The minimum performance requirements and service conditions for the products and materials specified under this section are listed below. Marshall Street East APCF APCF Desi 10 5 25 12.5 3 2 3.33 1.67 8.33 6.25 12 12 0.25 0.25 1.17 1 95% 95% 80% - 85% 95% 20 20 48 40 *Removal efficiency is based on 100 micron grit or larger having a 2.65 specific gravity. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-3 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of ten (l0) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shoWfl on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. The grit units and auxiliary equipment shall be delivered to site fully fabricated, subject to size, packaging and transportation constraints. The Contractor shall inspect equipment prior to unloading and notify Manufacturer of any damage to equipment to effect proper remedial action. B. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.09 SPARE PARTS A. The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts in clearly identified containers, labeled for easy identification without opening the packaging and suitably protected for long term storage in a humid environment. B. Special Tools 1. Furnish one set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate the equipment for which the tools are intended. C. Furnish a one-year supply of lubricants. Lubricants shall include summer and winter grades along with alternate references to equal products of other manufacturers including specifications such as AGMA numbers, viscosity, etc. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-4 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I II II II II II II II Ii I I I Ii II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.10 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year following final acceptance by the Owner. Warranty period shall commence as outlined in the General Conditions and Division 1. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it should be replaced and the unit restored at no expense to the Owner. C. The Manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the Contractor's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. D. Refer to the General Conditions and Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER The equipment specified herein is the product of a single manufacturer and shall be manufactured by Hydro International, Inc. Model - Grit King. No "or equal" item or substitutions are allowed. The CONTRACTOR shall include as part of his price, the purchase of (1) complete Grit King system each for Marshall Street and East APCF for the lump sum bit item, as stipulated in the bid form. The price is based upon the CONTRACTOR issuing a purchase order by the date noted in attached Hydro International, Inc.'s "Terms and Conditions". The Vortex Grit Collection Equipment manufacturer and model shall be the following or equal: A. Model Grit King Dynamic Separator by Hydro International, Portland, ME The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. All components of the grit collection equipment shall be amply proportioned for all stresses that may occur during fabrication, erection, and intermittent or continuous operation. B. Design and fabrication of structural steel members shall be in accordance with AISC and A WS Standards. C. The equipment shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to determine the number, size and location of all anchor bolts. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-5 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT D. Equipment weighing over 100 lbs. shall be provided with lifting lugs. 2.03 GRIT UNIT A. The grit separators shall be manufactured of Type 304L stainless steel, including all interior, submerged bracing, supports, internal components and pipework. Polypropylene (plastic), fiberglass or mild steel will not be accepted. All welding shall conform to the most recent standards of the American Welding Society (A WS) and American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). B. Each grit unit shall consist of a cylindrical vessel with a sloping base and flat top, cylindrical grit collection pot, support frame, and overflow annulus. The internal components shall include a dip plate, center shaft and cone with support frame and deflector plate. A flanged inlet pipe located on the vessel body and an overflow channel with drop pipe located on the overflow annulus shall be mounted tangentially. A flanged underflow pipe at the base of the unit complete with a male NPT connection for fluidizing shall be provided. C. Each grit unit shall be supplied with all weld spatter and flux residue removed, all rough and uneven welds ground smooth, and shall be free of any sharp edges. Each grit unit shall have an acid wash surface finish. D. Design 1. No moving parts subject to wear or stoppage shall be below the water surface. 2. The inlet and outlet shall be in the upper portion of the grit chamber to prevent disturbance of the settled grit. 2.04 BACKWASH / FLUIDIZING AND UNDERFLOW SYSTEM A. The backwash/fluidizing system is fed with screened/filtered plant or potable water free of debris and comprises of a plant water line, complete with regulating valve, pressure gauge, a solenoid valve and manually operated ball valves upstream and downstream of the solenoid valve. Each backwash/fluidizing and underflow system shall have: 1. One (1) I-inch diameter backwash/fluidizing line, one per unit, complete with: a. A I-inch diameter upstream solenoid valve, 120V, 60 Hz, single- phase, NEMA4X b. Two I-inch diameter manually operated ball valves on the backwash line upstream and downstream of the solenoid valve for isolation. c. A I-inch diameter pressure regulating valve and pressure gauge. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-6 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT II II II I) II Ii Ii I: I I I I I Ii Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. Two (2) 4-inch electrically actuated plug valves, one set per unit, one installed and one spare. 2.05 GRIT CLASSIFIER A. The grit classifier shall be capable of separating and removing 100 microns (~150 mesh) grit particles entrained in the flow having a specific gravity 2.65 or greater, with a 95% average removal efficiency. Each unit shall have a grit removal capacity of 12 ft3lhour and shall be capable of handling a 250 gpm grit slurry feed rate containing 1-5% solids by weight. Units requiring cyclone separators as the first stage primary separation devices will not be acceptable. B. The grit classifier shall include but not be limited to the following: specially designed tank with adjustable and removable internal flow redirecting inlet baffle and distribution assembly, perforated diffusion and discharge plates, screw conveyor baffle, conveying screw, non-lube external bearing assembly, variable speed drive assembly, tank covers, tank support assemblies, foundation material and spare parts. C. Settling Tank and Screw Trough 1. The receiving tank and screw trough shall be constructed of 304 grade stainless steel. The tank shall include an internal discharge box with side outlet and dual adjustable weirs for the return of putrescible matter to the grit chamber and for optimizing grit washing prior to removal. The integral inlet flow piping will discharge into a removable internal flow redirecting inlet baffle and distribution assembly, complete with perforated diffusion and discharge plates. The entire baffle assembly shall be capable of being removed to gain access to the conveying screw and trough. The lower portion of the screw shall include a combination closure and diffusion baffle. The inclined screw conveyor discharge trough shall be furnished with a structural steel support assembly for the discharge end of the unit. The trough support assembly shall be shipped as one fmished assembly for ease of field installation. A welded external trough support assembly at the lower end shall be specifically designed to support the lower end of the tank assembly and to mount the external bearing assembly for the screw conveyor. Bearing assemblies located inside the tank and screw trough will not be acceptable. D. Conveying Screw 1. The conveying screw shall be 12 inch diameter, 1/2 pitch, inclined 300 from the horizontal. The screw shall be constructed of 304 grade stainless steel and have 3/16 inch thick flights mounted on steel pipe of sufficient size to limit deflection of the screw to 1/8 inch. The use of intermediate hanger bearings internal to the unit is strictly prohibited. The pipe shall be a minimum of 3 inch diameter schedule 40 pipe. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-7 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 October, 2007 E. I I II I II Ii II II Ii II Support Bearing 1. The lower end of the screw shall be supported by a readily accessible externally mounted support bearing. The design must allow for simple gland rotation for extended service life and require low maintenance. The bearing assembly shall include a high-strength cast iron housing, internal water-tight and grit-resistant packings with packing holder, wear-resistant non-metallic wear ring with mounting boss and removable flanged gland, end cap, mounting gasket, cover gaskets, and assembly hardware.. The unit will be fully factory assembled to the grit washer assembly. F. Covers 1. The receiving tank and screw discharge trough assembly shall be fully covered. All covers will be 304 grade stainless steel of a minimum 12 gauge thickness. The two covers adjacent to the inlet feed piping shall be hinged with handles to provide ease of access. to the flow distribution assembly and adjustable weirs. One cover on the screw discharge trough shall be hinged with a lifting handle. All other covers shall be of bolted construction with gasketing. The inlet pipe support cover shall be adequately reinforced and include welded inlet pipe with bolted flange connection. All assembly hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. G. Discharge Pipes 1. The receiving tank shall be equipped with dual 6-inch diameter flanged discharge outlet pipes. Flanges shall be a minimum of 1/2 inch thick, drilled to match ANSI 150 lb. pipe flanges. II I: H. . Service Pipes II II II II II II Ii 1. The receiving tank shall also include dual 6-inch diameter service pipes, with threaded caps and internal neoprene closure plugs located on each side of the tank, for servicing the inlet baftle and distribution assembly. I Drive Assembly 1. The discharge trough mounted screw conveyor drive assembly shall be an integral variable speed unit. The output speed range will be from 1 to 4 RPM. The unit shall include an AGMA rated helical gear reducer with a minimum 1.25 service factor and a minimum 1 HP motor. The reducer shall have an oil tight housing and be bolted directly to the screw trough. The output shaft of the reducer shall utilize a 2-bolt direct connection to the discharge end of the screw conveyor. The motor shall be 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz service. 11320-8 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturers, model number, serial number, capacity, pressure and any other pertinent data shall be attached to each item of equipment. B. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number, model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes, service factor and other pertinent data shall be attached to each motor. C. The Grit System Manufacturer shall provide additional fluidizing assemblies complete with regulating valve, pressure gauge, a solenoid valve and manually operated ball valves upstream and downstream of the solenoid valve for installation on 4-inch grit pump suction pipes and 20-inch influent pipe. Fluidizing connection sizes and quantities are as follows: 1. 20-inch influent lines will require: a. Marshall Street - three (3) 1 ~-inch fluidizing assemblies b. East - two (2) 1 ~-inch fluidizing assemblies 2. 4-inch grit pump suction lines will require: a. Marshall Street - two (2) I-inch fluidizing assemblies b. East - two (2) I-inch fluidizing assemblies D. The Grit System Manufacturer shall provide one (1) automated plug valves for each grit unit for connection to the inlet pipe of the grit system for isolation purposes. Plug valves and actuators shall be as specified in Section 15100 - Process Valves. Plug valve sizes and quantities are as follows: 1. Marshall Street - Three (3) 20-inch diameter plug valves 2. East - Two (2) 20-inch diameter plug valves E. The Grit System Manufacturer shall provide control floats for operation of inlet pipe plug valves. Control floats shall be as specified in Division 13. The quantity of required floats is as follows: 1. Marshall Street - Two (2) floats 2. East - One (1) float 2.07 CONTROLS A. The vortex grit collector equipment Manufacturer shall fully coordinate with the electrical subcontractor and the instrumentation system supplier for proper operation and control of all equipment provided under this section. B. The vortex type grit removal units shall be cycled on and off by remote control signals from the main control panel based on influent flow and hours in service.. The control system, both local and main, shall be designed and manufactured by the same company that furnishes the vortex type grit removal system. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 11320-9 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Motorized Plug Valves: To control the grit unit's operation, a manual H/OIA selector switch shall be provided in the Manufacturer's control panel. a. In the Automatic position, plug valve operations shall be primarily controlled by floats located in the influent channel with a timer override. As plant flow increases more grit units will be brought online by opening the motorized plug valves. Prior to opening a motorized plug valve, the fluidizing system attached to the 20-inch influent pipe shall be activated for an Operator selectable period of time. As flow decreases, grit units will be taken out of service by closing the motorized valve. The three grit units shall alternate with each cycle at low flows. At peak design flows, all grit units shall operate. If grit units have not cycled during an Operator selectable time, the timer shall open and close the appropriate valves to bring the next unit online. A 24-hour, 96 position time clock shall be provided. I II II II II II b. In the Hand position, Operators will be able to open and close individual valves, overriding the automated controls. II II Ii II II 2. Prior to discharging the grit from the grit pot, a backwash/fluidizing cycle is initiated. The 4-inch electrically actuated plug valve, 120V, 60 Hz, single-phase, NEMA 4X connected to the 4-inch diameter grit underflow pipe will close, isolating the grit pot from the grit pump suction line. The I-inch fluidizing solenoid valve will feed plant water into the grit pot. The backwashing regime uses a fluidizing system that has two primary functions: a. To fluidize the accumulated grit in the grit pot of the grit unit, thereby preventing collected grit from consolidating into a mass that is difficult to remove. The fluidizing process also aids in transporting the accumulated grit to the grit dewatering equipment. I Ii II II II II b. To provide a mechanism for lifting organics from the surface of the collected grit (re-entraining the organic particles from the grit pot into the main flow within the body of the separator), thereby providing a means for reducing the organic content of the recovered grit. c. The backwash cycle duration is a site dependant variable, depending on the grit and organic content in the plant influent, the Operator may adjust it's duration to suit. 3. Grit Pumping: To control the operation of the grit pumps and related systems a manual H/OI A selector switch shall be provided for each pump in the Manufacturer's control panel. Ii' I] 11320-10 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. In the automatic position, pumping frequency shall be timer controlled by Operator selectable time intervals. The two grit pumps shall alternate lead and lag position with each cycle. A 24- hour, 96-position time clock shall be provided. The 24-hour timer contacts shall operate a 0-30 minute pump timer. Flushing of grit pumps suction and discharge piping should be sequenced for every pump shut down using the solenoid valves. b. In Hand position, Operators shall be able to override the timer settings and initiate a grit pumping sequence, including grit fluidizing and line flushing. 4. Grit Screw Conveyor: The conveyor starts when the pump starts. A delay stops the conveyor after the pump stops within the recommended time interval. 5. Degritting Control Sequence a. A time clock shall initiate when grit discharge cycles occur. The time clock shall be adjustable to initiate a cycle up to every 5 minutes. b. When the time clock initiates a cycle, the grit classifier shall operate for an adjustable time period (typically 900 seconds). Concurrently, the grit classifier sends a signal to open the I-inch diameter solenoid valve connected to the I-inch diameter fluidizing line for an adjustable time period (typically 60 seconds). When the fluidizing timer times out, the solenoid valve shall close and the grit pump connected to the 4-inch diameter underflow pipe shall run for an adjustable period of time (typically 120 seconds). c. This process repeats when the next cycle time programmed in the time clock is attained. 6. The new grit system shall be capable of interfacing with the plants existing SCADA system. The following list details the information required: a. Grit System Power Failure b. For each Influent Valve - Open, Closed, Fail c. For each Underflow Valve - Open, Closed, Fail d. For each Grit Pump - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail e. For the Grit Classifier - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail c. Control Panel 11320-11 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 October, 2007 ., 1. I I II Ii There shall be one (1) Manufacturer's provided control panel controlling the transfer of grit from the primary grit separator to the grit dewatering equipment. The panel shall be a NEMA 4X, 316 stainless steel enclosure rated for 480V AC, 3Ph, 60Hz power supply. The main control panel shall be totally enclosed, front access type with up/side/bottom entry. The panel shall be manufactured by a U.L. listed control panel facility and shall bear a U.L. 913 label. 2. Control system shall include a programmable logic controller (PLC), power supply and I/O as manufactured by Allen-Bradley SLC 5/05. Ii 3. The following shall be controlled from the main control panel: II Influent Plug Valves Underflow Plug Valves Fluidizing Solenoids Grit Pumps Grit Classifier I II I Ii II II II 4. The panel door layout shall include the following items: a. Lockable Disconnect / Main Breaker b. Back Lit Power On Maintained 2-way Lever c. Master 3-way H-O-A (Hand-Off-Auto) d. H/O/ A switch for each grit pump e. Maintained 2-way Open/Close or On/Off 1) Underflow Plug Valve f. Back Lit Spring Return 1) Fluidizing Solenoid 2) Grit Pump 3) Grit Classifier g. Push Button Spring Return 1) Cycle Reset 2) Alarm Silence h. Indicating lights for all device function status Ii 5. The panel shall be equipped with dry contacts for remote monitoring of all devices as listed above. II II II II II 6. There shall be a master fault light and audible alarm that signal when a fault has occurred. There shall be an alarm silence push button and cycle reset push button to clear the fault signal. 7. The control panel shall incorporate motor starters and the associated stop/start switches for the grit pump and grit classifier. 8. All switches, . pushbuttons and pilot lights shall be NEMA rated components. IEC rated components are not acceptable. 11320-12 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.08 SHOP TESTING A. Each grit collector drive shall be shop assembled prior to shipment and test run to assure proper operation and then delivered to the site for installation. 2.09 PAINTING A. Manufacturer shall prime equipment in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating Process Equipment and Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting. B. Contractor shall apply intermediate and finish coats in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating Process Equipment and Section 09902 - Pipe and Equipment Painting. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents. B. Install the equipment in the locations as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and the approved shop drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The equipment manufacturer shall furnish the services of a competent and experienced factory representative who has complete knowledge of proper installation, operation and maintenance of the equipment to inspect the installed equipment, perform an initial test run, conduct final performance testing, and provide operating and maintenance instructions to the plant personnel. D. Submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installed equipment has been examined and found to be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the equipment. 3.02 TESTING A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-13 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. I: II II Ii II Ii Ii II II Preliminary field tests shall be made by the Manufacturer's Representative after installation of the Grit Classification Equipment and Grit Pumps, but prior to placing in service to confirm the following: 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Functional Test shall occur during Phase I Equipment Start-up as specified in Section 01660; the equipment shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance. All control functions, alarm and communications with SCADA system shall be tested and demonstrated to work in accordance with the specifications. The equipment shall be operated for 48 hours without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating and perform the specified function. These tests may be sequence to correspond with the equipment installation schedule. D. Grit Unit Performance Tests shall occur during Phase II Equipment Start-up as specified in Section 01660 and are not to be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing and manufacturer's certificate is submitted. E. Grit Unit Performance Tests shall be done in the field (in-situ) and conducted by an independent testing organization as detailed in Section 01600 of both the vortex grit unit and the grit classifier. The specified performance must be met before the equipment is accepted and considered substantially complete. All costs associated with these field tests shall be paid by the Contractor using the previously negotiated and stipulated allowance. II II II F. Grit Unit Performance Tests shall be run during an eight hour test interval. The tests will be conducted with the system operating under continuous flow conditions. The test interval will not begin until five minutes after steady flow conditions have been established and the test period will be completed at least five minutes before the steady flow operating cycle is terminated. II Ii 1. Sampling Point Information: Sampling Location Designation Number and Minimum Volume of Samples Vortex Grit Influent VGU-I 3 - 1,000 gallon Vortex Grit Effluent VGU-E 3 - 1,000 gallon Vortex Grit Underflow GC-I 3 - 500 gallon Grit. Classifier Overflow GC-O 3 -, 500 gallon II II The dewatered grit captured by the system and discharged by the dewatering equipment should be sampled and analyzed to determine if the performance guarantee is being met. Ii II I) 11320-14 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. Grit removal efficiency is to be determined by averaging the results obtained from the number of samples indicated above using the procedure outlined below. b. During the three tests, one thousand (1000) pounds of US Silica Corp. (or equal) silica sand will be introduced to the vortex grit unit as "seed sand". This sand loading provides a concentration in excess of 1500 mg/l of graded sand in the influent to the grit unit. Sand gradation shall approximate the following: Sand Sizes % 50 micron 2 100 micron 37 150 micron 27 200 micron 12 250 micron 12 300 micron 10 c. For purposes of this test, grit shall be defined as any inorganic substance with a specific gravity greater than 2.5. 2. Vortex Grit Unit Sampling and Test Procedure: a. Samples shall be taken from different locations as described above. b. The vortex grit influent and effluent samples shall be collected using submersible pumps from the middle of the channel and routed to large containers to be utilized as settling basins (one for influent sample and one for effluent sample). A minimum of 1,000 gallons shall be allowed to flow into each settling basin; overflow shall be directed to a sewer or the grit collector discharge channel. c. At the termination of each test run, the grit shall be allowed to settle and the supernatant shall be siphoned from the top of each settling basin until approximately I-in of liquid remains in the bottom. The entire volume of sample is recorded before being split for analysis. d. A 200-gram portion of the settled sample shall be placed in the Wet Sieve System for immediate sieving of the solids. Wet sieving for size fractions shall be conducted on fresh grit from the grit unit influent and effluent samples. e. Each residue shall be weighed and totaled, including the amount passing through the 150 mesh sieve. This provides a grit size 11320-15 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT graduation for both influent and effiuent samples. The removal efficiencies for inlet-to-outlet removal are based on the material retained in the sieve. This means that the figure for 70 mesh removal is based on all material retained on a 70 mesh sieve, comparing the influent to the effiuent. The 100 mesh removal figure is all material passing a 70 mesh but retained on 100 mesh, comparing the influent and effiuent. The 100 mesh removal figure represents all material passing the 70 to 100 mesh screens, but being retained on the 150 mesh screen, comparing influent to effiuent. 3. Grit Classifier Sampling and Test Procedure: a. Samples shall be taken from different locations as described above. b. The grit classifier influent shall be collected by connecting a clear 2-inch hose to a flushing connection installed on the grit unit underflow pipe following the grit pump. A minimum of 500 gallons shall be allowed to flow into the settling basin; overflow shall be directed to a sewer or the grit collector discharge channel. c. The grit classifier overflow shall be collected by placing a 5-gallon bucket under the discharge pipe and transferred continuously by a ten-gpm pump directly into a grit settler. A minimum of 500 gallons shall be allowed to flow into the settling basin; overflow shall be directed to a sewer or the grit collector discharge channel. d. Grit classifier influent and overflow samples shall be tested using the protocol described above in Vortex Grit Unit Sampling and Test Procedures. G. In the event the equipment fails to meet the specified performance, the Grit System Manufacturer shall be responsible for making all corrections of the work and subsequent test runs until the defects are corrected. If the system remains unable to meet the test requirements, the defective equipment shall be removed and replaced at the Manufacturer's expense. H. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation. Results shall be considered acceptable if they are within 5% of the performance requirements specified above. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-16 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I 11 II II 1\ II Ii II II I Ii II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. c. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and hall be mailed directly to the Engineer. 11320-17 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT SECTION 11320 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT I I II HYDRO INTERNATIONAL PROPOSAL Ii I II I: II 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11320-18 VORTEX GRIT COLLECTION EQUIPMENT II I:i Ii 1\ II Ii II Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Hydro International FINAL QUOTATION To: Project: Location: Hydro Ref: Date: Jones Edmunds & Associates, Inc. Marshall St. APCF & East APCF Clearwater, FL 2006-390,2006-391 Wednesday, September 26, 2007 TO SUPPLY: .. . Marshall St. APCF QUANTITY DESCRIPTION PRICE 3 No. 12 foot diameter free standing Grit King"" Dynamic Separators with overflow channel extensions, manufactured in type 304L stainless steel. 3 No. Overflow channel covers and access hatches. 1 No. Type SXV Reg-U-Flo<8l Vortex Valve 1 No. NEMA 4X control panel with PLC (AT, fluidizing, grit pump, VFD, inlet fluidizing, floats, classifier) 3 No. Underflow control systems comprised of: . 1 No.1 inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 3 No. 1 inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 inch pressure regulating valve and gauge . 1 No.4 inch RCS electrically actuated plug valve - NEMA 4X 1 No. 4 inch spare RCS electrically actuated plug valve - NEMA 4X 2 No. Grit Underflow Pipe fluidizing systems comprised of: . 1 NO.1 inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 2 No. 1 inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 inch pressure reQulating valve and gauge 3 No. Inlet fluidizing systems comprised of: . 1 No.1 % inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 2 NO.1 % inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 % inch pressure regulating valve and gauge 2 No. Model CEVP Dry mount vortex type grit pumps 4 No. 4 inch diameter manually actuated isolating knife gate valves 3 No. 20 inch diameter EIM/Limitorque electrically actuated plug valves - NEMA 4X 1 No. 12 inch diameter standard screw classifier manufactured in type 304L stainless steel 1 No. Inlet Float Control SUB-TOTAL $1,029,311 Hydro International. 94 Hutchins Drive. Portland, ME 04102 Tel: (207) 756-6200. Fax: (207) 756-6212. E-mail: hiltech@hil-tech.com www.Hydro-lntemational.biz 25 Years of Vortex Technology East APCF 2 No. 12 foot diameter free standing Grit King<l!l Dynamic Separators with overflow channel extensions, manufactured in type 304L stainless steel. 2No. Overilow channel covers and access hatches. 1 No. Type SXV Reg-U-Flo<l!l Vortex Valve 1 No. NEMA 4X control panel with PLC (AT, fluidizing, grit pump, VFD, inlet fluidizing, floats, classifier) 2 No. Underilow control systems compriseq of: . 1 NO.1 inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 3 No. 1 inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 inch pressure regulating valve and gauge . 1 No.4 inch RCS electrically actuated plug valve - NEMA 4X 1 No. 4 inch Spare RCS electricallY actuated plua valve - NEMA 4X 2 No. Grit Underflow Pipe fluidizing systems comprised of: . 1 NO.1 inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 2 No. 1 inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 inch pressure regulating valve and aauge 2 No. Inlet fluidizing systems comprised of: . 1 NO.1 % inch slow acting solenoid valve - NEMA 4X . 2 No. 1 % inch manually activated ball valves . 1 No. 1 % inch pressure reaulating valve and aauae 2 No. Model CEVP Dry mount vortex tvoe arit pumps 4No. 4 inch diameter manually actuated isolating knife aate valves 2 No. 20 inch diameter EI M/Limitorque electrically actuated plug valves - NEMA 4X 1 No. 12 inch diameter standard screw classifier manufactured in type 304L stainless steel 1 No. Inlet Float Control SUB-TOTAL $769,681 1 No. Field performance verification testina $40,000 TOTAL: $1,838,992 Price includes design costs, fabrication, installation details and drawings, and delivery to the job site. Unloading, storage and installation by others. Price does not include taxes or duties of any kind. The descriptions contained in this quotation are our interpretation of the specifications. Should amendments to this proposal be necessary, we reserve the right to vary the price accordingly. I II Ii II II II Ii Ii II I: II Ii II I II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Validity: Terms: The quoted price will remain firm for the duration of the project assuming the following: · The orders for both facilities will be placed at the same time and the project schedules will run simultaneously. · Hydro obtains a purchase agreement by December 14,2007. The Contractor/Client will accept delivery of the equipment on or before March .31,2008. If there are space constraints on the project Hydro can provide storage for the equipment at no additional cost to the owner if it is acceptable to invoice for completed equipment on or before March 31, 2008. In the event that a raw material cost increase takes place between the advertisement date and the purchase agreement date in excess of 4%, Hydro International and the contractor/client shall come to terms on the final sale price of the equipment. The percentage of increase shall model the 304/304L stainless steel surcharges as published on Allegheny Ludlum Corporation's website http://www.alleahenvludlum.com. Payment shall be within 30 calendar days of the indicated milestone event as follows: Shop Drawing Approval 15% Delivery of Equipment 65% Satisfactory Completion of Performance Testing 10% Successful Completion of Performance Warranty 10% I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11325 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete procurement and installation of Grit Classification Equipment and appurtenances at the Northeast APCF as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT F. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS G. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS H. Section 01800 - TRAINING I. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS J. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following. A. Shop drawings B. Manufacturer's certificates C. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions m accordance with Section 01730 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). B. American Water Works Association (A WWA) C. Hydraulic Institute Standards. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) E. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) F. American Welding Society (A WS). 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-1 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. B. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for use in washing conveyance, and dewatering of grit separated from raw wastewater by grit collection unit. The influent shall be pumped (via existing pumps) into the classifier through two cyclones positioned over the setting pool. The inclined grit classifier shall wash and dewater the grit while lifting it from the hopper to a higher point of discharge. The equipment shall be approved for installation by the equipment manufacturer before its order and installation. One complete unit shall be provided and installed as shown on the Drawings. The screw conveyor with parallel plate separator (classifier) shall be equipped with a two (2) grit separators (cyclones) that will be driven by existing grit pump(s). The grit shall be washed and conveyed to the grit discharge chutes by means of classifiers. C. The grit concentrators (cyclones) shall be provided for secondary treatment of organics and secondary grit dewatering. These units will replace the existing grit concentrators and shall be used with existing grit pumps. The grit concentrators shall operate on the constant rate vortex principle and have a capacity of 250 gallons per minute each. Design shall be such that a small volume of water and the grit will discharge at the bottom of the concentrator to the screw conveyor with parallel plate separator (classifier). At a minimum, 93% percent of the water pumped to the concentrator and 95% of the residual organic matter shall flow out the top and be returned to the grit chamber inlet channel. The unit shall be capable of intermittent operation with minimal variation in removal efficiency. D. The grit conveyor (screw or shaftless) with parallel plate separator (screw classifier) shall be a free standing unit with support legs. The inlet hopper shall receive the mixture of water and grit from the concentrator and shall have parallel plates located in the settling zone to improve retention of grit. An overflow weir trough shall be provided to return water to the system. The grit will be elevated from the hopper by the screw, and the dewatered grit will drop from the plain end pipe outlet into the dumpster. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. The grit classification equipment shall be designed for the following conditions of servIces: 1. The minimum performance requirements for the products and materials specified under this section are listed below. a. Performance Parameter Performance Value 11325-2 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT I I 11 Ii II II Ii Ii II I I I I II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Removal efficiency of 150 mesh grit 95 percent Having a 2.65 specific gravity 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. The equipment shall be approved for installation by the equipment manufacturer before its order and installation. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 1.09 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall fumishthe following spare parts in clearly identified containers: A. One lower bearing assembly for each size grit classifier B. One (1) set of matched V -belts for each size unit C. One complete set of gaskets for each size unit D. One spare liner, full length of the inclined conveyer, ifused E. Special Tools 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-3 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT 1. Furnish one set of all special tools required for normal operation and maintenance of the equipment. 2. Tools shall be furnished in a suitable steel case, clearly and indelibly marked on the exterior to indicate the equipment for which the tools are intended. F. Furnish a one-year supply of lubricants. Lubricants shall include summer and winter grades along with alternate references to equal products of other manufacturers including specifications such as AGMA numbers, viscosity, etc. G. Provide the OWNER a list of all spare and replacement parts with individual prices and location where they are available. Prices shall remain in effect for a period of not less than one year after start-up and fmal acceptance. 1.10 WARRANTY A. All equipment supplied under this Section shall be warranted for a period of one (1) year by the CONTRACTOR and the Manufacturer from start-up or 18 months from time of equipment shipment, whichever comes first. Warranty period shall commence as outlined in the General Conditions and Division I. B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the warranty period, it shall be replaced in the machine(s) and the unites) restored to service at no expense to the OWNER. C. The Manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the CONTRACTOR's warranty period. No exception to this provision shall be allowed. D. Refer to the General Conditions and Division 1 for additional warranty requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER The equipment shall be approved for installation at the Northeast APCF by the equipment manufacturer before it is ordered and installed. The Grit Classification Equipment manufacturer and model shall be the following or equal: A. Grit-Mitt by We sTech, Salt Lake City, UT B. Approved Equal 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-4 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT I II Ii II I Ii Ii II Ii II , II II I II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.02 MANUF ACTURED UNITS A. All equipment shall be designed and proportioned to have liberal strength, stability and stiffness and to be especially adapted for the intended service. B. Equipment furnished in this specification shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with this specification. Each conveyor/grit classifier shall be furnished complete with all supports; all mechanical equipment required for proper operation, including complete drive units; all steel, iron, and other metal construction specified herein; and all additional materials of fabrication as required by the supplier's design. C. All equipment included in this section shall be furnished by a single supplier who shall be responsible for the design, coordination and the satisfactory operation of the system. D. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired. E. Like items of materials/equipment shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to provide standardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts and manufacturer's service. F. The equipment shall be rigidly and accurately anchored into position and all necessary foundation bolts, plates, nuts and washers shall be furnished and installed by the CONTRACTOR. It shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer to determine the number, size and location of all anchor bolts. G. Equipment weighing over 100 Ibs shall be provided with lifting lugs. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturers, model number, serial number, capacity, pressure and any other pertinent data shall be attached to each unit. B. Stainless steel nameplates giving the name of the manufacturer, serial number model number, horsepower, speed, voltage, amperes, service factor and other pertinent data shall be attached to each motor. C. Removable, all metal guards in complete conformance with OSHA shall be provided for all motor couplings or belts and similar exposed rotating elements. D. Grit Separator (2-cyclones) I. Materials a. Ni-Hard construction b. Flanges: Cast iron, 1251b ANSI standard flat-face 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-5 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT c. Bolts, nuts, fasteners: Type 316 stainless steel 2. Sizes a. b. Inlet: 4-in Overflow: 6-in Inlet orifice: 3.5-in minimum c. 3. Design a. Flowrate 250gpm through each cyclone b. Maximum Headloss: 10psi c. No moving parts E. Grit Classifier I. Materials a. Hopper and conveyor 'u' channel: 3/16-inch thick Type 316 stainless steel b. Screw: 5/l6-inch Type 316 stainless steel c. Flanges: Cast iron, 150 lb ANSI standard flat-face d. Bolts, nuts, fasteners - Type 316 stainless steel 2. Sizes a. b. c. d. Conveyor length: 8- ft Screw diameter: II-in Discharge: 8-in Drain connections: 2-in 3. Design a. Screw speed: 6 rpm b. Screw shall run on anti-friction bearings at the outlet end, and a bronze bushing at the inlet end. c. Conveyor angle: 22 degrees 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS A. The classifier shall be driven at constant speed by a minimum 1 horsepower, totally enclosed drive motor with properly sized V -belt drive complete with totally enclosed belt guard in conformance with OSHA requirements. 2.05 CONTROLS A. In accordance with Division 16, the controls for the grit classifier shall include all control elements and a variable time delay off timer. The timer shall interlock with the grit pumps such that when the grit pumps shut off the timer will "time out" to ensure that the grit classifier continues to run until all grit is discharged. B. The control system shall be supplied as specified in Division 13 and Division 16. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-6 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUlPMENT I II Ii II II II I II Ii II II I I I II II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Each classifier shall be provided with local disconnects as specified in Division 16. 2.06 SHOP TESTING A. Grit classification equipment shall be shop assembled prior to shipment and test run to assure proper operation and then delivered to the site for installation. 2.07 PAINTING Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process System. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents. B. Install the grit classification equipment as shown on the Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and approved shop drawings. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. Submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the installed equipment has been examined and found to be in complete accordance with the manufacturer's requirements, that the equipment is ready for operation, and that the operating personnel have been suitably instructed in the operation, lubrication and care of the equipment. 3.02 TESTING A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. B. Field tests shall demonstrate the following: 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Field tests shall not be conducted until such time that the entire installation is complete and ready for testing and manufacturer's certificate is submitted and accepted by the ENGINEER. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-7 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I II D. Functional Test: Prior to plant start-up, the equipment shall be inspected for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance. The equipment shall be operated for 48 hours without vibration, jamming, leakage, or overheating and perform the specified function. II E. Submit full scale field test data, from a unit of the same size as that provided. These test results shall demonstrate compliance with the performance requirements stated in Paragraph 1.05C above. The submittal shall include the location of the equipment, date of actual test and name, address and telephone number of the contact familiar with the actual test. The manufacturer shall certify the accuracy of the full-scale test results. If full-scale test data are not submitted to demonstrate the performance required under Paragraph 1.05C above, then a field performance test shall be conducted. Ii Ii 1. Grit removal efficiency is to be determined by averaging the results obtained from at least three sample runs using a similar procedure to the one outlined below. The specified performance must be met before the equipment is accepted. All testing costs shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. II I II II II Ii I a. For purposes of this test, grit shall be defined as any inorganic substance with a specific gravity greater than 2.5. b. Samples of grit shall be taken from the influent stream and effluent stream(s) of the unit. These samples shall be collected through orifices or sample tubes located in the influent and effluent piping and routed to large containers to be utilized as settling basins (one for influent, one for classifier overflow and, if grit separator is used, one for separator overflow). During each test run, the orifices or tubes shall be monitored to ensure that there is no pluggage and full flow is obtained. The velocity in the sample lines shall be 2.5 fps or greater. A minimum of 200 gallons shall be allowed to flow into each settling basin; overflow shall be directed to a sewer. II II II c. At the termination of each test run, the supernatant shall be siphoned from the top of each settling basin until approximately 1- in of liquid remains in the bottom. All grit shall be carefully washed from each settling basin to ensure 100 percent capture. d. Samples shall be passed through a 10 mesh screen to remove large particles and a 100 mesh screen to trap all particles larger than 100 mesh. Ii Ii I e. The grit samples captured on the 100 mesh screen shall be transferred to labeled sample containers and tested by an independent laboratory. Each sample will be placed in an II II 11325-8 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I evaporating dish where it shall be dried at 103 degrees C and placed in a muffle furnace at 550 degrees C for 30 minutes to volatilize all organics. f. Each sample shall then be cooled in desiccator, weighed and passed through 70 mesh, 100 mesh and 150 mesh sieves. g. Each residue shall be weighed and totaled, including the amount passing through the 150 mesh sieve. This provides a grit size graduation for both influent and effluent samples. 2. The removal efficiencies as stated above are for inlet-to-outlet removal efficiency by percentage, based on the material retained in the sieve. This means that the figure for 70 mesh removal is based on all material retained on a 70 mesh sieve, comparing the influent to the effluent. The 1000 mesh removal figure is all material passing a 70 mesh but retained on 1000 mesh, comparing the influent and effluent. The 100 mesh removal figure represents all material passing the 70 to 100 mesh screens, but being retained on the 150 mesh screen, comparing influent to effluent. F. In the event of improper installation or failure of the equipment to meet the specified performance, the CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for making all corrections of the work and subsequent test runs until the defects are corrected. If the system remains unable to meet the test requirements, the defective equipment shall be removed and replaced at the CONTRACTOR's expense. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the fmal acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11325-9 GRIT CLASSIFICATION EQUIPMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11330 STAIR/STEP MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN WITH WASH PRESS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete procurement and installation of Mechanical Fine Screen with Wash Press and appurtenances at the Northeast and East APCF as shown in the Contract Drawing and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT E. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS F. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS F. Section 01800 - TRAINING G. Section 09901- PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS H. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING I. Section 15100 - PROCESS VALVES J. Division 15 - MECHANICAL PIPES, VALVES, PIPE HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS K. Division 16 - Motor Starters and Electrical Work 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Shop drawings 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. 2. General arrangement and dimensional drawings of the step/stair screen system. 3. Written recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up of the equipment. B. Data on performance testing, service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, upon request, for use in determining that the step/stair screen system offered meets the intent of the contract, performance requirements and criteria stated in these specifications. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 STAlR / STEP SCREEN 11330-1 C. Manufacturer's certificates 1. The equipment supplier warrants that the step/stair screen system to be supplied shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the Contract Specifications. D. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01730 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) B. American Water Works Association (A WW A) C. Hydraulic Institute Standards D. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. American Federation of Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) G. American Welding Society (A WS) H. Steel Structures Painting Council, American National Standards Institute (SSPC) I. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The stair/step screen furnished shall positively remove debris from the incoming wastewater by means of fixed and movable lamellas. The lamellas shall be secured within a framework that is installed in the concrete channels as shown on the Contract Drawings. During each cleaning cycle, the movable lamellas shall rotate one complete revolution (or one step), which will transport the screenings material up to the next set of fixed lamellas. The movable lamellas will then fmish their rotation and return to their original position. A positive means of stopping the movable lamellas at the original position shall be incorporated into the design. Multiple revolutions during normal flow are not acceptable. This intef!I1ittent cycling will raise the screening upward and subsequently out of the channel at the point of discharge into the appropriate receiving device. B. The washing press shall be provided to reduce the organic content, moisture content and volume of screenings material from a mechanical fme screen. Screenings material shall enter the inlet hopper and be transported by the rotating screw into the washing zone. In the washing zone, wash water is sprayed through the hollow shaft screw and into the screenings material to help dissolve and remove organic material. C. During normal flow conditions, the washing press shall be operated in a forward and reverse sequence. The screenings will be transported to a washing zone where wash water is injected through the hollow shaft screw and into the screenings. The screw will then reverse and bring the screenings out of the washing zone. This adjustable washing process shall be repeated a minimum of four times to ensure thorough cleaning of the screenings material. During peak 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-2 STAIR I STEP SCREEN I II , II II I I] I I I, II I Ii I: II II I II Ii , II I II I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I loading conditions, the washing process shall automatically switch to operate only in the forward direction to handle the larger amount of screenings. Four manual ball valves shall be provided, one for each solenoid valve, to allow personnel to isolate the solenoid valves or throttle the amount of wash water. 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS Northeast APCF: . Number of Units Two (2) . Average Flow Rate 13.5 MaD each . Peak Flow Rate 27.0 MaD each . Flow Channel Width 5' -0" . Flow Channel Depth 6' -0" . Discharge Height Elev. 73.50' . Channel Top Elev. 71.25' . Channel Invert Elev. 65.25' . Slot Width / Spacing 1/4 inch . Setting Inclination 53 degrees from horizontal (maximum) . Maximum Allowable Headloss @ 27 MGD - 1.0 ft . Screen Motor Power: 2.0 HP minimum and 5.0 HP maximum . Wash Press Motor Power 5.0 HP minimum and 10.0 HP maximum East APCF: . Number of Units Two (2) . Average Flow Rate 6.0 MGD each . Peak Flow Rate 12.5 MGD each . Flow Channel Width 3' -0" . Flow Channel Depth 6' -0" . Discharge Height Elev. 28.83' minimum . Channel Top Elev. 25.75' . Channel Invert Elev. 19.75' . Slot Width / Spacing 1/4 inch . Setting Inclination 53 degrees from horizontal (maximum) . Maximum Allowable Headloss @ 12.5 MGD - 1.0 ft . Screen Motor Power: 2.0 HP minimum and 5.0 HP maximum . Wash Press Motor Power .5.0 HP minimum and 10.0 HP maximum 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-3 STAlR/STEPSCREEN B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum often (10) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. D. The Screen and Wash Press shall be the product of one manufacturer to establish "system responsibility". 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The Contractor shall inspect equipment prior to unloading and notify Manufacturer of any damage to equipment to effect proper remedial action. 1.09 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts for each screen listed in this specification. Spare parts shall be provided in clearly identified containers: A. Three (3) movable stainless steel lamellas B. Three (3) fixed stainless steel lamellas including the plastic sleeves and spacers C. Twenty-five (25) plastic spacers D. Spare parts for washing press as recommended by washing press manufacturer. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The equipment supplier shall warrant that its equipment shall be free from defects in material and workmanship; and that it will replace or repair, F.O.B. its factory, any part or parts returned to it which examination shall show to have failed under normal use and service by the user within eighteen (18) months following initial shipment or twelve (12) months following operation start-up, whichever occurs fIrst. PART 2 PRODUCTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-4 STAJR/STEPSCREEN I I II II Ii II I: Ii II Ii II II II I Ii II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Mechanical Fine Screen 1. Step Screen from Huber Technology, Inc. 2. Stair Screen from Vulcan Industries, Inc. of Missouri Valley, Iowa 3. Approved equal B. Washing Press 1. W AP 2 as manufactured by Huber Technology, Inc. 2. Model EWP Washing Press as produced by Vulcan Industries, Inc. of Missouri Valley, Iowa 3. Approved equal 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Frame Assembly 1. The frame assembly shall be of a one piece, formed structural design and shall provide a rigid, secure unit capable of withstanding all operating forces when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. The frame assembly shall consist of two side frames, a base plate, two drive plates, fixed lamella support members, movable lamella support members and two frame support legs with pivot pins. The drive plates shall be mounted within the side frame and shall be connected to the movable lamella support members. 2. The frame assembly shall be designed to mount into the channel without the need for recesses in the channel walls or channel floor. Neoprene side seals shall be attached to the side frames with 316 stainless steel retainers and hardware to seal between the screen and channel walls. 3. The side frames shall extend fully from the channel invert to the top of the unit and shall be arranged to pivot out of the channel for maintenance. The frame shall be designed to clear all fixed screenings receiving devices when the screen is pivoted out of the channel for maintenance. The side frames shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 'l4-inch (6 mm). B. Inlet Hopper 1. The inlet hopper shall be designed to direct screenings material from the bar screen onto the existing conveyor belt or discharge chute. The inlet hopper shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. All attachment hardware shall be 316 stainless steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-5 STAIR / STEP SCREEN B. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Ii A. Lamellas Ii II II 1. The screening surface of the stair screen shall consist of alternating fixed and movable step-shaped lamellas. The steps on the lamellas shall be of the same size, nominally 2-3/8-inch deep by 4-1/4-inch tall, except for the lowest step, which shall be of a low profile design. The distance from the bottom of the channel to the top of the bottom step shall not exceed 2-1/2- inches. All lamellas shall be attached to either the fixed or movable lamella support members. Ii 2. The lamellas in the screening area shall have a slot width (or spacing) of 1/4-inch. Fixed lamellas shall be provided with replaceable plastic spacers on each side to maintain the proper spacing and prevent metal-to-metal contact between the lamellas. II I: II II II II II II Ii I 3. The lower portion of the fixed lamellas shall be furnished with thick polypropylene sleeves to ensure proper spacing and prevent metal-to- metal contact between the lamellas. The lower portion of the movable lamellas shall be provided with half-moon shaped teeth to penetrate through fme grit and sand during operation. The lower lamellas shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 4. The upper portion of the fixed lamellas and movable lamellas shall be constructed of V.V. stabilized polypropylene. The bar spacings between the fixed and movable lamellas in the transport zone shall be 1 mm or less. The thick lamellas shall help to ensure that stringy material does not fall through the screen prior to discharge. Directing Plate 1. The stair screen shall be provided with a directing plate at the base of the machine perpendicular to the flow and level with the lowest step on the lamellas. The directing plate shall direct heavier material, such as grit and gravel, onto the top shelf of the bottom row of steps on the lamellas to prevent a build up of material in front of the screen. 2. The directing plate shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel and shall be provided with a replaceable nylon brush to seal between the downstream edge of the plate and the upstream edge of the bottom row of steps. Ii c. Enclosure Panels II I 1. The portion of the stair screen located above the top of the channel on both the upstream and downstream sides shall be shrouded in removable enclosure panels. The drive compartment shall be shrouded separately. The drive shall be fully enclosed to protect it from the atmosphere in the channel. II 11330-6 STAIR / STEP SCREEN II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I F. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. The enclosure panels shall be manufactured of 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 20-gauge. The panels shall be formed with engineered bends along the sides to help prevent deflection. Flat plate covers are not acceptable. D. Discharge Chute 1. A fully shrouded and easily removable discharge chute shall be provided at the point of discharge to interface with and direct screenings onto the existing conveyor belt or discharge hopper. The discharge chute shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel. E. Screw Housing 1. The screw housing and associated components shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. The inlet flange shall have a minimum thickness of 9/16- inch and the outlet flange shall have a minimum thickness of 7/16-inch. The outlet flange shall incorporate a lO-inch pipe bolt pattern for connection to the discharge pipe. 2. The dewatering section shall incorporate anti-rotation bars around the complete circumference to contain the screenings material and prevent rotation of the screenings during the dewatering process. Counter sunk perforations shall be provided in the dewatering zone to allow the removal ofthe filtrate during compaction. Wash water inlets shall be provided on the top of the washing zone and on the top of the dewatering zone for automatic periodic flushing. 3. The removable cover for the dewatering section shall be held in place by a latching system to allow easy removal. A resilient seal shall be mounted to the cover to form a watertight seal with the screw housing. 4. The bottom of the housing shall contain a ~-inch thick, 316 stainless steel wedge wire section for drainage. The wedge wire section shall be constructed of individual profiled bars and shall have 2 mm openings. Hollow Shaft Screw 1. The hollow-shaft screw shall be constructed of alloy steel and it shall have a minimum outside diameter of 8-112 inches. The shaft shall be a minimum of 2-1/2 inches in diameter. The shaft shall be hollow with perforations located in the washing zone to allow wash water to be injected into the screenings from the inside out. Designs incorporating only radial or external spraying from the outside of the screw housing are not acceptable. 11330-7 STAIR / STEP SCREEN 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. The flights shall be cold formed from a continuous length of AISI 8620 steel bar with a minimum thickness of %-inch. After fabrication the screw shall be precision machined to ensure that it is concentric along its length. The distance between the flights shall be arranged to allow transportation into the washing zone and compaction in the dewatering zone. I Ii 3. The screw shall have a minimum Brinell hardness of 200 and hard facing shall be applied to the end of the screw to extend the useful service life. Ii II 4. A stainless steel reinforced nylon brush shall be attached to the hollow shaft screw with setscrews in the drainage area to help prevent debris from blinding drain. To reduce wear on the brush, the design shall be such that the screw shall not be allowed to rest in the press housing. The screw shall be fully supported and cantilevered off of the thrust bearing. II G. Thrust Bearing Ii II 1. And independent, stainless steel axial thrust bearing shall be flange mounted to the drive and flange mounted to the press body. The thrust bearing shall fully support the screw and handle the load created during compaction and reversal of the screw. The thrust bearing shall have a fabricated stainless steel housing and shall utilize self-aligning double tapered roller bearings located between two sets of double lip seals. The flanges on the housing shall have a 7/16-inchminimum thickness. Designs that utilize the bearing inside the gear reducer are not acceptable. II Ii I I I I 2. An O-ring seal shall be mounted in a machined groove on the face of the bearing to seal against the press body. The screw shall be cantilevered off the thrust bearing to prevent the screw from resting inside the screw housing. H. Drain Pan 1. A drain pan shall be mounted to the bottom of the screw housing along the full length of the housing. The pan shall be sloped towards the drain and it shall be provided along with a flushing nozzle on the dewatering end and a 4-inch diameter drainpipe on the drive end. The pan shall be held in place by a latching system to allow fast and easy removal. Designs that utilize drain pans that rely on tools for removal or designs where the drain pan is not removable are not acceptable. II II II 2. The drain pan shall incorporate a resilient seal along its top edge to form a watertight seal with the screw housing. The drain pan shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. II Ii 11330-8 STAIR / STEP SCREEN II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. Discharge Pipe 1. Tl~e discharge pipe shall be mounted to the pipe flange on the press body and designed to transport the washed, dewatered and compacted screenings to the appropriate receiving device. The discharge pipe shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel pipe and shall be of the configuration as shown on the Contract Drawings. 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS A. Fine Screw Drive Assembly 1. The stair 1 step screen shall be furnished with an integrated drive assembly consisting of a TEFC electric motor with a double reduction helical worm gear reducer, drive shaft, bearings, sprockets and dual drive chains. 2. The motor shall be a minimum 2.0 horsepower, 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz wit a service factor of 1.15. The motors shall be rated at 400C ambient with Class F insulation and shall have a Class B temperature rise at full load. The nominal motor speed shall be 1800 rpm. 3. Gear reducers shall have ball or roller bearings throughout with all moving parts immersed in oil. Worm shall be of alloy steel with threads precision ground and polished after case hardening. The worm gear shall either be of all high strength alloy bronze or alloy bronze-rimmed semi-steel. Shafts shall be of high strength alloy steel ground to required tolerances. All ball or roller bearings shall be B-10 rated and manufactured by a member of the Antifriction Bearing Manufacturer's Association for 100,000 hour life (minimum). At least one bearing on each shaft shall be of the combined radial and thrust type. 4. Gear reducer units shall meet the standards of the American Gear Manufacturers Association. 5. The drive assembly shall be capable of elevating the weight of the movable lamellas plus the maximum debris load. 6. The chain and sprocket transmission system shall consist of endless dual chain, an upper sprocket connected to a bearing in a fixed housing and a lower sprocket connected to a bearing in a pivoting housing. The drive system shall be identified on each side of the screen. a. The drive system shall be designed so that the lower sprocket, lower bearing assembly and associated chain are located above the maximum water level. Designs that utilize sprockets, bearings, linkage or bushings located below the maximum water level are not acceptable. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-9 STAIR / STEP SCREEN b. The lower bearing assembly shall be designed to pivot or slip to automatically accommodate uneven chain stretch. c. The chain shall be arranged in the same plane as the fixed lamella package and the same plane as the movable lamella package when in the pared position to ensure maximum efficiency in the drive system. d. Automatic shock absorber type chain tensioning devices shall be proved to ensure that the drive chains maintain proper tension and to eliminate the need for adjustment. e. Automatic, oil drip type chain lubricators shall be provided to lubricate the chain. B. Wash Press Drive Assembly 1. The washing press shall be complete with an integrated drive assembly consisting of a TEFC electric reversing motor close-coupled to a gear reducer. 2. The motor shall be a minimum 5.0 horsepower, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz with a service factor of 1.15. The motors shall be rated 400C ambient with Class F insulation and shall have a Class B temperature rise at full load. The nominal motor speed shall be 1800 rpm. 3. The gear reducer shall be a Flender parallel shaft helical bevel gear reducer having a 105:1 ratio. The gear reducer shall have a minimum output torque rating of 18,500 in/lbs at 16 rpm. 4. Gear reducers shall have ball or roller bearings throughout with all moving parts immersed in oil. Gears shall be of alloy steel with threads precision ground and polished after casehardening. Shafts shall be of high strength alloy steel ground to required tolerances. All ball or roller bearings shall be B-10 rated and manufactured by a member of the Antifriction Bearing Manufacturer's Association for 100,000 hour life (minimum). At least one bearing on each shaft shall be of the combined radial and thrust type. 2.05 CONTROLS A. The stair screen shall be cycled on and off by remote control signals from the manufacturer's main control panel. The screen shall be cycled by one of two demand signal: differential level controller or an internal PLC timer. 1. Differential Level - The differential level controller shall be located within the main control panel and shall measure the head loss across the screen. Once a preset level has been reached, a signal in the form of a dry contact 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-10 STAIR / STEP SCREEN II II Ii II II II Ii II Ii Ii II Ii I II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 closure is generated for starting the screen. Once directed to start, the screen will be cycled on and off bya repeat cycle timer until the head loss is reduced to a preset operating level. Differential level shall be measured by ultrasonic transducers mounted upstream and downstream of the screen. Two (2) Echomax transducers, fabricated stainless steel brackets and anchor bolts and a sufficient length of cable shall be provided as part of the differential level system. The differential level controller shall be Siemens Milltronics model SITRANS LU02, or approved equal. 2. Internal PLC Timer - If the differential level controller fails to direct the screens to cycle within an Operator selectable length of time, the PLC timer will direct the screens to cycle. The control system, both local and main, shall be designed and manufactured by the same company that furnishes the mechanical screen. B. The washing press shall be cycled on and off by remote control signals from the main control panel. The washing press shall be cycled by a screen cycle counter generated from the stair screen. The screw shall rotate in the forward and reverse direction during normal operation and the solenoid valves shall be sequenced on and off by the control logic written in the PLC. During a peak loading event, the screw shall operate in the forward direction with all solenoid valves open with brief intervals of screw reversal to ensure that the screw shaft does not accumulate with debris. The control system, both local and main, shall be designed and manufactured by the same company that furnishes the washing press and incorporated into the mechanical screen control panel. Local Control Panels 1. Mechanical Screens - Local controls shall consist of a NEMA 4X local junction box with a mushroom head EMERGENCY STOP push-button. a. The local controls and motor shall be pre-wired to a terminal strip located inside the local junction box. The junction box shall be mounted on one of the screen support legs. b. One (1) NEMA 4x home position limit switch to stop the movable lamella package at a predetermined position after each cleaning cycle. Limit switch shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT) and rated not less than 10 amps at 120 volt AC. 2. Wash Press - Local controls shall consist of a NEMA 4x local junction box with a mushroom head EMERGENCY STOP push-button. a. The local controls, solenoid valves and motor shall be factory wired to a terminal strip located inside the local junction box. S.O. 11330-11 STAIR / STEP SCREEN 03 720-022-0 1 October, 2007 II cable shall be used for the connection from the local control station to the solenoid valves. Four (4) ACO Red Hat II brass body solenoid valves, four (4) manual union-type PVC ball valves, a 100-micron strainer and a pressure gauge shall be provided as part of a valve wash water manifold. The solenoid valves shall be activated by the PLC in the main control panel to provide wash water intermittently during cleaning and flushing cycles. Ii II b. The local control station and valve manifold shall be mounted on a common floor mounted 316 stainless steel support stand. If II D. Furnish one main control panel for the washing press and mechanical screens. The main control panel shall be totally enclosed, front access type with up/side/bottom entry. The panel shall be manufactured by a V.L. listed control panel facility and shall bear a V.L. 913 label. Construction of the control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4x, 316L stainless steel with indicating devices and switches mounted on the front door. The controls for the screen shall be included in the same control panel as the press as the same manufacturer will provide both the screens and the press. II Ii I: 1. Main control panel wiring shall be color-coded, labeled, neatly cabled and supported in nonflammable wiring raceways. Wiring shall be minimum 16-gauge MTW stranded wire. Ii 2. The control panel wiring shall contain all power and control devices for screens shown on the Contract Drawings (wiring diagrams), which shall include, but not be limited to, the following: II II a. b. One (1) control power ON-OFF selector switch. One (1) HAND-OFF-AVTO selector switch for operation of the stair screen drive. One (1) red pilot light for "Screen Run" indication. One (1) amber pilot light for "Over Current" indication. One (1) white pilot light for control power. One (1) momentary "reset" push-button for over current reset. Spate contact for remote indication of "Over Current" status. Control relays, wiring and circuitry required to implement the control logic. One (1) full voltage NEMA rated starter. The magnetic starter shall be of the heater less design and provide phase loss protection, short circuit self-protection and thermal memory. The solid-state overload shall be self-powered. One (1) 120 V AC step down control transformer. One (1) single channel electronic timer switch shall be provided. The timer switch shall be capable of a total of 288 operations in 5- minute increments. One (1) Milltronics HydroRanger 200 differential level controller to sense the differential in water level upstream and downstream of II II II II II c. d. I. II e. f. g. h. II 1. J. k. I. 11330-12 STAlR/STEPSCREEN I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 the stair screen. m. One (1) current sensing relay. The current sensing relay shall continuously monitor the motor current to prevent damage due to a jam obstruction or a unit malfunction. An over current condition that causes motor shutdown shall cause an alarm to sound. The alarm shall be manually reset prior to the unit returning to normal operation. n. One (1) elapsed timer meter mounted on the door of the enclosure. 7. The control panel wiring shall contain all power and control devices for washing press shown on the Contract Drawings (wiring diagrams), which shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. One (1) control power ON-OFF selector switch. b. One (1) red pilot light for "Press Run" status. c. One (1) amber pilot light for "Over Current" indication. d. One (1) white pilot light for control power. e. One (1) momentary "reset" push-button for over current reset. f. Spare contact for remote indication of "Over Current" alarm. g. One (1) HAND-OFF-AUTO switch. h. One (1) FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE switch. 1. One (1) INITIATE push-button. J. Control logic shall be PLC based with timers and counters written in control logic. Timers and counters shall be adjustable via operator interface on the exterior of the control panel. The PLC shall be an Allen Bradley SLC 5/05. k. One (1) surge arrestor to protect the PLC. I. 120 V AC control power transformer. m. One (1) current sensing relay. The current sensing relay shall continuously monitor the motor current to prevent damage due to a jam obstruction or a unit malfunction. An over current condition that causes motor shutdown shall cause an alarm to sound. The alarm shall be manually reset prior to the unit returning to normal operation. n. One (1) elapsed timer meter shall be mounted on the door of the enclosure. 8. All switches, pushbuttons and pilot lights shall be NEMA rated components. IEC rated components are not acceptable. 9. The new mechanical bar screen and wash press shall be capable of interfacing with the plants existing SCADA system. The following list details the information required: a. Barscreen System Power Failure b. For each Barscreen (Discreet Signals)- Hand, Auto, Run, Fail, Up, Down, Motor Overload, Influent Channel Level High Alarm c. For each Barscreen (Analog Signals) - Upstream Level, Downstream Level 11330-13 STAIR / STEP SCREEN d. For Wash Press (Discreet Signals) - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail e. For Grit Conveyor (Discreet Signals) - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail 10. The Manufacturer shall provide a set of normally open dry contacts for each discreet point and three (3) terminal blocks (labeled "+", "-", and "s" wired into their analog loops) for each analog point. 2.06 SHOP TESTING A. Each fine screen and wash press shall be shop assembled prior to shipment and test run to assure proper operation and then delivered to the site for installation. 2.07 PAINTING Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process System. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents. 3.02 TESTING A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the screen, wash press and discharge chute. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following: 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's (or supplier's) services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11330-14 STAIR! STEP SCREEN I: I II Ii II II Ii Ii I Ii Ii II II Ii Ii II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03 720-022-0 1 October, 2007 installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be a summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. The representative shall be a factory-employed service technician. Sales representatives are not considered acceptable service technicians. C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his fmdings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 11330-15 STAIR/STEP SCREEN I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11331 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN WITH WASH PRESS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete procurement and installation of Mechanical Fine Screen with Wash Press and appurtenances at Marshall Street APCF as shown in the Contract Drawing and as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT E. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS F. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS F. Section 01800 - TRAINING G. Section 09901- PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS H. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING 1. Section 15100 - PROCESS VAL YES J. Division 15 - MECHANICAL PIPES, VALVES, PIPE HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS K. Division 16 - Motor Starters and Electrical Work 1.03 SUBMITI ALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Shop drawings 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. 2. General arrangement and dimensional drawings of the front rake front return screen system. 3. Written recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up of the equipment. B. Data on performance testing, service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, upon request, for use in determining that the front rake front return screen system offered meets the intent of the contract, performance requirements and criteria stated in these specifications. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11331-1 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN C. Manufacturer's certificates 1. The equipment supplier warrants that the front rake front return screen system to be supplied shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the Contract Specifications. D. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01730 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) B. American Water Works Association (A WW A) C. Hydraulic Institute Standards D. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) F. American Federation of Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) G. American Welding Society (A WS) H. Steel Structures Painting Council, American National Standards Institute (SSPC) 1. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The front rake front return screen furnished shall positively remove debris from the incoming wastewater by means of movable rakes. The rakes shall be secured within a framework that is installed in the concrete channels as shown on the Contract Drawings. The rakes shall approach channel invert from the upstream side <;>f the screen and rake upward at upstream face with between the bars. The screenings shall be discharged on downstream side of the screen using a cleaning rake to a screenings conveyor. The screen rakes shall be designed such that screenings will not wrap around the tines or the stationary bars, and will not fall back into the sewage flow during the cleaning cycle. B. The washing press shall be provided to reduce the organic content, moisture content and volume of screenings material from a mechanical fine screen. Screenings material shall enter the inlet hopper and be transported by the rotating screw into the washing zone. In the washing zone, wash water is sprayed through the hollow shaft screw and into the screenings material to help dissolve and remove organic material. C. During normal flow conditions, the washing press shall receive screenings from the existing conveyor. The screenings shall then be transported to the washing zone where wash water is introduced into the screenings. The washing press shall be controlled in conjunction with the screens. The washing press shall begin operation whenever the screens begin operation and shall continue operation for a predetermined period of time after the screen stops. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11331-2 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN I I, II II II II Ii Ii I I I I I I II II II II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS Marshall Street APCF: . Number of Units Two (2) . Average Flow Rate 25.0 MGD each . Peak Flow Rate 25.0 MaD each . Flow Channel Width 3' -6" . Flow Channel Depth 6' -67" . Discharge Elev. 15.50' . Channel Top Elev. 2.67' . Channel Invert Elev. -4.00' . Slot Width 1 Spacing 114 inch . Setting Inclination 78 degrees from horizontal (maximum) . Maximum Allowable Headloss @ 27 MGD - 1.0 ft . Screen Motor Power: 2.0 HP minimum and 5.0 HP maximum . Wash Press Motor Power 10.0 HP maximum or as necessary to meet with design requirements 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of ten (10) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. D. The Screen and Wash Press shall be the product of one manufacturer to establish "system responsibility". 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11331-3 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Contractor shall inspect equipment prior to unloading and notify Manufacturer of any damage to equipment to effect proper remedial action. B. 1.09 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts in clearly identified containers: A. Three (3) rake bars B. Five (5) feet of chain C. One (1) set U-Trough liners D. One (1) set gear reducer seals E. One (1) brush for wash press F. One (1) packing rope (shaft seal) 1.10 WARRANTY A. The equipment supplier shall warrant that its equipment shall be free from defects in material and workmanship; and that it will replace or repair, F.O.B. its factory, any part or parts returned to it which examination shall show to have failed under normal use and service by the user within eighteen (18) months following initial shipment or twelve (12) months following operation start-up, whichever occurs fIrst. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Mechanical Fine Screen 1. Mahr Bar Model from Headworks, Inc. 2. Rakemax Model from Huber Technology, Inc. 3. Approved equal B. Washing Press 1. Screwpactor as manufactured by Headworks, Inc. 2. Approved equal 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Frame Assembly 03720-022-01 October, 2007 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN 11331-4 Ii I Ii II Ii I: I II I I I I Ii Ii Ii II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. The frame assembly shall be of a one piece, formed structural design and shall provide a rigid, secure unit capable of withstanding all operating forces when installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction. 2. The frame assembly shall be designed to mount into the channel without the need for recesses in the channel walls or channel floor. Neoprene side seals shall be attached to the side frames with 316 stainless steel retainers and hardware to seal between the screen and channel walls. 3. The side frames shall extend fully from the channel invert to the top of the unit. The frame shall be designed to clear all fixed screenings receiving devices when the screen is pivoted out of the channel for maintenance. The side frames shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel with a minimum thickness of 3/4-inch. B. Inlet Hopper 1. The inlet hopper shall be designed to direct screenings material from the bar screen into the existing conveyor belt. The inlet hopper shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. All attachment hardware shall be of 316 stainless steel. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Rakes 1. The screening surface of the front rake front return screen shall consist of rakes. The taper section bars on the bar rack shall be of the same size, nominally .31 "xO.15"x 1.57". The screen bars shall be individually replaceable without any welding or cutting. Screen bars that are welded to the frame work shall not be allowed. Replacement screen bars shall be available from the screen manufacturer. Round bars shall not be used. 2. The bars in the screening area shall have a slot width (or spacing) of 1/4- inch. Bars shall be provided with replaceable plastic spacers on each side to maintain the proper spacing and prevent metal-to-metal contact between the bars. The bars shall be fastened to a dead plate that extends to the point of discharge. Bars shall extend a minimum of 7.8" above the maximum water level. The bars shall be supported from framework and be readily removable. 3. The raking tines shall have the tooth profile precision cut from a single continuous bar of sufficient thickness and dept to insure adequate stiffuess and strength to cope with the specified duty cycle. The rakes shall be fabricated from stainless steel Grade 316. The rake tines shall penetrate into the screen bar spacing to insure that screenings are completely cleared during each lifting operation. Rake tines are mechanically engaged into 03720-022-01 October, 2007 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN 11331-5 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Ii the screen bars. During each cleaning stroke, the raking tines shall engage into the bottom of the bar screen grids at the channel invert. Drive chains, chain guides, chain sprockets, bearings, and axle shall be fully replaceble without having to remove the screen from the channel. Ii II Ii II B. Discharge Chute 1. A fully shrouded arid easily removable discharge chute shall be provided at the point of discharge to interface with and direct screenings into the inlet hopper on the washing press. The discharge chute shall be manufactured from 316 stainless steel. C. Wash Press Ii I I. I I I I I Iii I: 1. The sieve zone shall be tubular in design with an integral collection pan and an inlet chute to accept screenings from the conveyor. The sieve zone shall be manufactured from minimum 11 guage grade 304 stainless steel and minimum 14 guage 304 stainless steel. The perforations shall be 118". The sieve zone shall include one (1) inlet hopper(s) to direct screenings from the existing conveyor into the shafted screw conveyor/compactor. The inlet hoppers shall be constructed of 14 gauge grade 204 stainless steel and shall be bolted to the transport zone of the u-trough. 2. The wash zone shall be tubular in design with an integral collection pan located directly under the zone. The wash zone shall wash screenings and reduce the organic content. The wash zone shall wash screenings and reduce the perforated grade 304 stainless steel plate and minimum 14 gauge grade 304 stainless steel plate. The perforatations shall be 118". The wash zone shall consist of a spray header fitted with spray nozzles to provide cleaning of screenings before compacting. The wash zone supply water shall be approximately 10 gpm at 40 psi. The wash zone shall include a solenoid valve to control the flow of water into the wash zone. The wash zone shall include a solenoid valve, shipped loose to control the flow of water. All inter connecting piping, valves, etc. between the water source, wash zone and the solenoid valve shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor. 3. The press zone design shall be tubular in design with an integral collection pan located under the zone. The press zone shall be contructed of minimum 11 guage grade 304 stainless steel. 4. The collection pan design shall be a u-trough design located directly under the sieve, wash and press zones. The collection pan shall be constructed of minimum 14 gauges grade 304 stainless steel and attached to the compactor body.with quick release clamps. Periodically, water shall be introduced into the collection pan to flush organics and other fmes to the drain. The collection pan water supply shall be approximately 10 gpm at 40 psi. The flush water shall run five (5) seconds out of every twenty (20) Ii I 11331-6 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I seconds and be field adjustable. The flush water shall flow down to the base of the collection pan to the 3" diameter drain outlet. 5. The Transport Zone shall be tubular in design and constructed of minimum 11 gauge Grade 304 Stainless Steel. The Transport Zone shall be fitted with Wear Bars constructed of minimum 3/8" thick Carbon Steel. The Wear Bars shall be bolted from the outside of the Transport Zone. Welded Wear Bars shall not be allowed. 6. The Discharge Tube shall be cylindrical and constructed of minimum 14 gauge Grade 304 Stainless Steel. The discharge tube shall increase in diameter over its length in order to reduce the potential for plugging. The Discharge Tube shall direct and discharge screenings at a clear discharge height that allows for placement of a receptacle (provided by others) to collect the screenings. 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS A. Fine Screw Drive Assembly 1. The front rake screen shall be furnished with an integrated drive assembly consisting of a TEFC electric motor with a double reduction helical worm gear reducer, drive shaft, bearings, sprockets and dual drive chains. . 2. The motor shall be an explosion proof inverter duty with minimum 3.0 horsepower, 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hertz wit a service factor of 1.15. The motors shall be rated at 400C ambient with Class F insulation and shall have a Class B temperature rise at full load. The nominal motor speed shall be 1800 rpm. 3. Gear reducers shall have ball or roller bearings throughout with all moving parts immersed in oil. Worm shall be of alloy steel with threads precision ground and polished after case hardening. The worm gear shall either be of all high strength alloy bronze or alloy bronze-rimmed semi-steel. Shafts shall be of high strength alloy steel ground to required tolerances. All ball or roller bearings shall be B-10 rated and manufactured by a member of the Antifriction Bearing Manufacturer's Association for 100,000 hour life (minimum). At least one bearing on each shaft shall be of the combined radial and thrust type. 4. Gear reducer units shall meet the standards of the American Gear Manufacturers Association. B. Wash Press Drive Assembly 1. The washing press shall be complete with an integrated drive assembly consisting of a TEFC electric reversing motor close-coupled to a gear 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11331-7 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN reducer. 2. The motor shall be a maximum 10.0 horsepower, 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz with a service factor of 1.15. The motors shall be rated 400C ambient with Class F insulation and shall have a Class B temperature rise at full load. The nominal motor speed shall be 1800 rpm. 3. The gear reducer shall be a shaft mounted parallel shaft helical bevel gear reducer having a 105: 1 ratio directly coupled to the motor. The gear reducer shall have a minimum output torque rating of 18,500 in/lbs at 14 rpm. 4. Gear reducers shall have ball or roller bearings throughout with all moving parts immersed in oil. Gears shall be of alloy steel with threads precision ground and polished after casehardening. Shafts shall be of high strength alloy steel ground to required tolerances. All ball or roller bearings shall be B-10 rated and manufactured by a member of the Antifriction Bearing Manufacturer's Association for 100,000 hour life (minimum). At least one bearing on each shaft shall be of the combined radial and thrust type. 2.05 CONTROLS A. The stair screen shall be cycled on and off by remote control signals from the manufacturer's main control panel. The screen shall be cycled by one of two demand signal: differential level controller or an internal PLC timer. 1. Differential Level - The differential level controller shall be located within the main control panel and shall measure the head loss across the screen. Once a preset level has been reached, a signal in the form of a dry contact closure is generated for starting the screen. Once directed to start, the screen will be cycled on and off by a repeat cycle timer until the head loss is reduced to a preset operating level. Differential level shall be measured by ultrasonic transducers mounted upstream and downstream of the screen. Two (2) Echomax transducers, fabricated stainless steel brackets and anchor bolts and a sufficient length of cable shall be provided as part of the differential level system. The differential level controller shall be Siemens Milltronics model SITRANS LU02, or approved equal. 2. Internal PLC Timer - If the differential level controller fails to direct the screens to cycle within an Operator selectable length of time, the PLC timer will direct the screens to cycle. The control system, both local and main, shall be designed and manufactured by the same company that furnishes the mechanical screen. B. The washing press shall be cycled on and off by remote control signals from the main control panel. The washing press shall be cycled by a screen cycle counter generated from the stair screen. The screw shall rotate. in the forward and reverse direction during normal operation and the solenoid valves shall be sequenced on 03720-022-01 October, 2007f 11331-8 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 and off by the control logic written in the PLC. During a peak loading event, the screw shall operate in the forward direction with all solenoid valves open with brief intervals of screw reversal to ensure that the screw shaft does not accumulate with debris. The control system, both local and main, shall be designed and manufactured by the same company that furnishes the washing press and incorporated into the mechanical screen control panel. c. Local Control Panels 1. Mechanical Screens - Local controls shall consist of a NEMA 4X local junction box with a mushroom head EMERGENCY STOP push-button. a. The local controls and motor shall be pre-wired to a terminal strip located inside the local junction box. The junction box shall be mounted on one of the screen support legs. b. One (1) NEMA 4x home position limit switch to stop the movable lamella package at a predetermined position after each cleaning cycle. Limit switch shall be single pole, double throw (SPDT) and rated not less than 10 amps at 120 volt AC. 2. Wash Press - Local controls shall consist of a NEMA 4x local junction box with a mushroom head EMERGENCY STOP push-button. a. The local controls, solenoid valves and motor shall be factory wired to a terminal strip located inside the local junction box. S.O. cable shall be used for the connection from the local control station to the solenoid valves. Four (4) ACO Red Hat II brass body solenoid valves, four (4) manual union-type PVC ball valves, a 100-micron strainer and a pressure gauge shall be provided as part of a valve wash water manifold. The solenoid valves shall be activated by the PLC in the main control panel to provide wash water intermittently during cleaning and flushing cycles. b. The local control station and valve manifold shall be mounted on a common floor mounted 316 stainless steel support stand. D. Furnish one main control panel for the washing press and mechanical screens. The main control panel shall be totally enclosed, front access type with up/side/bottom entry. The panel shall be manufactured by a U.L. listed control panel facility and shall bear a U.L. 913 label. Construction of the control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4x, 316L stainless steel with indicating devices and switches mounted on the front door. The controls for the screen shall be included in the same control panel as the press as the same manufacturer will provide both the screens and the press. 11331-9 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Main control panel wiring shall be color-coded, labeled, neatly cabled and supported in nonflammable wiring raceways. Wiring shall be ,minimum 16-gauge MTW stranded wire. II II Ii 2. The control panel wiring shall contain all power and control devices for screens shown on the Contract Drawings (wiring diagrams), which shall include, but not be limited to, the following: II II II Ii a. One (1) control power ON-OFF selector switch. b. One (1) HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch for operation of the stair screen drive. c. One (1) red pilot light for "Screen Run" indication. d. One (1) amber pilot light for "Over Current" indication. e. One (1) white pilot light for control power. f. One (1) momentary "reset" push-button for over current reset. g. Spare contact for remote indication of "Over Current" status. h. Control relays, wiring and circuitry required to implement the control logic. 1. One (1) full voltage NEMA rated starter. The magnetic starter shall be of the heater less design and provide phase loss protection, short circuit self-protection and thermal memory. The solid-state overload shall be self-powered. J. One (1) 120 V AC step down control transformer. k. One (1) single channel electronic timer switch shall be provided. The timer switch shall be capable of a total of 288 operations in 5- minute increments. I. One (1) Milltronics HydroRanger 200 differential level controller to sense the differential in water level upstream and downstream of the stair screen. m. One (1) current sensing relay. The current sensing relay shall continuously monitor the motor current to prevent damage due to a jam obstruction or a unit malfunction. An over current condition that causes motor shutdown shall cause an alarm to sound. The alarm shall be manually reset prior to the unit returning to normal operation. n. One (1) elapsed timer meter mounted on the door of the enclosure. II Ii I II I II II II 7. The control panel wiring shall contain all power and control devices for washing press shown on the Contract Drawings (wiring diagrams), which shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a. One (1) control power ON-OFF selector switch. b. One (1) red pilot light for "Press Run" status. c. One (1) amber pilot light for "Over Current" indication. d. One (1) white pilot light for control power. e. One (1) momentary "reset" push-button for over current reset. f. Spare contact for remote indication of "Over Current" alarm. g. One (1) HAND-OFF-AUTO switch. h. One (1) FORWARD-OFF-REVERSE switch. II II II 11331-10 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. One (1) INITIATE push-button. J. Control logic shall be PLC based with timers and counters written in control logic. Timers and counters shall be adjustable via operator interface on the exterior of the control panel. The PLC shall be an Allen Bradley SLC 5/05. k. One (1) surge arrestor to protect the PLC. I. 120 V AC control power transformer. m. One (1) current sensing relay. The current sensing relay shall continuously monitor the motor current to prevent damage due to a jam obstruction or a unit malfunction. An over current condition that causes motor shutdown shall cause an alarm to sound. The alarm shall be manually reset prior to the unit returning to normal operation. n. One (1) elapsed timer meter shall be mounted on the door of the enclosure. 8. All switches, pushbuttons and pilot lights shall be NEMA rated components. IEC rated components are not acceptable. 9. The new mechanical bar screen and wash press shall be capable of interfacing with the plants existing SCADA system. The following list details the information required: a. Barscreen System Power Failure b. For each Barscreen (Discreet Signals}- Hand, Auto, Run, Fail, Up, Down, Motor Overload, Influent Channel Level High Alarm c. For each Barscreen (Analog Signals) - Upstream Level, Downstream Level d. For Wash Press (Discreet Signals) - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail e. For Grit Conveyor (Discreet Signals) - Hand, Auto, Run, Fail 10. The Manufacturer shall provide a set of normally open dry contacts for each discreet point and three (3) terminal blocks (labeled "+", "-", and "s" wired into their analog loops) for each analog point. 2.06 SHOP TESTING A. Each fine screen and wash press shall be shop assembled prior to shipment and test run to assure proper operation and then delivered to the site for installation. 2.07 PAINTING Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 - Painting and Coating - Process System. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11331-11 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents. 3.02 TESTING 3.03 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the screen, wash press and discharge chute. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following: 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation. MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's (or supplier's) services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be a summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his findings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 11331-12 FRONT RAKE FRONT RETURN SCREEN I I: II II 11 II Ii Ii Ii II II II II I;! Ii II I I: Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 11332 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete procurement and installation of (3) shaftless screw conveyors and appurtenances for screenings conveying at Northeast APCF, Marshall Street APCF and East APCF as shown in the Contract Drawing and as specified herein. A. Screw Conveyors with shafts and intermediate hanger bearings will not be acceptable for this project. B. Conveyor rotational speeds shall not be greater than herein specified, unless availability of the reducer ratio requires slight adjustment (+- 3 rpm) or if shown by the conveyor manufacturer calculations to be required to meet design load. Deviations from specified speed cannot be utilized to reduce the conveyor trough and spiral size. Faster speeds are utilized to prevent the fluidization or apparent thinning when conveying dewatered sludge, to reduce liner and spiral wear from abrasive material such as grit or compacted screenings, and to aid in dewatering of wet screenings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT E. Section 01730 - OPERA nON AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS F. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS F. Section 01800 - TRAINING G. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS H. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING 1. Section 15100 - PROCESS VAL YES J. Division 15 - MECHANICAL PIPES, VALVES, PIPE HANGERS, AND SUPPORTS K. Division 16 - Motor Starters and Electrical Work 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-1 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR A. Shop drawings 1. Manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. 2. General arrangement and dimensional drawings of the shaftless conveyor system. 3. Written recommended procedures for job site storage, handling, installation, and start-up of the equipment. Data on performance testing, service history and operation of submitted equipment shall be made available to the Engineer, upon request, for use in determining that the shaftless conveyor screen system offered meets the intent of the contract, performance requirements and criteria stated in these specifications. Manufacturer's certificates 1. The equipment supplier warrants that the shaftless conveyor system to be supplied shall be manufactured in strict compliance with the Contract Specifications. Operation and maintenance manuals and manufacturer's instructions in accordance with Section 01730 B. C. D. 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. 1.05 1.06 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) American Water Works Association (A WW A) Hydraulic Institute Standards American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) American Federation of Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA) American Welding Society (A WS) Steel Structures Painting Council, American National Standards Institute (SSPC) Underwriters Laboratory (UL) SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The shaftless conveyor shall be provided to collect screenings from the mechanical screens and then to convey the screens to the downstream wash press. Screenings material shall enter the inlet hopper and be transported by the rotating screw into the wash press. The shaftless conveyor shall be controlled in conjunction with the screens. The conveyor shall begin operation whenever the screens begin operation and shall continue operation for a predetermined period of time after the screen stops. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS Northeast APCF · Number of Units: · Ability to Handle (Screenings Quantity) Marshall Street APCF One (1) 4.1 yd3/day 11332-2 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR I II II Ii Ii Ii II II II Ii Ii Ii II II Ii II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I · Number of Units: · Ability to Handle (Screenings Quantity) East APCF · Number of Units: · Ability to Handle (Screenings Quantity) One (1) 3.9 yd3/day One (1) 1.8 yd3/day 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of ten (10) years. Equipment bought and re-sold; or supplied under a license or marketing agreement shall not be considered for meeting the experience clause. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. D. Fabricate and assemble all equipment under this section in full conformity with this specification and as shown in the contract drawings. E. Furnish equipment complete with all supports; all mechanical equipment required for proper operation, including complete drive units; all steel and other metal construction specified herein; and all additional materials or fabrication as required by the supplier's design F. Unless otherwise noted; i. All equipment included in this section shall be furnished by a single supplier who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and the satisfactory operation of the system. 11. For optimum quality control, spirals furnished with the shaftless conveyors shall be produced from spiral manufacturing equipment actually owned by the conveyor supplier. 1.08 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-3 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR B. The Contractor shall inspect equipment prior to unloading and notify Manufacturer of any damage to equipment to effect proper remedial action. 1.09 SPARE PARTS The Contractor shall furnish the following spare parts in clearly identified containers: A. One (1) Emergency Stop Switch (without enclosure) B. One (1) Motion failure probe C. One (1) Packing gland set, for each conveyor supplied D. One (1) Liner set, for the longest conveyor furnished. E. One (1) Spiral, complete length required with coupling disc for the longest conveyor supplied F. One (1) Motor, of each type/size furnished G. Furnish lubricants of the type and quantity as recommended by the conveyor manufacturer for (start-up) operation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. The equipment supplier shall warrant that its equipment shall be free from defects in material and workmanship; and that it will replace or repair, F.O.B. its factory, any part or parts returned to it which examination shall show to have failed under normal use and service by the user within eighteen (18) months following initial shipment or twelve (12) months following operation start-up, whichever occurs first. B. The shaftless screw liner and spiral shall be warranted for a period of three years from factory start-up against wear. Liner: For a wear indicator (two color) liner, excessive wear shall be indicated by appearance of the bottom indicator layer (second color) along more than 30% of the conveyor length during the first three years of service. If these wear indications occur the conveyor supplier shall provide new formed and banded liner to replace all the liner in the conveyor that has excessive wear. If a one color liner is used the excessive wear shall be indicated if the thickness of the liner, at three points over a 30% long section of the conveyor, is a W' thick or less at the thinnest point of the liner, during the first three years of service. Since one color liners prohibit a simple visual inspection confmnation for the liner thickness status at the spiral-liner contact point, the conveyor manufacturer shall supply a field technician to the jobsite on the annual acceptance date for three consecutive years, to remove a minimum 30% of all liners and demonstrate to the owner that at a minimum of W' of liner is remaining. If excessive liner wear is found the conveyor supplier shall provide new formed and banded liner to replace all the liner in the conveyor that has excessive wear. Screw: Excessive wear on the screw shall be indicated by loss of more than 50% of the height of the main outer screw section over 30% of the total length of the screw. If excessive screw wear is found the conveyor supplier shall provide new screw to replace the screw in the conveyor that has excessive wear. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-4 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR I II II II 1.1 'I J II Ii II II II Ii -I i II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Shaftless Screw Conveyor 1. Spirac, Inc. Georgia or, 2. Approved equal 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS The shaftless screw conveyor equipment shall include the following: . Troughs, Liners & Covers . Spiral Flighting . Chutes . End Shaft . Electric Motor & Gear Reducer . Mounting and Support Structure . Safety Accessories . Spare Parts Power supply: Power supply to the equipment will be 460 volts, 60 Hz, 3 ph. Power supply for electrical controls shall be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. Fabrication: All welds to be continuous unless otherwise specified. Facing surfaces of field- welded components shall be beveled and match marked. Edge Grinding: Sharp corners of all cut and sheared edges shall be made smooth. Fasteners: All bolts, nuts, washers, and other fasteners shall be stainless steel. Surface Preparation 1. All iron and mild steel surfaces to be painted shall be dry abrasive blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP6, and in accordance with the painting section of these specifications. Surfaces shall be painted or hot dip galvanized within 24 hours to prevent rusting and surface discoloration. 2. Stainless steel shall be cleaned with mild abrasive wheels and/or nonferrous blast media to remove heavy scale and welding carbon and/or passivated with stainless steel cleaner then rinsed. Performance And Design Requirements: Design the shaftless screw conveyor system to meet the performance and design requirements per the attached "Table A". Conveyor selection design standards to be based on the operational experience of the manufacturer with shaftless screw conveyors, and not shafted screw conveyors. Materials: Materials used in the fabrication of the equipment under this section shall conform to the following and attached "Table A": o Chutes, Troughs, End Plates, AISI 304 stainless steel Covers, Hoppers & Supports 03720-022-01 October, 2007 . 11332-5 SIIAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR Table A - Conveyor Design Table Shaftless Screw Conveyors Conveyor Location Northeast Marshall Conveyor Performance & Design APCF Street East APCF APCF Performance 1 Material conveyed Screenings Screenings Screenings 2 Density, average, lbs/cu.ft. 55 55 55 3 Design Volume, ftJ/hr. (Average) 4.61 4.38 2.02 4 Design Volume, ftJ /hr. (peak) 54 54 54 5 Max. screw speed, rpm 12 12 12 6 Trough fill rate ~ Design load (Peak), % 30 30 30 System Design 7 Length, approx. ft 27 14 14 8 Feed Inlet From Step Screen Bar Screens Step Screen 9 Discharge outlet to Dewatering Dewatering Dewatering Press Press Press 10 No. Discharges: 1 1 1 11 Discharge Type (axial or vertical) Vertical Vertical Vertical 12 Conveyor size, U or OK trough U250 U250 U250 13 Trough width, ID inches, min. 9.84" 9.84" 9.84" 14 Trough thickness, min. 2.5mm 2.5mm 2.5mm 15 Minimum lid thickness 2.5mm 2.5 mm 2.5mm 16 Lid length, inches max. 60 60 60 17 Chute thickness, min. 2.5mm 2.5mm 2.5mm 18 Spiral OD, min. 215 mm 215 mm 215 mm 19 Spiral, outer thickness, min. 20mm 20mm 20mm 20 Spiral pitch (full or 2/3) . Full Full Full 21 Spiral insert Yes Yes Yes 22 Liner type SPX SPX SPX 23 Liner length, ft, max 4' 4' 4' 24 Liner thickness, inch, min. 8mm 8mm 8mm 25 Location of drives Pushing Pushing Pushing 26 Drive Hp, min. 1 1 1 27 Motion failure probes, # per conv 1 1 1 28 NEMA rating at probe 4X 4X 4X Materials of Construction 29 U Trough, lids, end plates & flanges 304 304 304 30 Hardware including supports, vertical, less 304 304 304 than 6' 31 drive shafts 1045 1045 1045 32 Bell-housings HDG HDG HDG 33 Liners UHMW UHMW UHMW 34 Spiral HTMAS HTMAS HTMAS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-6 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR I I I I I I II II I Ii Ii Ii I I Ii II II 11 II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I o Spiral Flighting Special Chrome-Alloy Steel w/minimum 225 Brinnell Hardness UHMW Polyethylene, DurafloO SP)(TM AISI 304 stainless steel A36 CS, HDG o Wear Liner o Hardware o Bellhousing Excluded From Conveyor Supplier's Scope of Supply 1. Any vertical conveyor supports longer than 6 feet shall be considered structural steel and shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. The conveyor manufacturer will recommend support points and support design and will furnish all stainless steel support brackets on the conveyor. All structural steel shall be A 36 carbon steel with coatings as specified herein. 2. Any horizontal steel needed to span walls or otherwise needed to give support underneath or above the vertical conveyor supports shall also be considered structural steel and be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3. All hanging supports furnished by the conveyor manufacturer shall be one (1) foot longer than required for field fit by the Contractor, who shall supply connections approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all fasteners both for hanging and floor anchors. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Spiral Flighting 4. Spiral flighting for the shaftless screw conveyors shall be designed to convey material without a center shaft or hanger bearings. 5. Spiral flights shall be cold-formed high strength chrome alloy steel with a minimum hardness of 225 Brinnell. The spiral flights shall be designed with adequate stability to prevent distortion and jumping in the trough. A second, inner spiral, concentric with the outside spiral shall also be provided. The torsional rating of the auger flighting shall exceed the torque rating of the drive motor at 150% of its nameplate horsepower. The "spring effect" of the spiral shall not exceed + 1.0 mm per 100 mm of length at maximum load conditions. The minimum outer spiral thickness shall be 0.75". 6. The spiral flighting shall be formed in sections from one continuous flat bar and shall be concentric to within:!:2 mm. Sectional flighting formed from plate shall not be permitted. 7. Spiral flighting shall have full penetration welds at all splice connections. The flights shall be aligned to assure true alignment when assembled in the field and shall be made in accordance with the supplier's requirements. The spiral flights shall be coupled to the end shaft by a flanged, bolted connection. 8. Field welds at the jobsite by the Contractor for installation may be necessary when any overall conveyor length presents shipping or handling constraints. 9. A gland packing ring consisting of two Teflon fiber packing rings shall seal the drive shaft at its penetration through the end plate, along with a greased labyrinth sealing system. 10. The connection of the spiral to the drive system shall be through a flanged connection plate that is welded to the spiral forming a smooth and 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR 11332-7 D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 continuous transformation from the flange plate to the spiral. The drive shaft shall have a mating flange and shall be bolted to the spiral connection plate. Additionally, a grease lubricated labyrinth seal shall be shaft mounted internally in the conveyor between the back plate and spiral coupling connection. I I Ii Ii I Ii I I I, Ii I I B. Hold Down Provisions: In order to avoid excessive wear and increased maintenance the conveyors shall be designed without the use of steel hold down bars. Proprietary hold-down guide liners mounted under the lids will be accepted that do not interfere with the flow of conveyed product. c. Horizontal and Inclined Troughs: Troughs shall be U-shaped and similar to the dimensional standards ofCEMA 350 and enclosure classification lIE. 1. A flanged drain outlet shall be provided with each conveyor to facilitate cleaning if required by contract drawings. The drain outlet shall be piped to a drain as shown on the drawings, with adequate cleaning facilities. Drain flushing connections are to be provided if and where specified by the contract drawings. The Contractor shall furnish all labor and materials to connect the conveyor flush water and/or drains with the plant water and drain system. 2. Each trough shall be equipped with inlet and/or discharge openings as shown on the contract drawings. If required, each inlet and discharge opening shall be flanged suitable for interconnection to other devices.. Any interconnecting devices such as chutes and hoppers shall be fabricated from the same grade of material as the troughs and with a gauge thickness to suit the application requirements. 3. Bolted covers shall be furnished for any portion of each trough that is not covered by the filling chute. Covers shall be manufactured in maximum five (5) foot length section to allow for easy access and ease of liner replacement. To prevent Unsafe access to the conveyors, quick opening covers will not be allowed unless they are also bolted to prevent access during operation. Each conveyor shall be fixed with the appropriate warning labels to call for lock out - tag out of the electrical system before the covers are removed. If required, inspection hatches or sample ports with fmger guards will be supplied as indicated on the contract drawings. Ii Ii I II I I) II I Wear Liner 1. Liner - The inside trough surfaces of both the screenings compactors and shaftless conveyors shall be lined with a layer of ultra high molecular weight polyethylene UHMW-PE. The wear liner shall be SPIRAC Duraflo SPX or Xylethon by Durawear. The liner shall be a single piece, formed and bonded with two (2) layers, each of a different color, to provide a visible indication when the liner is nearing the end of its useful life. The liner shall be supplied in maximum 3.3 foot long sections to provide ease of replacement. The liner shall be held in place with stainless steel clips; no fasteners will be allowed. Liner thickness shall be at a minimum 3/8" for spirals up to 220 mm diameter, 112" thick for spirals up to 320 mm diameter, horizontal and 3/8" 11332-8 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I thick for all vertical conveyors. Liners less than the specified minimum thickness and molecular weight shall not be acceptable. 2. The liner material shall have the following physical properties, as a mffilffium: PrODertv V aluelU nit Testin2 Method Density 61.2Ibs/ft3 DIN53479 Molecular Weight 9.2x 1 O() gimol Margolies Ball Indentation Hardness 5,946Ibs/in2 DIN53456 Shore Hardness D 64 DIN53505 Crystalline Melting Range 2780 F Dynamic Coefficient of friction 0.1-0.12 ratio Plastic to steel of tension/load D. Conveyor Supports 1. Supports to 6 Feet in Height: Each conveyor shall be furnished complete with supports suitable for mounting as shown on the contract drawings and as required by the supplier's design of 304 stainless steel structural angle, minimum 0.25" thick. The supports shall be shop fabricated from structural steel shapes and plates, and shall be assembled and fitted to the conveyor prior to its delivery to the jobsite. Supports and conveyor segments shall be match marked and shipped to the jobsite for assembly by the contraction others. The manufacturer shall allow for 1 inch of grout beneath each support foot pad for the Contractor to compensate for uneven floor elevation. At a minimum, each conveyor shall. be provided with supports at the inlet and discharge end, with intermediate supports as required. 2. All shop welding shall conform to the latest standards of the American Welding Society (A WS). The supports shall be designed to avoid interference with other equipment or equipment supports. E. Hoppers. Discharge Boots. & Gates 1. Furnish inlet and discharge hoppers of the same gauge and construction material as the conveyor troughs, at locations as shown on the drawings. Flanges shall be a minimum 5 mm thick. 2. Furnish single-ply flanged discharge boots at locations as shown on the drawings. The flexible boots shall be EPDM rubber hose, neoprene, Linatrile by Linatex Corporation, or approved equal. 2.04 MOTORS AND DRIVERS A. All electrical equipment shall conform to applicable standard of the National Electrical Manufactures Association (NEMA) and the National Electrical Code (NEC). Both power and control equipment shall be insulated for not less than 600 volts even though operating voltages may be lower. B. All motors shall be totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC), designed in accordance with the detailed motor specifications and suitable for operation with a 460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hz. Power supply. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR 11332-9 C. Motion Failure Alarm Unit: An external conveyor mounted motion failure alarm; (alternately known as "zero speed" or "under-speed" switch) to detect spiral or drive shaft failure shall be utilized in this design. This function shall be performed by the electronic motor monitor (12.5 below) by measuring the "spiral turning, conveyor empty" amp reading base line and using a lower set point for "no spiral load" for a shaft or spiral failure alarm. D. Emergency Shutdown: Each conveyor shall be furnished with an emergency trip cord and safety switch. The cord shall run the full length of each conveyor. The trip switch shall immediately stop all conveyors when the switch is actuated. The switch shall be RS type by Conveyor Components Corporation or approved equal. E. Electronic Motor Overload/Trip: Each conveyor motor starter shall incorporate a solid state electronic motor overload monitor that meets or exceeds NEMA protection Class IP20. The overload monitor shall be self powered and shall alarm at four set points; maximum overload warrIing, maximum overload alarm, minimum underload warrIing, and minimum underload alarm. The monitor shall be capable of inhibiting a pre-alarm signal during start up load conditions. The alarm response delay will be adjustable from 0.01 to 3.0 seconds. All alarm setting and reset shall be easily adjustable by push button keypad and coded alarm conditions will be visible on an LED window, both on the accessible on monitor front paneL F. The overload shall be furnished by the party responsible for the conveyor electrical controls. Drive Units A. Each spiral conveyor shall be driven by a constant-speed gear reducer motor drive unit mounted to a bellhousing adapter flange mounted to the end plate of the conveyor. B. The adapter flange shall allow the leakage of any material from the conveyor trough to atmosphere rather than into the gear reducer/ motor drive unit. Direct coupling of the gear reducer/motor drive unit to the end flange of the conveyor will not be acceptable. C. The drive unit shall be rigidly supported so there is no visible "wobble" movement under any operating condition. In the event of a prolonged power failure or emergency system shutdown the drive system shall be designed, at a minimum, to start the conveyor from a dead stop with the trough filled at 2 X the design load for loads designed up to 67% fill rate and 1.5 X for loads designed exceeding 67% fill rate. D. All motors shall be of energy efficient design meeting or exceeding NEMA MG1- table 12-10 and EP Act guidelines. The motors shall be 230/460 volt, 60 Hz, 3 phase conforming to the General Equipment specifications, except as modified herein. Each motor shall be 400C ambient rated, 3300 feet (100Om) altitude or lower operation, with a maximum temperature rise of 80 degree C by resistance at 1.0 service factor (95 degree C rise at 1.15 s.t:) The motors have Class B insulation with Design B speed/torque characteristics in accordance with NEMA MG 1-12.35 and 12.38, and be C face type, with NEMA frame sizes. E. Constant speed motors shall have a 1.15 service factor and a TEFC enclosure. F. Inverter drive motors when required by attachment "Table A", herein, shall have a 1000:1 constant torque range (except inverter duty in hazardous locations), be compatible with encoder devices for use in closed loop velocity or position control, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-10 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR Ii I: II I I I I I I II I, I, I I II I: II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I and meet NEMA MG1, parts 30 & 31 for AC induction motors powered from adjustable speed controls. Each motor shall have a nameplate service factor of 1.0, but sized so that at design load the s.f exceeds 1.15. G. Gear Reducers 1. All gears shall be AGMA Class II, single or double reduction, helical gear units with high capacity roller bearings. Bearings shall be designed for the thrust loads from the fully loaded startup condition and shall have an AFBMA B-lO life of 30,000 hours. 2. The reducer will be air-cooled unit with no auxiliary cooling requirement. The gear reducer shall be sized with a torque service factor of 1.5 times the absorbed power or 1.1 times the motor nameplate, at the driven shaft speed, whichever is greater. 2.05 CONTROLS Except as specified above, electrical controls for the shaftless conveying equipment furnished under this section shall be provided by others. A. Control panel shall be of the (wall-mounted) (free-standing) type with NEMA 4X enclosure. B. Each control panel shall include a motor starter, run, stop and fault indicator lights, elapsed time meter, main disconnect switch, Hand-Off-Auto selector switch, emergency "STOP" button and electric motor power monitor. C. Each control panel shall be equipped with a HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch. 1. In the HAND position, the conveyor shall start. 2. In the AUTO position; a. The conveyor shall start whenever the equipment that supplies material to the conveyor is energized. b. The conveyor drive shall stop automatically upon failure of the conveyor as indicated by its motion failure alarm unit, upon the failure of any downstream conveyor (if applicable), upon tripping / activation of the emergency stop switch, or upon electric motor overload. 3. In the OFF position, the conveyor shall stop. D. The controls shall include an adjustable 0 - 30 minute timer that will allow a purge cycle, and then automatically shut off the conveyor(s) after the equipment that supplies the conveyed material stops. 2.06 SHOP TESTING Each shaftless screw conveyor shall be shop assembled prior to shipment and test run to assure proper operation and then delivered to the site for installation. 2.07 PAINTING Surface preparation, shop pamtmg, field painting and specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 System. 03720-022-01 11332-11 October, 2007 other pertinent detailed pamtmg - Painting and Coating - Process SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed in accordance with Specification 01600, the instructions of the manufacturer, and the Contract Documents. 3.02 TESTING A. Field tests shall be made in conformance with Section 01400 and Section 01600. B. Preliminary field tests shall be made after installation of the screen, conveyor, wash press and discharge chute. Final field tests shall demonstrate the following: 1. That the units have been properly installed and are in proper alignment. 2. That the units operate without overheating or overloading of any parts and without objectionable vibration. 3. That there are no mechanical defects in any of the parts. C. Final acceptance will be dependent upon the satisfactory operation and performance after installation. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. Provide manufacturer's (or supplier's) services according to Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be a summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. C. Equipment manufacturer shall provide a written report covering his fmdings and installation approval. The report shall include description of all inspections and any deficiencies noted and shall be mailed directly to the Engineer. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 11332-12 SHAFTLESS SCREW CONVEYOR Ii I I I I I I I Ii II .1 II II II Ii II II Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 13401 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This section requires the Contractor to perform all work necessary to furnish, install, commission, test, document, and start-up the instrumentation and control system, including modifications to the existing instrumentation and control system. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, equipment, incidentals, and services required for a complete and operational system. B. The Contractor shall work closely with the Owner's control system technician to coordinate both power and control system outages during the installation of the Contractor-provided controls and instrumentation. Contractor will coordinate with the control system technician and provide the support personnel necessary for a full functional test of the control system interfaces. Owner's control system technician will provide all programming and configuration of existing PLC and SCADA systems. Contractor will provide all hardware, installation, wiring, and testing of control system components, including I/O modules, terminal blocks, relays, surge arrestors, and other electrical equipment necessary for a complete, functional system. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The provisions of all other sections of the specifications are fully applicable to this section as if incorporated herein. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with others. 1.03 PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits, licenses and inspections required for the work of this section and pay all charges incidental thereto. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer all certificates of inspection and licenses issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 REFERENCES The work shall conform to applicable provisions of the latest edition or revision of the following standards, except as modified herein. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 13401-1 C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) D. Instrument Society of America (ISA) E. UnderwriterOs Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work to the Engineer within 30 days after Award of Contract. 1. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other descriptive data required to demonstrate conformance to the specifications. Partial lists will not be acceptable. 2. The basis of acceptance will be the manufacturer's published ratings for the equipment. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified. B. The Contractor shall submit testing procedures, test reports and a training program. 1. Provide a test procedure outline, example operational report, and example functional test procedures and schedules. 2. Provide a factory test report. 3. Provide an operational acceptance report. The report shall contain a completed status sheet for each loop. Each sheet shall be signed off by the Contractor's field crew. The report shall be reviewed, verified, and signed off by the Contractor. 4. Provide a training program and schedule. C. Each submittal shall be complete, neat, orderly, and bound with a table of contents and section divider tabs. D. Each submittal shall include, but not be limited to, the requirements described herein. E. Equal materials or products may be submitted for approval. Submissions shall be accompanied with adequate data to demonstrate equality. Equality of materials or products shall be the decision of the Engineer. F. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a cover letter describing any exceptions or deviations from the specifications. Cover letters addressing resubmitted materials 03720-022-01 October, 2007 13401-2 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I I: Ii I II II Ii II I Ii I II I 101 II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I shall also describe any changes which have been made since the previous submittal and include a brief response to the Engineer's comments. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Provide shop drawings for all equipment, field panels and enclosures. 3. As a minimum, the drawings shall show the fabrication design, internal equipment arrangement, internal wiring, and external wiring connections. 2. Provide panel elementary diagrams. The diagrams shall show all control functions, power distribution, switched analog signals, and auxiliary devices such as relays, alarms, fuses, lights, fans, etc. 3. Provide a power requirement (voltages, currents, phases) and heat dissipation (maximum Btu/hr) summary for all panels. 4. Panel connection drawings shall show ISA wire tags. 5. Provide any needed installation details to adequately define the installation of panels and field components. B. Provide loop diagrams for each specified loop. The loop diagrams shall meet the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4. A diagram(s) shall show the wiring and/or plumbing for all major components, resistors, diodes, DC power supplies, shield terminations, tubing, piping, valving, test taps, and other appurtenances for process connections. Each analog diagram shall tabulate loop impedances. An individual loop shall be shown on a diagram divided into three areas for identification of element locations: panel face, back-of-panel, and field. Loop diagrams shall be on 8~ x 11-inch or 11 x 17-inch drawings. 1. Provide a description of operation for each loop. C. Provide electrical and plumbing interconnection diagrams showing all component and panel connection/terminal identification numbers and external wire numbers. These diagrams shall include all intermediate terminations (e.g., at terminal junction blocks and motor control centers). 1. The interconnection diagrams shall be coordinated with other suppliers and the electrical subcontractor. The electrical subcontractor shall review and approve the diagrams prior to any submission to the Engineer. 4. The diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1-101. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 13401-3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE A. Provide descriptive literature for all equipment provided under this section. The literature shall include major components, electrical devices, panel materials, panel components, panel paints and colors, mechanical devices, equipment tags, tubing, valves, fittings, fasteners, and appurtenances. This descriptive literature shall include catalog information, external wiring information, dimensional data, and mounting requirements. B. Provide data (specification) sheets for all equipment and components. Provide a separate data sheet for each major component. The data sheets shall show the "component name," tag numbers, quantities, specific catalog/ordering numbers, specific features, and special options. C. Provide components parts list with exact and complete (including options and accessories) manufacturer's part number. Group the list by the component name used in these specifications. Group each component type by tag number used in these specifications. Components without tag numbers shall be grouped by the manufacturer's part number. D. Provide a list of recommended spares, spare parts, and expendables with tag number, part number, unit pricing, and total purchase cost. E. Provide storage requirements for all components provided under this section. 1.08 CERTIFICATION/DOCUMENTATION The instrument system supplier( s) shall verify the calibration and operation of all control, instrumentation and telemetry components and shall present written certification of the operation. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03720-022-01 September, 2007 A. Prior to fmal acceptance of this project, the Contractor shall submit an operation and maintenance (O&M) manual to the Engineer for all components provided under this section. The manual shall comply with the following: 1. The literature shall have sufficiently detailed descriptions and figures to facilitate the operation, removal, installation, adjustment, calibration, and maintenance of each component to the printed circuit board level. 2. The manual shall include internal wiring and piping diagrams. Termination designations and wire and pipe numbers shall be clearly shown. Diagrams, device designations, and symbols shall be in accordance with NEMA ICS 1- 101. 3. The manual shall include an updated set of manufacturer's literature, data sheets, loop descriptions of operations, drawings corrected per shop drawing review comments and as-built modifications and components parts list. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION 13401-4 AND CONTROLS I I II II Ii Ii I I I II I Ii I I..!. , , 11 Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. Instructions and parts lists shall have been prepared for the specific equipment furnished. 6. List of suppliers and/or service shops that can provide parts and accessories and equipment repair for the components provided under this section. The list shall include a contact name, telephone number and address. B. The Contractor shall provide one as-built set of Record Drawings on CD ROM diskettes in Autocad "DWG" or "DXF" format, consisting of the following: 1. Process and instrumentation diagrams. 2. Loop diagrams. 3. Panel elementary diagrams. 4. Interconnecting wiring diagrams. 1.10 SYSTEM OVERVIEW A. The general arrangement of the instruments, controls and monitoring systems are shown on the drawings and specified herein. The location of all transmitters, controllers, recorders, indicators, totalizers, etc., shall be as shown on the plans and/or as indicated herein. The Contractor shall be responsible for all detail installation drawings showing wiring, tubing, piping, etc., and shall be responsible for furnishing all devices required for a complete and functioning system. B. This project involves several complete control system packages which are part of the overall equipment packages. These systems are to be installed at three of the Owners wastewater treatment facilities. Each bar screen and grit handling system equipment package is equipped with its own PLC (among other hard-wired controls) for system control, monitoring, and alarming functions. C. In addition to the packaged control systems, several system parameters will be monitored on the existing plant-wide SCADA system. No control of the equipment from the existing plant control system is intended under this contract. The digital interfaces between the equipment control systems and the plant SCADA system shall be accomplished through the use of several interposing relays, supplied under this contract, and installed in the equipment vendor's control panel. These relays shall be wired to the contractor-furnished digital input modules as indicated on the plans. Analog signals are to be wired to contractor- furnished analog input modules. D. All I/O modules are to be provided under this contract, and installed in the PLC rack by the Owners representative. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 13401-5 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS E. The work requires the Contractor to provide and install terminal blocks and interposing relays and make wiring terminations in existing control panels, MCC's, and I/O cabinets as outlined in the drawings. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and equipment with manufacturer's tags and labels and UL labels intact. Deliver packaged material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand, and UL label. B. Throughout this Contract, the Contractor shall provide suitable protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and the effects of weather and the construction environment. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of materials and equipment until the acceptance of equipment by the Owner. C. Prior to installation, store material and equipment indoors in a dry, clean location. Handle and store so as to avoid damage. Heat storage areas which contain items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. D. Turn off power to panels and equipment and close and cover control panels and equipment during any dusty construction to prevent degradation or operation or service life. E. Follow manufacturers' installation instructions explicitly, unless otherwise indicated. Wherever any conflict arises between the manufacturers' instructions and these Contract Documents, follow the Engineer's decision at no additional cost to the Owner. Keep a copy of the manufacturers' installation instructions on the job site and available for review at all times. F. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Prior to fmal inspection and testing. and upon completion of the work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from the premises and from the interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. G. Touch up scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, and consistency of the original fInish. 1.12 WARRANTY 03720-022-01 September, 2007 A. All work, equipment, and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective design, materials and workmanship for a period of one year. The warranty period shall begin at the time of project completion and acceptance by the Owner. B. The warranty shall cover replacement equipment and/or repair, including labor, travel time and miscellaneous expenses, at no cost to the Owner for the full warranty period. 13401-6 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I I Ii Ii II II Ii I I I I I I] II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The manufacturer(s) and/or supplier(s) shall have regularly engaged in the manufacture of major components and/or assembly or instrumentation and control systems of the type and scope required for this project for a minimum of five years. B. It is recognized that one manufacturer may not make all the equipment required and specified under this section. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the various manufacturers and equipment suppliers are coordinated in providing the equipment needed to perform the specified functions. The Contractor shall ensure that they are fully aware and understand the requirements of the system. 2.02 GENERAL EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide the functions described under paragraph 1.10, System Overview. Major components and equipment items to implement these functions are specified under paragraph 2.03, Component Specifications. All components and items of equipment that are necessary, whether indicated or not, to effect the required functions and performance shall be provided. In general and unless otherwise noted, corrosion- resistant materials such as 316 stainless steel shall be used. Working pressures, spans, and other ratings shall be selected to best fit the application. All like equipment shall be of the same manufacture. B. Whenever any material or product is indicated by patent or proprietary name, by name of manufacturer, or by catalog number, such specifications shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of establishing a standard of quality and expanding the description ofthe material or product desired. Materials and products equal to named material or product may be provided unless specifically noted otherwise. C. All equipment furnished under this section of the specifications shall be new and unused and shall be the standard product of a manufacturer having a minimum of five years successful experience in the manufacture of the equipment. Wherever possible, equipment items having the same or similar rated capacity or function shall be identical. Equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest and proven design. D. The design of the instrumentation and control system is based on the equipment and components specified herein. If more than one manufacturer is noted, the first named is the basis for design where there are differences. Should the Contractor select equipment which changes the design basis, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer and make all approved changes at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Electrical Transient Protection: All instrumentation and control equipment shall be equipped with suitable surge-arresting devices to protect the equipment from damage due to electrical transients induced in the interconnecting lines by lightning discharges or by nearby electrical devices. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 13401-7 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS F. G. H. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 1. Voltage surge and transient protectors for both power and analog field circuits shall be provided on the field end and destination end of the circuits. Ii I I I I I I I I: I a. Analog circuits shall be protected by EDCO SS Series suppressors. b. All instrument 120 volt power and signal circuits shall be protected by EDCO SLAC Series suppressor. 2. The devices shall be connected to the system ground. Total resistance of the ground circuit from the device to the driven ground rod shall not exceed 0.1 ohm. Signal Characteristics 1. Analog signals shall be 4 to 20 mA DC and shall conform to the compatibility requirements ofISA Standard S50.1. Unless otherwise noted, circuits shall be Type 2 two-wire. Transmitters shall have a load resistance capability conforming to Class L. Transmitters and receivers shall be fully isolated. 2. Discrete signals are two-state logic signals of two types. Control signals shall use 120 V AC sources. Alarm sigrIals that interface directly with an annunciator shall use less than 30 VDC sources. All alarm sigrIals shall be "normally open, close to alarm" isolated contacts rated for 5 amperes at 120 V AC and 2 amperes at 30 VDC. Ii Environmental Conditions 1. Unconditioned air: 20 to 105 OF, 10 to 100% humidity, subjectto wash down or rain, corrosive (assume marine salts and H2S as a minimum), and nonhazardous. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. Ii I I Ii I' Ii II I 2. Other conditions as noted or approved. Nameplates, Name Tags and Service Legends: All field and panel mounted components provided under this section shall be provided with permanently mounted name tags gearing the entire ISA tag number of the component. 3. Panel mounted tags shall be engraved plastic. Field mounted tags shall be stamped 16-gauge 316 stainless steel with 3/16-inch high characters. 2. Nameplates shall be inscribed to identify the component listed and mounted near a panel face mounted instrument. 3. Service legends shall be integrally mounted on a panel mounted instrument. Unless otherwise noted, service legends shall be engraved with the functional explanation. 13401-8 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I K. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 4. Nameplates and service legends shall be engraved, rigid, laminated plastic plates attached to enclosure with stainless steel screws maintaining NEMA rating of enclosure. Unless otherwise noted, plate color shall be black with 3/16-inch high white lettering. Panel nameplates shall have I/2-inch high lettering. 1. Colors and Inscriptions: Unless otherwise noted, the following inscription and color code shall be used for all push buttons and indicating light lenses: ON, green; OFF, red; OPEN, green; CLOSED, red; AUTO, white; MANUAL, yellow; START, red; STOP, green; RESET, red; TEST, black; ACKNOWLEDGE, green; and READY, blue. All unused or noninscribed buttons shall be black. 1. Lettering shall be black on white, amber, or yellow. Lettering shall be white on black, red, blue, or green. J. Relays 1. Analog signal switching relays shall be provided for switching 4-20 mA or 1- 5 VDC signals. The relays shall have double-throw dry circuit contacts in a break-before-make configuration rated for 15 VA minimum. The relays shall be sealed to prevent dust, dirt, or moisture contamination. Relays shall be UL recognized and shall be Potter and Brumfield KUP or KUL Series or Struthers-Dunn Series 219. 2. Control circuit switching relays shall be rated for not less than 2 amperes at 120 V AC or 28 VDC. 3. All relay connections shall have a screw terminal interface with the wiring. Terminals shall have a permanent, legible identification and shall be mounted such that terminal identifications are clearly visible and the terminals are readily accessible. Power Supplies: Provide DC power supplies as required to power instruments requiring external DC power. 1. Power supplies shall convert 120 V AC power to DC power of the appropriate voltage(s) with sufficient voltage regulation and ripple control to assure that the instruments being supplied can operate within their required tolerances. 2. Output overvoltage and overcurrent protective devices shall be provided with the power supply to protect the instruments from damage due to power supply failure and to protect the power supply from damage due to external failure. 4. Each power supply shall be provided with a NEMA 1 enclosure for mounting within other enclosures. Power supplies shall be mounted such that dissipated heat does not adversely affect other components. 13401-9 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS L. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 Wiring: All electrical wiring and wiring identification shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 16401, Low-Voltage Electrical Work - General Requirements. 1. Wires shall be 600-volt class, PVC insulated stranded copper. 2. Wiring for 120 volt circuits and signals shall be sized as required for the current to be carried, but not smaller than 14 A WG if enclosed in sheet metal raceway or plastic wiring duct. Wiring for signal circuits shall be twisted shielded pairs (TSP) not smaller than 16 A WG. Analog signals shall be separated from any power wiring by at least 6 inches. 3. All interconnecting wires to other enclosures shall be terminated at numbered terminal blocks. All external connections shall be to numbered terminal blocks. All connections for future functions shall be wired to numbered blocks. a. Terminal blocks shall be grouped to keep circuits of different voltages separate. Provide sufficient terminal blocks for all functions required, all spare annunciator points, and all spare conductors plus 15 percent spare. b. Terminal blocks shall be one-piece molded plastic blocks with screw- type terminals and barriers rated for 300 volts. Terminals shall be double sided and supplied with removable covers which prevent accidental contact with live circuits. Terminals shall have permanent, legible identification, clearly visible with protective cover removed. c. Wires shall be terminated at the terminal blocks with crimp-type, preinsulated, ring-tongue lugs. Lugs shall be the appropriate size for size of the terminal block screws and the size and number of wires terminated. 4. All analog signal wiring shall be TSP with tie points at terminal blocks. Provide external dropping resistors or diodes to allow removal of an instrument from the loop without opening the circuit. 5. Shields shall be interconnected within each loop at terminals. Shield wires shall be dressed with heat-shrink tubing. Ground signal shields at control panels only (not field devices). 6. Enclosures shall conform to the National Electrical ManufacturerOs Association, NEMA-3R, unless otherwise noted. Construction shall be of 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. Aluminum construction shall use 5052 H-32 aluminum alloy and shall provide for noncontact of dissimilar metals. Minimum metal thickness shall be 14 gauge. Where practical, enclosures shall be manufactured by Hoffman or H.F. Cox. 13401-10 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I II II II Ii Ii Ii II II Ii I! Ii I Ii II II Ii II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Doors shall be rubber gasketed with a continuous hinge. b. Panels mounted outside or in unheated areas shall be provided with thermostatically controlled heaters that will maintain the panel inside temperature above 40 OF. c. Panel shall be sized to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment in or on the panel. d. Provide a breaker protected 120 volt, 15 amp duplex receptacle within the panel. 2.03 ADDITIONS TO THE EXISTING IN-PLANT SCADA SYSTEM 03720-022-01 September, 2007 A. Hardware Requirements: In addition to the PLC control system being provided by the equipment manufacturer, the existing PLC-based plant control systems at each facility shall be modified with additional PLC hardware to accommodate the Input / Output (I/O) requirements of this contract. This additional hardware shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the following hardware: 1. Flex I/O Analog and Digital Input Modules, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, no exceptions. 2. SLCI/O Analog and Digital Input Modules, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, no exceptions. 3. PLC5 I/O Analog and Digital Input Modules, as manufactured by Allen Bradley, no exceptions. 4. I/O Module faceplate labeling shall be included to match existing type and style of I/O module labeling. 5. Interconnection cables, as required by the application, and as dictated by the existing installation. Provide cable labeling of same style of existing I/O cables, and indicate cable numbers on as-built drawings. 6. Where interlocking with existing controls for SCADA interface purposes, provide and install an interposing relay in parallel with the existing pilot light or other indicating device, wiring the contacts of the interposing relay back to the PLC input module. Interposing relay coil and contact ratings are to be sized for the application intended. 7. Provide sufficient number of terminal blocks within existing control system enclosures to accomplish intended functionality. Terminal blocks to match manufacture and style of existing terminal blocks with like labeling 13401-11 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS B. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 convention applied to new terminal blocks. Terminal block numbering to be indicated on as-built drawings. I I 8. All mounting hardware as required by application. II II Configuration and Programming Requirements: 1. The existing plant PLC systems shall be configured to accept the proposed I/O modules being added to the PLC I/O racks. Ii a. Remove any PLC I/O database descriptions and modify PLC ladder logic III for any equipment that may become obsolete as a result of this project. , b. Configuration of the PLC associated with each modified I/O rack must be I completed in order for the I/O to be recognized by the control system. ! c. The PLC memory register addresses shall be modified to reflect the status III or alarm condition being monitored. d. All necessary ladder logic to scale analog points and/or convey electronic signals to the Human Machine Interface (HMI) computer shall be included. II II e. Provide documentation of all new and modified PLC files (database listing, ladder logic listing, I/O structure listing). I: 2. The existing plant HMI system shall be modified to include the new I/O points being added to the plant-wide SCADA system. HMI databases must be modified to include the new I/O points. Database entries shall include equipment descriptions to match PLC point descriptions and shall utilize P&ID drawing equipment numbers for data point identification tags. If II a. HMI screens shall be created to reflect the status and alarm data for the bar screen and grit handling systems. In addition, existing HMI screens shall be modified to include data and alarms from the new equipment. II I b. Modify any existing HMI screens depicting the equipment removed under I, )1 this contract. Replace any appropriate graphics or icons to reflect new bar screen and grit handling systems. c. A new HMI screen, titled "Bar Screen System", shall be created depicting a system overview similar to the P&ID'drawings of that system. Include on this screen, all bar screen data as required under this contract. II Ii II II d. A new HMI screen, titled "Grit Handling System", shall be created depicting a system overview similar to the P&ID drawings of that system. Include on this screen all grit handling system data as required under this contract. 13401-12 PROCESSTINSTR~ATlON AND CONTROLS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I e. Graphics on the new HMI screens shall match existing HMI screens in type, background, font, icon color conventions, and interface functionality. Provide shortcuts (or links) to these screens from any system overview screens, menu bar buttons, or other pertinent locations within the HMI system. f. Modify existing alarm database points, alarm summary screens, and alarm event logs to display alarm events indicated on project plans. g. Modify existing event logs to record operations data; to include as a minimum: pump run times, channel levels, motor starts, and equipment states such as hand or auto. h. Provide documentation of all new and modified HMI files (database listing, screen captures, and program code listings). 1. Provide the Owner with a minimum 1 hour of operator training for the new HMI screens and controls. 2.04 FLOAT SWITCHES Float switches shall be of the suspended type with polypropylene or PVC body. Units shall have an integral electrical cable with two #19 A WG stranded conductors. Switches shall be pilot duty, normally open or normally closed, as required for application. Switches shall be suitable for use with intrinsically safe circuits. Each switch shall be supported from an AISI Type 316 stainless steel cable support bracket with individual stainless steel Kellems grip strain relief supports. Each switch shall be provided with a sufficient cable length to extend from the float switch to the fmal termination point at the pump control panel and have an additional 10 feet of looped cable within the pump station. The float switch cables shall be bundled to an AISI Type 316 stainless steel cable with heavy-duty nylon strap wire ties. The upper end of the stainless steel cable shall be attached to the cable support bracket and the lower end attached to a five-pound (minimum) cable weight. The cable weight shall be fIrmly attached to the cable and shall be constructed of noncorrosive metal and/or materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL The Contractor shall lay out the work and be responsible for necessary lines, levels, elevations and measurements. Installations shall comply with the applicable requirements of Section 16401, Low Voltage Electrical Work - General Requirements. The drawings indicate extent and general arrangement of the components. The Contractor shall familiarize himself with work of other trades engaged in the construction. Exact routing of raceways, piping and locations of equipment may be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. The Contractor shall coordinate with the details of equipment shop drawings for connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be construed to permit redesigning systems. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 13401-13 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 3.02 INSTALLATION Comply with referenced standards, National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Safety Code, local codes and rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction. Size of conductors, circuit breakers, motor controllers and protective devices indicated or specified shall meet all requirements of the NEC. 3.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS The installer shall be acceptable to the manufacturer and/or supplier of the instrumentation and control systems. The installer shall have a minimum of 5 years experience installing instrumentation and control systems of a similar type and scope. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. General B. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 1. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work which has a neat and finished appearance. 2. Coordinate the work with the Owner, the Contractor, and the work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference. Electrical Power and Signal Wiring 1. Control and signal wiring in enclosures and racks shall be restrained by plastic ties or ducts. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end so that any bending or twisting will to be around the longitudinal axis of the wire and the bend area shall be protected with a sleeve. 2. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire. Provide abrasion protection for any wire bundles which pass through holes or acrOss edges of sheet metal. 3. Use the manufacturer's recommended tool with the proper sized anvil, for all crimp terminations. No more than one wire shall be terminated in a single crimp lug and no more than two lugs shall be installed on a single-screw terminal. 4. Wiring shall not be spliced or tapped except at device terminals or terminal blocks. All devices with pig-tail wiring shall terminate on terminal blocks within or near the device. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection at any time by the Engineer. Correct any work, materials, or equipment not in accordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient or defective. Corrections shall be made in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer at no additional cost to the Owner. 5. 13401-14 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I Ii II II Ii Ii I Ii II Ii I I II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.05 TESTING L. General: All elements of the instrumentation and control system shall be tested to demonstrate that the total system satisfies all of the requirements of this specification. 1. All testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. Where it is not practical to test with real process variables, the Contractor shall provide a suitable means of simulation. These simulation techniques shall be acceptable to the Engineer. 2. The Contractor shall have an updated set of drawings and specifications, a master copy of approved test procedures, and the master copy of current test failures and solutions to test failures. 3. Testing will not to be considered complete until all portions of the test have been approved by the Engineer. If a test or a portion of a test fails to the point where it needs to be rescheduled at a later date, the additional testing cost shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Factory Testing: The components shall be tested with simulated inputs and outputs at the factory. Factory tests shall generally conform to the applicable sections ofISA RP55.1. C. Operational Acceptance Testing: The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that each portion of the instrumentation and control system is ready for operation. 2. All components of the system shall be checked for proper installation, adjusted, and calibrated on a loop-by-loop basis. 2. All elements shall be checked to verify that they have been installed properly and that all terminations have been made correctly. All pneumatic tubing shall be tested in accordance with ISA procedure RP7.1. 3. All discrete elements and systems shall have their set points adjusted and shall be checked for proper operation. 4. All continuous elements and systems shall have three-point calibrations performed. All controller tuning constants shall be adjusted to preliminary settings. 5. The Contractor shall prepare operational acceptance test status report sheets for each loop listing the checks and adjustments performed and the calibration points actually set. Copies of completed status report sheets shall be submitted prior to final acceptance. D. Functional Acceptance Testing: The objective of these tests is to demonstrate that the instrumentation and control system is operating and complying with the specified performance requirements. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 13401-15 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 1. Each loop function shall be demonstrated to the Engineer in accordance with approved test procedures. Each loop shall be signed off by both the Contractor and the Engineer upon satisfactory completion. 2. A test date may be set after the testing submittal has been approved and pre- test training has been completed. 3. No modifications shall be made to the system during the functional acceptance test period except as required to maintain Owner operations. The test shall not interrupt normal operations unless approved by the Owner. 4. If a test fails to produce the expected results, minimal time shall be spent to determine the cause and take corrective action. Construction shall not interfere with the tests unless approved by the Engineer. 5. All failed tests shall be retested until the result complies with the specifications and/or is acceptable to the Engineer and Owner. 6. At the end of the test, a punch list will be provided to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then determine the cause of the failure, correct the deficiency, and report to the Engineer why the test failed and the corrective action taken. The Engineer will then determine if the function needs to be retested and determine any other tests which may be required. 7. Within 10 working days from the end of a test period or retest period, a formal punch list will be transmitted to the Contractor. The Contractor shall submit a single test report for the test period and reschedule retesting. Retesting shall be scheduled for not less than one week after the Engineer receives the test report and the retest dates shall be acceptable to all. 3.06 ON-SITE SUPERVISION A. The Contractor shall provide factory-trained, onsite service engineers to supervise and coordinate installation, adjustment, testing, training, and startup of the instrumentation and control system. B. The Contractor shall provide startup and testing assistance by engineers and programmers as required to thoroughly check all of the equipment and perform all operational and functional tests required. C. The service engineer shall be specifically trained on the type of equipment specified and shall advise the Contractor in the location and method ofinstalling special cable, mounting, pipe and wiring of one of each type of device. The service engineer shall supervise the calibration, commissioning and initial start-up of the instrumentation and control system. A signed and dated calibration sticker shall be affixed to each device. 03720-022-01 September, 2007 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 13401-16 I: I Ii Ii I) I I] I] I I I I I I, II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.07 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one 8-hour day on-site training for the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel at the job site prior to functional acceptance testing. B. The training program shall include classroom and field instruction by experienced and knowledgeable technicians and engineers on the operation and maintenance of the instrumentation and control elements, components, and systems provided. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 September, 2007 13401-17 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15060 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This Specification describes responsibilities and requirements for Piping Systems including the following: 1. Labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services to be furnished in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. The materials to be used for the piping systems shown in the Drawings are listed by servIce m the Piping Schedule, included in the Process Mechanical Drawing. 2. Coordination of work with other trades. 3. The furnishing and installation of all supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure, and complete installation, although such work is not specifically indicated. 4. The furnishing of As-Built Drawings and documents for piping systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING E. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING F. Section 15100-PROCESS VALVES G. Section 15101 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS H. Section 15103 - PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 1. Section 15104 - STAINLESS STEEL PIPE J. Section 15105 - WASTEWATER FORCE MAINS K. Section 15106 - GRAVITY SEWER L. Section 15107 - HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-1 PIPING SYSTEMs-GENERAL M. Section 15063 - WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS N. Section 15064 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form a part of this Specification as if incorporated herein except as modified herein to the extent referenced. Referenced standards and recommended practices referred to herein shall be the latest edition of any such document. A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI A21.11, Rubber Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 2. ANSI B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads 3. ANSI B2.1, Pipe Threads. 4. ANSI B16.21, Nonmetallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges. 5. ANSI B18.2.1, Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Including Askew Head Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Lag Screws. 6. ANSI B18.2.2., Square and Hex Nuts. 7. ANSI B31.1, Power Piping (Pressure Piping). 8. ANSI B31.3, Process Piping B. American Society for Testing and Materials: 1. ASTM A 183, Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and nuts 2. ASTM A 194, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure and High-Temperature Service 3. ASTM A 307, Specification for Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners. 4. ASTM D 1330, Standard Specification for Rubber Sheet Gaskets 5. ASTM F 467, Standard Specification for Nonferrous Nuts for General Use C. American Water Works Association: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-2 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL I I I I I I Ii Ii II I I I I I Ii I I I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. A WW A C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service-Sizes 4 inch through 144 inch. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance, for submittal requirements. B. If the Contractor deviates from the piping layout as shown on the Contract Drawings, then the Contractor shall submit scaled piping drawings showing locations and dimensions to and from fittings, valves, tanks, equipment, structures, and related appurtenances. Provide scaled drawings to a minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals 1 foot. Provide details to minimum scale of 1/8 inch equals 1 foot. Elevations shall correspond to reference vertical elevation datum shown or provided for this project. C. Copies of any manufacturer's written directions regarding material handling, delivery, storage, and installation. D. As-built piping drawings shall meet the requirements of Section 01700, Project Record Documents. During the progress of the work and when the work is finally completed and accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, "As-Built" Drawings of installed piping systems in project including pre-existing piping discovered, relocated, or at locations other than as originally shown in the Drawings. The Contractor shall identify complete location, elevations, and description of piping systems. Piping systems and fittings are to be identified from three points on structures and/or stationary appurtenances. E. Submit copies of forms documenting required field pressure testing work and results. F. Submit welding certificate copies. G. Submit certified copies of mill test reports for bolts and nuts, including coatings if specified. Provide recertification by an independent domestic testing laboratory for materials originating outside of the United States. H. Submit manufacturer's data sheet for gaskets supplied showing dimensions and bolting recommendations. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-3 PIPING SYSTEM~ENERAL A. The Contractor shall take care to protect the pipe from kinks, cuts, end damage, and other defects when transporting all pipe. Binding and tie-down methods shall not damage or deflect the pipes in any way. Pipe damaged during shipment shall be rejected. Ii I II 1.05 HANDLING, STORAGE, INSPECTION, AND PROTECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I II Ii B. Pipe shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects which could damage the pipe. Stacking of any pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the lower layers of pipe under anticipated temperature conditions. When necessary due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such widths to not allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports. Pipe shall not be removed from storage until bedding or sub-grade work is complete and ready to receive the pipe. I I C. The handling of the joined pipe shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting objects. Ropes, fabric, or rubber.;.protected slings and straps shall be used when handling pipe. Chains, cables, or hooks inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting each length of pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Slings for handling joined pipe shall not be positioned at socket-welded joints. Sections of the pipes with cuts and gouges shall be removed and the ends of the pipe rejoined. The Contractor shall repair all pipe coatings which have been damaged before the pipe is installed. II I I I I I I I I I II D. The Contractor shall cover all pipe stored on the site with canvas or other opaque material to protect it from sunlight. Provide air circulation under the covering. E. All pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the work. Any defective or damaged materials found during field inspection or during tests shall be removed from the site and replaced by, and at the expense of, the Contractor. F. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. G. Gaskets shall be placed in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Gaskets shall not come in contact with petroleum products. Gaskets shall be used on a first- delivered-to-site and first-to-be-installed rotation basis. Mechanical-joint glands, bolts, and washers shall be handled and stored in a manner that will ensure proper use with respect to types and sizes. 15060-4 PIPING SYSTEMs-GENERAL I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1.06 DEFINITIONS OF BURIED AND EXPOSED PIPING A. Buried piping is piping buried in the soil beginning at the wall or beneath the slab of a structure. Where a coating is specified, provide the coating up to the structure wall. Piping encased in concrete is considered to be buried. Do not coat encased pIpe. B. Exposed piping is piping in any of the following conditions or locations: 1. Above ground. 2. Inside buildings, vaults, or other structures. 3. In underground concrete trenches or galleries. C. Submerged piping is considered all piping inside the tank. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING SYSTEM GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE A. Unless noted otherwise in the Drawings, piping system materials, fittings, and appurtenances are subject to requirements of the individual Specifications for the piping systems. 2.02 PIPING SCHEDULE A. A piping schedule (legend and identification) listing the piping identification abbreviations, materials of construction, working pressures, test pressures, lining systems, coating systems, Specification section, and color coding associated with the flow streams is provided on the Contract Drawings. In locations where the piping material referenced on the piping schedule is not appropriate, the piping material is indicated in the Drawings. Materials called out in the Drawings shall govern over materials stated in the piping schedule. B. The piping schedule in the Drawings may show alternative piping materials for certain services. In such cases, the same pipe material shall be used for all pipe sizes in all locations for the given piping service. Do not intermix piping materials unless specifically designated on the Drawings. 2.03 THREAD FORMING FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS A. Form threads for stainless steel bolts by rolling, not by cutting or grinding. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-5 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL 2.04 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. Bolts and nuts for Class 150 flanges (including A WW A C207, Class D) located indoors, outdoors above and below ground, and in vaults and structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. B. Bolts and nuts for submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A 194 (Grade 8) for nuts. Fit shall be Classes 2A per ANSI B1.1 when connecting to cast-iron valves having body bolt holes; 2.05 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Bolts and nuts for flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8, for nuts. 2.06 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC, CPVC AND PVDF PIPE A. Bolts for piping in sodium hypo cWo rite service shall be made of titanium, per ASTM F 467, Grade Ti1, Ti2, or Ti7. Nuts shall conform to ASTM F 467, same material as the bolts. B. Bolts and nuts in. chemical service other than sodium hypocWorite shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8, for nuts. C. Bolts and nuts for buried and submerged flanges and flanges located outdoors above ground or in vaults and structures shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8, for bolts and ASTM A 194, Grade 8, for nuts. D. Provide a washer under each nut and under each bolthead. Washers shall be of the same material as the nuts. 2.07 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL PIPE A. Bolts and nuts for Class 150 flanges (including A WW A C207, Class D) located indoors, outdoors above ground, in vaults, and in structures shall be carbon steel, ASTM A 307, Grade B. Bolts and nuts for buried service shall also be hot-dipped galvanized. B. Bolts and nuts or submerged Class 150 flanges shall be Type 304 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193 (Grade B8) for bolts and ASTM A 194 (Grade 8) for 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-6 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL I Ii I: I I I I! Ii II Ii I' I I I Ii I: II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I nuts. Fit shall be Classes 2A per ANSI B1.1 when connecting to cast-iron valves having body bolt holes. 2.08 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. Anti-Seize Lubricant shall be chloride free and shall be nongalling NSF approved when used on potable water pipes. 2.09 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STEEL, DUCTILE IRON, AND STAINLESS STEEL PIPE A. Flange gaskets shall be in accordance with ANSI! A WW A C207, except as modified herein. Gaskets shall be ring type. All gasket material shall be suitable for the fluid being conveyed and shall be resistant to free chlorine concentrations up to 10 mgIL. All gasket material shall be rated to the surge pressures listed in the pipe schedule. Gaskets shall be EPDM, Viton, or an approved equal. 2.10 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS IN RAW SEWAGE A. Gaskets shall be full face, 1/8 inch thick, Buna-N having a hardness of 55 to 65 durometer. Gaskets shall be suitable for a water pressure of 200 psi at a temperature of 250oF. Gaskets shall have "nominal" pipe size inside diameters,- not the inside diameters per ANSI B16.21. Provide Garlock Style 9122 or equal. 2.11 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR PVC AND CPVC PIPE A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 1/8 inch thick, having a hardness of 50 to 70 durometer A. Gasket material for other than sodium hypochlorite service shall be EPR. Gasket material for sodium hypochlorite service shall be Viton ETP. 2.12 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR PVDF PIPE A. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full faced, 5/64 inch thick (minimum), made of Teflon-bonded EPDM or PVDF-bonded EPDM. The EPDM shall have a hardness of 65 to 70 Durometer "A". Gaskets shall be suitable for a fluid temperature range of -40oF to +210oF. 2.13 GASKETS FOR FLANGES FOR STAINLESS STEEL PIPE IN CHEMICAL SERVICE A. Gaskets shall be suitable for a maximum pressure of 300 psi and a maximum temperature of 500oF. Gaskets for chemical service shall be one of the following materials: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-7 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL 1. Teflon envelope type, full face, 118 inch thick, with compressed nonasbestos filler. Provide free-flow design in which the Teflon is machined or milled between leaves to provide a space for the filler. 2. Teflon (PTFE) with inert filler, 1I8~inch thick. Product: Garlock "Gylon 3510" shall be used for potassium hydroxide, sodium hypocWorite, and ammonium hydroxide. Garlock "Gylon 3545" shall be used for sulfuric acid, corrosion inhibitor, and hydrofluosilicic acid. 2.14 POTABLE WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. All potable water piping systems including pipe, valves, fittings, weld-solvents, linings, gaskets, lubricants, grout disinfection agents, etc. and surfaces in contact with potable water shall meet all local and State of Florida regulations and requirements including National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Standards 61. Contractor shall coordinate color of potable water system piping color in accordance with Section 09901 and 09902. 2.15 LOCATOR WIRE A. All 2-inch and larger buried piping shall be laid with two insulated, 12-gauge minimum A WG, solid strand copper wires taped with adhesive backed tape or tied to the nonmetallic pipe for location purposes. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Field Alignment: 1. The. piping shown on the Contract Drawings is generally indicative of the work, with symbols and notations provided for clarity. However, the Contract Drawings are not an exact representation of all conditions involved; therefore, install piping to suit actual field conditions and measurements as approved by the Engineer. No extra compensation will be made for work due to differences between indicated and actual dimensions. 2. The Contractor shall install all adapters, fittings, flanged connections, closures, restrained joints, etc. not specified but necessary for a complete installation acceptable to the Engineer. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-8 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL I I 11 I I Ii I: 1'1 I 1'1 II I I, I I I I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. The Contract Drawings do not indicate all adapters, fittings, spool pieces, bushings, unions, supports, hangers, and other items required to accommodate the installation and connection of pipe, fittings, valves, and equipment of various joint designs and sizes. Provide such required items of appropriate designs, materials, coatings, and linings. 4. An extensive network of underground piping, duct, conduit, direct-buried conductors, and related structures of various sizes, materials, alignments, age, and function exist within the project site. Conclusive information concerning these facilities is not available. Consequently, the design of new piping indicated on the Contract Drawings is approximate. Adjust alignment, fitting, valve, and joint locations as required and as approved by the Engineer to accommodate and protect existing facilities and provide the intended functionality of new piping. 3.02 FIELD LAYOUT AND MODIFICATIONS A. The Contractor, unless directed otherwise, shall be responsible for setting construction layout stakes and/or offsets required to complete the designated work. The Contractor shall ensure that those stakes and/or offsets are protected and any re-staking required for any reason including work stoppage shall be included in the bid price and no additional compensation to the Contractor will be made. B. The Engineer has the right to make any modifications the Engineer deems necessary due to field conditions, conflicts with other utilities, or to protect other properties. 3.03 PIPE PRODUCTS INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of inspection to the effect that the pipe, fittings, gaskets, glands, bolts, and nuts supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit these certificates to the Engineer before installing the pipe materials. The Contractor shall visually inspect all pipe and fittings at delivery and before they are lowered into the trench to be installed. Pipe or fittings that do not conform to these specifications or have been damaged in any manner will be rejected and the Contractor must remove them immediately. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the Engineer, the methods or quality assurance and uniformity of manufacturer fail to secure acceptable and uniform pipe products or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe products. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-9 PIPING SYSTEM~ENERAL 3.04 REMOVAL OF EXISTING PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Due to certain permit requirements, pipe that is to be removed or replaced from service will have to be physically taken out of the ground. The limits of pipe to be removed shall be specifically called for in the plans or shall be approved in writing by the Engineer. Any other removal not specifically called for shall be considered incidental to construction of other items in the contract and the Contractor will not receive compensation for such work. B. When removing pipe the Contractor shall excavate a trench wide enough to dislodge the pipe from the surrounding soil and long enough to be able to handle the pipe without causing any damage to nearby utilities, structures, or adjacent property. C. The removed pipe, fitting, and appurtenances will become the Contractor's property and the Contractor shall be responsible for proper disposal and any required permits thereof. D. Regarding pipe remaining in the ground subsequent to removal of connected pipe or pipe fittings, the remaining pipes and fittings shall be plugged or capped as approved by the Engineer. E. Pipe that will be abandoned in place shall be plugged or capped as approved by the Engineer. 3.05 BURIED PIPING AND PIPE FITTINGS A. Trenching and backfilling for all pipe and fittings shall also be in accordance with these Specifications. B. Installation: 1. Inspect all piping for defects and remove all lumps or excess coatings before installation. The inside of the mechanical joint and outside of plain-end pipe shall be cleaned before joining pipe. Caution shall be taken to prevent damage to the pipe during lowering into the trench. No foreign matter shall enter the pipe during installation. The Contractor shall cover the pipe ends during installation to prevent debris from entering the pipe. No debris, tools, clothing, or other material shall be placed in the pipe. 2. After being placed in the trench, the pipe shall be brought to the proper line and grade by compacting the approved backfill material under it, except at the bell end. Joint deflection shall not exceed 75% of the manufacturer's limit. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-10 PIPING SYSTEMs-GENERAL I I I: II I, I I Ii I I I I I I I: I II Ii I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. The Contractor shall install temporary water-tight plugs on the pipe ends during the time that the pipe is in the trench but no work is in progress. If there is water in the trench upon beginning work, this plug shall remain in place until the trench has been pumped dry, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the Engineer's Representative, or the Owner's Representative. 4. Buried carbon steel bolts and nuts shall receive one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous mastic. 5. Coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant before assembly. 6. Restrained plugs or caps shall be inserted into all buried dead end pipes, tees, or crosses. Provide blind flanges for all flanged exposed piping. Restrained plugs and caps installed for pressure testing shall be fully secured and blocked to withstand the test pressure. 7. Where plugging is required because of contract division or phasing for later connection, the ends of such lines shall be equipped with a suitable cast iron or ductile iron plug/cap or blind flange with or without a blowoff cock, as shown on the Drawings. Installation or removal of such plugging shall be considered incidental to the work and the Contractor shall not be compensated by the Owner for performing this work. 3.06 FLANGED JOINTS FOR EXPOSED PIPE AND FITTINGS A. When bolting flanged joints, the Contractor shall take care to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would prevent uniform gasket compression or which would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. One flange shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually and at a uniform rate to ensure uniform compression of the gasket, in accordance with pipe and fitting manufacturer's recommendations. B. Coat threaded portions of stainless steel bolts and nuts with lubricant before assembly. C. Connecting to Pumping Equipment: The Contractor shall take special care when connecting to pumping equipment to ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump flanges. All connecting pipe shall be permanently supported so that accurate matching of bolt holes and uniform contact over the entire surface of flanges are obtained before any bolts are installed in the flanges. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-11 PIPING SYSTEMS-GENERAL In addition, pump connection piping shall be free to move parallel to its longitudinal center line while the bolts are being tightened. 1. . Each pump shall be leveled, aligned, and wedged into a position which will fit the correcting pipe, but shall not be grouted until the initial fitting and alignment of the pipe so that the pump may be shifted on its foundation if necessary to properly install the connecting pipe. Each pump shall, however, be grouted before final bolting of the connecting piping. 2. After fmal alignment and bolting, the pump connections shall be tested for applied piping stresses by loosening the flange bolts which, if the piping is properly installed, should result in no movement of the piping relative to the pump or opening of the pump connection joints. If any movement is observed, the piping shall be loosened and re-aligned as required and then the flanges bolted back together. The flange bolts then shall be loosened and the process repeated until no movement is observed. 3. All carbon steel bolts and nuts shall be coated with the same coating as the piping system they are used on. 3.07 ANCHORING AND RESTRAINING A. The use of thrust blocks in new lines is prohibited and shall only be limited to areas in which a new fitting has been installed in an existing line and field restraining joints is not feasible or when directed by the Engineer. 3.08 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Piping, for pressure testing end inspection requirements. 3.09 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Welding: 1. Use only certified welders meeting procedures and performance outlined in Section 9 of the ASME and other codes and requirements in accordance with local building and utility requirements. Submit Welder's certificates to the Engineer for review before beginning any welding on the project. Welder must be certified for all positions (flat, vertical, and overhead). 2. Have all welds conform to highest industrial practice in accordance with ANSI B31.3 and ANSI B31.1 or other codes and requirements in accordance with local building and utility requirements. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-12 PIPING SYSTEMS---GENERAL I II II Ii Ii Ii Ii I I I I I I II II II Ii I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.10 PIPE COLOR CODING A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Engineer and the Owner to generate a list of acceptable pipe colors for buried and exposed piping systems. Where color- coding is achieved by painting and or banding exterior surfaces of the piping systems, painting and pipe identification shall be provided in accordance with Sections 09901, 09902 and 15075. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15060-13 PIPING SYSTEMS--GENERAL I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15063 WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, installation, and testing of steel, cast-iron, and ductile-iron wall pipes and sleeves (including wall collars and seepage rings) and penetrations. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions and Section 01340. B. Submit detail drawings for fabricated steel or cast-iron wall and floor pipes and sleeves, wall flanges, seep rings, and sealing materials. Show dimensions and wall thicknesses. C. Show flange sizes and the appropriate ANSI or A WW A flange dimensional standard where flanged end wall pipes or penetrations are used. D. Show grooved-end dimensions and A WW A grooved-end dimensional standard where grooved-end wall pipes or penetrations are used. E. List coating systems to be applied, manufacturer, and dry thickness of coatings. Callout coatings where coatings are to be applied. F. List materials of construction, with ASTM material reference and grade. G. Submit manufacturer's instructions for installing rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRA nONS 15063-1 1. Submit six copies of the results of the leakage test for cast-iron sleeves having shrink-fit steel collars or collar halves bottomed in a groove and steel sleeves having welded steel collars. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. Use cast-iron, ductile-iron, stainless steel or fabricated steel wall sleeves when containing rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices through which piping passes. 1. Use only cast-iron or ductile-iron wall pipes when connecting to cast-iron and ductile-iron pipe. Use only fabricated steel or stainless steel wall pipes when connecting to steel or stainless steel pipe, respectively. 2. Cast-iron flanges shall conform to ANSI B16.1, Class 125 or 250, to match the flange on the connecting pipe. 3. Class 150 steel flanges shall conform to AWWA C207, Class D. Flanges shall be flat face. Flanges shall match the flange on the connecting pipe. 2.02 CAST -IRON OR DUCTILE-IRON WALL PIPES AND SLEEVES A. Provide cast- or ductile-iron wall pipes with ends as shown in the drawings for connection to adjacent cast-iron and ductile-iron pipe or for containing pipes where they pass through concrete walls, ceilings, and floor slabs. Provide seepage ring on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls. and slabs that are to be watertight. Locate collars such that the collar is at the center of the wall or floor slab, unless otherwise shown in the drawings. B. Wall pipes and sleeves shall be of the following types: 1. Pipe or sleeve with integrally cast seep ring. 2. Pipe or sleeve with shrink-fit steel collar attached. 3. Pipe or sleeve with steel collar halves bottomed in a groove provided in the pipe or sleeve. C. Minimum wall thickness for pipes and sleeves having integrally cast seep rings shall be as shown in the following table: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRA nONS 15063-2 I I II II II II II II Ii II II Ii II I II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Pipe or Sleeve Size MinimUm Wall Thickness (inches) (inches) 3 0.48 4 0.52 6 0.55 8 0.60 10 0.68 12 0.75 14 0.66 16 0.70 18 0.75 20 0.80 24 0.89 1. Minimum wall thickness of pipes or sleeves having shrink-fit collars shall be special Class 52. Cut shrink-fit collars from a 1I4-inch-thick steel ring. Attach the collar to a cast-iron or ductile-iron pipe or sleeve by heating the steel collar and allowing it to shrink over the pipe at the necessary location. Provide an epoxy bond (Keysite 740 or 742 or Scotchkote 302) between the pipe and collar. Sandblast the area of the pipe to be epoxy coated per SSPC SP-10. 2. Wall pipes or sleeves having steel collar halves bottomed in a groove shall be ductile iron Special Class 54 minimum unless otherwise shown. Wall flanges shall consist of l/4-inch-thick steel seep ring halves for pipes through 24-inch and 3/8-inch-thick halves for pipe 30 inches and larger, bottomed in a groove provided on the pipe. The pipe groove shall be machine cut to a depth of 1116 to 5/64 inch to provide a press fit for the seep ring. Seep ring halves shall be welded together after fit into groove but shall not be welded to pipe. Seep rings shall be sealed completely around the pipe with silicon sealant manufactured by Dow-Coming No. 790, General Electric Silpruf, or equal. 3. The material used in cast- or ductile-iron wall flanges, wall sleeves, and wall penetrations shall conform to ASTM A 395, A 436, A 536, A 48 (Class 35), or A 126 (Class B). D. Fabricated Steel Wall Pipes and Sleeves: 1. Provide fabricated steel wall pipes and sleeves with ends as shown in the drawings for connection to adjacent steel pipes, or for containing pipes, where they pass through concrete walls. Provide seepage ring or wall flange on wall pipes and sleeves passing through concrete walls and slabs that are to be watertight. Wall thickness shall be the same as the pipe wall WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRA nONS 15063-3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I thickness when connecting to steel pipe. Minimum wall thickness for sleeves containing pipes shall be standard weight per ANSI B36.10 for sleeves 72 inches and smaller and 112 inch for sleeves greater than 72 inches through 96 inches. Ii I' 2. Wall flanges shall be in the form of a steel wall collar welded to the steel sleeve or penetration. Cut welded wall collars from a l/4-inch steel ring. Attach the collar to a steel wall pipe or sleeve with full circle, 3/16-inch fillet welds. Welding procedures shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.3, Chapter V. II I: 3. Steel pipe used in fabricating wall sleeves containing pipes shall comply with ASTM 53 (Type E or S), Grade B; ASTM A 135, Grade B; ASTM A 139, Grade B; or API 5L or 5LX. Wall pipes connecting to steel pipe shall be of the same material as the connecting pipe. Wall collar material shall comply with ASTM A 36, A 105, A 181, or A 182. Ii Ii 4. Stainless steel pipe used in fabricating wall pipes shall be of the same material as the connecting pipe. Wall collar material shall comply with ASTM A 240. Ii II I I: II I II I: E. Rubber Annular Hvdrostatic Sealing Devices: 1. Rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be of the modular mechanical type, utilizing interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe sleeve and the passing pipe. Assemble links to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe, with a pressure plate under each bolthead and nut. 2. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Compound Material Pressure plate Delrin plastic, carbon steel, Type 304 stainless steel, Type 316 stainless steel (According to Contract Drawings) Bolts and nuts for Type 303 or 316 stainless steel links Sealing element EPDM rubber Ii 3. The size of the wall sleeve needed to accommodate the passing pipe shall be as recommended by the rubber annular seal manufacturer. II I Ii Ii 4. Provide centering blocks in 25% of the sealing elements on pipelines larger than 12 inches in diameter. WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 15063-4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. The rubber annular hydrostatic sealing devices shall be Link Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation; Innerlynx as manufactured by Advance Products & Systems, Inc.; or equal. F. Painting and Coating: 1. Line and coat sleeves and pipes (except stainless steel) per Section 09901. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF PIPES AND SLEEVES A. Provide a wall or floor pipe where shown in the drawings and wherever piping passes through walls or floors of tanks or channels in which the water surface is above the pipe penetration. B. Provide a floor sleeve where shown in the drawings and wherever plastic pipe, steel, or stainless steel pipe 3 inches and smaller or stainless steel or copper tubing passes through a floor or slab. Provide a rubber annular sealing device in the annular space between the sleeve and the passing pipe or tubing. C. Provide wall sleeves where shown in the drawings and wherever plastic, steel or stainless steel pipe 3 inches and smaller, or stainless steel or copper tubing passes through a wall. Provide a single rubber annular seal when the wall is 8 inches thick or less. Provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end of the sleeve) when the wall is more than 8 inches thick. D. Where wall sleeves are installed in which water or soil is on one or both sides of the channel or wall, provide two rubber annular seals (one at each end of the sleeve). E. Where pipes pass through walls or slabs and no sleeves or wall or floor pipe with seep ring is provided, pack the annular space with polyethylene foam filler and fill the ends of the penetration with 2 inches of elastomeric sealant on both sides of the structure. 3.02 INSTALLATION IN EXISTING CONCRETE WALLS AND SLABS Core drill holes 1 to 2 inches larger in diameter than the outside diameter of the wall flange or collar. Install wall pipe and collar assembly axially aligned with the piping to which it will be connected or will contain. Pack the void space between the sleeve and concrete with grout. See Division 3 for grouting specification. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS 15063-5 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I A. Installation in New Concrete Walls and Slabs: I: Install wall pipes and sleeves in walls before placing concrete. Do not allow any Iii portion of the pipe or sleeve to touch any of the reinforcing steel. Install wall pipe or sleeve and collar assembly axially aligned with the piping to which it will be attached or will contain. Provide supports to prevent the pipe or sleeve from II displacing or deforming while the concrete is being poured and is curing. B. Installation in Dry Floors and Slabs: II Install pipe sleeves and spools in concrete floors and slabs which do not have water over them such that the sleeve or pipe extends from the bottom of the floor or slab to two inches above the floor or slab unless shown otherwise in the drawings. II I: C. Installation of Wall Pipes Having Flanged End Connections: I' Ii II 1. Check alignment before grouting in place or pouring concrete. Realign if the sleeve is not properly aligned. 2. Install flanged end wall sleeves or penetrations with boltholes of the end flanges straddling the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the sleeve. D. Qualifications of Welders: II Welder qualifications shall be in accordance with A WS D 1.1. E. Installation of Rubber Annular Hydrostatic Sealing Devices: If I Install in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. F. Field Testing: II II II II Check each wall penetration for leakage at the time the hydraulic structure is tested for leakage; see Division 3. Penetrations shall show zero leakage. END OF SECTION Ii WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS II 15063-6 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15064 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes materials and installation of pipe hangers and supports including accessory items, such as anchor bolts and screws, pipe spiders, neoprene isolation pads, cable trays for hoses, and drip guards. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS D. Section 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL E. Section 15100 - PROCESS VALVES 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance, and the following. B. Provide line drawings of each piping system to the scale shown in the drawings, locating each support or hanger. Identify each type of hanger or support by the manufacturer's catalog number or figure. C. Provide installation drawings and manufacturer's catalog information on each type of hanger and support used. Clearly indicate the actual pipe outside diameter (not just nominal pipe size) that is used for the hangers and supports. D. Submit layout drawings for the drip guards, showing dimensions and thicknesses. Show design of seam or joint where field connections will be made between sections and pieces of drip guards. Submit a certificate listing the type of resin to be used, describing the manufacturer's brand name or designation, composition, and characteristics. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Not all pipe supports or hangers required are shown in the Drawings. Provide pipe supports for every piping system installed. Support piping by pipe support where it connects to pumps or other mechanical equipment. B. Pipe support and hanger components shall withstand the dead loads imposed by the weight of the pipes, fittings, and valves (all filled with water), plus valve actuators and any insulation, and shall have a minimum safety factor of five based on material ultimate strength. 2.02 HANGER AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Pipe hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Anvil, Grine11, Unistrut, Cooper B-Line, Aikinstrut, Superstrut, or equal. B. Pipe hangers and supports shall comply with MSS SP-58. Construct special hangers and supports if detailed in the drawings. The standard hangers and supports shall be in accordance with MSS SP-58 as listed below: Manufacturer and Model Description (or Equal) Adjustable steel clevis Anvil Fig. 590 or 260, B-Line B31 00 or B31 02 Steel double-bolt pipe clamp Anvil Fig. 295A or 295H, B-Line B3144 or B3144A Steel pipe clamp (pipes smaller than 3 Anvil Fig. 212, B-Line B3140 inches) Steel pipe clamp (pipes 3 inches and Anvil Fig. 216, B-Line 3142 larger) Pipe hanger B-Line B6690 Adjustable swivel pipe ring Anvil Superstrut 714, Anvil Fig. 104 Adjustable steel band hanger B-Line B3172 Extension pipe or riser clamp Anvil Fig. 261, B-Line B5573 Adjustable band hanger Anvil Fig. 97 Adjustable swivel ring band hanger Anvil Fig. 70, B-Line B3170 NF Split pipe ring with adjustable Anvil Fig. 108, B-Line B3173 turnbuckle Steel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 230, B-Line B3202 Steel clevis Anvil Fig. 299, B-Line B3201 Swivel turnbuckle Anvil Fig. 114, B-Line B3224 Malleable iron socket Anvil Fig. 11 OR, B-Line B3222 Steel weldless eye nut B-Line B3200 Steel or malleable iron concrete insert Anvil Fig. 281, Superstrut 452 Top beam C-clamp Anvil Fig. 92, B-Line B3033 Side I-beam or channel clamp Anvil Fig. 14 or 217 Center I-beam clamp Anvil Figure 134 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I I II II II Ii II II I II II Ii I Ii II I I II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Anvil Fi . 194, B-Line B3063 Anvil Fi . 195, B-Line B3066 Anvil Fi . 199, B-Line B3067 Anvil Fi . 202, B-Line B3062 Anvil Fig. 258, B-Line B3095 Anvil Fi . 259, B-Line B3090 Anvil Fi . 264, B-Line B3093!B3089 Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, or 165; Su erstrut A 789; B-Line B3160!B3165 AnvilFi . 167,B-LineB3151 Anvil Fi . 171, B-Line B3114 AnvilFi . 181,B-LineB3110 Anvil Fi .271, B-Line B3117SL C. The material of construction for all hangers and supports, applicable to process piping and fire protection used on the project, shall be in accordance with the Hanger and Support Application Schedule at the end of this section. 2.03 OFFSET PIPE CLAMP A. Anvil Figure 103, Cooper B-Line B3148, or equal. Material shall be Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise noted. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. Pipe Anchor Chair: Anvil Figure 198 or equal. B. One Hole Clamp: Anvil Figure 126 or equal. C. Roller Chair: Anvil Figure 175 or equal. 2.05 STEEL CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM A. Steel channel frames shall be 1-5/8 inches wide by 1-5/8 or 3-1/4 inches high by 12-gauge metal thickness, unless otherwise shown in the Drawings. Material shall conform to ASTM A 36, A 570 (Grade 33 minimum), or A 653 unless stainless steel is required by the Hanger and Support Application Schedule. Stainless steel 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 2.06 03720-022-01 October, 2007 shall be Type 304. One side of the channel shall have a continuous open slot with inturned clamping ridges. Maximum allowable stress under any combination of applied uniformly distributed loads and concentrated loads shall not exceed those recommended in the AISC or AIS1. Deflection shall not exceed 11240 of span. Use multiple back-to-back channels to achieve these criteria if single channels are not sufficient. Products: Unistrut P1000 or P5000 Series, B-Line Bll or B22 Series, or equal. B. Steel channels shall be hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A 153. C. Nuts shall be machined and case hardened. Provide rectangular nuts with the ends shaped to permit a quarter turn crosswise in the framing channel. Provide two serrated grooves in the nut to engage the inturned edges of the channel. D. Pipe clamps (including attachment screws and nuts) shall be Unistrut PllOO or P2000 Series, B-Line B2000 Series, or equal. Material shall be Type 304 stainless steel. E. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be carbon steel (ASTM A 36, A 575, or A 576) unless stainless steel is required by the Hanger and Support Application Schedule. Stainless steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A 276, Type 304. F. Accessory fittings and brackets shall be the same material as the channel or trapeze. Provide coating on carbon steel fittings and brackets as specified for the channels and frames. 1. Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut P1065, P1066, P1925; Superstrut AB-206, AB-207; or equal. 2. Post Bases: Unistrut P2072A, Superstrut AP-232, or equal. 3. 90-Degree Brackets: Unistrut P1326, P1346; Superstrut AB-203; or equal. 4. Rounded-End Flat Plate Fittings: Unistrut P2325, Superstrut X-240, or equal. G. Parallel pipe clamps shall be Unistrut P1563 through P1573, Superstrut AB-719, or equal. Material shall be Type 304 stainless steel. FIBERGLASS-REINFORCED PLASTIC (FRP) CHANNEL FRAMING SYSTEM A. FRP pipe hangers and supports shall be Aickinstrut, Inc., or equal. B. Material properties shall be as follows: 15064-4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Ii I Ii Ii I II Ii I I I I I I II II II 11 II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Longitudinal Direction Ultimate Tensile (psi) 37,500 minimum Ultimate Compressive (psi) 35,000 minimum Ultimate Flexural (psi) 37,500 minimum Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10**6 3.00 minimum Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10**6 2.00 minimum Ultimate Shear Strength (psi) 6,000 minimum Ultimate Bearing Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum Izod Impact (ASTM D 256) ft-Ib/inch notch 30 minimum Transverse Direction Ultimate Tensile (psi) 10,000 minimum Ultimate Compressive (psi) 20,000 minimum Ultimate Flexural (psi) 14,000 minimum Tensile Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.0 minimum Compressive Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.4 minimum Flexural Modulus (psi) x 10**6 1.0 minimum Ultimate Shear Strength (psi) 5,500 minimum Ultimate Bearin$!; Stress (psi) 35,000 minimum Izod Impact, ft-Ib notch 5 minimum Hardness Barcol Test 50 minimum C. Glass fiber reinforced composites and plastic products shall have a flame spread rating of25 or less when tested per ASTM E 84. D. Channel framing shall be 1-5/8 inches deep by 1-5/8 inches wide and shall be made using vinylester resin equal to Ashland Dera,kane 411, Ashland Hetron 922, or Reichhold Dion 9800. It shall have a nexus polyester surfacing veil over 100% of the surface which, along with a filler system, will protect against degradation from ultraviolet light. Channel shall be supplied with integral notches 1 inch on center. Notches shall be located on the interior flange to prevent slippage of pipe clamps and fittings after installation. In place of notched channel, unnotched channel may be used if the vertical channel sections supporting the horizontal piping are provided with stop lock hardware at each pipe clamp to prevent slippage. Channel framing shall be Aickinstrut G.R.P. Type V 2000 series or equal. E. Channel framing connections shall be made with vinylester glass fiber composite nuts, bolts, all threaded rods, channel fittings, bases, and hanger assemblies. Nut, bolts, and rods shall be Aickinstrut 4200 series, Strut Tech PVCG, or equal. Channel fittings shall be Aickinstrut 2800 style or equal. F. Load bearing pipe clamps and nonload bearing pipe straps shall be nonmetallic and nonconductive and shall be made by the injection molding process using 15064-5 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS polyurethane base resin. Pipe clamps and straps shall be Aickinstrut 3100 series or equal. G. Clevis hangers shall be made with vinylester glass fiber and be Aickinstrut 1500 series or equal. H. Hanger rods for trapezes shall be stainless steel or FRP as indicated in the drawings. Stainless steel hanger rod material shall comply with ASTM A 276, Type 304. FRP hanger rod shall be by Aickinstrut, StrutTech, or equal. 2.07 PIPE SPIDERS A. Cooper B-Line B3281 to 3286, Superstrut S-794 or equal. 2.08 WAFFLE ISOLA nON PADS A. Mason Type "W"; Machinery Installation Systems "Unisorb" Type S, SB, F, or FB; or equal. Provide minimum l/4-inch thickness. 2.09 NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES FOR METAL PIPE 6 INCHES AND SMALLER A. Unistrut P2600, B-Line "Vibrocushion," or equal. 2.10 ANCHOR BOLTS AND SCREWS A. Anchor bolts and screws for attaching pipe supports and hangers to walls, floors, ceilings, and roof beams shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 276 or F 593. Nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 194, Grade 8M, or ASTM F 594, Type 316 stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE HANGER AND WALL SUPPORT SPACING A. Install pipe hangers and wall supports on horizontal and vertical runs at the spacing shown or detailed in the drawings. Provide hanger rods (for horizontal runs) and wall supports of the sizes shown or detailed in the . drawings. If no spacing or rod sizes are given in the Drawings or in the Specifications for a particular piping system, use the following: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-6 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS II 11 Ii II Ii II I Ii Ii I Ii Ii I Ii II 11 II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing for Steel, Stainless Steel and Ductile-Iron Pipe: Pipe Size Maximum Support or Hanger Minimum Rod Size (inches) Spacing (feet) (inches) 3/8 and smaller 4 3/8 1/2 throuclll 6 3/8 1-1/4 through 2 8 3/8 2-1/2 and 3 10 1/2 3-1/2 and 4 10 5/8 6 10 3/4 8 10 7/8 10 and 12 10 7/8 14 and 16 10 1 18 10 1 20 throulrl124 9 1 30 6 1 B. Pipe Hanger or Wall Support Spacing for PVC Pipe: Maximum Support or Hanger Pipe Size Spacing Minimum Rod Size (inches) (feet) (inches) 3/4 3 3/8 1 3 3/8 1-1/2 3 3/8 2 3 3/8 2-1/2 3 1/2 3 3 1/2 C. Pipe Hanger or Wall Support Spacing for PVDF Piping: Maximum Hanger or Support Pipe Size Spacing Minimum Rod Size (inches) (feet) (inches) 3-1/4 2 3/8 1 2 3/8 1-1/2 3 3/8 2 3 3/8 D. For piping services not described, provide hangers and supports per MSS SP-58 and SP-69. E. Provide bracing for piping 8 inches and smaller that is installed on hangers or trapezes per MSS SP-127, except provide lateral bracing at maximum lO-foot center-to-center spacings. Provide sway bracing for hangers for piping larger than 8 inches. 15064-7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 3.02 PIPE SUPPORT SPACING FOR SUPPORTS ON TOP OF SLABS OR GRADE A. Install pipe supports on horizontal runs at the spacing shown or detailed in the drawings. Provide supports of the type shown or detailed in the drawings. If no spacings are given in the drawings or in the specifications for a particular piping system, use the following: 1. Pipe Support Spacing for Steel, Stainless Steel and Ductile-Iron Pipe: Pipe Size Maximum Support Spacing (inches) (feet) 3/8 and smaller 4 1/2 through 1 6 1-1/4 through 2 8 2-1/2 and 3 10 3-1/2 and 4 10 6 10 8 10 lOand 12 10 14 and 16 10 18 10 20 through 24 10 30 10 B. Pipe support spacing for other pipe materials shall be the same as described above in paragraph entitled "Pipe Hanger and Wall Support Spacing." 3.03 INSTALLING PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide separate hangers or supports at each valve. Provide one hanger or support around each end of the valve body or on the adjacent connecting pipe within one pipe diameter of the valve end. Provide additional hangers or supports to relieve eccentric loadings imposed by offset valve actuators. B. Provide separate hangers or supports at each pipe elbow, tee, or fitting. Provide separate hangers or supports on both sides of each nonrigid joint or flexible pipe coupling. c. Adjust pipe hangers per MSS SP-89, paragraph 10.6. D. Install leveling bolts beneath support baseplates. Provide 3/4-inch thick grout pad beneath each base. E. Install piping without springing, forcing, or stressing the pipe or any connecting valves, pumps, and other equipment to which the pipe is connected. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-8 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I I Ii II I Ii II I I I! Ii Ii Ii Ii I: Ii II Iii Ii I: I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.04 INSTALLING STEEL AND FRP CHANNEL FRAMES A. Use 1-5/8-inch-high channel frames unless 3-1/4-inch is needed to provide clearance from walls. Use multiple back-to-back channels if additional clearance is needed. 3 .05 INSTALLING NEOPRENE ISOLATING SLEEVES A. Install a sleeve around each metal pipe 6 inches and smaller at the point of bearing or contact with the pipe hanger or support. 3.06 PAINTING AND COATING A. Grind welds of fabricated steel pipe supports smooth, prepare surface by sandblasting, and apply coating system. B. Paint exposed metallic pipe hangers and supports to match the color of the adjacent wall using System No. 52 per Section 09901, Painting and Coating. If the adjacent wall is not painted, paint the hangers and supports to match color code of the largest pipe on the support. C. Coat submerged pipe hangers and supports per Section 09901, Painting and Coating, System No.7. D. Coat FRP pipe hangers and supports exposed to direct sunlight with System No. 41 or 42. FRP pipe hangers and supports that are hidden from direct sunlight need not be coated. 3.07 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATION SCHEDULE Area Location AcceDtable Material Exterior: Exposed to Outside Conditions Outside of Structures Stainless Steel Under Roof Canopy Stainless Steel Interior: All Areas in Headworks Stainless Steel END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15064-9 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15075 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes materials and installation of markers, labels, and signs for pipes, tanks, and valves; for mechanical equipment; for hazardous materials warnings; and for miscellaneous plant services. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. 1. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE 2. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 3. Section 09901- PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS 4. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340 and the following. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature describing materials, colors, letter size, and size of labels. P ART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 LABELS FOR PIPING A. Labels for piping shall bear the full piping system name as shown in the Piping Schedule in the drawings. Provide separate flow directional arrows next to each label. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Labels for piping inside buildings shall be vinyl cloth: W. H. Brady Co. B-500 vinyl cloth, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. Labels for piping located outdoors shall be weather- and UV -resistant acrylic plastic and shall be W. H. Brady Co. B-946, Seton Name Plate Corporation Pipe Markers, or equal. B. Alternatively, provide preprinted, semirigid, snap-on, color-coded pipe markers. Color, size, and labeling shall conform to ANSI A13.1 and Z535.1. Label shall 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15075-1 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION cover 360 degrees (minimum). Labels shall be fabricated of weather- and UV- resistant acrylic plastic. Labels shall be Seton Nameplate Corporation SetMark pipe marks or equal. 2.02 LABELS FOR V ALVES A. Provide each valve listed on the Tag Number list with an identification tag. Tag shall be 2-inch-square or circular aluminum or 1I16-inch-thick fiberglass: W. H. Brady B-60, Seton Name Plate Corp. Series SVT, or equal. Aluminum tags shall have black-filled letters. Provide fiberglass tags for the chemical system (processes 61 to 67) valves. Tag shall show the valve tag number and/or name or designation as given in the drawings. 2.03 HOSE BIBB SIGNS-NON-POTABLE WATER A. Provide a rigid sign labeled "NON-POTABLE WATER" for each hose bibb. Size and lettering shall conform to OSHA requirements. Signs shall be Seton Nameplate Company 20-gauge baked enamel, minimum size 7 inches by 3 inches; Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield fiberglass, minimum size 7 inches by 3 inches, 1/8 inch thick; or equal. 2.04 LABELS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT A. Provide a label for each pump, blower, compressor, tank, feeder, mixers, or other piece of mechanical equipment. Label shall show the equipment name and tag number as shown on the P&ID drawings. Labels shall be 1-112 inches (minimum) by 4 inches (minimum) brass, aluminum, or 1I8-inch-thick fiberglass tags. Provide fiberglass tags for the chemical system (Processes 61 to 67) equipment: Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield, Seton Style 2065, or equal. 2.05 LABELS FOR TANKS A. Signs shall be weather- and UV -resistant. Labels shall be Brady B-946, Seton Name Plate Corporation PSPL, or equal. Minimum size shall be 7 inches by 10 inches. Provide a sign on each quadrant of the tank bearing the tank tag number and the name of the liquid stored. 2.06 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS WARNING AND DANGER SIGNS A. Provide hazardous materials warning diamond signs complying with NFP A 704. Size shall be 10 inches square. Wall signs shall be 1I8-inch-thick fiberglass: Brady B-120 Fiber-Shield or equal. Signs attached to tanks, cabinets, or pieces of equipment shall be self-adhesive vinyl cloth. Provide four signs for each chemical bulk storage tank, one for each quadrant of the tank. Affix a sign to the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15075-2 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION I I I I I I I Ii I II Ii I! I I II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I exterior side of each chemical feed room door: Brady B-946 or equal. Provide signs at the following locations: B. Provide signs reading "DANGER" followed by the name of the chemical, gas, or hazard. Size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Signs shall be 1/8-inch-thick fiberglass: Brady B-120 or equal. Provide one sign at chemical fill station and at each chemical metering pump. 2.07 UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. Provide permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct burial service, not less than 6 inches wide by 3.5 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: Service Color Cable TV Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Telephone Orange Water Blue Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet 03720-022-01 . October, 2007 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15075-3 2.08 UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE A. Provide permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed tape consisting of an aluminum or steel foil sheathed in a plastic laminate, not less than 2 inches wide by 3 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of buried service. Provide the following colored tape for the various piping services: Service Color Cable TV Orange Gas Yellow Electric Red Telephone Orange Water Blue Sewer Green Chemical Yellow Reclaimed Water Violet PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING PIPE LABELS A. On piping having external diameters less than 6 inches (including insulation, if any), provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location. C. On piping designated to receive identification bands, such bands shall be 6-inches wide, neatly made by masking, and spaced at intervals of 30 inches on center, regardless of diameter of pipe being painted. Use approved precut and prefinished metal or plastic bands on piping in lieu of marked and painted bands, if approved by Engineer. PVC pipe shall be banded with colored bands in lieu of painting, unless otherwise noted. D. Apply identification labels to all types and sections of piping, as outlined herein. Such labels shall be in form of plain block lettering giving name of pipe content in full and showing direction of flow by arrows. All lettering shall have an overall height in inches, in accordance with the following table: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 15075-4 I I I I I I Ii I I I I II I I II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Diameter of Pipe or Pipe Cover Height of Lettering 3/4 to 1-3/8 inches ~ inch 1-1/2 to 2-3/8 inches % inch 2-1/2 to 7-7/8 inches 1 14 inches 8 to 10 inches 2 ~ inches Over 10 inches 3 ~ inches E. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, valve/pipe vaults, accessible maintenance spaces and exterior nonconcealed locations. 1. Adjacent to each valve and control device( except on pump suction and discharge where labels are required on headers only). 2. At each branch and riser take-off. 3. At locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ ceilings, or enter nonaccessible enclosures. 4. Maximum distance between labels shall be 10 feet on all non-potable water, chemical piping, and on all chlorine solution lines with a minimum of two labels in each room, gallery, or tunnel. Maximum distance between labels on all other piping runs shall be 20 feet. F. Identification lettering shall be located midway between color coding bands where possible and shall be properly inclined to pipe axis to facilitate reading. In the event lettering and arrow identifications are required for piping less than %- inch in diameter, the Contractor shall furnish and attach approved color coded tags where instructed. 3.02 INSTALLING VALVE AND EQUIPMENT LABELS A. Attach labels to the valve or piece of equipment with Type 304 or 316 stainless steel chains unless otherwise noted. For sodium hypochlorite and hydrofluosilicic acid use thermoplastic chains to attach labels. B. Attach valve labels to the valve handwheels. If the valve has no handwheel, attach the label to the valve by tying the tag wire or chain around the operating shaft or nut. 3.03 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS SIGNS A. Attach per sign manufacturer's recommendations and per OSHA requirements. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15075-5 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION 3.04 INSTALLING WALL AND DOOR SIGNS A. Attach to walls and doors using epoxy adhesive. 3.05 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND PLASTIC WARNING TAPE FOR METAL PIPE A. During backfilling of each exterior underground piping system, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6 t08 inches above the top of the pipe. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16 inches, install single line marker. 3.06 INSTALLING UNDERGROUND DETECTABLE METALLIC PIPE WARNING TAPE A. Install tape 4 to 6 inches below finished ground surface, located directly over buried pipelines. Where multiple small pipelines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches, install a single marker tape. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15075-6 PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION I Ii II II II II Ii Ii Ii Ii I II Ii II II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15100 PROCESS VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated valves, check valves, and process valves including gate, knife gate, butterfly, ball, hose bibbs, globe, angle, needle, eccentric plug, lubricated plug, nonlubricated plug, diaphragm, check, pinch, solenoid, pet cocks, mud valves, vacuum breakers, deluge valves, flap valves, balancing valves, gauge valves, instrument valve manifolds, and telescoping valves. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. SECTION 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. SECTION 01730 - OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS C. SECTION 09901-PAINTING AND COATING-PROCESS SYSTEMS D. SECTION 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL E. SECTION 15064 - PIPE HANGARS AND SUPPORTS F. SECTION 15075 - PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION G. SECTION 15144-PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 01340. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and detail construction sheets showing all valve parts. Describe each part by material of construction, specification (such as AISI, ASTM, SAE, or CDA), and grade or type. Identify each valve by tag number to which the catalog data and detail sheets pertain. C. Show valve dimensions including laying lengths. Show port sizes. Show dimensions and orientation of valve actuators, as installed on the valves. Show location of internal stops for gear actuators. State differential pressure and fluid velocity used to size actuators. For worm-gear actuators, state the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm and state the handwheel diameter. D. Show valve linings and coatings. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature. E. Submit copies of a report verifying that the valve interior linings and exterior coatings have been tested for holidays and lining thickness. Describe test results and repair procedures for each valve. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 PROCESS VAL YES 15100-1 F. For butterfly and eccentric plug valves, show the clear diameter or size of the port. Show the actual area of the port as a percentage of the area as calculated for the nominal valve size. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. Install valves complete with operating handwheels or levers, chainwheels, extension stems, floor stands, gear actuators, operating nuts, chains, and wrenches required for operation. B. Valves shall have the name of the manufacturer and the size of the valve cast or molded onto the valve body or bonnet or shown on a permanently attached plate. C. For buried locations, valves with mechanical joint ends may be substituted for the flanged ends specified provided the mechanical joint ends are compatible with the pipe ends. 2.02 VALVE ACTUATORS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Provide lever or wrench actuators for exposed valves 8 inches and smaller. For larger valves, provide handwheels. B. Where manually operated valves (size 2 inches and larger) are installed with their centerlines more than 6 feet 9 inches above the floor, provide chainwheel and guide actuators. C. Provide 2..,inch A WW A operating nuts for buried and submerged valves. Provide 2-inch A WW A operating nuts with the handwheels for manually actuated valves 24 inches and larger for use with a portable electric valve actuator. D. Provide enclosed gear actuators on butterfly, ball, and plug valves 10 inches and larger, unless electric valve actuators are shown in the drawings. Gear actuators for valves 10 inches through 20 inches shall be of the worm and gear, or of the traveling nut type. Gear actuators for valves 24 inches and larger shall be of the worm and gear types. E. Provide gear actuators on gate valves 14 inches and larger, unless electric valve actuators are shown in the drawings. Gear actuators shall be of the bevel or spur gear type. Provide grease case. Gearing shall comply with A WWA C500. F. Design gear actuators assuming that the differential pressure across the plug or disc is equal to the test pressure of the connecting piping pressure rating of the valve and assuming a line fluid temperature range of 500F to 1000F unless otherwise required in the detailed valve specifications. 15100-2 PROCESS VALVES I I II Ii II II I II Ii II II II II II I] II II I II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I G. Gear actuators shall be enclosed, oil lubricated, with seals provided on shafts to prevent entry of dirt and water into the actuator. Gear actuators for valves located above ground or in vaults and structures shall have handwheels. The actuators for valves in exposed service shall contain a dial indicating the position of the valve disc or plug. Gear actuators for buried or submerged valves shall have 2-inch- square A WW A operating nuts. H. F or buried or submerged service, provide watertight shaft seals and watertight valve and actuator cover gaskets. Provide totally enclosed actuators designed for buried or submerged service. 1. Traveling nut and worm and gear actuators shall be of the totally enclosed design so proportioned as to permit operation of the valve under full differential pressure rating of the valve with a maximum pull of 80 pounds on the handwheel or crank. Provide stop limiting devices in the actuators in the open and closed positions. Actuators shall be of the self-locking type to prevent the disc or plug from creeping. Design actuator components between the input and the stop-limiting devices to withstand without damage a pull of 200 pounds for handwheel or chainwheel actuators and an input torque of 300 foot-pounds for operating nuts when operating against the stops. J. Handwheel diameters for traveling nut actuators shall not exceed 8 inches for valves 12 inches and smaller and shall not exceed 12 inches for valves 20 inches and smaller. K. Self-locking worm gear shall be a one-piece design of gear bronze material (ASTM B 427; or ASTM B 584, Alloy C86200), accurately machine cut. Actuators for eccentric and lubricated plug valves may use ductile-iron gears provided the gearing is totally enclosed with spring-loaded rubber lip seals on the shafts. The worm shall be hardened alloy steel (ASTM A 322, Grade G41500 or G41400; or ASTM A 148, Grade 105-85), with thread ground and polished. Support worm-gear shaft at each end by ball or tapered roller bearings. The reduction gearing shall run in a proper lubricant. The handwheel diameter shall be no more than twice the radius of the gear sector in contact with the worm. Worm- gear actuators shall be Limitorque Model HBC, EIM Series W, or equal. L. Design actuators on buried valves to produce the required torque on the operating nut with a maximum input of 150 foot-pounds. M. Valve actuators, handwheels, or levers shall open by turning counterclockwise. 2.03 EXTENSION STEMS FOR BURIED AND SUBMERGED VALVE ACTUATORS A. Where the depth of the valve is such that its centerline is more than 4 feet below grade, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to a point 6 inches below the surface of the ground and/or box cover. Where the valve is submerged, provide operating extension stems to bring the operating nut to 6 inches above the water surface. Extension stems shall be Type 316 stainless steel, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-3 PROCESS VAL YES solid core, and shall be complete with 2-inch-square operating nut. The connections of the extension stems to the operating nuts and to the valves shall withstand without damage a pull of 300 foot-pounds. B. Extension stem diameters shall be as tabulated below: Minimum Extension Valve Size Stem Diameter (inches) (inches) 2 3/4 3,4 7/8 6 1 8 1-1/8 10, 12 1-1/4 14 1-3/8 16, 18 1-1/2 20, 24, 30, 36 1-3/4 42,48,54 2 C. Provide buried valves or valves located inside manholes or vaults with valve boxes cast in the manhole or vault roof, or stem extension and handle located under cover, with a valve position indicator designed to fit standard 5-1/4-inch valve boxes. The indicators shall show valve position and the direction and number of turns required to fully open ( or close). All internal gearing shall be sealed. Ship each unit ready for field installation complete with valve box cast- iron adapter, capscrews, guide bushing, position indicator, flexible washer, centering plate, and 2-inch A WW A nut. Valve box and indicator shall be provided by the valve manufacturer. Indicators shall be Westran Position Indicator, Pratt Diviner, or equal. I Ii II Ii I II II II Ii Ii Ii II II II 2.04 ~~~~~~ ANDS, EXTENSION STEMS, AND EXTENSION STEM SUPPORT II 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. When required by the installations, provide floor stands and extension stems for operation of valves. Floor stands shall be of the nonrising stem, indicating type, complete with steel extension stems, couplings, handwheels, stem guide brackets, and special yoke attachments as required by the valves and recommended and supplied by the stand manufacturer. Floor stands shall be cast-iron base type: Clow, Figure F-5515; Bingham and Taylor; Stockham; or equal. Handwheels shall turn counterclockwise to open the valves. B. Provide Type 316 stainless steel anchor bolts. 15100-4 PROCESS VALVES II Ii II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I C. Provide Type 316 stainless steel extension stems for valves in exposed and/or submerged service. D. Provide adjustable stem guide brackets for extension stems. The bracket shall allow valve stems to be set over a range of 2 to 36 inches from walls. Provide bushings drilled to accept up to 2-inch-diameter stems. Base, arm, and clamp shall be ductile iron. Coat ductile iron components in accordance with Section 09901. Bushing shall be bronze (ASTM B 584, Alloy C86400 or C83600). Bolts, nuts, screws, and washers (including wall anchor bolts) shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Provide slots in the bracket to accept 3/4-inch bolts for mounting the bracket to the wall. Products: Trumbull Industries, Inc., Adjustable Stem Guide or equal. 2.05 CHAINWHEELS AND GUIDES Chainwheels and guides shall be Clow Figure F-5680, DeZurik Series W or LWG, Stockham, or equal. Chainwheels and guides shall be galvanized iron or steel. Chains shall extend to within 4 feet of the operating floor. Chains shall be galvanized steel. 2.06 VAL VE TAGGING AND IDENTIFICATION Provide identifying valve tags per Section 15075. 2.07 PAINTING AND COATING A. Coat metal valves located above ground or in vaults and structures the same as the adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, then coat valves per in accordance with Section 09901 B. Coat buried metal valves at the place of manufacture per Section 09901. C. Coat submerged metal valves, stem guides, extension stems, and bonnets at the place of manufacture per Section 09901. D. Line the interior metal parts of metal valves 4 inches and larger, excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless steel pieces, per Section 09901, System No.7. Apply lining at the place of manufacture. E. Coat floor stands per Section 09901. F. Test the valve interior linings and exterior coatings at the factory with a low- voltage (22.5 to 80 volts, with approximately 80,000-ohm resistance) holiday detector, using a sponge saturated with a 0.5% sodium cWoride solution. The lining shall be holiday free. G. Measure the thickness of the valve interior linings per Section 09901. Repair areas having insufficient film thickness per Section 09901. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-5 PROCESS VALVES 2.08 PACKING, O-RINGS, AND GASKETS Unless otherwise stated in the detailed valve specifications, packing, O-rings, and gaskets shall be one of the following nonasbestos materials: A. Teflon. B. Kevlar aramid fiber. C. Acrylic or aramid fiber bound by nitrile. Products: Garlock "Bluegard," Klinger "Klingersil C4400," or equal. D. Buna-N (nitrile). 2.09 RUBBER SEATS Rubber seats shall be made of a rubber compound that is resistant to free chlorine and mono chloramine concentrations up to 10 mg/l in the fluid conveyed. 2.10 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Buried Cast-Iron Gate Valves 4 Inches and Larger for Fire Protection Service: Gate valves of sizes 4 inches through 12 inches for fire protection service shall be UL listed, FM approved, nonrising stem for use with indicator posts, solid wedge disc, bolted bonnet, with indicator post flange. Valves shall be rated for at least 175 psi, nonshock cold water. Ends shall be flanged, Class 125, ANSI B16.1 or mechanical joint. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Component Material Specification Body, bonnet, disc, and Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B indicator post flange Disc bushing, disc ring, Bronze ASTM B 62 or ASlM B 584 backseat bushing, and (Alloy C83600) seat ring Stem Copper silicon or brass ASlM B 21 or ASlM B 584 or ASTM B 763 (Alloys C87600, C99500, or C87500) Valves shall be Stockham G-632 or G-634, Nibco F-609, Clow F-6100 or F -6102, or equal. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-6 PROCESS VALVES 11 II II II Ii II II Ii Ii II I Ii II Ii Ii II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. Cast-Iron Resilient Wedge Gate Valves 3 Inches Through 20 Inches (A WW A C509): Valves shall comply with A WW A C509 and the following. Valves shall be of the bolted-bonnet type with nonrising stems. Valve stems shall be Type 304 or 316 stainless steel or cast, forged, or rolled bronze. Provide operating nut for buried valves. Provide hand wheel for exposed valves. Stem nuts shall be made of solid bronze. Bronze for internal working parts, including stems, shall not contain more than 2% aluminum nor more than 7% zinc. Bronze shall conform to ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584 (Alloy C83600), except the stem bronze shall have a minimum tensile strength of 60,000 psi, a minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi, and a minimum of 10% elongation in 2 inches (ASTM B 584 or B 763, Alloy C87600 or C99500). Body bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. End connections for exposed valves shall be flanged. End connections for buried valves shall be mechanical joint or push-on type. Provide reduction thrust bearings above the stem collar. Stuffing boxes shall be O-ring seal type with two rings located in stem above thrust collar. Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free from any sediment pockets. Valves shall be lined and coated at the place of manufacture with either fusion-bonded epoxy or heat-cured liquid epoxy. Minimum epoxy thickness shall be 8 mils. Manufacturers: Clow R/W, A VK, American Flow Control CRS-80, Waterous Series 500, Kennedy Ken-Seal, or equal. B. Knife Gate Valves: 1. Stainless Steel Knife Gate Valves 2 Inches Through 24 Inches: Knife gate valves shall be of the solid one-piece cast body design. Minimum working pressure shall be 150 psi. Provide bevel gear actuators for valves 14 inches and larger. Materials of construction shall be as follows: 15100-7 PROCESS VAL YES Component Material Specification Body Stainless steel ASTM A 743, Grade CF8M Yoke, superstructure, Stainless steel AISI Type 304 or 316 fasteners, and packing stainless steel gland Gate Stainless steel ASTM A 240, Type 316 Stem Stainless steel ASTM A 582, Grade S20300 Handwheel Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B Packing Flax or acrylic PTFE -- I Ii II II I) II Valves shall be bonnetless, wafer type with through bolting flange, for installation between two adjacent flanges. Flange holes in the body shall be Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Valve leakage shall be in accordance with MSS SP-81. Valves shall have a resilient seat (neoprene or nitrile) for drip-tight shutoff. Valves shall be Red Valve Model Flexgate , or equal. Ii II II C. Plug Valves 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Plug Valves shall be non-lubricated, eccentric type and shall close trop- tight at the rates pressure of 150 psig. II II I I 2. Port areas shall be at least 80 percent of the full pipe area to provide clog- free operation. 3. The valve body shall be cast iron with a welded-in-place nickel seat. The body shall have a bolted bonnet for permitting removal of the plug while body remains in line. 4. Flanges shall be 125-pound, faced and drilled. 5. The plug shall be cast iron with synthetic rubber facing, suitable for frequent open-close operation and for flow throttling. Ii 6. Journal bearings shall be provided at each end of the plug and shall be of the wetted type to prevent binding. Bearings shall be fabricated from oil- impregnated 316 stainless steel so that the plug will operate freely after long periods of inactivity. Ii Ii 7. Packing shall be adjustable U-rings, and shall be capable of being replaced under pressure without removal of the bonnet or plug. II II 8. Valves shall be provided with adjustable stops. 15100-8 II PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 9. Valves for interior installation and smaller than 8 inches in diameter shall be equipped with standard 2-inch nuts for wrench operation. 10. Valves 8 inches in diameter and larger shall be equipped with worm gear and handwheels. 11. Chain operators shall be furnished m accordance with chain wheel operators as stated hereinafter. 12. Unless otherwise specified, valves shall be installed so that when closed, the plug is at the upstream end of the valve. 13. In horizontal piping with the plug shaft installed horizontally, the plug shall be in the upper part of the valve body when open. 14. Plug valves on digester gas piping shall be NBR Hydrocarbonated for corrosion protection. 15. Plug valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurick, Keystone, Pratt or equal. D. Butterfly Valves: 1. Thrust Bearings for Butterfly Valves: Provide thrust bearings to hold the valve disc in the center of the valve seat. No bearings shall be mounted inside the valve body within the waterway. Do not use thrust bearings in which a metal bearing surface on the disc rubs in contact with an opposing metal surface on the inside of the body. 2. Bronze Components in Butterfly Valves: Bronze components in contact with water shall comply with the following requirements: Constituent Content Zinc 7% maximum Aluminum 2% maximum Lead 8% maximum Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum 3. Actuator Sizing for Butterfly Valves: 15100-9 PROCESS VAL YES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. Actuators shall be sized to produce valve shaft output torques equivalent to at least 75% of the torsional shear stress of the minimum required shaft diameters. I II I) 4. Port Sizes for Butterfly Valves: a. For valves 24 inches and smaller, the actual port diameter shall be at least 93% of the nominal valve size. For valves larger than 24 inches, the port diameter shall not be more than 1.25 inches smaller than the nominal valve size. The dimension of the port diameter shall be the clear waterway diameter plus the thickness of the rubber seat. . I II Ii 5. Corrosion-Resistant Materials in Butterfly Valves: Ii a. Where A WW A C504 requires "corrosion resistant" material, such material shall be one of the following: (1) Bronze as described above. (2) Type 304 or 316 stainless steel. (3) Monel (UNS N04400). (4) Synthetic nonmetallic material. II Ii II 6. Seating Surfaces in Butterfly Valves: Ii Ii Iii 11 a. Seating surfaces in valves having motorized actuators shall be stainless steel or nickel-copper per A WW A C504 or nickel- chromium alloy containing a minimum of 72% nickel and a minimum of 14% chromium. 7. Factory Leakage Testing: a. Perform factory leakage tests per A WW A C504 on both sides of the seat. 8. Flanged, Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 4 Through 72 Inches, Class 150B: Ii Butterfly valves shall be short body, flanged type for exposed valves and valves in vaults or structures, and either flanged or mechanical joint for buried valves. Valve shall conform to AWWA C504, Class 150B. Minimum working differential pressure across the valve disc shall be 150 psi. Flanged ends shall be Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Valve shafts shall be stub shaft or one-piece units extending completely through the valve disc. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Ii II II Ii II 15100-10 PROCESS VAL YES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Component Material Specification Body Cast iron or ductile AWWAC 504 Iron Exposed body Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 304 or capscrews and bolts and 316 nuts Discs Cast iron, ductile iron, AWWAC504 or Ni-Resist Shafts, disc fasteners, Stainless steel ASTM A 276, Type 304 or seat retention segments, 316 and seat fastening devices Seat material EPDM -- The rubber valve seat shall be secured to or retained in the valve body or on the valve disc. Valves shall be Pratt, DeZurik Series BA W, M&H, Val- Matic, or equal. 9. Butterfly Valves for Air Piping: a. Cast iron bodies. b. Cast iron valves conforming to ASTM A126, Class B with nichrome seating edge, or cast iron vanes conforming to ASTM A48 Class 40 with mechanically-secured rubber seat having integral 18-8 stainless steel clamp ring. c. Type 316 stainless steel valve shafts with permanently-lubricated Teflon bearings. d. Flanged ends or wafer type lug body rotating on a horizontal axis. e. 150 psi minimum working pressure. f. Resilient EPT rubber seats. g. Design and construction complying with A WW A Standard C504. h. Actuators as specified; lever actuators for valves 8 inches and smaller shall be infinitely variable level actuators with locking device. 1. Valve position indicators. J. All valve components suitable for operation up to 250 degrees F. 15100-11 PROCESS VAL YES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 k. Extended operators on valves installed on drop legs of aeration tank piping. I I] I] II II II Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by Dresser, DeZurik, Pratt, or equal. E. Ball Valves: 1. Threaded Bronze Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: Ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, for air or water service shall have bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600 or C84400) body and plug ball retainer. Ball and stem shall be bronze (as specified for the body) or Type 316 stainless steel. Provide chrome-plated ball, if ball is bronze. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI B1.20.1), nonblowout stems, reinforced Teflon seats, and have plastic-coated lever operators. Valves shall have a pressure rating of at least 600 psi WOG at a temperature of 150oF. Valves shall be Stockham S-206, Apollo 77-100 Series, or equal. Ii I I I I I Ii I I Ii II I I 2. Nut-and-Ferrule Brass Ball Valves (Straight Pattern), 3/4 Inch and Smaller: Brass ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water service shall be straight pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 2,500 psi at a temperature. of 150oF. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 70oF. Valve body, ball, stem, side rings, disc rings, and packing bolt shall be brass. Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide lever actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-and- ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40 or equal. 3; Nut-and-Ferrule Brass Ball Valves (Angle Pattern), 3/4 Inch and Smaller: Brass ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water service shall be angle pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 1,500 psi at a temperature of 150oF. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 700F. Valve body, ball, stem, side rings, disc rings, and packing bolt shall be brass. Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide lever actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-and- ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40A or equal. 15100-12 PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 4. Flanged Bronze Ball Valves, Class 150, 4 Inches and Smaller: Ball valves 4 inches and smaller shall have a minimum pressure rating of 200 psi at a temperature of 1500F. Valve body shall be aluminum bronze (ASTM B 148, Alloy C95400) or bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600). Ball and stem shall be Type 316 stainless steel or bronze (ASTM B 21, Alloy C48500). Seat and seals shall be Teflon. Ends shall be flanged, flat faced ANSI B16.5, Class 150. Valves shall be Neles- Jamesbury Style 5150, McCanna Series S151-BR, or equal. 5. Double Union PVC Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller: Thermoplastic ball valves, 3 inches and smaller, for water service shall be rated at a pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of lO50F. Body, ball, and stem shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D 1784, Type 1, Grade 1. Seats shall be Teflon. O-ring seals shall be Viton or EPDM depending on the service conditions. Valve ends shall be of the double-union design. Ends shall be socket welded except where threaded or flanged-end valves are specifically shown in the drawings. Valves shall have handle for manual operation. Provide stem extensions when valves are installed in insulated piping. Stem extensions shall be of a length sufficient to bring the bottom of the operating handle above the outside of the insulation; see Section 15080 for insulation thickness. Valves shall be as manufactured by Chemtrol, Hayward, R & G Sloan, Spears Manufacturing Company, Plast- O-Matic, or equal. 6. Double Union PVC Ball Valves 3 Inches and Smaller with Vented Ball for Hypochlorite Service: Vented PVC ball valves, 3 inches and smaller, for chemical service shall be rated at a pressure of 230 psi at a temperature of 700F and 150 psi at a temperature of 1050F. Provide machined vent hole, deburred, in the ball to allow gases to vent. Body, ball, and stem shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D 1784, Cell Classification 12454-A. Stems shall have double 0- rings and be of blowout proof design. Seats shall be Teflon and shall have elastomeric backing cushion of the same material as the valve seals. 0- ring seals shall be Viton FKM. Valve ends shall be of the double-union design. Ends shall be socket welded except where threaded or flanged-end valves are specifically shown in the drawings. Valves shall have handle for manual operation. Valves shall be Asahi/ America Type DuoBloc 21. 7. Full Port Threaded Stainless Steel Ball Valves 2 Inches and Smaller in Oxygen Service: Stainless steel ball valves, 2 inches and smaller, for water and hydraulic oil and oxygen service shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,000 psi WOG at a temperature of lOOOF. Provide full port ball and body design. Valve body, ball, and stem shall be Type 316 stainless steel, ASTM A 276 or A 351. Seat and seals shall be reinforced Teflon. Valves shall have 15100-13 PROCESS VALVES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 F. lever actuators, plastic coated. Valves shall have screwed ends (ANSI B1.20.1) and nonblowout stems. Valves shall be Worcester Series 59, Apollo 86-100 Series, or equal. I I II II II Ii II Ii II II 8. Nut-and-Ferrule Stainless Steel Ball Valves (Straight Pattern), 3/4 Inch and Smaller: Stainless steel ball valves, 3/4 inch and smaller, for water and chemical service shall be straight pattern and rated at a minimum pressure of 2,500 psi at a temperature of 1500F. Adjust valves for an operating pressure of 150 psi at a temperature of 700F. Valve body, ball, stem, side rings, disc rings, and packing bolt shall be Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A 276, A 351, or A 479). Upper and lower packing shall be Teflon. Provide lever actuators with plastic handle. Provide end connections of the nut-and- ferrule type for connection to tubing. Products: Whitey Series 40 or equal. 9. Flanged Stainless Steel Ball Valves 4 Inches and Smaller, Class 150: Stainless steel ball valves 1/2 inch through 4 inches shall have flanged ends, ANSI B16.5, Class 150. Pressure rating shall be at least 250 psi at a temperature of 100oF. Bodies shall be Type 316 stainless steel (ASTM A 351, Type CF8M). Ball, stem, and compression ring shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Bonnet bolting shall be ASTM A 193, Grade B8M. Seats and seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall be Neles-Jamesbury Type 5150 or 7150, McCanna Series F151-S6, Apollo Series 87, or equal. 10. Threaded Stainless Steel Ball V alves, ~ Inch Through 2 Inches: Ii Stainless 'steel ball valves, ~ inch through 2 inches, for carbon dioxide storage and feeding service, shall be rated at a minimum pressure of 1,500 psi WOG at a temperature of 1 OooF. Bodies shall be Type 316 stainless ,steel (ASTM A 351, Type CF8M). Ball, stem, and compression ring shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Seats shall be filled TFE and seals shall be TFE. Valves shall be Neles-Jamesbury type 3636MT, or equal. Ii I II Globe and Angle Valves: 1. Bronze Globe Valves 2 Inches and Smaller: Ii Globe valves, 2 inches and smaller, shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) with screwed ends, union bonnet, inside screw, rising stem, and composition or PTFE disc. Valves shall have a pressure rating of at least 300 psi at a temperature of 1500F. Stem shall be bronze: ASTM B 371 (Alloy C69400), ASTM B 99 (Alloy C65100), or ASTM B 584 (Alloy C87600). Valves shall be Crane No. 7TF, Walworth Figure 3095, Stockham B-22T, or equal. Ii I I I 15100-14 PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. Bronze Angle Hose Valves: Angle-type hose valves of sizes 1-1/2 inches and 2-1/2 inches shall be brass or bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) body with rising or nonrising stem, composition disc, and bronze or malleable iron handwheel. Stem shall be bronze, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 584 (Alloy C83600), or ASTM B 198 (Alloy C87600). Valves shall have a cold-water service pressure rating of at least 150 psi. Provide cap and chain with valve. Threads on the valve outlet shall be American National Standard fire hose coupling screw thread. Valves shall be Nibco T-301-HC, Powell Figure 151 with Figure 527 nipple adapter, Crane 17TF with hose nipple adapter, or equal. 3. Bronze Angle Hose Valves (l-1/2-inch and 2-1/2-inch) with Quick Connect Coupling Adapters (for Nonpotable Water Service): Angle-type hose valves of sizes 1-1/2 and 2-1/2 inches shall have brass or bronze (ASTM B 62 or B 584, Alloy C83600) body with rising or nonrising stem, composition disc, and bronze or malleable iron hand wheel. Stem shall be bronze, ASTM B 62, ASTM B 585 (Alloy C83600), or ASTM B 198 (Alloy C87600). Valve shall have cold-water service pressure rating of at least 150 psi. Threads on valve outlet shall be American National Standard fire hose coupling screw thread (ANSI B1.20.7). Provide atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to ASSE Standard 1011 and IAPMO code and approved by the City. Provide with quick connect female adapter to fit the quick connect male adapter on rubber water hose per specification section 15435. Products: Nibco T-301- HC, Powell Figure 151, Crane 17TF, or equal. 4. Bronze Hose Bibbs: Hose bibbs of size 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584, Alloy C83600) with rising or nonrising stem, composition disc, bronze or malleable iron handwheel, and bronze stem (ASTM B 99, Alloy C65100; ASTM B 371, Alloy C69400; or ASTM B 584, Alloy C87600). Packing shall be Teflon or graphite. Valves shall have a pressure rating of at least 125 psi for cold-water service. Threads on valve outlet shall be American National Standard fire hose coupling screw thread (ANSI B1.20.7). Provide atmospheric vacuum breaker conforming to ASSE Standard 1011 and IAPMO code and approved by the City. Valves shall be Jenkins Figure 112, 113, or 372, Nibco Figure T -l13-HC, Powell Figure 503H, or equal. G. Check Valves: 1. Cast-Iron Swing Check Valves 3 Inches to 12 Inches, Class 125: 15100-15 PROCESS VALVES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Swing check valves, 3 inches to 12 Inches, shall be iron body, bronze mounted, shall be used at the well sites, with the following materials of construction: I I I: 1 I Ii I, 1 I I: I I I I Ii I: Ii I: Ii Description Material Specification Disc or clapper seat ring and Bronze or brass ASTM B 62 or B 584 (Alloy valve body seat ring C84400 or C87600) Body and cap (bonnet) Cast iron ASTM A 126, Class B Disc and hinge or ann Bronze ASTM B 62 or ASTM B 584 (valves 4 inches and smaller) (Alloy C84400) Disc and hinge or ann Cast iron or ASTM A 126, Class B; ASTM (valves larger than 4 inches) bronze B62. Hinge pin Stainless steel Type 303, 304, or 410 stainless Cover bolts and nuts Stainless steel ASTM A 193, Grade B8M; ASTM A 194, Grade 8M Internal fasteners and Bronze or Type accessones 304 or 316 stainless steel Bronze or brass components in contact with water shall comply with the following requirements: Constituent Content Zinc 7% maximum Aluminum 2% maximum Lead 8% maximum Copper + Nickel + Silicon 83% minimum Ends shall be flanged, Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Minimum valve working pressure shall be 150 psi. Provide check valves with outside lever and spnng. The shop drawing submittal shall include a detail showing how the hinge pin extends through the valve body. Show packing gland, hinge pin gland, cap, and other pieces utilized. Valves shall be M&H Style 259, Clow F-5381 or equal. 2. High Service Pump - Surgebuster Swing Check Valves: The valve shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with A WW A C508. Valves shall consist of body, flapper, and bolted cover. Operating pressure shall be at least 250 psi at a temperature of 1500F. Valve seat shall be set at an angle of 35 degrees to the centerline of the pipe. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI B 16.1, Class 125. Body and cover shall be ductile iron (ASTM A 351). The disk shall be molded BUNA-N, ASTM D-2000-BG. The disk accelerator shall be type 302 stainless steel. Interior and exterior lining shall be fusion bonded epoxy. A mechanical 15100-16 PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 indicator shall be provided for each valve. Cover bolts shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Products: Val-Matic Series No. 7200 Surgebuster. 3. PVC Ball Check Valves: PVC check valves, 3 inches and smaller, shall be constructed of PVC per ASTM D 1784, Type I, Grade 1. Ends shall be double union, socket welded. Seats and seals shall be Viton or EPDM. Valve shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi at a temperature of750F. 4. PVC Diaphragm Check Valves 1 Inch and Smaller: PVC diaphragm check valves, 1 inch and smaller, shall be constructed of PVC per ASTM D 1784, Type I, Grade 1. Seats and seals shall be Viton. Provide. a union nut in the valve body, containing the diaphragm seal and seat. Diaphragm shall be EPDM. The design of the valve shall be such that it is normally closed. Flow entering the valve shall open the diaphragm, pushing it off the seat until it rests against an internal stop. If the inlet flow ceases or if backflow occurs, the diaphragm shall reposition itself, closing off the valve seat. Products: Plast-O-Matic Series CKM or equal. 5. CPVC Ball Check Valves: CPVC check valves 3 inches and smaller shall be constructed CPVC per ASTM D 1785, Type IV, Grade 1. Ends shall be double union, socket welded. Seats and seals shall be Viton or EPDM and shall be suitable for the service intended. Valves shall have a pressure rating of 150 psi at a temperature of750F. 6. Stainless Steel Ball Check Valves: Stainless steel back check valves ~ inch through 2 inches shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel body (ASTM A351 - CF8M). The tail piece, guide, and spring shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel. The valves shall have a pressure rating of 400 WOG at a temperature of 1000F. Valves shall be Conbraco Industries, Inc. or equal. 15100-17 PROCESS VALVES H. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 H. Pinch V alves~ I II II Ii II 1. Pinch Valves 1 Inch Through 8 Inches: Pinch valves of sizes 1 inch through 8 inches shall have cast-iron (ASTM A 48, Class 30) bodies with totally enclosed actuators. Sleeves shall be neoprene, Buna-N, or Hypalon. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Valves shall be handwheel operated with upper and lower pinch bars. Valves installed on the end of a pipe shall be provided with a Type 304 stainless steel retaining ring to hold the sleeve end in place. Valves shall be Red Valve Series 75, Flexible Valve Corporation Series 2100, Galligher "SIGMA," or equal. I I: I II II I: Ii II Ii I Ii II I . I Ii 2. Pinch Valves 1 Inch Through 8 Inches With Extension Stems: Pinch valves of sizes 1 inch through 8 inches shall have cast-iron (ASTM A 48, Class 30) bodies with totally enclosed actuators. Sleeves shall be neoprene, Buna-N, or Hypalon. Ends shall be flanged, ANSI B16.1, Class 125. Valves shall have 2-inch-square AWWA operating nuts with extension stem actuators. Valves shall have upper and lower pinch bars. Valves installed on the end of a pipe shall be provided with a Type 304 stainless steel retaining ring to hold the sleeve end in place. Valves shall be Red Valve Series 75, Galligher "SIGMA," or equal. Solenoid Valves: Design and construct solenoid valves such that they can be used in both horizontal and vertical piping. 1 Metallic Solenoid Valves 1-1/2 Inches and Smaller: Solenoid valves of sizes 1/4 inch through 1-1/2 inches for water and air service shall have forged brass (Alloy C23000) or bronze (ASTM B 62) bodies with Teflon main seats. Internal plunger, core tube, plunger spring, and cage assembly shall be stainless steel (Types 302, 304, or 305). Solenoid enclosures shall be NEMA 4, except where explosion-proof is noted in the drawings. Valve actuators shall be 120-volt a-c. Seals shall be Teflon. Valves shall have a maximum operating pressure and a maximum differential pressure of 125 psi. Solenoid valves shall be energized to open or close based on design condition. Valves shall be ASCO "Redhat", Parker Hannifin "Skinner", or equal. 15100-18 PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1 I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 2. Plastic Solenoid Valves 1/4 Inch Through 1 Inch: Solenoid valves of sizes 1/4 inch through 1 inch for water and chemical services shall have CPVC bodies with EPDM seals. Valve bodies shall be of the true union design with threaded end connections with the coil assembly contained in a molded polyester housing. Plunger or core tube shall be Teflon or polypropylene. Solenoid enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. Valve actuators shall be 120 volts a-c. Valves shall have a minimum operating pressure of 120 psi and a maximum differential pressure of 25 psi on either side of the valve, with the valve in the closed position. Solenoid valves shall be energized to open. Products: Hayward or equal. I. Pet Cocks and Drain Cocks: 1. Pet Cocks 1/2 Inch and Smaller: Pet cocks shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62) or brass (ASTM B 16), rated at 125 psi. Provide lever or tee handle operator. Pet cocks shall be Crane Figure 724, Lunkenheimer Figure 478 or 479, or equal. 3. Type 101O-Drain Cocks 1/2 Inch and Smaller: Drain cocks shall be all bronze (ASTM B 62) or brass (ASTM B 16), rated at 125 psi. Provide lever or tee handle operator. Drain cocks shall be Crane Figure 702, Lunkenheimer Figure 476 or 980, or equal. J. Mud Valves: 1. Mud Valves 4 Inches through 24 Inches: Mud valves shall be rising stem with flanged end, unless otherwise shown in the drawings. Materials of construction shall be as follows: Component Material Specification Body Cast iron ASTM A 48 or A 126 Stem, nut, disc ring, and Bronze ASTM B 62 or B 584, Alloy seat ring C83600 Extension stem Stainless steel AISI Type 316 Provide extension stem, stem guides, and A WW A operating nut. Mud valves shall be C10w Figure F-3088, Waterman Industries, or equal. K. Vacuum Breakers: 1. PVC Vacuum Breaker Valves, 1 Inch and Smaller: 15100-19 PROCESS VALVES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Ii Vacuum breaker valves shall have PVC body and EPDM diaphragm and seals. The diaphragm shall unseat at 2-inch Hg vacuum and allow air to enter the system at 80 scfm. End shall be threaded or socket welded. Vacuum breaker valve shall be Plast-O-Matic Series VBM, Ryan Herco, Harrington Industrial Plastics, or equal. II L. Electric Actuators: II II II II Ii Ii I' Valves indicated on the drawings with electric actuators, shall have the following features and controls: 1. "Remote" mode. Valve operation is controlled in response to a 4-20 inA signal from plant SCADA system. 2. "Local" mode. Valve can be opened or closed based on open, close, stop pushbuttons or actuator. 3. "Off' mode. Valve will not operate in the remote or local mode. The valve actuator shall be capable of completely opening or closing the valve at a minimum rate of 60 seconds in response to "open" and "close" pushbutton operation and remote "open" and "close" contact closures at peak flow and maximum unseating head conditions. The maximum torque and thrust required to meet these performance requirements shall be determined by the gate manufacturer, based on these specifications and drawings. The lift mechanism must be capable of withstanding, without damage, an effort of up to 200 pounds. The valve actuator manufacturer shall coordinate specific model selection with torque and thrust requirements. , II Ii II Self Locking Feature - The actuator gearing and! or stem threading shall be self- locking. II Manual Operation - A metallic handwheel shall be provided for manual operation with an arrow to indicate "open" rotation. The handwheel shall not rotate during motor operation. A fused motor shall not prevent manual operation. When in the manual operating mode, the actuator will remain in this mode until the motor is energized, at which time the actuator will automatically return to electric operation. Movement from motor operation to handwheel operation shall be accomplished by a positive padlockable declutch lever, which mechanically disengages the motor and related gearing. It shall be impossible for simultaneous manual and motor operation to occur. Friction type declutch mechanism is not acceptable. Maximum effort required to open or close the gate shall not exceed 40 pounds pull on the handwheel. I I I I I I Position Limit Switches - The actuator shall be capable of transmitting a position- indicating signal to indicate percent valve is open or closed. 15100-20 PROCESS VALVES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Torque Switch - Each valve actuator shall be equipped with a switch that will interrupt the control circuit in both the opening and closing directions when torque overload occurs. The valve actuator motor and all electrical enclosures shall be NEMA 4. Motor shall be 3 hp maximum. The motor shall be suitable for operation on three phase, 60 Hertz, 480 volt current. The motor shall be specifically designed for gate actuator service and shall be of high starting torque, totally enclosed, non- ventilated construction. Motor insulation shall be a minimum NEMA' Class F, with a maximum continuous temperature rating of 155 degrees C (rise plus ambient) for the duty cycle specified. The motor shall be of sufficient size to open or close the valve at the maximum stated torque. The motor shall be capable of operating at plus or minus 10% of specified voltage. The motor duty rating shall be sufficient for one complete cycle (open-close-open; or reverse) without exceeding its temperature rating. Motor bearings shall be of the anti-friction type, and permanently lubricated. Space heaters are not acceptable. Gearbox shall be oil-filled; grease is not acceptable. Actuator shall not be non-intrusive and shall be commissioned without removing covers. The motor shall be an independent sub-assembly such that the power gearing shall not be an integral part of the motor assembly, to allow for motor or gear changes dictated by system operation requirements. The motor shall be equipped with internal thermal contacts to protect against motor overload. Actuator shall provide a battery backup in case of power loss to allow operation of display panel. "Open/Close/Stop" pushbuttons shall be provided at the actuator. A padlockable "Local/Off/Remote" witch shall be provided at the actuator. In the "Local" position, the actuator shall be controlled by the "Open/Close/Stop" pushbuttons. In the "Remote" position, the actuator shall open or close or be set at a partially open position by plant SCADA system. The actuator shall have a contact closure indicating that the "Local/Remote" switch is in the "Remote" position. The motorized valve actuators shall be tested to demonstrate that the system has been properly installed and meets the performance requirements specified herein. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years experience manufacturing the proposed actuator. Actuators shall be as manufactured by the following, or approved equal: Rotork, Inc, Rochester, New York. Limitorque, Lynchburg, Virginia. ElM, Inc, Missouri City, Texas PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 JOINTS A. Bolt holes of flanged valves shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines of the pipe run to which the valves are attached. Clean flanges by wire brushing before installing flanged valves. Clean flange bolts and nuts by wire brushing, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-21 PROCESS VALVES lubricate threads with oil and graphite, and tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, reseat or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest the joints. Joints shall be watertight. B. Clean threaded joints by wire brushing or swabbing. Apply Teflon joint compound or Teflon tape to pipe threads before installing threaded valves. Joints shall be watertight. C. Install lug-type valves with separate hex head machine bolts at each bolt hole and each flange (two bolts per valve bolt hole). D. Install grooved-end couplings for valves in accordance with Section 15050. 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED VALVES: A. Unless otherwise indicated in the drawings, install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches or less above the floor with their operating stems vertical. Install valves in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations between 4 feet 6 inches and 6 feet 9 inches above the floor with their operating stems horizontal. B. Install valves on vertical runs of pipe that are next to walls with their stems horizontal, away from the wall. Valves on vertical runs of pipe that are not located next to walls shall be installed with their stems horizontal, oriented to facilitate valve operation. 3.03 INSTALLING BURIED VALVES A. Connect the valve, coat the flanges, apply tape wrapping or polyethylene encasement, and place and compact the backfill to the height of the valve stem. B. Place block pads under the extension pipe to maintain the valve box vertical during backfilling and repaving and to prevent the extension'pipe from contacting the valve bonnet. C. Mount the upper slip pipe of the extension in midposition and secure with backfill around the extension pipe. Pour the concrete ring allowing a depression so the valve box cap will be flush with the pavement surface. D. In streets without concrete curbs and in open areas, install the valve box as for a paved area with concrete curb except include a marker post. Cut the marker post from 4-inch by 4-inch dense structural grade Douglas fir No.2 or Southern Pine No.2 surfaced on four sides to a length of 5 feet. Chamfer the top. Set the post in concrete, 2 feet into the ground, away from traffic, and to the side of the pipeline. Coat with a seal and finish coat of white alkyd exterior paint. On the side facing the valve, letter in black the word "V AL VE" and the distance in feet from the marker post to the valve box cap. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-22 PROCESS VALVES I ., I II I II II II Ii I I I I II Ii I II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. Install debris cap as close as possible under the cast-iron cover without interfering with the cover operation. Trim flexible skirt to provide a smooth contact with the interior or the extension pipe. 3.04 FIELD COATING BURIED VALVES: A. Coat flanges of buried valves and the flanges of the adjacent piping, and the bolts and nuts of flanges and mechanical joints, per Section 09901, System No. 24. B. Wrap buried metal valves 6 inches and larger with polyethylene sheet in two layers of polyethylene conforming to A WW A C105, 8 mils in thickness each. Pass the two sheets of polyethylene under the valve and the coated flanges or joints with the connecting pipe and draw the sheets around the valve body, the valve bonnet, and the connecting pipe. Secure the sheets with plastic adhesive tape about the valve stem below the operating nut and about the barrel of the connecting pipe to prevent the entrance of soil. Fold overlaps twice and tape. Backfill the valve with care to avoid damaging the polyethylene. 3 .05 INSTALLING ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES: A. Install such that the rotation of the plug is about a horizontal axis. B. Install such that the plug stores in the top when the valve is open. C. Orient the valve such that the seat is opposite the high-pressure side. 3 .06 INSTALLING EXTENSION STEM GUIDE BRACKETS: A. Install at 6- to 8-foot centers. Provide at least two support brackets for stems longer than 10 feet, with one support near the bottom of the stem and one near the top. 3.07 MOUNTING GEAR ACTUATORS: A. The valve manufacturer shall select and mount the gear actuator and accessories on each valve and stroke the valve from fully open to fully closed prior to shipment. 3.08 FIELD INSTALLATION OF GEAR ACTUATOR: A. Provide the actuator manufacturer's recommended lubricating oil in each actuator before commencing the field testing. 3.09 VALVE LEAKAGE TESTING: A. Test valves for leakage at the same time that the connecting pipelines are tested. See Section 15144 for pressure testing requirements. Protect or isolate any parts 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15100-23 PROCESS VALVES of valves, actuators, or control and instrumentation systems whose pressure rating is less than the pressure test. Valves shall show zero leakage. Repair or replace any leaking valves and retest. 3.10 VALVE FIELD TESTING: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Operate manual valves through three full cycles of opening and closing. Valves shall operate from full open to full close without sticking or binding. Do not backfill buried valves until after verifying that valves operate from full open to full closed. If valves stick or bind, or do not operate from full open to full closed, repair or replace the valve and repeat the tests. B. Gear actuators shall operate valves from full open to full close through three cycles without binding or sticking. The pull required to operate handwheel- or chainwheel-operated valves shall not exceed 80 pounds. The torque required to operate valves having 2-inch A WW A nuts shall not exceed 150 ft-Ibs. If actuators stick or bind or if pulling forces and torques exceed the values stated previously, repair or replace the actuators and repeat the tests. Operators shall be fully lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to operating. END OF SECTION 15100-24 PROCESS VALVES I II 11 II Ii II Ii II II II II Ii I' II II II If II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I' I I I I I I SECTION 15101 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED These specifications cover the pipe, fittings, and accessory items used for process pipe reclaimed water distribution systems. Pipe used for reclaimed water distribution systems shall be ductile iron pipe (DIP), minimum Pressure Class 150. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all materials furnished and storage of same, until the date of substantial completion. The CONTRACTOR shall replace, at his expense, all materials found to be defective or damaged in handling and storage. The CONTRACTOR shall, if requested by the CITY ENGINEER or designee, furnish certificates, affidavits of compliance, test reports, or samples for check analysis for any of the materials specified herein. All pipe delivered to the project site for installation is subject to random testing for compliance with the designated specifications. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification section listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Contractor submittals shall include at least the following: A. The Contractor shall provide submittals in accordance with Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance. B. The Contractor shall transmit (from the related Vendor) for submittal to the Engineer, within 10 days after receipt of individual Notice to Proceed, a list of materials to be furnished, the names of the suppliers and the appropriate shop drawings for all ductile iron pipe and fittings. C. All ductile iron pipe and fittings to be installed under this Contract shall be inspected and tested at the foundry where the material for this project is manufactured. Submit sworn certificates of such tests and their results. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15101-1 F. D. E. G. In addition, all ductile iron pipe and fittings to be furnished under this Contract may be inspected at the foundry for compliance with these Specifications by an independent testing laboratory approved by the Owner. The manufacturer's cooperation shall be required in these inspections. The cost offoundry inspection of all pipe approved for this Contract, plus the cost of inspection of a reasonable amount of the disapproved pipe, will be borne by the ductile iron piping manufacturer. Shop Drawings including layout drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall include dimensioning, methods and locations of supports and all other pertinent technical specifications for all piping to be furnished. The Contractor shall submit the pipe manufacturer's certification of compliance with the applicable sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall coordinate all submittals with the ductile iron plpmg manufacturer in a manner not to impede construction on individual projects. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Quality Control: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Shop Tests: Test materials listed below at the shop or plant of the producer. Upon demand of the Engineer the manufacturer shall perform such additional tests, in accordance with ANSI A21.51, as the Engineer may deem necessary to establish the quality of the material offered for use. 2. Laboratory Tests: The Engineer reserves the right to require that laboratory tests be conducted on materials that are shop tested. The manufacturer shall furnish without compensation, labor, materials, and equipment necessary for collecting, packaging, and identifying representative samples of materials to be tested and the shipping of such samples to the Testing Laboratory. 3. All materials shall be new and have a manufacturer's certificate verifying compliance with all tests and inspections as required herein. The weight, class, and casting period shall be shown on each piece of pipe. The manufacturer's "mark," the year produced, and the word "Ductile" or letters "DI" shall be cast or stamped on all pipe. All fittings furnished by the approved manufacturer( s) shall be cast and machined at one foundry location to ensure quality control and provide satisfactory test data. 4. All tests required by A WW A C 151-76 shall be performed by the manufacturer and records of all such tests shall be retained for one year and shall be available to the Owner upon request. 15101-2 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITIINGS I; II II II Ii II I: Ii I II I I I II Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE All ductile iron pipe with a nominal diameter four inches (4") through fifty four inches (54 ") shall conform to ANSI! A WW A A21.51/C 151. A minimum Pressure Class 150 pipe shall be supplied for all sizes of pipe unless specifically called out in the drawings or required by the CITY ENGINEER or designee. 2.02 JOINTS Joints for ductile iron pipe and fittingjoints shall be push on or mechanical joints conforming to ANSI! A WW A A21.11 /C 111. Where called for in the plans, restrained or flanged joints shall be provided. Flanged joints shall conform to ANSI Standard B 16.1 - 125 lb. Restrainedjoints shall conform to Sections 34.3 and 34.4. 2.03 FITTINGS Any fittings required shall be mechanical joint ductile iron or gray iron conforming to ANSI!A WWA A21.10/C110, 150 psi minimum pressure rating, or ductile iron compact fittings four inches (4") through twelve inches (12") in accordance with ANSI! A WW A A 21.53/C153. 2.04 BOLTS A. Class 125 FF Flanges Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade A hex head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A hex head nuts. B. Class 250 RF Flanges Carbon steel, ASTM A307, Grade B hex head bolts and ASTM A563, Grade A heavy hex head nuts. 2.05 GASKETS Gaskets shall conform to ANSI A21.11 and be made for viton (fluorocarbon elastomer), EPDM (ethylene propylene diene monomer) or SBR (styrene-butadiene rubber). 2.06 LUBRICANT Lubricant for joints shall be manufacturer's standard. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FI1TINGS 15101-3 2.07 COATING AND LININGS A. Reclaimed Water Pipe - Where ductile iron pipe and fittings are to be below ground or installed in a casing pipe, the coating shall be a minimum 1.0 mil thick in accordance with ANSI A21.51. Where ductile iron pipe and fittings are to be installed above ground, pipe, fittings, and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one (1) field coat (minimum 1.5 mils dry thickness) of rust inhibitor primer. Intermediate and finish field coats of alkyd shall also be applied by the CONTRACTOR (minimum 1.5 mil dry thickness each coat). Primer and field coats shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. Final field coat shall be purple. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have an interior protective lining of cement mortar and bituminous sealed in accordance with ANSI Standard A21.4. B. Sanitary Sewer Pipe - Where ductile iron pipe and fittings are to be below ground or installed in a casing pipe the coating shall be a minimum 1.0 mil thick in accordance with ANSI! A WW A A21.51/C 151. Where ductile iron pipe and fittings are to be installed above ground, pipe, fittings and valves shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one field coat (minimum 1.5 mils dry thickness) of rush inhibitor primer. Intermediate and fInished field coats of Alkyd shall also be applied by the CONTRACTOR (minimum 1.5 mils dry thickness each coat). Primer and field coats shall be compatible and shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Final field coat color shall be green for raw wastewater. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall have'an interior protective lining of Pro tecto 401, Permite or approved equal with a minimum dry thickness of 40 mils applied by the pipe manufacturer. 2.08 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT The pipe shall be polyethylene encased (8 mil) where shown on the drawings or required by the Owner or designee in accordance with ANSI! A WW A A21.51/C 1 05. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING PIPE Care shall be taken not to damage the Protecto 401 lining when handling the pipe. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15101-4 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS II II Ii Ii II II II II I II II II II Ii II Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 CUTTING PIPE Cut pipe with milling type cutter, rolling pipe cutter, or abrasive saw cutter. Do not flame cut. 3.03 DRESSING CUT ENDS A. Dress cut ends of pipe in accordance with the type of joint to be made. B. Dress cut ends of buried pipe joints to remove sharp edges orprojections which may damage the rubber gasket. C. Dress cut ends of push-on joint pipe by beveling, as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. D. Dress cut ends of pipe for flexible couplings, and flanged coupling adapters, recommended by the coupling or adapter manufacturer. 3.04 FABRICATION OF FLANGED PIPE Flanged pipe shall be fabricated in the shop, not in the field, and delivered to the jobsite with flanges in place and properly faced. Threaded flanges shall be individually fitted and machine tightened on matching threaded pipe by the manufacturer. Flanges shall be faced after fabrication in accordance with ANSI A21.15/ A WW A C 115. 3.05 JOINTING PIPE A. Flanged Prior to connecting flanged pipe, the faces of the flanges shall be thoroughly cleaned of all oil, grease, and foreign material. The rubber gaskets shall be checked for proper fit and thoroughly cleaned. Care shall be taken to assure proper sealing of the flange gasket. Bolts shall be tightened so that the pressure on the gasket is uniform. Torque-limiting wrenches shall be used to ensure uniform bearing insofar as possible. If joints leak when the hydrostatic test is applied, the gaskets shall be removed and reset and bolts retightened. B. Mechanical and Push-On Joint Joint pipe with mechanical and push-on type joints in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide all special tools and devices, such as special jacks, chokers, and similar items required for proper installation. Lubricant for the pipe gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer, and no substitutes will be permitted under any circumstance. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15101-5 II 3.06 TESTING II All lines shall be tested at the pressures listed in the Piping Schedule and by the procedure listed therein. Test procedures shall be as specified in Section 15144 - Pressure Testing for Piping. II END OF SECTION II II II I Ii Ii II II I II II II I: Ii II 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15101-6 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15103 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section includes materials, installation, and testing of PVC pipe and fittings for use in process piping having a maximum design pressure of 150 psi and having a maximum design temperature of 1 050F. B. All buried PVC pipe shall be laid with an accompanying dual # 14 gauge copper wire with a suitable for burial service blue electrical insulation for potable water pipe and purple electrical insulation for reclaimed water pipe installed above the pipe in a continuously conductive run from test station to test station, to facilitate future location of the main. The installation shall comply with standard detail shown in Section In of these specifications. C. All PVC pressure pipes, upon delivery to the site until such time as it is placed in the trench, shall be shielded from the weather and direct sun light to prevent pipe deterioration. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS D. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING E. Section 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL F. Section 15064 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS G. Section 15075 - PROCESS EQUIPMENT, PIPING, AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION H. Section 15100 - PROCESS VALVES 1.03 REFERENCES The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 03720-022-01 October, 2007 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15103-1 B. 1. ASTM D1784: Standard Specification for Rigid PVC Compounds and CWorinated PVC Compounds. ASTM D2837: Standard Test Method for Obtaining Hydrostatic Design Basis for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials ASTM D3034: Sewer Pipe Short Form Specification ASTM D3139: Standard Specification for Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM F477: Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe ASTM F1417: Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure Air 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. American Water Works Association (A WW A) 1. AWWA C605: Standard for Underground Installation of PVC Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water C. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) 1. 2. NSF14: Plastic Piping System Components and Related Materials NSF61: Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects 1.04 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Contractor shall include at least the following in submittals: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340 and the following. 2. Submit materials list showing materials of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and grade. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced standards, e.g., ASTM D 1784, D 1785, and D 2467. Show wall thickness of pipe and fittings. Show fitting dimensions. 3. Submit data sheets for solvent cement and demonstrating compliance with ASTM D 2564 and F 656. 4. Submit data sheets showing that the pipe and fittings are ANSI/NSF 61 listed for use in potable water service and that the pipe will bear the NSF logo for potable water use. 15103-2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS I II Ii II II II I Ii Ii Ii II I II Ii II I: II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PIPE A. Pipe shall be Schedule 80, Type I, Grade 1 (Class 12454-B), conforming to ASTM D 1784 and D 1785. B. Pipe shall bear the NSF61 logo when used for potable water. 2.02 FITTINGS A. Fittings shall be Schedule 80 and shall conform to ASTM D 2464 for threaded fittings and ASTM D 2467 for socket-type fittings. B. PVC fittings shall be Schedule 80 conforming to ASTM D-2464 and D-2466 or latest revision thereof. (Threaded IPS nipples and plugs only.) C. Nipples bushings couplings, bends and caps shall be made from Schedule 80 PVC unless shown differently on the Contract Drawings. 2.03 FLANGES A. PVC flanges shall be of the one-piece solid socket design and shall be made of the same material as the pipe. Pressure rating shall be at least 150 psi at a temperature of 730F. Minimum burst pressure shall be 500 psi. Flanges shall match the dimensions of ANSI B16.5, Class 150, steel flanges for outside diameter, bolt circle, and bolt holes. Do not use Van Stone flanges. 2.04 UNIONS A. Unions shall have socket-type ends, Viton O-rings, and shall be Schedule 80. Material shall be Type I, Grade 1 PVC, per ASTM D 1784. 2.05 JOINTS A. Pipe and fitting joints shall be socket welded except where threaded and flanged joints are required to connect to valves and equipment. 2.06 SOLVENT CEMENT IN OTHER THAN CHEMICAL AND CHEMICAL CARRIER WATER SERVICE A. Solvent cement for socket joints shall comply with ASTM D 2564 and F 656. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15103-3 2.07 SOLVENT CEMENT IN CHEMICAL AND CHEMICAL CARRIER WATER SERVICE A. Solvent cement shall be free of silica. Products: IPS "Weld-On 724" or Oatey "Lo V.O.C. PVC Heavy Duty Gray." B. Sodium Hypochlorite PVC lines shall use IPS Weldon CPVC 724 or IPS EZ Weldon Wet'RDry PVC 725 2.08 GASKETS FOR FLANGES A. See Section 15060. 2.09 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES A. See Section 15060. 2.10 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. See Section 15060. 2.11 WYE STRAINERS A. PVC wye strainers shall be manufactured of the same material as the pipe, with 30-mesh screens and Viton seals. Connecting ends shall be the socket type, solvent welded. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not install PVC pipe when the temperature is below 400F or above 90oF. Store loose pipes on racks with a maximum support spacing of 3 feet. Provide shades for pipe stored outdoors or installed outdoors until the pipe is filled with water. B. Store fittings indoors in their original cartons. C. Store solvent cement indoors or, if outdoors, shade from direct sunlight exposure. Do not use solvent cements that have exceeded the shelf life marked on the storage container. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15103-4 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (pVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS I II Ii Ii II II I Ii II II II II I I II Ii Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.02 03720-022-01 October, 2007 D. Before installation, check pipe and fittings for cuts, scratches, gouges, buckling, kinking, or splitting on pipe ends. Remove any pipe section containing defects by cutting out the damaged section of pipe. E. Do not drag PVC pipe over the ground, drop it onto the ground, or drop objects on it. SOLVENT-WELDED JOINTS A. Before solvent welding, remove fittings and couplings from their cartons and expose them to the air at the same temperature conditions as the pipe for at least one hour. B. Cut pipe ends square and remove all burrs, chips,.and filings before joining pipe or fittings. Bevel solvent-welded pipe ends as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. C. Wipe away loose dirt and moisture from the inside and outside of the pipe end and the inside of the fitting before applying solvent cement. Clean the surfaces of both pipes and fittings that are to be solvent welded with a clean cloth moistened with acetone or methylethyl ketone. Do not apply solvent cement to wet surfaces. D. The pipe and fitting socket shall have an interference fit. The diametrical clearance between pipe and entrance of the fitting socket shall not exceed 0.04 inch. Check the fit at every joint before applying solvent cement. E. Make up solvent-welded joints per ASTM D 2855. Application of cement to both surfaces to be joined and assembly of these surfaces shall produce a continuous bond between them with visual evidence of cement at least flush with the outer end of the fitting bore around the entire circumference. F. Allow at least eight hours of drying time before moving solvent-welded joints or subjecting the joints to any internal or external loads or pressures. G. Acceptance criteria for solvent-welded joints shall be as follows: 1. Unfilled Areas in Joint: None permitted. 2. Unbonded Areas in Joint: None permitted. 3. Protrusion of Material into Pipe Bore, Percent of Pipe Wall Thickness: Cement, 50%. 15103-5 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 3.03 FLANGED JOINTS A. Lubricate carbon steel bolt threads with graphite and oil before installation. B. Tighten bolts on PVC flanges by tightening the nuts diametrically opposite each other using a torque wrench. Complete tightening shall be accomplished in stages and the final torque values shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. See Section 15060. 3.05 THREADED JOINTS A. Cut threaded ends on PVC to the dimensions of ANSI B1.20.1. Ends shall be square cut. Follow the pipe manufacturer's recommendations regarding pipe hold-down methods, saw cutting blade size, and saw cutting speed. B. Pipe or tubing cutters shall be specifically designed for use on PVC pipe. Use cutters manufactured by Reed Manufacturing Company, Ridge Tool Company, or equal. C. If a hold-down vise is used when the pipe is cut, insert a rubber sheet between the vise jaws and the pipe to avoid scratching the pipe. D. Thread cutting dies shall be clean and sharp and shall not be used to cut materials other than plastic. II II II II II II Ii II II Ii I Ii E. Apply Teflon@ thread compound or Teflon@ tape lubricant to threads before I screwing on the fitting. 3.06 INSTALLING UNIONS A. Provide unions on exposed piping 3 inches and smaller as follows: 1. At every change in direction (horizontal and vertical). 2. Six to 12 inches downstream of valves. 3. Every 40 feet in straight pipe runs. 4. Where, shown in the Drawings. 3.07 INSTALLING BURIED PIPE A. Install in accordance with Section 02225 and as follows. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15103-6 II II II II Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.08 3.09 3.10 3.11 03720-022-01 October, 2007 B. Trench bottom shall be continuous, smooth, and free of rocks. See the details in the Drawings for trench dimensions, pipe bedding, and backfill. C. After the pipe has been solvent-welded and the joints have set, snake the pipe in the trench according to the pipe manufacturer's recommendations in order to allow for thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe. D. Do not backfill the pipe trench until the solvent-welded joints have set. Support the pipe uniformly and continuously over its entire length on firm, stable soil. Do not use blocking to change pipe grade or to support pipe in the trench. E. Install buried PVC pipe in accordance with ASTM D 2774 and the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Backfill materials in the pipe zone shall be imported sand as specified in Section 02225. If water flooding is used, do not add successive layers unless the previous layer is compacted to 90% relative compaction. INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING A. See Section 15060 and Section 15064. B. Fill empty piping with water, provide temporary shading, or use other means to keep the surface temperature of the pipe below 1 OooF. PAINTING AND COATING A. Coat piping that is exposed to sunlight as specified Section 09901, System No. 41 or 42. PIPE LABELS AND COLOR CODING A. Label and color code exposed piping and piping located inside concrete pipe trenches with flow stream identification labels and banding in accordance with Sections 09901, 09902, and 15075 and the Piping Schedule on the drawings. HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Perform hydrostatic testing for leakage in accordance with Section 15144. END OF SECTION 15103-7 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15104 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section covers the work necessary to furnish, install, and complete the stainless steel pipe and fittings specified herein, and as specified further in Section 15060, Piping Systems - General B. This section includes materials and installation of stainless steel pipe and fittings 30 inches in diameter and smaller conforming to ASTM A 312 and having a maximum design pressure of 200 psi. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification section listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITI ALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS E. Section 09902 - PIPE AND EQUIPMENT PAINTING F. Section 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS - GENERAL G. Section 15063 - WALL PIPES, SEEP RINGS, AND PENETRATIONS H. Section 15064 - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1.03 SUBMITI ALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Contractor submittals shall include at least the following: 1. Shop drawings in accordance with the General Conditions, Section 01340, and the following. 2. Submit materials list showing material of pipe and fittings with ASTM reference and grade. Submit manufacturer's certification of compliance with referenced standards, e.g., ASTM A 53, A 135, A 587, A WW A C200. Show piping service (fuel oil, gasoline, water, air, etc.). 3. For piping 6 inches and larger, submit piping layout drawings showing location and dimensions of pipe and fittings. Include laying lengths of 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104--1 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS valves, meters, in-line pumps, and other equipment determining piping dimensions. Label or number each fitting or piece of pipe and provide the following information for each item: a. Material of construction, with ASTM or API reference and grade. b. Wall thickness of steel cylinder. c. Manufacturer's certificates of compliance with referenced pipe standards, e.g., ASTM A 53, ASTM A 135, API 5L, A WW A C200. d. Show weld sizes and dimensions of grooved-end collars, flanges, reinforcing collars, wrapper plates, and crotch plates. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 PIPE A. Pipe smaller than 3 inches shall conform to ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304L. Pipe 3 inches and larger shall conform to ASTM A 312, Grade TP 304L. B. Pipe sizes and wall thicknesses shall conform to ANSI B36.19 as follows: Pipe Size Wall Thickness 1 inch and smaller Schedule 80S 1-1/4 inches through 3 inches Schedule 80S 3-1/2 inches through 12 inches Schedule 40S 14 inches through 30 inches Schedule 10S 2.02 FITTINGS A. B. C. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Fittings 3 inches and smaller shall be threaded forged, 1,000-pound CWP, ASTM A182/A182M Rev C Grade F304L. Material for threaded forged fittings shall conform to ASTM A 182, Grade F304L. Fittings for buried or submerged pipe larger than 3 inches through 30 inches shall be butt-welded, conforming to ASTM A 403, Class WP or ASTM A 774, the same material and wall thickness as the pipe, conforming to ANSI B16.9. Elbows shall be long radius. Fittings for aboveground or exposed pipe larger than 3 inches through 30 inches shall be butt-welded or flanged, conforming to ASTM A 403, Class WP or ASTM A 774, the same material and wall thickness as the pipe, conforming to ANSI B16.9. Elbows shall be long radius. 15104-2 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Ii Ii II I Ii II Ii Ii II Ii Ii II I Ii II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.03 PICKLING, PASSIVATING, AND FINAL CLEANING A. Pipe and fittings shall be final cleaned, pickled, and passivated in accordance with ASTM A 380. Passivation shall be the removal of exogenous (not inherent in the base metal) iron or iron compounds from the surface of the stainless steel by means of a chemical dissolution, by a treatment with an acid solution that will completely remove the surface contamination but will not significantly affect the stainless steel itself. After fmal cleaning, wet surfaces with water and inspect for rust spots after 24 hours. Reclean if there is any evidence of rusting. 2.04 QUALITY CONTROL A. Include the "Hydrostatic Test" and "Flattening Test" requirements described in ASTM A 530. 2.05 PROTECTIVE END CAPS A. Provide protective end caps on each piece of pipe or fabricated section, completely sealing the piece from contamination during shipment and storage. Provide the same type of seals on each fitting or ship and store fittings in sealed boxes or containers. 2.06 UNIONS A. Unions shall be 3,000-pound WOG forged stainless steel, with dimensions conforming to MSS SP-83. Ends shall be socket-welded type. Material shall conform to ASTM A 182, Grade F304L for socket-welded type. 2.07 JOINTS A. Joints for pipes 3 inches and smaller shall be socket welded, the same material as specified for fittings, 3,000-pound WOG, conforming to ANSI B16.11. B. Joints for buried or submerged pipe larger than 3 inches shall be butt-welded. C. Joints for aboveground or exposed pipe larger than 3 inches shall be grooved end or flanged or butt-welded. Grooved-end joints for piping 24 inches and smaller shall be of the roll-grooved type. D. Provide plain-end pipe where flexible pipe couplings are to be provided. Provide lugs for thrust harnesses where shown in the Drawings, as specified in Section 15122. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104-3 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS E. Where piping connects to wall pipes, meters, valves, or other equipment, the pipe ends shall match the ends of the wall pipes, meters, valves, or equipment. 2.08 OUTLETS AND NOZZLES A. Outlets of size 3 inches and smaller in piping 4 inches and larger shall be of the Thredolet type, in accordance with MSS SP-97 and A WW A Manual MIl (1989 edition), Figure 13-23. Outlets shall be 3,000-pound WOG stainless steel in accordance with ASTM A 182, Grade F304L F316L or ASTM A 403, Grade WP304L WP316L. Threads shall comply with ANSI B1.20.1. Outlets shall be Bonney Forge Co. "Thredolet," Allied Piping Products Co. "BrancWet," or equal. B. Alternatively, threaded openings not less than 2 inches or more than 3 inches in nominal size shall be a flat-bottom half-coupling conforming to ANSI B 16.11, Class 3000. Where the mounting surface is curved to a diameter of 36 inches or less, the mounting diameter shall be the same as that of the surface upon which it is to be mounted. Forge the threaded outlet and its plug from steel conforming to ASTMA 105 or ASTM A 181, Class 70. C. For outlets 3 inches and smaller in piping smaller than 4 inches, use a tee with a threaded outlet. D. For outlets larger than 3 inches, use a tee with a flanged outlet. 2.09 GROOVED-END COUPLINGS A. Grooved-end couplings for piping 24 inches and smaller shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Couplings shall be flexible type, square-cut grooved, per A WW A C606. Couplings shall be Victaulic Style 77-S, Gustin-Bacon Figure 100, or equal. B. Gaskets shall be CPDM and shall conform to ASTM D 2000. C. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A 193, GradeB8M, Class 2. Bolts in buried or submerged service shall be ASTM A 193, Grade B8M, Class 2. D. Couplings for connecting to grooved-end valves shall be Victaulic Style 75 to match the valve ends. E. Grooved-end adapter flanges for pipe 18 inches and smaller having a maximum test pressure of 200 psi shall comply with ANSI B 16.1, Class 125 dimensions. Flanges shall be Victaulic Style 741 or 742, Gustin-Bacon Figure 154, or equal. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104-4 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Ii II Ii Ii II II II Ii I Ii Ii II Ii II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.10 THREAD LUBRICANT A. Use Teflon thread lubricating compound or Teflon tape. 2.11 FLANGES A. Provide weld-neck flanges (conforming to ANSI B16.5) for piping 3 inches and smaller to connect to flanged valves, fittings, or equipment. Provide weld-neck or Van Stone flanges (per ASTM F 2015) for piping larger than 3 inches. Flanges shall be Class 150 per ANSI B16.5. Flanges shall match the connecting flanges on the adjacent fitting, valve, or piece of equipment. Flanges shall be flat face. B. Material for weld-neck flanges shall conform to ASTM A 182, Grade F304L. C. Material for Van Stone flanges shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM A3 51, Grade CF8M. 2.12 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES A. Forged flanges: Type 304 stainless steel, ASTM A320/A320M Grade B8M hex head bolts and ASTM A194/A194M Grade 8M hex head nuts. For additional information, see Section 15060. 2.13 LUBRICANT FOR STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. Lubricant for joints shall be Teflon tape or manufacturer's standard. For additional information see Section 15060. 2.14 GASKETS FOR FLANGES A. Gaskets for all flanges, flanged service: lI8-inch thick, unless otherwise specified, homogeneous black rubber (EPDM), hardness 60 (Shore A), rated to 300 degrees F., conforming to ANSI B16.21 and ASTM D1330 Steam Grade. Blind flanges shall be gasketed covering the entire inside face with the gasket cemented to the blind flange. For additional information see Section 15060. 2.15 WYE STRAINERS A. Strainers 2 inches and smaller shall be stainless steel, wye pattern, with minimum pressure rating of 300-psi WOG. Material shall conform to ASTM A 351 or A 743, Grade CF8M. Screen shall be 20 mesh and the same material as the str~ner. Provide pet cock of the same material as the strainer body in the blowoff connection. Ends shall be threaded conforming to ANSI B1.20.1. Provide one 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104-5 ST AlNLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS II spare screen for each strainer. Strainers shall be Sarco Type 316, Muessco No. 861, or equal. II PART 3 EXECUTION Ii A. II II II 3.01 FABRICATION, ASSEMBLY, AND ERECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Beveled ends for butt-welding shall conform to ANSI B16.25. Remove slag by chipping or grinding. Surfaces shall be clean of paint, oil, rust, scale, slag, and other material detrimental to welding. When welding the reverse side, chip out slag before welding. B. Fabrication shall comply with ANSI B31.3, Chapter V. Welding procedure and performance qualifications shall be in accordance with Section IX, Articles II and III, respectively, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. II C. II The minimum number of passes for welded joints shall be as follows: Steel Cylinder Thickness Minimum Number of Passes (inch) for Welds Less than 0.1875 1 0.1875 through 0.25 2 Greater than 0.25 3 II II II ! II I Ii II Ii II I . I II Welds shall be full penetration. D. Use the shielded metal arc welding (SMA W) submerged arc welding (SAW), flux-cored arc welding (FCA W), or gas-metal arc welding (GMA W) process for shop welding. Use the SMA W process for field welding. E. Welding preparation shall comply with ANSI B31.3, paragraph 328.4. Limitations on imperfections in welds shall conform to the requirements in ANSI B31.3, Table 341.3.2, and paragraph 341.4 for visual examination. F. Identify welds in accordance with ANSI B31.3, paragraph 328.5. G. Clean each layer of deposited weld metal before depositing the next layer of weld metal, including the final pass, by a power-driven wire brush. H. Use an inert or shielding gas welding method. Do not use oxygen fuel welding. The interior of the pipe shall be purged with inert gas before the root pass. I. Welded butt joints (both longitudinal and circumferential) shall comply with A WW A C220, Section 4. Do not use backing rings. Provide full penetration and 15104-6 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I smooth internal diameters for the root bead of welds. Grind the inside weld of socket welds flush with the pipe internal diameter. Welds shall be of smooth finish. Use anti-spatter compounds specifically formulated or designed for use with stainless steel. Do not allow heat tint to form in the heat-affected zone or remove heat tint completely from the heat-affected zone of the fInished weld. The maximum depth of grinding or abrasive blasting to remove defects shall not exceed 10% of the wall thickness. Do not perform abrasive blasting with steel shot, grit, or sand. J. No iron or steel surfaces shall come into contact with the stainless steel. This includes placing the stainless steel on steel tables, racks, pipe supports, etc. Do not use carbon steel wire brushes or grinders. K. Welding electrodes shall comply with A WS A5.4. Bare wire shall comply with A WS A5.9. Use electrodes as follows: Weldin Electrode Material E308 E347 E 316 E 318 3.02 SHOP TESTING OF FABRICATED OR WELDED COMPONENTS A. After completion of fabrication and welding in the shop and before the application of any lining or coating, test each component according to the referenced standards. Test fabricated fittings per A WW A C200. Test the seams in fittings which have not been previously shop hydrostatically tested by the dye penetrant method as described in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Appendix B. In lieu of the dye penetrant method of testing, completed fittings may be hydrostatically tested. Use the field hydrostatic test pressure or 125% of the design pressure, whichever is higher. 3.03 INSTALLING THREADED PIPING A. Ream, clean, and remove burrs from threaded piping before making up joints. Apply thread lubricant to threaded ends before installing fittings, couplings, unions, or joints. 3.04 INSTALLING FLANGED PIPING A. See Section 15060. 03720-022-01 , October, 2007 15104-7 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 3.05 INSTALLATION OF STAINLESS STEEL BOLTS AND NUTS A. See Section 15060. 3.06 INSTALLING GROOVED-END PIPING A. See Section 15060. 3.07 INSTALLING UNIONS A. Provide unions on exposed piping 3 inches and smaller as follows: 1. At every change in direction (horizontal and vertical). 2. Six to 12 inches downstream of valves. 3. Every 40 feet in straight piping runs. 4. Where shown in the Drawings. 3.08 INSTALLING ABOVEGROUND OR EXPOSED PIPING A. See Sections 15060. 3.09 INSTALLING BURIED PIPING A. Install in accordance with Sections 02225 and as follows. B. When installing pipe in trenches, do not deviate more than 1 inch from line or ~ inch from grade. Measure for grade at the pipe invert. 3.10 INSTALLING SUBMERGED PIPING A. Install pipe on the alignment shown in the Drawings. B. Do not add water into the basins while the pipe is empty. 3.11 FIELD HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. Hydrostatically test pipe and fittings in the field in accordance with Section 15144. See Piping Schedule on the drawings for test pressures. B. Do not allow test water to remain in the pipe for more than five days. Drain and dry the piping after completing the testing. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104-8 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS II II II II Ii II Ii II Ii II II II I Ii Ii Ii I Ii I II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.12 PAINTING AND COATING A. See Section 09901. 3.13 COATING BURIED AND SUBMERGED BOLTS, NUTS, AND TIE RODS A. See Section 15060. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15104-9 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15107 HIGH DENSITY POL YETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. This Section includes materials and methods of installation of HDPE. Pipe is intended for use in the scum wasting system. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance with specified requirements. 1.03 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. All pipe, fittings, valves and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or by skidding in order to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be rolled or skidded against pipe on the ground. Slings, hooks or pipe tongs shall be padded and used in such a manner as to prevent damage to the exterior surface or interior of the pipe. B. Materials, if stored, shall be kept safe from damage. The interior as well as all sealing surfaces of all pipe, fittings, and other appurtenances shall be kept free from dirt or foreign matter at all times. Valves shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage or freezing. C. Pipe stored outside and exposed to prolonged periods of sunlight shall be covered with canvas or other opaque material. Air circulation shall be provided under covenng. D. Pipe shall not be stacked higher than the limits recommended by the manufacturer. The bottom tiers shall be kept off the ground on timbers, rails, or concrete. Pipe shall not be stored close to heat sources. E. Gaskets shall be placed in a cool location out of direct sunlight. Gaskets shall not come in contact with petroleum products. Gaskets shall be used on a first-in, first-out basis. Mechanical-joint bolts shall be handled and stored in a manner that will ensure proper use with respect to types and sizes. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 mGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE 15107-1 1.04 H. I. J. K. REFERENCES A. Ductile Iron Pipe A.N.S.!. A21-51. B. HDPE Pipe AWWA C906. C. HDPE Pipe AWWA C901. D. Water Resources Act, Chapter 373, F.S. E. Chapter 17-40 Florida Administrative Code. F. Chapter 17-610 Florida Administrative Code. G. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). American Water Works Association (A WW A). American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials (AASHTO). American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE). L. Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS A. In general, shop drawings and related manufacturer's product certification shall be made in accordance with the General and Special Conditions of the Contract for approval prior to construction or fabrication of the material by the manufacturer. The following items, which require shop drawings, are brought to the Contractor's attention. The list may not include all items for which shop drawing submittals are required to meet the requirements of the project. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Detail drawings of all classes of pipe, joints, and fittings. 2. Detail Drawings of restrained and flexible joints, including test reports to confirm thrust restraint capacities and restraining mechanism application. 3. Pipeline laying schedule tabulated and referenced to construction line and grade controls shown on plans, with station, offset and elevations. References shall be provided for pipe fittings, valves, service connections and other important features ofthe pipeline. II I I 4. Detail drawings of all Drilling Pits. 15107-2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HOPE) PIPE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. Service Connections. 6. Valves and Valve Boxes. 7. Paint - Manufacturer's information and color sample. 8. All Appurtenant Items. B. Certification and test reports for the materials, manufacturing, and testing of the types of pipe supplied shall be performed and furnished by the pipe manufacturer in accordance with the latest standards of the industry as described herein. C. Provide a statement in writing from the HDPE pipe manufacturer that it is listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute as a qualified extruder for the polyethylene resin being used to manufacture the pipe for this project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFERENCES A. The following documents are a part of this Section. Where this Specification section differs from these documents, the requirements ofthis section shall apply. 1. ASTM D1248-84, Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials. 2. ASTM D3350-84, Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings Material. 3. ASTM F714-85, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter. 2.02 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS A. General: 1. All High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) shall be manufactured by Driscopipe, a subsidiary of Phillips Petroleum Company; PLEXCO, Division of Chevron Chemical Company; or approved equal. 2. All HDPE pipe shall have a Ductile Iron Pipe outside diameter unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. 3. Domestic wastewater pipe shall be permanently co-extruded with green coloring on pipe outside surface. 4. All HDPE piping system components shall be the products of one manufacturer. 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE 15107-3 03720-022-01 October, 2007 II B. HDPE Pipe Specifications II II 1. High Density Polyethylene pipe 4-inches diameter and larger shall conform to material standard ASTM D3350 345434 C cell classification rated as PE 3408 by the Plastics Pipe Institute. Minimum pressure rating shall be 160 psi SDR 11 (Standard Dimension Ratio) for pipe sizes greater than 4 inches in diameter. For pipe sizes 3-inches and smaller in diameter, the minimum pressure rating shall be 200 psi SDR 9. All pipe 4-inches in diameter and greater shall have a ductile iron pipe O.D. Pressure ratings are at standard test conditions and temperature of 73.4oF (230C). Ii II II II 2. The polyethylene compound shall be suitably protected against degradation by ultraviolet light by means of carbon black, well dispersed by precompounding in a concentration of not less than 2 percent. 3. The maximum allowable hoop stress shall be 800 psi at 73.4 degrees F. 4. The pipe manufacturer shall be listed with the Plastic Pipe Institute as meeting the recipe and mixing requirements of the resin manufacturer for the resin used to manufacture the pipe in this project. I: II C. Fittings. Ii 1. All fittings for HDPE pipe (4" and larger), except for D.I/HDPE Mechanical Joint Adaptors, shall be compact ductile iron mechanical joint fittings. If a fitting is unavailable as a compact ductile iron mechanical joint fitting, then use a regular ductile iron mechanical joint fitting. All fittings for HDPE pipe (3" and smaller) shall be HDPE. II II 2. D.l./HDPE Mechanical Joint Adaptors. a. The manufacturer of the HDPE pipe shall supply all D.I./HDPE mechanical joint adaptors and accessories required to perform the work as shown on the Drawings. I Ii II Ii II b. The D.l./HDPE mechanical joint adaptor shall consist of: 1) A molded or fabricated HDPE mechanical joint transition fitting 2) A standard rubber gasket for a D.I. mechanical joint. 3) A D.l. mechanical joint backup drive ring. 4) Cor- Ten mechanical joint tee bolts. 5) A stainless steel stiffener inserted in the MJ end of the HDPE transition fitting. c. The D.l./HDPE mechanical joint adaptor shall be connected to the HDPE pipe by a heat-fused joint on one end, and connected to a Ii II 15107-4 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE)PWE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 ductile iron pipe valve, or fitting with a mechanical joint on the other end. d. The tee bolts and backup drive ring shall act as a joint restraint to keep the connecting pieces from pulling apart. e. The HDPE transition fitting shall be molded or fabricated by the manufacturer of the HDPE pipe. All molded fittings shall be fully pressure rated to match the SDR pressure rating for which they are made. Fabricated fittings shall be rated for internal pressure service equivalent to the full pressure rating of the mating pipe. f. If rework compounds are required, only those generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin compounds of the same class and type from the same raw material supplier shall be used. g. Solvent epoxy cementing and mechanical joining with bolt on wrap around clamps shall not be used for connections. HDPE Pipe Jointing Method 1. HDPE pipe shall be jointed by the butt-fusion process in accordance with pipe manufacturer's directions. Contractor shall provide butt-fusion technicians who are trained and certified by the P .E. pipe manufacturer to complete the project. The date of technician certification shall not exceed 12 months before commencing construction. 2. All HDPE pipe joined by butt-fusion shall be made from the same class and type of raw material made by the same raw material supplier. 3. Butt-fusion means the butt-joining of the pipe by softening the aligned faces of the pipe ends in a suitable apparatus and pressing them together under controlled pressure. 4. The internal and external beads resulting from the butt-fusion process shall be visible and examined for penetration 360 degrees around the pipe diameter. 5. Short pieces of pipe between valves and fittings shall be DIP with all joints retrained for sizes 3-inches and larger. For 2-inch, the short pieces shall be brass or Sch. 80 with IP threads and DI, HDPE or brass fittings and all joints restrained. 6. Only in locations or situations where, approved by the Project Representative, fusion of the HDPE pipe may be accomplished with Electrofusion Coupings, as manufactured by Central Plastics Company, or approved equal. Technical information must be provided to demonstrate 15107-5 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) PIPE II the fused coupling will not compromise the structural integrity of the II HDPE main pipe. 7. The normal method of fusing HDPE will be using the butt-fusion method. 2.03 LOCATOR WIRE A. All HDPE pipe, installed by directional bore or by open cut, shall be laid with two (2) insulated 14 gauge solid strand copper wires for location purposes. All "long" HDPE service piping (services greater than 40 feet in length) shall be laid with one (1) insulated 14 gauge solid strand copper wire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All polyethylene pipe shall be cut, fabricated, and installed in strict conformance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Joining, laying, and pulling of polyethylene pipe shall be accomplished by personnel experienced in working with polyethylene pipe. The pipe supplier shall certify in writing that the Contractor is qualified to join, lay, and pull the pipe or representative of the pipe manufacturer shall be on site to oversee the pipe joining. Expenses for the representative shall be paid for by the Contractor. 3.02 PIPE INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall obtain from the pipe manufacturer a certificate of inspection to the effect that the pipe and fittings supplied for this Contract have been inspected at the plant and that they meet the requirements of these specifications. The Contractor shall submit these certificates to the Engineer prior to installation of the pipe materials. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to visual inspection at time of delivery and before they are lowered into the trench to be laid. Joints or fittings that do not conform to these specifications will be rejected and must be removed immediately by the Contractor. The entire product of any plant may be rejected when, in the opinion of the Owner or Engineer, the methods of manufacture fail to secure uniform results, or where the materials used are such as to produce inferior pipe or fittings. 3.03 TRANSPORTATION A. Care shall be taken during transportation of the pipe that it is not cut, kinked, or otherwise damaged. 3.04 STORAGE A. Pipes shall be stored on level ground, preferably turf or sand, free of sharp objects, which could damage the pipe. Stacking of the polyethylene pipe shall be limited to a height that will not cause excessive deformation of the bottom layers at pipes 03720-022-01 October, 2007 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HOPE) PIPE 15107-6 II II II II II II II II I Ii Ii II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I under anticipated temperature condition. Where necessary due to ground conditions, the pipe shall be stored on wooden sleepers, spaced suitably and of such widths as not to allow deformation of the pipe at the point of contact with the sleeper or between supports. B. Pipes shall be stored in such a manner as to limit their exposure to ultraviolet light as the pipe color will fade. Excessive loss of color in the pipe material may result in the rejection of piping material by the Project Representative. 3.05 HANDLING PIPE A. The handling of the joined pipeline shall be in such a manner that the pipe is not damaged by dragging it over sharp and cutting objects. Ropes, fabric, or rubber- protected slings and straps shall be used when handling pipes. Chains, cables, or hooks inserted into the pipe ends shall not be used. Two slings spread apart shall be used for lifting each length of pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped onto rocky or unprepared ground. Slings for handling the pipeline shall not be positioned at butt-fused joints. Sections of the pipes with cuts and gouges exceeding 10 percent of the pipe wall thickness or kinked sections shall be removed and the ends rejoined. The dragging of fused HDPE pipe along asphalt and concrete paving will not be allowed. B. The open ends of all sections of joined and/or installed pipe (not in service) shall be plugged at night to prevent animals or foreign material from entering the pipe line or pipe section. C. Waterproof nightcaps of approved design may be used but they shall be so constructed that they will prevent the entrance of any type of natural precipitation into the pipe and will be fastened to the pipe in such a manner that the wind cannot blow them loose. D. The practice of stuffmg cloth or paper in the open ends of the pipe will not be permitted. E. Where possible, the pipe shall be raised and supported at a suitable distance back from the open end such that the open end will be below the level of the pipe at the point of support. 3.06 LAYING PIPE A. Joints: 1. All HDPE pipe shall be jointed by the heat fusion process which produces homogeneous, seal, leak tight joints. B. Butt Fusion Testing: I. Contractor shall test the fIrst fusion of the day on a daily basis. 2. In testing, the fusion shall be allowed to cool completely, then fusion test straps shall be cut out. The test shall be minimum of 12" or 30 times the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and minimum of 1" 03720-022-01 October, 2007 mGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE)PWE 15107-7 Ii or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width. Bend the test strap until the ends of the strap touch. Contractor shall not commence until a fusion test has passed the bent strap test. II II 3.07 TESTING AND LEAKAGE 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Hydrostatic Tests - General 1. The piping shall be tested between valved sections to a maximum length of 2,000 feet immediately after installation and backfilling has been completed. 2. In testing, the part of the system under test shall be filled with water and subjected to a sustained pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. The piping shall be tested in sections, thereby, testing each valve for secure closure. While the system is being filled with water, air shall be carefully and completely exhausted. If permanent air vents are not located at all high points, the Contractor shall install corporation stops or fittings and valves at such points so the air can be expelled as the pipe system is slowly filled with water. II Ii II 3. Test pressure shall be maintained at 150 psi by pumping for a minimum of two (2) hours and until all sections under test have been checked for evidence of leakage. The test pressure shall not vary by more than ::t5 psi for the duration of the test. Rate of loss shall not exceed that specified in the following paragraph "Allowable Limits For Leakage." Visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of total leakage shown by test. Testing shall be in accordance with the applicable provisions of A WW A Standard C600 Section 4. NOTE: TEST DURATION SHALL BE AT LEAST TWO HOURS. I Ii I II I I I 4. All pumps, gauges and measuring devices shall be furnished, installed and operated by the Contractor and all such equipment and, devices and their installation shall be approved by the Engineer. All pressure and leakage testing shall be done in the presence of a representative of the Engineer or the Owner. Ii II II I I I 5. Water for testing and flushing shall be potable water for potable water mains and reclaimed water for, reclaimed water mains provided by the Contractor, at no cost to the Owner, from a source approved by the Engineer. Flow velocity during line filling should not exceed 2 f.p.s. 6. If the contractor elects to perform hydrostatic testing against valves in an existing distribution system, he does so at his own risk and will bear the cost of any damages to the existing valve, piping system, private or public property, or the new pipeline under test. 7. Polyethylene Pipe Hydrostatic Test: 15107-8 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HOPE) PIPE I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I a. Under no circumstances shall the total time under test for PE pipe exceed 8 hours at 1.5 times the pipe pressure rating. If the test is not completed because of leakage, equipment failure or other reason, the test shall be permitted to "relax" for 8 hours before the next test sequence. b. For high density polyethylene pipe the initial test pressure shall be allowed to maintain at test pressure by adding make-up water each hour for a period of times as required by pipe manufacturer and approved by the engineer to allow for diameter expansion to stabilize. After the required equilibrium period the test section shall be returned to the original test pressure by adding a measurable amount of make-up water, the pump turned off and the final pressure held for a minimum of 2 hours. Pressure drop may occur due to pressure expansion. Allowable amounts of make-up water for expansion during the pressure test is shown in the tables following this sub-section. c. Allowance and testing for pipe stretching shall be as recommended by the Plastic Pipe Institute and A WW A. ALLOWABLE LEAKAGE IN GALLONS PER HOUR (Test Pressure = 150 psi) Pipe diameter Leakage per 1,000 feet 2 0.18 4 0.37 6 0.55 8 0.74 10 0.92 12 1.10 16 1.47 03720-022-01 October, 2007 HIGH DENSITY 15107-9 POLYETHYLENE (HOPE) PIPE ALLOWABLE FOR EXPANSION UNDER TEST PRESSURE* POL YETHYLENE PIPE Nominal Pipe Allowances for Expansion Size (in.) (US Gals/1 00 Feet of Pipe) I-Hour Test 2-Hour Test 3-Hour Test 3 or less 0.10 0.15 0.25 4 0.13 0.25 0.40 6 0.30 0.60 0.90 8 0.50 1.0 1.5 10 0.75 1.3 2.1 12 1.1 2.3 3.4 14 1.4 2.8 4.2 16 1.7 3.3 5.0 *These allowances only apply to the test phase and not to the initial expansion phase. * 3.08 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM A. Connections to existing sewage collection pipelines shall be made as shown on the Contract Drawings. Coordination between the Owner and the Contractor shall be required in order to accomplish this task. The Contractor shall supply connection, procedure, and customer notification schedules to the Owner, for approval, two (2) weeks prior to the proposed connection date. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15107-10 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HOPE) PIPE I II II Ii I) II Ii I II I I I I II II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15121 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials and installation of miscellaneous piping specialties, such as quick-connect couplings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance, and the following. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data and descriptive literature showing dimensions and materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show coatings. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 METALLIC QUICK-CONNECT COUPLINGS 1. Type 6 - Quick-connect couplers shall be female coupler/female thread type with locking handles. Provide dust plug and security chain with each coupler. Bodies and locking handles shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Couplers shall be CIV ACON Kamlok 633-D/634-A, Evertite Part D/DP, or equal. 2. Type 8 - Quick-connect couplers shall be male adapter/female thread type. Provide dust cap and security chain with each coupler. Bodies and locking handles shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Adapters shall be CIV ACON Kamlock 633-A/634-B, Evertite Part AlDC, or equal. 3. Type 10 - Quick connect couplers shall be male adapter/hose shank type. Provide dust cap with each coupler. Bodies and dust caps shall be Type 316 stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Adapters shall be CIV ACON Kamlok 633-E/634- B, Evertite Part C/DC, or equal. 2.02 NON METALLIC QUICK-CONNECT COUPLINGS 1. Type 6A - Quick-connect couplers shall be female coupler/female thread type with locking handles. Provide dust plug and security chain with each coupler. Bodies shall be glass fiber reinforced polypropylene. Locking handles shall be stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Couplers shall be Evertite Part D/DP, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15121-1 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITIINGS AND ACCESSORIES Banjo Corporation Female Cplg/Female Thread and Dust Plug, Murray Equipment Inc. Style D/DP, or equal. 2. Type 8A - Quick-connect couplers shall be male adapter/female thread type. Provide dust cap and security chain with each coupler. Bodies shall be glass fiber reinforced polypropylene. Locking handles shall be stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Adapters shall be Evertite Part A/DC, Banjo Corporation Male Adapter/Female Thread and Dust Cap, Murray Equipment Inc. Style A/DC, or equal. 3. Type lOA - Quick connect couplers shall be male adapter/hose shank type. Provide dust cap with security chain with each coupler. Bodies shall be glass fiber reinforced polypropylene. Locking handles shall be stainless steel. Gasket shall be Teflon. Adapters shall be Evertite Part C/DC, Banjo Corporation Male Adpater/Hose Shank and Dust Cap, Murray Equipment Inc. Style E, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLING QUICK-CONNECT COUPLINGS Attach to piping per the relevant piping specification and!or as indicated on the drawings. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15121-2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES II II II II II II Ii II Ii Ii I] II Ii II II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15122 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section includes materials and installation of flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings in accordance with the Section 01340, Project Submittals and Acceptance. B. Submit manufacturer's catalog data on flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints. Show manufacturer's model or figure number for each type of coupling or joint for each type of pipe material for which couplings and joints are used. Show coatings. C. Submit manufacturer's recommended torques to which the coupling bolts shall be tightened for the flexible sleeve-type pipe couplings. D. Show materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show dimensions. E. Show number, size, and material of construction of tie rods and lugs for each thrust harness on the project. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 GENERAL A. Each flexible coupling and expansion joint shall be designed for the type, size, and pressure rating of the connecting piping. B. Expansion joint couplings shall be used to allow for the thermal expansion of aeration piping shall be furnished and installed per manufacturer's instructions at the locations designated in the approved piping layout prepared by the coupling manufacturer. Submit piping layout to the Engineer showing proposed coupling locations. C. All wetted materials shall be suitable for use for the fluid being conveyed. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 15122-1 2.02 2.03 D. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 D. Wetted materials for flexible coupling and expansion Jomts used to convey drinking water shall be resistant to free cWorine and cWoramine concentrations up to 10 mg/l. E. All flexible couplings and expansion joints used in association with drinking water service shall be certified as suitable for contact with drinking water by an accredited certification organization in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water Systems Components - Health Effects. BOLTED, SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS (TYPE C105) A. Bolted, sleeve-type couplings shall be designed and manufactured conforming to AWWA C219. B. Type C105: Flanged Coupling Adapter 1. Adapters for ductile-iron pipe 12 inches and smaller shall be ductile iron: Dresser Style 127, Smith-Blair Series 912, or equal. 2. Adapters for ductile-iron pipe larger than 12 inches and steel pipe shall be steel: Dresser Style 128, Smith-Blair Type 913, or equal. 3. Flange ends shall match the flange of the connecting pipe. BOLTED, SPLIT-SLEEVE, AND SINGLE-POINT CLOSURE COUPLINGS (TYPE C201 AND C202) A. Bolted, split-sleeve, and single-point closure couplings shall meet the materials and performance conforming to AWWA C219, which shall be used for steel pipe and stainless steel pipe. B. When the connecting piping is carbon steel, coupling shall be manufactured from ASTM A36 carbon steel. When the connecting piping is stainless steel, coupling shall be manufactured from ASTM A240 Type 316/316L stainless steel. C. The coupling shall be of the split with a single-point closure coupling. Provide welded restraint rings on the pipe ends for end restraint. As the coupling closes, it shall confme an elastomeric o-ring type gasket on each pipe end to create a radial seal. The axial seal shall be affected at the closure plates as bolts pull the coupling snug round the pipe. The coupling manufacturer shall provide the restraint rings for each coupling. The Contractor's fabricator shall weld the restraint rings to the pipe in strict accordance with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. 15122-2 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS I Ii II II II Ii II Ii I I II II II II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I E. For water service, the elastomeric o-ring type gaskets shall be EPDM (or other material accepted by Engineer) conforming to ASTM D-2000 for the design pressure for the temperature range of minus 20 to 180 degrees Fahrenheit. F. Type C201 shall be a shouldered bolted, split-sleeve fully restrained coupling. Type C201 coupling shall be Depend-O-Lok F x F (Fixed x Fixed), Type 2 manufactured by Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, Inc., or approved equal. G. Type C202 shall be a shouldered bolted, split-sleeve fully restrained coupling that allows angular deflection of the connecting pipes. Type C202 coupling shall be Depend-O-Lok F x F (Fixed x Fixed), Type 2, Modified manufactured by Victaulic, Depend-O-Lok, Inc., or approved equal. 2.04 NON-METALLIC BELLOWS EXPANSION JOINTS (TYPE E301 AND E302) A. Classification 1. Type E301: Teflon bellows expansion joints 2. Type E302: Spherical rubber expansion joints B. Type E301: Teflon bellows expansion joints 1. Teflon bellows expansion joints shall be three convolutions, ductile-iron flanges, Monel reinforcing ring, and a Teflon facing on the flanges. Provide thrust harnesses. Flanges shall be Class 125, ANSI B16.1. 2. Products shall be Peabody-Dore Style E-1608-B, Resistoflex No. R6905, or equal. C. Type E302: Spherical expansion joints 1. Spherical design expansion joints shall be cWorobutyl with polyester fiber reinforcing and be provided with steel retaining rings and Type 304 stainless steel gusset plates and control rods. Expansion joints shall have flat-face flanges integral with the body to match Class 125, ANSI B16.1. Joint Size Flange - to - Flange Length (inches) Minimum Pressure Rating (1500F) (psi) 225 225 125 4-8 1 0-12 14-20 6 8 10-12 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15122-3 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 2. Expansion joints shall be manufactured by Metraflex Metrasphere, Proco Series 240, or equal. II II II 2.05 HIGH SERVICE PUMP SUCTION AND DISCHARGE FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS II (TYPE E600) . ! D. A. High service pump suction and discharge flexible connectors shall be corrugated bellows-type expansion joints reinforced with equalizing/control rings. B. Expansion joints shall conform to the Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association (EJMA) standards, latest edition and addenda, in all respects. Bellows elements shall be formed by the hydro forming process. Expansion joints shall be supplied with equalizing/control rings of the bolted type. Bellows convolutions shall be 2" pitch and height, minimum. All bellows designs shall be provided with bellows calculations, submitted for record purposes, which conform to the EJMA standards, including cycle life. Bellows designs shall be hydro tested to 1-112 times the design pressure, minimum. The bellows shall not exhibit any signs of squirm. Devices such as flow liners, covers, hinge or gimbal hardware, etc. shall not be utilized to prevent (or mitigate) the effects of squirm during hydro testing. C. The expansion joints shall have a design pressure rating of at least 200 psig and shall be furnished with van stone type flanged ends with 125-pound drilling. Each expansion joint shall be furnished with an inner flow liner that shall be suitable for the conveyance of potable water at velocities of up to 20 fps in either direction through the expansion joint. E. Materials of construction shall be as follows: F. G. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 Bellows: Liner: Equalizing/control rings: Collars/bands: 304 stainless steel 304 stainless steel 304 stainless steel 304 stainless steel Welded stainless steel components shall be made of low carbon type stainless steel. Each expansion joint shall be designed provide the following concurrent movements as a minimum: Compression: Lateral offset: Angular rotation: 3/4" 118" Flange faces parallel within 1/8" 15122-4 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS II II II II Ii Ii II Ii I II Ii II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I H. Expansion joints shall be factory pre-compressed 3/8 inch less than overall length. I. Each expansion joint shall be equipped with a tie rod!restraint system designed to limit the axial deflection of the entire flexible connector assembly to no more than 0.005" with the piping system subjected to 200 psig pressure. Axial deflection calculations shall be submitted for record purposes. The tie rod/restraint system shall be reviewed by the high service pump manufacturer and shall comply with the pump manufacturer's recommendations for the proposed pump/piping configuration. J. The Contractor shall store, handle, align, and install each expansion joint in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. A copy of the manufacturer's installation recommendations shall be provided to the Resident Representative at the time of expansion joint installation. The piping, and each expansion joint, shall be aligned during installation so as to impose no axial, lateral, or torsional deflection. Expansion joints shall not be used to correct piping misalignment. All piping shall be laid true so that expansion joint end fittings mate perfectly with connecting pipe and/or equipment. The Contractor shall demonstrate this alignment to the Resident Representative during assembly. The Contractor shall provide all spacers as necessary to provide proper alignment and installation and to maintain the preset compression traverse. The provided expansion joints shall be fully compatible with the installation conditions and geometry shown on the Drawings. The expansion joints shall be manufactured by Senior Flexonics, Inc., Expansion Joint Division of New Braunfels, Texas. 2.06 BOL TING FOR FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. Bolts and nuts for flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints shall be as specified for the adjacent piping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from pipe ends. Clean gaskets in flexible pipe couplings before installation. B. Lubricate bolt threads with graphite and oil prior to installation. C. Install threaded nut and bolt thread protection caps after completing the bolt, nut, and gasket installation. 15122-5 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS 3.02 PAINTING AND COATING A. Exterior Coating of Buried Flexible Pipe Couplings: Coat buried flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies) per Section 09901, System No. 21. Coat buried bolt threads, tie bolt threads, and nuts per Section 09901, System No. 24. B. Exterior Coating of Exposed Flexible Pipe Coupling (Non-Submerged): Coat flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies) located indoors, in vaults and structures, and above ground with the same coating system as specified for the adjacent pipe. If the adjacent pipe is not coated, coat couplings per Section 09901, System No. 10. Apply prime coat at factory. C. Exterior Coating of Exposed Flexible Pipe Coupling (Submerged): Coat flexible pipe couplings (including joint harness assemblies) that will be submerged per Section 09901, System No.7. Apply prime coat at factory. D. Line carbon steel and iron flexible pipe couplings per Section 09901, System No.7. 3.03 HYDROSTATIC TESTING 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. Hydrostatically test flexible pipe couplings and expansion joints in place with the pipe being tested. Test in accordance with Section 15144, Pressure Testing of Pipe. END OF SECTION 15122-6 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS AND EXPANSION JOINTS Ii II I: II II Ii Ii II Ii II II II II I II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15144 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. This section specifies the hydrostatic and leakage testing of pressure piping for raw water transmission, water treatment plants, water distribution and transmission mains and raw sewage force mains. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 15060 - PIPING SYSTEMS GENERAL D. Section 15100-PROCESS VALVES E. Section 15101 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS F. Section 15104 - STAINLESS STEEL PIPE G. Section 15103 - PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Submit test bulkhead locations and design calculations, pipe attachment details, and methods to prevent excessive pipe wall stresses. 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). B. American Water Works Association (A WW A) C. Hydraulic Institute Standards. Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15144-1 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING PART 2 MATERIALS 2.01 2.02 2.03 VENTS AND DRAINS FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING A. Install vents on the high points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the drawings or not. Install drains on low points of aboveground piping, whether shown in the drawings or not. Provide a valve at each vent or drain point. Valves shall be 3/4 inch for piping 3 inches and larger and 112 inch for piping smaller than 3 inches. MANUAL AIR-RELEASE VALVES FOR BURIED PIPING A. Provide temporary manual air-release valves for pipeline test. Construct the pipe outlet in the same manner as for a permanent air valve and after use, seal with a blind flange, pipe cap, or plug and coat the same as the adjacent pipe. TEST BULKHEADS A. Design and fabricate test bulkheads per Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Materials shall comply with Part UCS of said code. Design pressure shall be at least 2.0 times the specified test pressure for the section of pipe containing the bulkhead. Limit stresses to 70% of yield strength of the bulkhead material at the bulkhead design pressure. Include air-release and water drainage connections. 2.04 TESTING FLUID A. B. C. D. Testing fluid shall be water unless otherwise indicated on the Piping Schedule. For fuel oil piping, use potable water for hydrostatic testing and flushing. For potable water pipelines, obtain and use only potable water for hydrostatic testing. Submit request for use of water from waterlines of Owner 48-hours in advance. E. The Contractor may obtain the water from the Owner at no charge. 2.05 TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Provide calibrated pressure gauges, pipes, bulkheads, pumps, compressors, chart recorder, and meters to perform the hydrostatic testing. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15144-2 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING II Ii II II II II Ii Ii II II II II 11 Ii II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3.18 PIPE LEAK TESTING A. General 1. Conduct pressure and leakage tests on newly installed pipelines and appurtenances, in accordance with reviewed testing plan. 2. Furnish necessary equipment and material and make taps in piping, as necessary for testing and as specified. 3. Engineer will observe the tests. 4. Provide 10 days' advance written notice of start of testing to Engineer. 5. Test Pressures and Type of Test: As specified in the piping schedule as shown. 6. Test Records: Make records of each piping system during the test to document the following: a. Date of test. b. Description and identification of piping tested. c. Test fluid. d. Test pressure. e. Remarks, including: 1. Leaks (type, location) 2. Repairs made on leaks. f. Certification by Contractor and signed acknowledgment by Engineer that tests have been satisfactorily completed. B. Testing New Pipe Connected to Existing Pipe 1. Isolate new pipe with grooved-end pipe caps, spectacle blinds, or blind flanges. 2. Test joint between new piping and existing piping by methods, approved by the Engineer, that do not place the entire existing system under test load. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15144-3 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING C. Buried Pressure Piping 1. Initial Service Leak Test: Conduct with partially backfilled tench and joints left open for inspection, as field conditions permit and as approved by Engineer. 2. Final Hydrostatic Acceptance Test: Conduct after trench has been completely backfilled. 3. Expose all joints on buried pressure piping to be pneumatically tested or subjected to an initial service leak test. D. Exposed Pressure Piping: Conduct tests after pIpmg has been completely installed and inspected for proper installation, including all supports, hangers, and anchors, but prior to installation of insulation. 3.19 HYDROSTATIC LEAK TESTING A. GENERAL 1. Hydrostatic tests shall consist of pressure test and leakage test. Hydrostatic tests shall be conducted on all newly laid pressure pipes, joints and valves, including all service lines to the curb stops. Air testing of pressure pipes will not be permitted under any circumstance. Tests may be made on sections not exceeding 2,000 feet, when this procedure is acceptable to the Engineer or designee. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary equipment and material, including water, make all taps, including cross connects, and furnish all closure pieces in the pipe as required. Equipment to be furnished by the Contractor shall include graduated containers, pressure gauges, hydraulic force pumps, and suitable hoses and piping. The Engineer or designee will monitor the test. 2. The Contractor may conduct hydrostatic tests after the trench has been partially backfilled with the joints left exposed for inspection for this informational purposes only. The hydrostatic tests for acceptance shall only be conducted after the trenches have been completely backfilled and compacted as specified. B. TESTING CRITERIA 1. All pipe sections to be pressure tested shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi, or in accordance with the piping schedule in the mechanical drawings. The duration of each pressure test shall be for a period of two (2) hours. The maximum allowable pressure loss for the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15144-4 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING I I II I Ii Ii II II Ii II Ii I II I Ii I II I, II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 two (2) hour test shall be two (2) psig. If during the test, the integrity of the tested line is in question, the Engineer or designee may require a second two (2) hour pressure test. The basic provisions of A WW A C-600 shall be applicable. c. PROCEDURE FOR PRESSURE TEST 1. Each section of pipe to be tested shall be slowly filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe ill a satisfactory manner. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe, and the main shall be flushed and pigged using a City approved swab. To accomplish this, taps shall be made, and appropriate valves installed to ensure bleeding of all air from the main. If defective pipes, fittings, valves, or hydrants are discovered in consequence of this pressure test, all such items shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor with sound material and the test shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Provisions of A WW A C600, where applicable, shall apply. D. PROCEDURE FOR LEAKAGE TEST 1. After completion of the pressure test, a leakage test shall be conducted to determine the quantity of water lost by leakage under the specified test pressure. Applicable provisions of A WW A C600 and C602 shall apply. 2. Allowable leakage in gallons per hour for pipeline shall not be greater than that determined by the formulas: Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP) L = SD (P)~ 133,200 Where: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. S = Length of pipe tested, in feet. D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches. P = Average test pressure during leakage testing pounds per square inch gauge. 133,200 = Predetermined constant. Polyvinyl CWoride (PVC) L= ND(P)~ 7,400 Where: L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour. N = Number of joints. 15144-5 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches. P = Average test, pressure during leakage test in pounds per square inch gauge. 7,400 = Predetermined constant. Leakage is defined as the quantity of water to be supplied in the newly laid pipe or any valved section under test, which is necessary to n;laintain the specified leakage test pressure after the pipe has been filled with water and the air expelled. Should any test of pipe laid disclose leakage greater than that allowed, the Contractor shall locate and replace or repair the defective joints, pipe or valve until the leakage from subsequent testing is within the specified allowance. 3.20 INITIAL SERVICE LEAK TESTS A. Testing Equipment As specified herein before. B. Procedure 1. Gradually bring piping system up to normal operating pressure and hold continuously for a minimum of 10 minutes. 2. Examine joints and connections for leakage with soap bubbles. 3. The piping system, exclusive of possible localized instances at pump or valve packing, shall show no visual evidence of leaking. 4. Correct any visible leakage end retest as directed by Engineer. 3.21 FINAL CLEANING A. Interim Cleaning 1. Prevent accumulation of weld rod, weld spatter, pipe cuttings and filings, gravel, cleaning rags, and other foreign material within piping sections during fabrication. 2. Examine piping to assure removal of these and other foreign objects prior to assembly and installation. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15144-6 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING II II II Ii II II I II II 11 Ii Ii I II Ii II Ii II II I I I I I I 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I 06622-016-01 B. Following assembly and testing, and prior to disinfection and final acceptance, flush pipelines with water to remove accumulate construction debris and other foreign matter. C. Flush until all foreign matter is removed from the pipeline. D. Provide hoses, temporary pipes, ditches, and other items as required to properly dispose of flushing water without damage to adjacent properties. E. Minimum Flushing Velocity: 2.5 fps. F. For large diameter pipe where it is impractical to flush the pipe at 2.5 fps velocity, clean the pipeline in-place from the inside by brushing and sweeping, then flush the line at a lower velocity as approved by the Engineer. G. Insert cone strainers in the flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-place until cleaning has been accomplished. H. Remove accumulated debris through drains 2 inches and larger or by removing spools and valves from piping. END OF SECTION PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPES 15144-7 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15210 SLIDE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete installation of slide gates and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. A. Manufacturer to furnish and deliver, F.O.B., self-contained type slide gates, as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. C. A manufacturer's representative for the equipment specified herein shall provide three (3) days of service for measurement of bolt locations installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the installation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT F. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS G. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS H. Section 01800 - TRAINING I. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE J. Section 05505 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS K. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 15210-1 SLIDE GATES A. Shop drawings 1. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly. 2. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. 3. Detailed Structural and Mechanical Drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment associated therewith. 4. Gate operator and stem calculations for each gate and service condition. 5. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. 6. Performance Test Procedures. B. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. 4. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials AND EQUIPMENT. 6. Operation and Maintenance manuals: As specified In Section 01730, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Manuals. 7. Service records for maintenance performed during construction. 1.04 REFERENCES Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 1. A167, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium- Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SLIDE GATES 15210-2 II II Ii II II II II II II II II Ii I Ii II Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. A193, Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High- Temperature Service. 3. A240, Standard Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium- Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels. 4. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. 5. B209, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 6. B308, Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6. 7. Standard Structural Shapes. B. American Water Works Association (A WW A) 1. C561, Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates. C. Hydraulic Institute Standards. Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS See slide gate table on the contract drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 15210-3 SLIDE GATES requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Stainless steel slide gates and accessories shall be as manufactured by the following, or approved equal: 1. H. Fontaine Ltd, Magog, Quebec, Canada. 2. Rodney Hunt Company, Orange, Massachusetts. 2.02 GENERAL A. The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. B. Wherever the term "stainless steel" is used in this specification, Type 304 stainless steel is to be used, unless otherwise noted. C. The slide gates shall be complete, including all gates, guides, extended guide frames, yokes, bench stands, baseplates, brackets, anchor bolts, stems, and all other necessary appurtenances. D. Gate manufacturer shall provide proof of at least ten (10) years of experience manufacturing the type of slide gates specified herein. 2.03 SLIDE GATES The slide gates shall be furnished with all necessary accessories for a complete and operable installation. 2.04 FRAME 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SLIDE GATES 15210-4 I Ii II 11 II Ii II I I I I I Ii Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I The frame and benchstand shall be constructed of one-piece, stainless steel members of adequate strength to withstand the maximum service loads and still maintain shape. The gate guides shall be of a sandwiched type construction built of plates, angles and formed shapes and shall incorporate UHMWPE or other friction reducing feature that shall reduce the coefficient of friction to less than 0.2. The guide slot shall engage the disc plate a minimum of 1 inch. The frame shall be face-mounted (as shown on the contract drawings); Type 316 stainless steel epoxy grouted anchors shall be an integral part of the guide section. The frame and actuator yoke members shall be of sufficient strength to support the actuator without additional reinforcement and shall be designed so that applied loads will be transmitted directly from the gate disc stiffeners through the guide to the concrete without subjecting the gate disc to the full shear force of the applied load. 2.05 GATE DISC The gate disc shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch thick and shall be of sufficient size to completely seal the opening as shown in the construction drawings when in the fully lowered position. The gate disc shall be reinforced such that the plate will not deflect more than 1/360 of the span of the gate under maximum head and will not deflect such that it will bind in the frame. 2.06 SEALS A specially molded resilient neoprene seal shall be mounted on the bottom of the gate disc to provide flushbottom closure. The shape of the seal shall provide a seating surface having a minimum width of% inches. The vertical face of the seal shall be in contact with the seating of the guide to provide a proper seal at the corners. All seals shall restrict leakage to the following limits: A. Under a design seating head of less than 20 feet, measured from the gate invert, leakage shall not exceed 0.1 gallons per minute per foot of seating perimeter. B. Under a design unseating head ofless than 10 feet, measured from the gate invert, leakage shall not exceed 0.2 gallons per minute per foot of seating perimeter. 2.07 STEM Stem shall be constructed of carbon steel. Stem threads shall be of the cut Acme type. Stem shall be a minimum of 1 ~ inches in diameter and shall be fitted with an adjustable stop collar provided on the stem(s) to limit both upward and downward travel. Stem shall be designed to withstand twice the rated output of the operator and shall have stem guides to limit the L/r of the stem to 200. 2.08 GATE OPERATORS A. Slide Gate Operators 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15210-5 SLIDE GATES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Handwheel or Crank Operated - Unless otherwise scheduled or shown on the Drawings, all gates shall have handwheel or crank-operated floorstands or benchstands. a. Handwheel operated type shall be without gear reduction and crank operated type shall be geared. b. Both types shall have weatherproof housings with a solid bronze operating nut mounted on high-strength cast iron pedestals or base plates. c. The operating nut for each type shall be internally threaded with threads corresponding to stem threading. d. Tapered roller or ball bearings shall be provided for both types, above and below a flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. e. All gears shall be constructed of steel and shall be accurately machine cut and of proper design to provide smooth operation and to support load conditions. Lubrication fittings shall be provided in the gear housing to permit lubrication of all gears and bearings. f. All reduction gear cases shall be precision machined and equipped with tapered roller or needle bearings and sealed about all reduction shafts. g. Geared hoists shall have a 4: 1 ratio and handwheel hoists shall have 1: 1 ratio. h. Each hoist shall be supplied with a 2-inch square operating nut, and either a removable cast iron crank arm with revolving brass grip or a removable cast iron or steel handwheel as required. 1. Floorstands shall include a cast iron pedestal designed to position the input shaft approximately 36 inches above the operating floor. J. An arrow with the word "Open" will be permanently attached or cast on the floorstand indicating the direction of rotation to open the gate. k. All geared and handwheel floorstands shall operate with a maximum effort not to exceed 40 pounds on the crank or handwheel. B. Identification Tagging Requirements: 15210-6 SLIDE GATES Ii I Ii 11 Ii Ii Ii II Ii II Ii I II Ii I; II 1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. For each gate operator, 1 Y2-inch minimum diameter heavy brass tag, bearing the gate tag number shown in the schedule. 2. Attach the tags to the operator by soldered split key rings so that ring and tag cannot be removed. No adhesives are permitted. Use block type numbers and letters with 1I4-inch minimum high numbers and letters stamped on and filled with black enamel. 2.09 APPURTENANCES A. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel sized by equipment manufacturer at least Y2 inch in diameter, or as shown, and as specified in Section 05500, MISCELLANEOUS METALS. 2.10 SHOPIFACTORY FINISHING A. Coat all surfaces in contact with concrete with an unthinned bitumastic paint. Prepare surface with cleaning solvent per manufacturer's recommendations or insulate with suitable protective neoprene gasket material. 2.11 PAINTING AND COATINGS Surface preparation, shop painting, field painting and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section09901-PAINTING AND COATING -PROCESS SYSTEMS. PART 3 EXECUTION All gates shall be installed in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with detailed instructions supplied by the gate manufacturer. 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The slide gates shall be completely shop-assembled to ensure the proper fit and adjustment of all parts. B. All gates shall be thoroughly cleaned and installed in strict conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Gates shall be installed using the existing bolts, supplemented by additional, new bolts as determined necessary by gate manufacturer. All new anchor bolts and necessary bolt setting plates shall be provided by the manufacturer. Two nuts shall be provided for each anchor bolt. New anchor bolts shall be epoxy grouted, Type 316 stainless steel, by HIL TI, or equal, furnished by the 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15210-7 SLIDE GATES gate manufacturer, and shall be drilled and epoxy grouted into the existing concrete. Threads shall be protected and shall be cleaned and coated with an antigalling compound before the nuts are attached and tightened. C. The installation of all parts shall be done in a workmanlike manner and in accordance with detailed technical installation procedures supplied by the gate manufacturer. D. Sealant, as recommended by the gate manufacturer, shall be applied between frame and wall to produce a watertight seal. 3.02 TESTING A. The completely assembled slide gates, in the vertical position, shall be shop inspected for proper seating. 1. The Engineer shall be notified a minimum often (10) days in advance of this shop inspection so that he may witness the shop inspection, if desired. 2. Gate components shall be machined and!or adjusted to meet equipment design tolerances previously specified. 3. The gate disc shall be fully opened and closed in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely and that the required clearance between the disc tongue and gate guide groove is maintained at all times. B. Field tests shall be conducted on all gates to verify compliance with all seating tolerances and leakage requirements. 3.03 MANUFACTURERS' SERVICES AND CERTIFICA TE(S) A. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the fmal acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. B. Provide manufacturer's certification letter indicating that gates were installed and tested in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation and that gate and actuator operation and maintenance instructions were provided to Owner's representatives. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 SLIDE GATES 15210-8 I I I I I I I I I 1\ I: II I I I] II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 15220 SLUICE GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK This section includes provisions for the complete installation of stainless steel sluice gates and appurtenances as shown in the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. A. Manufacturer to furnish and deliver, F.O.B., self-contained and conventional type sluice gates, as shown on the Contract Drawings. B. Like items of equipment specified herein shall be the end products of one manufacturer in order to achieve standardization for operation, maintenance, spare parts, and manufacturer's service. C. A manufacturer's representative for the equipment specified herein shall provide three (3) days of service for measurement of bolt locations installation assistance, inspection, and certification of the in~tallation. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS The specification sections listed below are an integral part of this equipment specification, and the Contractor shall be responsible for providing these sections to the equipment suppliers. A. Section 01340 - PROJECT SUBMITTALS AND ACCEPTANCE B. Section 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS C. Section 01600 - MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT D. Section 01660 - EQUIPMENT START-UP AND INITIAL OPERATION E. Section 01700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT F. Section 01730 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS G. Section 01740 - WARRANTIES AND BONDS H. Section 01800 - TRAINING I. Section 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE J. Section 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS K. Section 09901 - PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS 1.03 SUBMITTALS Submit to the ENGINEER, in accordance with Section 01340, copies of all materials required to establish compliance with this Section. Submittals shall include at least the following: A. Shop drawings 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15220-1 SLUICE GATES B. 1.04 REFERENCES 1. Make, model, and weight of each equipment assembly. 2. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, and identification of materials of construction. 3. Detailed Structural and Mechanical Drawings showing the equipment fabrications and interface with other items. Include dimensions, size, and locations of connections to other work, and weights of associated equipment associated therewith. 4. Gate operator and stem calculations for each gate and service condition. 5. Gate opening and closing thrust forces that will be transmitted to the support structure with operator at extreme positions and load. 6. Performance Test Procedures. Information Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance. 2. Special shipping, storage 'and protection, and handling instructions. 3. Manufacturer's written/printed installation instructions. 4. Routine maintenance requirements prior to plant startup. 5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation in accordance with Section 01600, Materials AND EQUIPMENT. 6. Operation and Maintenance manuals: As specified In Section 01730, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE Manuals. 7. Service records for maintenance performed during construction. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the products herein specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed organizations. A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM). 1. A36/ A36M, Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A48, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15220-2 SLUICE GATES I Ii II 11 Ii Ii II I Ii I Ii Ii I I Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. A276, Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Bars and Shapes. B. American Water Works Association (A WW A) 1. C560, Cast-Iron Slide Gates. 2. C561, Fabricated Stainless Steel Slide Gates C. Hydraulic Institute Standards. Where reference is made to a standard of one of the above, or other organizations, the version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OR CONDITIONS A. The sluice gates shall be substantially watertight under the design head conditions. 1. The leakage shall not exceed 0.10 gallon per minute per foot of periphery for the rated seating and 0.20 gpm/ft of periphery for unseating of the gate in accordance with A WW A C-560. B. F or the purpose of these specifications, gate types listed in the schedule shall be defmed as meeting the ,leakage requirements under the head conditions on the table shown on the contract drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All the equipment specified under this Section shall be furnished by a single manufacturer, and shall be standard units of proven ability as manufactured by a competent organization that is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the manufacture of the equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practice and methods, and shall operate satisfactorily when installed. B. All equipment furnished under this Section shall be new and unused and shall be the standard products of manufacturers having a successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems specified herein for a minimum of five (5) years. C. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is required, but do not cover all details which may vary in accordance with the exact requirements of the equipment as offered. They are, however, intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation, field testing and field calibration of all 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15220-3 SLUICE GATES materials and apparatus as required. Any additional equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not specifically mentioned in these Specifications or shown on the Drawings shall be furnished and installed at no change in Contract Price or Time. 1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE All equipment delivered and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather, humidity, and temperature variations; dirt and dust; or other contaminants in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS Slide gates and accessories shall be as manufactured by the following, or approved equal: 1. 2. H. Fontaine Ltd, Magog, Quebec, Canada. HydroGate. 2.02 GENERAL A. Wherever the term "stainless steel" is used in this specification, Type 304 stainless steel is to be used, unless otherwise noted. B. The slide gates shall be complete, including all gates, guides, extended guide frames, yokes, bench stands, baseplates, brackets, anchor bolts, stems, and all other necessary appurtenances. C. Gate manufacturer shall provide proof of at least ten (10) years of experience manufacturing the type of slide gates specified herein. 2.03 EQUIPMENT DESIGN AND F ABRICA TION A. Sluice Gates 1. General sluice gates shall be stainless steel and shall be designed to withstand the design head shown in the schedule. a. Liberal safety factors shall be used in the design of all the equipment. Working stresses shall not exceed the lower valve of one-third (1/3) of the yield strength or one-fifth (115) of the ultimate strength of the material. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15220-4 SLUICE GATES I Ii Ii I II II II Ii I II Ii II I II Ii Ii II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. The slide or disc shall be designed with a minimum safety factor of 6. c. The sluice gates and operators shall be completely shop assembled, inspected and tested to ensure proper fit and adjustment of all parts. 2. Frame - The gate frame shall be of stainless steel and shall be constructed of structural members or formed plate welded to form a rigid one-piece frame. The frame shall be of the integral flange back design suitable for mounting on a concrete wall or wall thimble as indicated herein or on the Drawings. a. The frame configuration shall be of the flush-bottom type and shall allow the replacement of the top and side seals without removing the gate frame from the wall or wall thimble. b. Guide frames for all self-contained gates shall be designed and adequately stiffened for the maximum thrust that the operator can exert on the frame. 3. Wall Thimbles - Wall thimbles shall be stainless steel and supplied by the gate manufacturer. Refer to the gate schedule for types and applicable locations. Material thickness should be according to the manufacturer's recommendations and be of sufficient resistance to handle the operating forces. 4. Slide - The slide shall consist of a flat plate reinforced with formed plates or structural members to limit its deflection to 1/720 of the gate's span under the design head. 5. Guides and Seals - The guides shall be made of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) and shall be of such length as to retain and support at least two thirds (2/3) of the vertical height of the slide in the fully open position. Side and top seals shall be made of UHMWPE (ultra high molecular weight polyethylene) of the self-adjusting type. A continuous compression cord shall ensure contact between the UHMWPE guide and the gate in all positions. The sealing system shall maintain efficient sealing in any position of the slide and allow the water to flow only below the slide plate. The flush bottom seal shall be made of resilient neoprene set into the bottom member of the frame. 15220-5 SLUICE GATES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 I 6. Ii Ii Stem and Couplings - The operating stem shall be of stainless steel designed to transmit in compression at least 2 times the rated output of the operating manual mechanism with a 40 lb (178 N) effort on the crank or handwheel. The stem shall have a slenderness ratio (UR) less than 200. The threaded portion of the stem shall have machine cut threads of the Acme type. II Where a hydraulic, pneumatic or electric operator is used, the stem design force shall not be less than 1.25 times the output thrust of the hydraulic or pneumatic cylinder with a pressure equal to the maximum working pressure of the supply, or 1.25 times the output thrust of the electric motor in the stalled condition. II Ii a. For stems in more than one piece and with a diameter of 1 % inches (45 mm) and larger, the different sections shall be joined together by solid couplings. The couplings shall be grooved and keyed and shall be of greater strength than the stem. Stems with a diameter smaller than 1 % inches (45 mm) shall be pinned to an extension tube. Ii Ii Ii II I b. Gates having a width equal to or greater than two times their height shall be provided with two lifting mechanisms connected by a tandem shaft. II 7. Stem Guides - Stem guides shall be equipped with a UHMWPE bushing. Guides shall be adjustable and spaced in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation. The L/R ratio shall not be greater than 200. II II II I 8. Pipe Covers - Rising stem gates shall be provided with a clear polycarbonate stem cover. The stem cover shall have a cap and condensation vents and a clear mylar position indicating tape. The tape shall be field applied to the stem cover after the gate has been installed and positioned. II II II , II I B. Standard Sluice Gate Options 1. Flush Bottom Seal - Gates so scheduled or detailed on the Drawings shall be provided with a slide or frame mounted flush bottom seal. a. The solid bulb, compressible, resilient seal shall be attached and held in place by stainless steel or retainers having stainless steel fasteners. 15220-6 SLUICE GATES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 b. The full length of the bottom edge of the disc shall be machined for mounting of the seal or for making uniform contact with the seal when it is mounted on the frame. 2. Self-Contained Gates - Self-contained sluice gates shall have extended side guides to allow the gate to fully open. a. The stainless steel yoke, attached to machined pads on the side guides, shall have a machined bearing surface for the stem thrust collar or a mounting plate for the hoist. b. The gate operating thrust shall be transferred to the yoke by the stem thrust collar or hoist. c. On gates arranged for non-rising stem operation, a bronze thrust nut, in a nut pocket at the tope of the disc, shall engage the stem threads and open and close the gate disc as it travels along the operating stem. d. The stem shall not project into the clear opening of the sluice gate. A cold rolled carbon steel extension stem coupled to the operating stem shall be provided when the operating floor is above the gate. e. On gates arranged for rising stem operation, the threaded operating nut shall be at the gate yoke. f. Unless otherwise scheduled or detailed on the Drawings, all self- contained sluice gates shall be of the rising stem type. 3. Modulating Service - All sluice gates scheduled or detailed on the Drawings for modulating service shall have a cast nylon operating nut and polished stainless steel stem. a. A bronze liner shall also be provided in the guide groove and on the disc tongue. b. All modulating sluice gates shall have extended side guides to allow the gate to fully open and shall operate with a smooth, even, uniform movement without jerking, binding or twisting. C. Sluice Gate Operators 15220-7 SLUICE GATES 03720-022-01 October, 2007 1. Handwheel or Crank Operated - Unless otherwise scheduled or shown on the Drawings, all gates shall have handwheel or crank-operated floorstands or benchstands. a. Handwheel operated type shall be without gear reduction and crank operated type shall be geared. b. Both types shall have weatherproof housings with a solid bronze operating nut mounted on high-strength cast iron pedestals or base plates. c. The operating nut for each type shall be internally threaded with threads corresponding to stem threading. d. Tapered roller or ball bearings shall be provided for both types, above and below a flange on the operating nut to support both opening and closing thrusts. e. All gears shall be constructed of steel and shall be accurately machine cut and of proper design to provide smooth operation and to support load conditions. Lubrication fittings shall be provided in the gear housing to permit lubrication of all gears and bearings. f. All reduction gear cases shall be precision machined and equipped with tapered roller or needle bearings and sealed about all reduction shafts. g. Geared hoists shall have a 4:1 ratio and handwheel hoists shall have 1: 1 ratio. h. Each hoist shall be supplied with a 2-inch square operating nut, and either a removable cast iron crank arm with revolving brass grip or a removable cast iron or steel handwheel as required. 1. Floorstands shall include a cast iron pedestal designed to position the input shaft approximately 36 inches above the operating floor. J. An arrow with the word "Open" will be permanently attached or cast on the floorstand indicating the direction of rotation to open the gate. k. All geared and handwheel floorstands shall operate with a maximum effort not to exceed 40 pounds on the crank or handwheel. 15220-8 SLUICE GATES I: I I] Ii II II I: Ii II II II II II If Ii Ii II II Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2.04 DATA NOT SPECIFIED A. Data not specified in this section shall be the manufacturer's standard for the size equipment specified. 2.05 APPURTENANCES A. Lifting Lugs: Furnish suitably attached for equipment assemblies and components weighing over 100 pounds. B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A193, Type 316 stainless steel sized by equipment manufacturer at least ~ inch in diameter, or as shown, and as specified in Section 05500, MISCELLANEOUS METALS. ' 2.06 SHOP/F ACTORY FINISHING A. Coat all surfaces in contact with concrete with an unthinned bitumastic paint. Prepare surface with cleaning solvent per manufacturer's recommendations or insulate with suitable protective neoprene gasket material. 2.07 PAINTING AND COATINGS Surface preparation, shop painting, field pamtmg and other pertinent detailed painting specifications shall be in accordance with Section 09901 PAINTING AND COATING - PROCESS SYSTEMS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mounting of Sluice Gates - Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or in the sluice gate schedule, wall thimbles shall be furnished for all sluice gates. 1. Wall thimbles shall be stainless steel, one-piece construction, of adequate section to withstand all operational and installation stresses. 2. Wall thimbles shall be internally braced during concrete placement. 3. A center ring or water stop shall be cast around the periphery of the thimble. 4. The front flange shall be machined and have tapped holes for the sluice gate attaching studs and metal stamped vertical centerlines with the word "Top" for correct alignment. 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 15220-9 SLUICE GATES 5. Rectangular and square thimbles with an overall width greater that 36 inches shall be provided with holes in the invert to allow satisfactory concrete placement beneath the thimble. Holes shall be on centers of 24 inches or less. A permanent gasket of uniform thickness or mastic shall be used to form a seal between the front face of the thimble and back of the gate frame. 6. B. Wall thimble mountings of sluice gates shall conform to one of the following types, as indicated on the sluice gate schedule: Type I Type II Type III F-section wall thimble having a length equal to the wall thickness. E-section wall thimble having a length equal to the wall thickness. Flanged-by-mechanical-joint wall thimble. The mechanical-joint portion of the wall thimble shall extend beyond the exterIor of the wall a sufficient distance to allow for joint restrainers to be installed as required for the associated pipeline. Flange-and-bell wall thimble. Bell portion shall be spigot and of a standard cast iron pipe; Class "B" bells per ASA 21.2 shall be furnished. F -section wall thimble butted to standard flange and bell adaptor for concrete pipe. The wall thimble to adaptor joint shall be made within the concrete wall as shown on the Drawings. E-section wall thimble butted to standard flange and bell adaptor for concrete pipe. The E-section shall be bolted or clamped to the adaptor as shown on the Contract Drawings. The joint shall be made within the concrete wall. See Drawings for special mounting details. Type IV Type V Type VI Type VII C. The sluice gate equipment and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the installation manual furnished by the gate manufacturer. 1. Care should be used in the handling, storage and installation of this equipment to prevent damage or distortion to the equipment and to ensure proper performance. D. All bolts, studs and nuts, required for the setting of the sluice gates and operating stands shall be silicon bronze. 1. Bolts shall be at least 5/8-inch in diameter. 3.02 TESTING 03720-022-01 October, 2007 A. The completely assembled sluice gate, in the vertical position, shall be shop inspected for proper seating. 15220-10 SLUICE GATES I I II II II I Ii II I Ii II II I I Ii Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 1. The Engineer shall be notified 10 days in advance of this shop inspection so that he may witness the shop inspection, if desired. 2. Seat facings shall be machined and wedges adjusted to meet equipment design tolerances previously specified. 3. The gate disc shall be fully opened and closed in its guide system to ensure that it operates freely and that the required clearance between the disc tongue and gate guide groove maintained at all times. 4. Field test shall be conducted on all gates to verify compliance with all seating tolerances and leakage requirements. 3.03 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES AND CERTIFICATE(S) A. The Contractor shall arrange for the equipment manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative in accordance with Section 01600. B. The Contractor shall arrange for the manufacturer to furnish the services of a qualified representative as necessary to check and supervise the equipment installation; to supervise the final acceptance test and the initial operation; and to instruct the Owner's operator in operations, proper maintenance and repairs. The number of days for each of the manufacturer's services shall be as summarized in Table 1 located in Specification Section 01600. C. A written report covering the representative's findings and installation approval shall be mailed directly to the Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 15220-11 SLUICE GATES I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SECTION 16401 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED The work includes furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary for a complete corrosion-resistant and operable electrical installation, including all fees, charges and permits necessary. Work of this section includes electrical installation requirements for equipment of other sections. A. The Contractor shall provide temporary and permanent electrical services of proper voltage and phase as required for the Project All single-phase temporary receptacle outlets shall be provided with ground fault protection per NEC Article 305-6. B. The Contractor shall coordinate the work of this section with others involved in the construction of the project. 1.02 RELATED WORK A. The provisions of all other technical sections of the specifications are fully applicable to this section as if incorporated herein. B. Division 0 and Division 1 of these specifications are a part of this section as if incorporated herein. 1.03 PERMITS AND FEES The Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits and inspections required for the work of this section and pay all charges incidental thereto. The Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 REFERENCES The work shall conform to local codes, rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction and to applicable provisions of the latest edition or revision of the following standards, except as modified herein. ' A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C2 National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) C12.16 Solid-State Electricity Meters C39.1 Requirements, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments C50.10 Rotating Electrical Machinery 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 C62.41 Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits Specification for Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated HID Lamp Ballasts C62.45 C80.1 C82.9 B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) A153 Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware B8 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors; Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft C. Federal Specifications and Standards (FSS) A-A-50552 Fittings for Cable, Power, Electrical and Conduit, Metal, Flexible A-A-50553 Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall (EMT) Type) A-A-50563A Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps, Electrical A-A-55809 Insulation Tape, Electrical, Pressure-Sensitive, Plastic A-A-55810 Conduit, Metal, Flexible A-A-59213 Splice Connectors A-A-59544 Cable and Wire, Electrical (Power, Fixed Installation) W-C-375C Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service W..,C-596G(2) Connector, Electrical Power, (Plug, Receptac,le and Cable Outlet) W-P-115C Panel, Power Distribution W-S-896F(1) Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-Mounted (General Specification) D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) ICS 1 Industrial Controls and Systems ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems MG 1 Motors and Generators PB 1 Panel Boards ST 20 Dry- Type Transformer for General Applications TC 2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit TC 3 PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing WD 1 General Purpose Wiring Devices E. National Fire Protection Association (NFP A) 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 101 Life Safety Code F. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 67 Panelboards 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 16401-2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - I Ii II II II II II Ii Ii II Ii II II II II II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 360 Liquid- Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 489 Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 498 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 508 Industrial Control Equipment 510 PVC, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 514A Metallic Outlet Boxes 514B Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings 514C Non-metallic Outlet Boxes, Flush-Devices Boxes and Covers 651 Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Steel 1029 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 1449 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit G. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 117 Test Procedure for Evaluation of Systems of Insulating Materials for Random- Wound AC Electric Machinery 519 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems 1.05 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall submit a complete list of materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work to the Engineer within 30 days after the Award of Contract. A. The list shall include catalog numbers, cut sheets, diagrams, and other descriptive data required to demonstrate conformance to the specifications. Partial lists will not 'be acceptable. B. The basis of acceptance shall be the manufacturer's published ratings for the equipment. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in manufacture of products specified. 1.06 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings shall be submitted for the following items of equipment: 1. Wiring Devices 2. Safety Switches 3. Circuit Breakers 4. Motors 5. Motor Starters 6. Relays 7. Control Devices 8. Transformers 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 16401-3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 9. Concrete Posts/Po1es 10. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors 11. Concrete Handholes and Pull Boxes B. Contents of the shop drawings shall include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Details of construction, outline and assembly drawings Dimensions ' Materials Finish Ratings Accessories Trim Engineering data Ladder type schematic control diagrams and wiring diagrams Calculations for harmonic current and voltage distortion 8. 1.07 MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE Manufacturer's literature shall be submitted for the equipment listed in Article 1.06 above, including the following: A. Written description of equipment function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions. B. Recommended assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and calibration instructions. C. Operating instructions. D. Guide to troubleshooting. E. Maintenance instructions and timetables. F. Parts List with identification to assembly drawing. 1.08 CERTIFICATION/DOCUMENTATION Transient voltage surge suppressor submittals shall include the following: A. UL 1449 peak let-through voltage documentation. B. Category C3 peak let-through voltage test results. 1.09 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Prior to final acceptance of this project, an operation and maintenance manual shall be submitted to the Engineer. The manual shall include manufacturer's literature as outlined in Article 1.07 above, 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS II , I II II IJ Ii Ii I II II Ii II II II II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I drawings corrected per shop drawing review comments and as-built modifications, and lists of suppliers and!or service shops that can provide parts and accessories and equipment repair for the items of equipment listed in Article 1.06 above. The lists shall include a contact name, telephone number and address. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver materials with manufacturer's tags and labels and UL labels intact. Deliver packaged material in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, brand and UL label. Store materials and equipment in a dry, clean location. Handle and store so as to avoid damage. Remove items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted or unlabeled condition from the project site immediately. A. The Contractor shall provide suitable protection of materials and equipment from dust and moisture. The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of materials and equipment until acceptance by the Owner. 1.11 WARRANTY All equipment and materials supplied shall be warranted against defective design, materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one year, or as specified herein, against normal use. The warranty period shall begin once the total project is accepted by the Owner and shall cover replacement of equipment and/or repair, including labor, travel time, and miscellaneous expenses at no cost to the Owner for the full warranty period. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. All material and equipment shall be new, approved and labeled, where required, by UL. Only products by manufacturers regularly engaged in production of specified units will be acceptable. B. Where two or more units are required which perform the same function or are of the same class of equipment or materials, provide all units from a single manufacturer. C. Provide materials and equipment of suitable composition to perform satisfactorily when exposed to corrosive conditions of project site. 1. Provide breather and drain fittings in all raceways and enclosures where necessary to prevent condensation or trapping of moisture. 2. Provide heaters in all control panels to prevent condensation. 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 16401-5 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2.02 03720-022-01 October, 2007 CONDUIT A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Rigid metal conduit shall be zinc-coated steel and shall conform to UL 6. Fittings shall be cast or malleable iron, zinc-coated, and shall conform to FSS A-A-50563A and UL 514B. 9. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit, elbows and fittings shall be coated with a bonded polyvinyl chloride which is permanently fused on at the factory. a. Above ground conduit system PVC coating shall have a minimum thickness of 40 mils. Couplings and condulets shall have overlapping pressure sealing sleeves. b. Below ground conduit system PVC coating shall have a minimum thickness of 20 mils. c. Below ground conduit system PVC coating for extreme corrosive conditions shall have a minimum thickness of20 mils and shall have both external and internal bonded coatings. B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit: Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride compound and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651. Conduit shall be sunlight resistant, rated for uSe with 90 oC conductors. Fittings shall be of the same polyvinyl chloride compound, of the same manufacture as the conduit and shall conform to NEMA TC-3 and UL 514B. Conduit and fittings shall be joined by means of a solvent cement. Type of cement and procedure for application shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Conduit shall be Carlon Plus 40 and Plus 80, or equal. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing: Electrical metallic tubing shall be zinc-coated steel and shall conform to UL 797. Fittings shall be compression type and shall conform to FSS A-A-50553. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible metal conduit shall be zinc-coated steel and shall conform to FSS A-A-55810. Fittings shall conform to FSS A-A-50552. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be made with galvanized steel flexible conduit covered with an extruded PVC jacket. 1. Fittings shall be compression type specifically designed for use with flexible conduit and shall form watertight connections. Box connectors shall have "0" ring between the fitting body and the enclosure. F. Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit: Liquidtight flexible nonmetallic conduit shall be an assembly of a hard PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVc. Conduit shall conform to UL 1660 for use as indicated in Article 351 of the NEC and 16401-6 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I II - I Ii . I II II II II II II II I' II I Ii II II I] Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I shall be sunlight resistant. 1. Fittings shall be compression type designed for use with the flexible conduit. Box connectors shall have "0" ring between the fitting body and the enclosure. 2. Conduit shall be "Carflex" manufactured by Carlon, or equal. 2.03 BOXES A. General: Boxes shall be sized as recommended by the NEC or as shown on the drawings. 1. Electrical boxes shall be stainless steel NEMA 4X or as shown on the drawings. 2. Electrical boxes installed in hazardous locations as identified on drawings shall be NEMA 7 rated boxes. 3. Electrical box covers shall be gasketed for watertight seal. B. Outlet Boxes: Outlet boxes shall be sheet steel, cast metal or nonmetallic. 1. Sheet steel boxes shall be cadmium-coated or zinc-coated. 2. Cast metal boxes shall conform to FSS A-A-50563A. 3. Non-metallic boxes shall conform to UL 514C. 4. Fixture outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be 4-inch, octagonal. 5. Switch and receptacle outlet boxes shall be 2 inches wide by 4 inches high by 2 inches deep. 6. Junction box extensions and covers shall conform to UL 514A. 7. Boxes installed in wet locations or on exterior surfaces shall be stainless steel NEMA 4X gasketed type boxes. 2.04 WIRING DEVICES A. Toggle Switches: Toggle switches shall be specification grade and shall conform to FSS W -S-896F( 1) and shall be totally enclosed with bodies of molded compound and a mounting strap. 1. Handles shall be brown. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-7 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Wiring terminals shall be screw type, back- or side-wired. 3. Switches shall be rated, quiet type, 20 amperes, 277 volts. 4. Switches shall be suitable for control of tungsten filament lamp loads with "T" marking of UL. 5. No more than one switch is allowed in a single gang position of a switch box. B. Receptacles: Receptacles shall be specification grade and shall conform to FSS W -C- 596G(2), NEMA WD-1 and UL 498. 1. Single and duplex receptacles for general purpose use shall be heavy duty specification grade, 20 amperes, 125 volts, three wire grounding, NEMA configuration 5-20R. 2. Special purpose single receptacles shall be heavy duty specification grade, 20 amperes, 250 volts, three wire grounding, NEMA configuration 6-20R, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 3. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amperes, 125 volts, three wire grounding, NEMA configuration 5-20R. a. Receptacles shall have a nominal sensitivity to ground leakage current of 4 to 6 milliamps and shall function to interrupt the current supply for any value of ground leakage current exceeding the trip level of 4 to 6 milliamps on the load side of the receptacle with a maximum tripping time of 1I30th of a second. b. Receptacles shall provide protection for any device connected to the circuit beyond the receptacle. c. Receptacles shall have test and reset buttons accessible on the face of the receptacle. 4. Receptacles shall be suitable for mounting in a standard outlet box, and shall have a high-impact nylon face. 5. Wiring terminals shall be screw type, back- or side-wired. 6. Receptacles shall be Leviton, Hubbell, or approved equal. 2.05 DEVICE PLATES Cover Plates: Cover plates shall conform to UL 514A. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-8 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I II II I Ii II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I A. Furnish one-piece type to suit devices installed, with round or beveled edges. B. Weatherproof cover plates shall be spring-loaded gasketed type with individual cover for each outlet or switch. C. Waterproof cover plates shall have screw cap for each outlet. Plug shall have matching screw attachment to maintain rating when plug is attached. Screw cap shall be permanently attached to cover plate by chain. A matching plug shall be provided for each cover plate. D. Zinc-coated steel or cast metal plates shall be used on unfinished walls. E. Satin fInish stainless steel plates shall be used on finished walls. F. Provide metal screws with countersunk heads and finish to match finish of plate. 2.06 WIRE AND CABLE A. Conductors: All conductors shall be annealed soft drawn copper, conforming to ASTM B8, FSS A-A-59544, UL 83, and the latest requirements of the NEe All conductors shall have THW or THWN type insulation, rated at 600 volts, unless specifically noted otherwise. 1. Other types of insulation may be used as permitted by the NEC. The Contractor shall be responsible for change in conduit size and conductor size to maintain ampacity of circuit. 2. Wire #8 A WG and larger shall be stranded concentric lay. Wire sizes #14, #12, and #10 A WG shall be stranded for control and motor power and solid for light and receptacle circuits. 3. Conductors shall be as manufactured by Senator Wire & Cable Company, Laribee Wire Manufacturing Company, Inc., Southwire Company, or equal. B. Conductor splices shall conform to FSS A-A-592,13. Acceptable: Scotchcast Splicing Kit, Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Plastic tape shall conform to FSS A-A-55809. 2.07 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Safety switches shall be NEMA heavy-duty type and UL listed. Switches shall be rated as indicated on the drawings. 1. All switches shall have switch blades which are fully visible in the OFF position when the door is open. Switches shall have permanently attached arc 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 16401-9 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS suppressors, hinged or otherwise attached to permit easy access to line-side lugs without removal of the arc suppressor. Lugs shall be UL listed for copper and aluminum cables and front removable. All current-carrying parts shall be plated by electrolytic processes. 2. Switches shall have a quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism which shall be an integral part of the box, not the cover. Padlocking provisions shall be provided for padlocking in the OFF position only, with at least three padlocks. Switches shall have a dual-cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the ON position or closing of the switch mechanism with the door open. B. Enclosures: Switches installed indoors shall be furnished in NEMA 1 general- purpose enclosure with knockouts, unless otherwise specified. Switches located outdoors shall be furnished in NEMA 3R or NEMA 4X enclosures as indicated on the drawings. Switches located within Class 1, Division 2 environments as defmed by NEC 500 shall be furnished in NEMA 7 explosion proof enclosures. 1. Covers on NEMA 1 enclosures shall be attached with butt-type pin hinges. 2. NEMA 3R switches through 200 amperes shall be provided with closing caps and!or interchangeable hubs as required. Rain-tight covers shall be securable in the open position. 3. NEMA 4X switches shall be furnished in stainless steel enclosures without knockouts. The means of sealing the cover shall be positive, with 30 through 200 ampere switches having quick release latches with pin type hinges and gaskets. Enclosures shall be of Code gauge stainless steel. 4. NEMA 7 switches shall be the cast metallic type with threaded conduit openings located in the end walls. C. The switchjaws shall be multi-spring type for positive grip of the switch blades. The fuse clips shall be spring-reinforced, positive pressure type or electrolytic copper. D. Switches shall be as manufactured by Square D, General Electric, Cutler- Hammer/Westinghouse, ITE, or approved equal. All switches shall be of the same manufacture. 2.08 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Provide molded case thermal magnetic circuit breakers of the type, size and electrical characteristics as specified or indicated on the drawings. Circuit breakers used as service entrance disconnects shall be suitable and rated as service entrance equipment. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-10 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I Ii II II I Ii II I I Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I, I I I I I I I B. Circuit breakers shall be of single unit c4i>nstruction, and multi-pole circuit breakers shall have trip elements in each pole with common trip bar. Frame size 225 amperes of larger shall have adjustable magnetic instantaneous trip and shall have interchangeable thermal magnetic trip units. C. Shunt trip shall be installed in circuit breakers where required by drawings or specifications. D. Circuit breaker interrupting ratings shall be equal to the available short circuit current at the point of installation with the minimum ratings as follows: Frame Size 100 A 225 A 400A 800A 1200 A 240 V 18,000 25,000 42,000 42,000 42,000 480V 14,000 22,000 30,000 30,000 30,000 E. Provide NEMA Type 1 enclosures for general duty indoor use. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel for exterior locations unless indicated otherwise. F. Circuit breakers shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer/Westinghouse, or approved equal. 2.09 MOTORS A. Motors shall be provided with equipment driven, unless otherwise indicated or specified, and shall conform to the latest requirements ofNEMA, IEEE, ANSI, NEC, and Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA) standards, where applicable. B. Motors shall be of sufficient capacity to operate the driven equipment, under all load and operating conditions, without exceeding 100% of the motor's nameplate horsepower rating, excluding service factor, and without exceeding the motor's rated temperature limits. C. Motors shall be furnished with permanent, highly visible stainless steel nameplates. Nameplates shall include all motor ratings, accessories and special features. D. For motors located within hazardous locations as identified on the drawings, motor housings and electrical connection boxes shall be NEMA 7 rated. E. Motors may be single-speed, multi-speed or part winding as required for the application. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-11 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS J. K. L. M. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 F. Multi-speed motors shall be designed for operation at one of two or more speeds and shall have separate windings for each speed. G. 3Part winding motors shall be designed for part winding starting and shall have two sets of identical windings suitable for parallel operation. H. Motors for variable speed applications shall be designed for operation at the rated maximum speed and at reduced speed throughout the variable speed range, without overloading. Motors for variable speed operation shall be compatible with the associated variable speed control equipment and operating conditions including the effects of harmonic current and voltage distortion. Motors for variable speed operation shall be equipped with a normally closed automatic reset winding thermostat in addition to all accessory equipment recommended by the variable speed equipment manufacturer. Thermostat leads shall be brought to the motor connection box. I. Motors shall be NEMA design B, unless otherwise indicated or specified, and shall be suitable for continuous duty operation. Motor currents and torque shall be in accordance with NEMA MGl-12.34 and MGl-12.37. 1. Three-phase, single-speed, squirrel-cage induction motors less than 50 HP shall be rated 208-230/460 volt for use on 208,240 or 480 volt, three-phase, 60 Hz systems. 2. Multi-speed motors and motors 50 HP and larger may be single voltage as required for the particular voltage. 3. Single-phase general-purpose induction motors shall be split-phase or capacitor start rated 115/230-208 volt, single-phase, 60 Hz. Motors 10 HP and larger shall be NEMA design M. Motors smaller than 10 HP shall be NEMA design L or N. Motor currents and torque shall be in accordance with NEMA MGl-12.31, MGl-12.32 and MGl-12.33. Motors shall be provided with Class F non-hygroscopic insulation system utilizing materials and insulation system evaluated in accordance with IEEE 117 classification tests. Temperature rise shall be limited to a maximum of 80 oC, by resistance, at a service factor of 1.0 in an ambient temperature of 40 oC. Motors shall have multiple dips and bakes of varnish treatment for additional protection. Motors larger than 5 HP shall be provided with locked-rotor current not exceeding NEMA Code letter "G". Motors shall be furnished with a minimum service factor of 1.15. Motors shall be suitable for full voltage across the line type starting, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. 16401-12 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I II II II Ii II I II II II II II I Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I N. 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 Motors shall be equipped with ball, open, single-row, deep-groove Conrad type bearings conforming to the AFBMA Standard 20. Drive end bearings may be cylindrical roller type for belted drives. 1. Bearing life shall be 17,500 hours minimum for belted applications and 100,000 hours minimum for flexible direct-coupled applications. 2. Bearing identification number shall be stamped on motor nameplate. 3. Lubrication system shall consist of a capped grease fitting inlet, a relief plug 180 degrees from inlet, and grease reservoir in bracket and cast inner cap. 4. Bearings shall be greased by manufacturer with a premium moisture-resistant polyuria-thickened grease containing rust inhibitors and suitable for operation over a temperature range of -25 oC to 120 oC. o. Motor enclosure, including frame with integrally-cast feet and!or vertical P-base mounting, end brackets, bearing inner caps, fan guards and conduit box and cover shall be ASTM Type A-48, Class 25 cast iron or better. 1. Conduit box shall be provided with number and size conduit connection, as shown on drawings. Conduit box shall allow rotation to accommodate conduit entrance. Provision for grounding shall be made, utilizing a mounted clamp-type lug in the conduit box. P. Motors shall be equipped with lifting lugs. Motor enclosures shall be equipped with stainless steel screens for all openings in accordance with NEMA MG 1 for guarded machines. Q. Vertical hollow-shaft motors shall be equipped with non-reverse ratchets to prevent backspin. R. Motors shall be NEMA MG 1 open drip-proof, weather-protected type I, totally enclosed fan-cooled or explosion-proof as specified in other sections of the specification or indicated on the drawings. S. Motor enclosure to be NEMA 7 rated where installed in hazardous locations identified on drawings. T. Polyphase motors shall be of an energy-efficient design having a minimum efficiency rating as listed in NEMA MG 1-12.55, Table 12-6C. 1. Motor efficiency shall be determined in accordance with NEMA MG 1- 12.54.1 and IEEE 112, Method B. 16401-13 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 2. Efficiency rating shall be labeled on the motor nameplate in compliance with NEMA MG 1-12.54.2. u. Motors shall be capable of the following starts per hour, unless otherwise specified, without overheating or causing damage to the motor. V. 60 HP and below, 6 starts per hour. 2. Above 60 HP, 4 starts per hour. W. Motors 5 HP and above, except submersible motors, shall be provided with a 120 volt single-phase space heater. Leads shall be brought to the motor terminal box. 2.10 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual Motor Starters: Manual motor starters shall be toggle, key or pushbutton type and shall be equipped with melting alloy overload protection on each pole. B. Fractional horsepower manual motor starters shall be Square D Type F (or equal) single-unit with handle guard!lock-off feature. Handle shall be toggle type unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings. C. Integral horsepower manual motor starters shall be Square D Type M or T (or equal) rated 600 V AC/250 V dc, with lock-off feature and auxiliary contact. Auxiliary contact shall be normally open unless otherwise indicated. Control shall be pushbutton or toggle as indicated on the drawings. D. Manual motor starters shall be provided in surface mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated. d. Type F units mounted outdoors shall be in NEMA 4 cast metal enclosures. e. Type M or T units mounted outdoors shall be in NEMA 4 stainless steel or cast metal enclosures. f. Manual motor starters located in hazardous locations shall be explosion-proof, Crouse-Hinds Series EDS or equal. E. Magnetic Motor Starters: Magnetic motor starters shall be rated in accordance with NEMA Standards, sizes and horsepower ratings. Starters shall be sized for the horsepower ratings as indicat€d on the drawings or required by the driven equipment. Minimum sizes and type of starter shall be as indicated on the drawings and shall have the following features: 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-14 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS II II II II II Ii Ii II I; Ii Ii II I Ii II II II I) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 2. 1. Magnetic starters shall be equipped with double break silver alloy contacts. All contacts shall be replaceable without removing power wiring or removing starter from panel or enclosure. Coils shall be of molded construction. All coils shall be replaceable from the front without removing starter from the panel or enclosure. 3. Overload relays shall be the melting alloy type with a replaceable control module. Thermal units shall be of one-piece construction and inter- changeable. The starter shall be inoperative if the thermal unit is removed. Three-phase starters shall have overload relays in all three phases. Reset button shall be accessible without opening door or panel. Visible trip indication for overload phase indication shall be provided. Relay shall have a form C contact which operates when the overload relay trips; contact shall be wired to terminal blocks for remote use. 4. A phase failure relay shall be provided for all motor starters and shall have solid state sensing circuitry monitoring all three phases. Relay shall have isolated DPDT contacts. Relay shall protect motor against: the loss of one of the three phases; voltage unbalance in excess of 10% rated voltage; phase reversal; and undervoltage, undervoltage shall be adjustable to 75% of rated voltage. Relay shall be Square D Company class 8430 or approved equal. 5. All motor starters shall have their own control power transformer for individual starter control voltage, except where installed in control panels in which a common control power transformer may be incorporated. Control voltage shall be 120 V AC. Control power transformers shall be sized to include motor space heater load, starter or contactor coil, timers, relays and oth~r devices as indicated or specified. Both primary inputs and the ungrounded secondary output of the control power transformer shall be fused. 6. Starters shall be suitable for the addition of at least four external electrical interlocks of any arrangement, normally open or normally closed. Starters shall be supplied with a minimum of two interlock contacts. 7. All magnetic starters shall be provided with terminal blocks for wiring of devices external to starter enclosure. Starter shall be supplied in NEMA 1 enclosure unless otherwise indicated or specified. 8. Starter shall be capable of starting the motor the number of times per hour stated for motors or as required by the pumping sequence, without causing damage to the starter. 9. Panel mounting elapsed time meters shall have six register wheels indicating up to 99,999.9 hours, without reset knob, and be rated at 115 V AC, 60 Hz. Provide one for each motor installed and connect so that the meter will record the time that the motor is energized. 16401-15 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-0 I October, 2007 10. Equip all magnetic controllers and!or starters, unless otherwise noted, with a three-position selector switch, labeled "Hand-Off-Automatic" or as indicated. Switch in Hand position shall start motor. 11. Equip all magnetic controllers and!or starters with indicating lights as follows: green-power on; red-running. 12. A list of overload relay heater elements installed in each starter shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. List shall identify starter by name of equipment and show type, size and model number of heater element. F. Full Voltage Non-reversing Starters (FVNR): Full voltage non-reversing motor starters shall be designed for across-the-line full voltage starting and stopping of squirrel-cage motors, and shall be the combination type with motor circuit protector unless otherwise indicated. 1. The starters shall be rated 600 V AC, 60 Hz. G. Full Voltage Reversing Starters (FVR): Full voltage reversing motor starters shall be designed for across-the-line full voltage starting and stopping of squirrel-cage motors, and shall be the combination type with motor circuit protector unless otherwise indicated. H. The starters shall be rated 600 V AC, 60 Hz. I. Combination Starters: 1. Combination starters shall be manufactured in accordance with the latest published NEMA Standards. Combination starters shall consist of circuit breaker, fused disconnect or motor circuit protector, as indicated on the drawings, and a magnetic motor starter as specified above. Combination starters shall have an interrupting rating sufficient for the short circuit current available at the line terminals with a minimum rating of 14,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at 480 volts. All combination starters shall be mounted in a NEMA 1, General Purpose enclosure, unless otherwise indicated on the contract drawings. 2. Operator and operator arm shall be permanently attached to handle of breaker with positive indication of switch position with door either open or closed. Door and switch shall be interlocked to prevent closing switch when door is open. 3. Door latch shall be tamper-proof with coin-proof slot in door handle latch. The door handle shall have double safety interlocking of the operator and 16401-16 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I Ii II II II Ii I II Ii II Ii 11 II II II Ii II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I door handle to prevent opening of door when breaker is in the "ON" position. An interlock bypass shall be provided to give access to authorized personnel. All exposed parts shall be dead when the switch is in the "OFF" position. 4. Padlocking facilities shall be provided to positively lock the disconnect in either the "ON" or "OFF" position with from one to three padlocks with the door open or closed. 5. Combination starters shall be Allen-Bradley, Cutler- HammerlW estinghouse, Square D, or approved equal. J. Control Devices: 1. Pushbutton control, when indicated on the drawings, shall be non- illuminated, momentary contact (unless otherwise indicated), oil-tight, pushbutton with no guard. Pushbutton controls shall be Square D Type "K", or approved equal. 2. Selector switch operators, when indicated on the drawings, shall be two- or three-position, non-illuminated, oil-tight switches with normal return to all positions. Selector switch operators shall be Square D Type "K",' or approved equal. 3. Pilot lights shall be 120 volt incandescent push-to-test type with a colored lens. Pilot lights shall be Square D Type "K", or approved equal. 4. Provide time delay relays in all motor starters larger than 5 HP to provide a sequenced start-up of motors upon energization. Sequence shall start with largest motor, next largest, etc. Timer shall have a range of 5 to 180 seconds. 2.11 TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS A. Primary transient voltage surge suppressor shall be installed at the main service on the load side of the main breaker or automatic transfer switch as indicated on the drawings. 1. Primary service transient voltage surge suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449 and shall be tested to Category C3 (20 kV, 10 kA, 8/20 J.lsec. Waveform) per ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and C62.45. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Single impulse current rating of 160,000 amperes per phase (8/20 J.lsec. waveform). b. Pulse life rating of 1,000 occurrences with no clamping drift for Category C (8/20 J.lsec. waveform). 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-17 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 c. UL 1449 peak let-through voltage shall not exceed the following: I II II I II II Ii II II II Ii II II Ii I Voltage 120/208 or 120/240 277/480 L-N 500 800 N-G 500 800 d. Test for Category C3 peak let-through voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62.41 (20 kV-1.2/50 ~s) shall be accomplished by an independent testing laboratory. Documentation of the test shall be submitted with the shop drawings. e. Peak let-through voltage measured in UL and ANSI/IEEE testing shall include the effect of6-inch leads connected to the complete unit. f. Turn-on and turn-offtimes shall be less than 1.0 nanosecond. B. Secondary transient voltage surge suppressors shall be installed on the secondary side of step-down transformers or at the associated panelboards, at control panels and at motor disconnects or junction boxes as indicated on the drawings. Suppressors located at panelboards shall be connected to a 30 amp multi-pole breaker. All other suppressors shall be fused. 1. Secondary transient voltage surge suppressors shall be listed in accordance with UL 1449. Suppressors shall meet or exceed the following criteria: a. Single impulse current rating of80,000 amperes per phase (8/20 ~sec. waveform). b. Pulse life rating of 1,000 occurrences with no clamping drift for Category C (8/20 ~sec. waveform). c. UL 1449 peak let-through voltage shall not exceed the following: Voltage 120/208 or 120/240 277/480 L-N 500 800 N-G 500 800 g. Test for Category C3 peak let-through voltage ANSI/IEEE C.62.41- 1991 (20 kV-1.2/50 ~s) shall be accomplished by an independent testing laboratory. Documentation of the test shall be submitted with the shop drawings. II e. Peak let-through voltage measured in UL and ANSI/IEEE testing shall include the effect of 6-inch leads connected to the complete unit. II II I 16401-18 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I f. Turn-on and turn-off times shall be less than 1.0 nanosecond. C. Minimum requirements for surge suppressors: 1. Provide suppression elements between each phase or leg and the system neutral and between the neutral conductor and ground. D. Each module of modular type suppressors shall be externally fused. Status of each module shall be monitored on the front of the enclosure and on each module. 1. Suppressor failure mode shall be of a "fail-short" design. 2. Visible indication of proper connection and operation shall be provided. E. Modular type suppressors shall have an internal disconnect and current limiting fuses. Encapsulated suppressors shall have external fuse or circuit breaker protection. F. Terminals shall be provided for all necessary power and ground connections and shall accommodate #10 to #1 A WG wire sizes. 1. Suppressors shall be of solid-state componentry and shall operate bidirectionally. 2. Suppressors shall have a warranty guarantee period of at least five years. G. All transient voltage surge suppressors shall be of the same manufacture and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Mounting position shall be selected to provide shortest lead possible between the suppressor and point of connection. H. Transient voltage surge suppressors shall be as manufactured by Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., or approved equal. 2.12 GROUNDING A. Ground rods shall be copper-clad steel, 3/4" x 10' sectional type, with couplings and driving studs for installation. B. Conductor shall be bare, stranded copper, complying with ASTM B8, for main power ground and instrument ground, unless otherwise indicated. Grounding conductors run in conduit shall have green insulation. C. Connection to ground rod shall be made with exothermic welding kits by Cadweld, or approved equal. "Acorn" type clamps are not acceptable. Ground connections to 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS equipment frames, building steel, etc., shall be made with equipment grounding lugs or clamps intended for grounding purposes. 2.13 PLASTIC CAUTION TAPE Provide a continuous non-metallic caution tape, 12 inches below fInished grade, above each duct or conduit run. The tape shall be 6 inches wide, imprinted to indicate underground electric utilities, as manufactured by Giffolyn, Terra-Tape, or equal. 2.14 PRECAST PRODUCTS A. Concrete Handholes: Concrete handholes shall conform to the dimensions shoWn on the drawings, shall be designed to H - 20 loading and shall be constructed of 4000 PSI (minimum) reinforced concrete. 1. Handholes shall have full-size aluminum (T6061-T6) diamond plate pedestrian covers with reinforcing angles, rated for 300 pounds per square foot unless otherwise indicated. Covers shall be removable and shall be provided with lifting holes (four per cover). Covers larger than 4' x 4' nominal shall be of sectional construction. Aluminum angles with flat bars shall be set into inside of walls flush with the top to match covers. 2. Handholes shall be open bottom unless otherwise indicated or specified. 3. Handholes shall have pulling eyes cast in wall opposite duct entry. Conduit shall be terminated in handholewith end bells grouted in entrance windows with non-shrink grout. 4. Power and!or signal cables shall be supported on heavy duty non-metallic cable racks with adjustable arms and be held in place with non-metallic tie wraps. Racks shall be maximum three feet apart with a minimum of one per wall of handhole. Racks shall be attached to handhole walls per the rack manufacturer's recommendation with a minimum of three anchors per rack. An anchor shall be located in holes immediately above each adjustable arm. 5. Handholes shall be installed on a 6-inch thick bed of gravel. Gravel shall be compacted prior to casting or setting handholes. Handholes shall protrude 2 inches minimum above surrounding grade. B. Concrete Pull Box: Pull box shall be constructed of reinforced concrete or polymer concrete and shall be Brooks Products, Inc., Quazite, or equal. Covers shall be provided with lifting slot, bolts and "ELECTRIC" logo. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT OF CONDUIT AND WIRING SYSTEMS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-20 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I Ii II II Ii Ii Ii II Ii I! I II II I; Ii II II II I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I The Contractor shall layout the work and shall be responsible for all necessary lines, levels, elevations and measurements. The drawings indicate extent and general arrangement of the components. The Contractor shall become familiar with work of other trades engaged in the construction. Exact routing of raceways and locations of equipment may be governed by structural conditions and obstructions. This Contractor shall coordinate with the details of equipment shop drawings for connections to equipment furnished by others. This is not to be construed to permit redesigning systems. A. Submit all requests for changes in the proposed layout due to structural features, equipment locations and similar conditions to the Engineer, with the following proVISIOns: 1. Detail the reasons for the changes. 2. Submit request within 30 days after award of contract. 3. Make no changes without written approval of the Engineer. B. Examine areas scheduled to receive electrical equipment and material for conditions which will adversely affect execution, permanence or quality of work. Determine field conditions by actual measurement. Do not proceed with installation until defects have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with NEC, NESC, local codes and rules and regulations of local agencies having jurisdiction. Size of conductors, circuit breakers, motor controllers and protective devices indicated or specified shall meet all requirements ofthe NEe. 1. Determine rating and type of all electrical equipment furnished. Provide electrical equipment and conductors of correct size to serve equipment. Voltage drop shall be limited to 3%, including main service, feeder and branch circuit. Coordinate electrical installation of systems and packaged equipment items specified in other sections of these specifications. 2. Provide coordination of protective, control and signaling devices. B. Grounding: A ground network shall be established which will electrically connect the metal structural materials, equipment enclosures, conduits, outlet boxes, cabinets, motor frames, transformer cases, switchgear enclosures, etc., the service transformer neutral and the earth to obtain a potential common to all of these. The ground system shall be properly bonded and sized in accordance with NEC. Solidly ground all non- current-conducting metal parts to the electrical installation grounding bus. A green insulated grounding conductor shall be carried with each circuit. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-21 LOW-VOLTAGE ELEClRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 II 1. Provide common grounds throughout system. I II Ii II II 2. Provide a ground grid consisting of driven copper-clad steel ground rods connected by bare copper conductor at service entrance and!or as shown on the drawings. Resistance to remote earth shall be 10 ohms or less before connection to system. C. Identification: Equipment such as, but not limited to: disconnect switches, motor starters, control panels, etc., shall be clearly marked. 1. Identify all devices operating at more than 250 V AC phase-to-phase, or 125 V AC phase-to-ground, with red enamel letters or numerals of appropriate height applied with a stencil. 2. Except as otherwise noted, all equipment shall be marked with engraved nameplates of laminated two-color phenolic plastic having white letters. Attach each nameplate with stainless steel screws. Align nameplates on equipment being marked in center near the top. I: II 3. Panel boards and control panels shall have designation in1l2-inch high letters and voltage in 1I4-inch high letters centered above door on exterior trim. Ii II II II II I" II I 4. Mark equipment mounted remotely from source of power (such as pumps and fans) with equipment number, source of power and starter location. Where starters are remotely mounted, marking shall include equipment name, number and location. 5. Conductors shall be identified at each termination, pull box, junction box, handhole, point of entry to or exit from wireways, panelboards, control panels, and other points of access. Tags or labels shall be securely affixed to the conductor in visible locations. Tags shall be durable plastic with the designation stamped on one side with suitable dies. Labels shall be permanent with legible black characters on white heat-shrink tubing or equivalent identification acceptable to the Engineer. a. Power conductors shall be color-coded to identify phases, neutral and switching legs, using plastic, self-sealing tape. Tags or labels shall identify the switchboard, MCC, panel, etc., it is served from and the circuit number. b. Control conductor (including monitor and instrumentation conductors) shall be identified by color coding and tag or label as to wire number (corresponding to manufacturer's wiring diagram) and equipment name. II II II 16401-22 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 c. Power wiring and control wiring shall be identified in all handholes with a waterproof permanent tag attached to the cable with plastic cable ties. D. Equipment Connections: Provide complete system with all power and control connections required for proper operation. E. Conduit: 1. Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit may be used as follows: a. Exposed in buildings. h. Exposed with PVC coating where indicated on the drawings. 1. Concealed in poured concrete. d. Below grade with a coating of tar or pitch; pressure-sensitive plastic tape; or two coats of asphalt tar enamel, allowing 24 hours drying between coats and before covering. J. Below grade with PVC coating where indicated on the drawings. 2. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) may be used as follows: k. Co~cealed above suspended ceilings. 1. Exposed in buildings with non-corrOSIve atmospheres where approved by the Engineer. 3. Rigid non-metallic (PVC) conduit may be used as follows: a. Concealed in walls and floors, Schedule 40. b. Below grade direct burial, Schedule 40. c. Exposed in damp or wet locations, Schedule 40. d. Exposed below 6 feet above finished floor or grade and where subject to damage, Schedule 80. 4. Conduit burial depth shall be measured from top of conduit to top surface of finished grade, pavement, concrete or similar cover as follows: a. 18 inches (minimum) below unpaved areas, 16401-23 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03720-022-01 October, 2007 9. b. 24 inches (minimum) below stabilized subbase in paved areas. Ii II II 1'1 5. F or concretes slabs on grade and foundations, conduit burial depth shall be measured from the bottom of the concrete slab or foundation as follows: a. 12 inches (minimum) below concrete slabs on grade or foundations. 6. It shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to coordinate the location and depths of all electrical conduits to be installed under this contract with other trades. Particular attention shall be provided at all locations where conduits enter a structure or building from underground. Proper clearances from the top of the conduits to the bottom of slabs and foundations shall be maintained. I II 7. Where conduits rise through slabs on grade, curved portion of bends shall not be visible above finished slab. 1\ I: 8. Conduit stub-up to above grade and conduit stub-up out of or from below floor slab shall be rigid galvanized steel [or Schedule 80 PVC] from and including last 90 degree bend. Ii Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete in wet locations shall be protected by a 20-mil sheath of PVC at the penetration extending from 2 inches within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete. Ii 10. II Ii Stub-ups through concrete slabs for connection of future equipment or conduits runs shall be provided with couplings threaded inside for plugs and shall be set flush with finished floor or slab. Install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs in couplings. Provide pull wire in all empty conduit runs. 11. Avoid bends and offsets, where possible. Make bends and offsets with an approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Install plastic (PVC) coated conduit and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation manual using tools designed for the purpose of installing plastic (PVC) coated conduit and fittings. Touch-up any and all damaged areas with manufacturer's recommended coating compound. Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Use expansion fittings or other approved devices where conduit or tubing crosses expansion joints. Prevent dirt or trash from lodging in conduits, boxes and fittings. Free clogged conduit of all obstructions or replace conduit. I Ii I'I II Ii 16401-24 II II LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I. I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 12. Supports: a. Pipe straps, wall brackets, hangers or ceiling trapeze. b. Use wood screws or screw-type nails for fastening to wood. Use toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps for fastening to steel work. c. Power-driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws where acceptable to the Engineer. d. Use threaded C-clamps on rigid steel conduit only. e. Do not weld conduit or pipe straps to steel structures. f. Non-metallic conduit through I-inch size shall use one hole snap strap clamps and 1-l/4-inch through 2-inch shall use two hole snap straps clamps, with maximum spacing between supports as outlined in the NEC based on 50 oC conductor temperature. Clamps shall be manufactured from a nylon compound. 13. Expansion couplings shall be used in all straight lengths of non-metallic conduit in exposed applications. Maximum spacing between expansion couplings shall be 100 feet. 14. Connections: All conduits, where they enter sheet metal enclosures such as panelboards, pull boxes or outlet boxes, shall be secured in place by galvanized locknuts and bushings, one locknut inside of box with bushing on conduit end and one locknut outside of box for rigid conduit. The locknuts shall be tightened against the box without deforming the box. a. All bushings and conduit box connectors shall have the insulating material permanently fastened to the fittings. b. Grounding bushings shall be used in switchgear and motor control centers. c. Conduit connections exposed in wet locations shall be by watertight threaded hub. Metallic conduit box connections may use a two-piece hub with built-in recessed neoprene gasket such as Appleton Uni- Seal. Non-metallic conduit box connectors may use a neoprene flat washer or "0" ring placed over threads of the fitting between the shoulder of the fitting and the box. 16401-25 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS d. Conduit connections shall use fittings to maintain NEMA rating of enclosures. F. Duct Banks: 1. Conduit: Conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC of the number and size as indicated on the drawings. a. Conduits shall maintain a continuous slope between handholes and shall be sloped toward handholes with a minimum grade of 3 inches per 100 feet. b. Conduits shall terminate in handholes with end bells. c. Thoroughly clean each conduit after installation. Pass a mandrel, not less than 12 inches long with a diameter 1/4-inch less than the inside dimension, through each conduit. d. Conduit shall follow straight lines, as far as possible, with spacing both horizontally and vertically maintained by spacers, manufactured by the conduit manufacturer. Securely anchor conduit to prevent movement during placement of backfill or concrete encasement. Conduit couplings shall be staggered by rows. Long radius bends shall be used where deviation from straight lines is necessary. e. Concrete encasement, where indicated on the drawings, shall be constructed to the dimensions shown. Trench bottoms shall be tamped firm and even. Suitably braced side forms shall be employed. Concrete shall be installed in a continuous pour to eliminate joints. f. The high point of conduits between handholes shall have a minimum of 18 inches cover below the finished grade. g. The entire underground conduit/duct system shall be watertight. Seal conduits to exclude moisture at each building or structure. h. Provide plastic caution tape above the duct run 12 inches below finished grade. G. Boxes: 1. Provide outlet, pull, junction or terminal boxes in wiring or conduit systems wherever required for pulling wires, making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures. 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-26 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS II II Ii Ii Ii II II Ii Ii I: II II II 11 Ii II II I 1- I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 03720-022-01 October, 2007 a. Indicated locations are approximate only. Coordinate actual location with all work to be performed in space or area and for equipment to be served. b. Locate outlets so that fixtures and other items will be symmetrically located according to space or area layout. c. Outdoor switch and receptacle outlets shall utilize non-metallic boxes and covers. 2. Outlet boxes in exposed work or wet locations shall be cast metal. Sheet metal boxes shall be concealed in walls or ceiling. Non-metallic boxes shall be used with non-metallic conduit. G. Supports: a. In open overhead spaces, cast boxes threaded to rigid metallic conduit need not be separately supported unless used for fixture support. b. Use wood screws or screw-type nails for fastening to wood. Use toggle bolts for fastening to hollow masonry units. Use concrete inserts or expansion anchors for fastening to concrete. Use machine screws or welded, threaded studs for fastening to steel work. c. Power-driven threaded studs may be used in lieu of expansion bolts or machine or wood screws, where acceptable to the Engineer. H. Wiring Devices: Receptacles installed outdoors shall be the ground fault circuit interrupter type. 1. Wiring: 1. Provide complete system of conductors as indicated. 2. Size shall be as required by the NEC and shall be #12 A WG minimum for power and lighting circuits, and #14 A WG minimum for control and alarm circuits. 3. Crimp on insulated wire terminals shall be used on stranded wire for terminations. 4. Splices shall be in accessible locations only and shall be insulated pressure type for#10 A WG and smaller wires. For #8 A WG and larger, use solderless connectors covered with an insulation material equivalent to the conductor insulation. 16401-27 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 3.03 03720-022-01 October, 2007 H. Appearance: All items shall be cleaned or touched up as necessary to assure first class condition. FIELD TESTS AND OBSERVATION A. General: Do not enclose or cover any work until it has been observed, tested and accepted. 1. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for observation and testing. 2. Show, by demonstration, that all circuits and devices are in operating condition. Tests shall include the following: a. Megger all motor windings before operation for insulation resistance and, if found low, dry out windings to secure acceptable insulation resistance. b. Check control center components, buses, starters, breakers, relays, alarms, interlocks, etc., and place in service in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Provide inspection and adjustment of electrical equipment prior to energization. c. Megger all power cables and wiring for insulation resistance and record. d. Check all motors for correct lubrication and lubricate, if required, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. e. Check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse, if necessary. 3. Assemble in binders and turn over to the Owner all instruction bulletins, lubrication schedules, operating instructions, pampWets, parts lists, prints, etc., accompanying or attached to apparatus and equipment. 4. Notify Engineer one week prior to test date. B. Ground Rod Test: Before any wire is connected to ground rods, test each rod for resistance to ground, 1. Testing instrument shall be a direct reading, single test, portable ground testing megger. 2. Test procedure shall be as recommended by manufacturer of test instrument used. 16401-28 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I II II II II Ii I! II Ii I: II II I I Ii Ii I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. The make and model of test instrument used and a copy of test procedure shall be submitted to the Engineer before test is conducted. 4. Do not conduct tests within 48 hours after rainfall or during foggy weather. 5. If ground resistance exceeds 10 ohms, additional grounds shall be driven. 6. The grounding test shall be witnessed by the Engineer or other representative of the Owner. A copy of test results and method shall be included in the maintenance manual. Deliver one copy of test results to the Engineer within one week after test. 3.04 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Remove excess and waste materials from project site. B. Remove defective work and replace with material that meets specification requirements or repair to the satisfaction of the Owner. C. Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in factory- or shop-finished surfaces. END OF SECTION 03720-022-01 October, 2007 16401-29 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL WORK GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Part IV Other Contract Documents I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Section V I- I I l- I- l- I I t t t t J t J t _I f t BOND NUMBER: 0050714 .. CONTRACT BOND STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC., Contractor and WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY (Surety) whose home address is WESTFIELD CENTER. MEDINIA COUNTY. OHIO. HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner") in the penal sum of: FIVE MILLION, EIGHT HUNDRED FORTY SEVEN THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED THREE DOLLARS AND FORTY CENTS ($5,847,803.40) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators~ccessors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the IS day of ~ "'"1 ' ~ entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCF'S). a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if full:y copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one-year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof, and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, Want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub-Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. Page I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals ofthe parties hereto this day of , 200 TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC. CONTRACTOR By:4~ -- Thurston Lar1berson, President Westfield Insurance_qompany ---- ~ ""- Page 2 01/15/2008 11:0g 7275524755 ENG PAGE 01/01 CONTRACT This CONTRACT made and entered into this ,?Jay of , 200~ by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, he e nafte designated as the "City", and TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC. of the City of PALMETTO, County of MANATEE and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor"- WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors> assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor> shall and will at their own cost and expense perfonn all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST. MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCF'S) FOR THE SUM OF: FIVE MILLION, EIGHT HUNDRED FORTY SEVEN THOUSAND, EIGHT HUNDRED THREE DOLLARS AND FORTY CENTS ($5,847,803.40). In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instIUctions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the tenns, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HERE.lN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB-CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB~CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. Page 3 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I- I I I ~ , CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay-off or termination; rates of payor other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non-discrimination clause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and/or worker's representatives, except sub-contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1.000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1.000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Page 4 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACT (3) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA (Seal) By: iJ:~ ?>.~-:1l. William B. Home, II City Manager Attest: Countersigned: By: 4~~ Fr~Hibbard, Mayor-Councilmember Camilo Soto Assistant City Attorney (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) TLC- Diversified, Tnc. (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). (Contractor) ~ ~ ~7\~) Thurston Lamberson President Page 5 _~H' 1 ~li'fr~_ -",*,.~:,;......;:'i;t~ ,~ "-i<M~ - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT (CORPORATION FORM) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF MANATEE On this day personally appeared before me, the undersigned authority, duly authorized to administer oaths and take acknowledgments, , who after being duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is the (TITLE) of TLC DIVERSIFIED INC. a Florida Corporation, with its principal place of business located at 2719 17TH STREET. EAST. PALMETTO. FLORIDA 34221 (herein, the "Contractor"). That the Contractor was the general contractor under a contract executed on the day of , 200 , with the CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, a municipal corporation, as Owner, and that the Contractor was to perform the construction of: HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCED POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCF'S) That said work has now been completed and the Contractor has paid and discharged all sub-contractors, laborers and material men in connection with said work and there are no liens outstanding of any nature nor any debts or obligations that might become a lien or encumbrance in connection with said work against the described property. That he is making this affidavit pursuant to the requirements of Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, and upon consideration of the payment of (Final Full Amount of Contract) in full satisfaction and discharge of said contract. That the Owner is hereby released from any claim which might arise out of said Contract. The word "liens" as used in this affidavit shall mean any and all arising under the operation of the Florida Mechanic's Lien Law as set forth in Chapter 713, Florida Statutes. Sworn and subscribed to before me TLC DIVERSIFIED. INC. AFFIANT This _ day of .200 BY: NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires: PRESIDENT Page 6 - I I I I I I I-- I I. I I. I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we. the undersigned, TLC Diversified, Inc. as Principal, and Westfield Insurance Company as Suretyt are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of Amount Bid Dollars ($I 0% of bi}i (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and asSigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of ~ TLC Diversified, Inc. as Principal, ~dwestfield Insurance Company, as Surety, for work specified as: Headworks Sceening & Grit Removal proj ect all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County. is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approyed by the City Manager. this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 26 day of October . 2007 (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individWl) Corporation. TLC Diversified, Inc. Principal The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's nmne, his own name and his title; the person signing for a corporation must, by affidavit, show his authority to bind the coxporation. ~ --- Title President ,. '" ~"'s.-t()1\) La.,M. \-Cor ~ Wes field Insurance Company ~ ~ SectionVL.doc Page 7 . Revisod; 5/09f20Q7 I I POWER NO. OS 92202 04 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Center, 0/1io Know All Men by These Presents, Tllat WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSU~ANCE COMPANY, corporations, llerelnatIer rererreoto individually as a 'Company' ana collectively as 'Companies: dUlY organized and exJStlng under the laws 01 tile State or Orllo, ana navlng Its pnndpal ol'fice in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these presents make, constitute and appoint Tti"EODORE J. JEDUCK, ROBERT H. BOND, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY General Power of Attorney I I CERTIFIED COpy I I of DAVIE and State of FL 1(5 true ana lawful Attomey(s)-ln.Fact, wltll lull power and autl10rlty hereby conferred In Its name, place and stead, to execute, aCknowledge and del/yer iIllY and all bonOs. r9C09"1za.nc:es, I.IOderUlkings. or other i~ts CN' contracts of $Uf"OtyWltp.. - " . " _ . . _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ . . _ _ _ _ . _ . . _ . , . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . _ . _ . _ LIMITATION: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFlCIENCY, MORTGAGE GUARANTEE, OR -8AJltK OEPOSITORY BONOS. and to bind any.ot the Companies thereby as tully and to tlle same extent as if such bonds were signed by the President, sealed with the corporate seal of me applicable Company and duly attested by its Secretary, Ilereby ratitying and connrmlng all that U',e said Attorney(s)-in-FaC1 may do in the premises. Said appointment is made under and by auCtlonty or the fOllowing resolution adOpted by the Board of DIrectors of each of the WESTFIELO INSURANCE COMPANY, W€STFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: "Se IC Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any Secretary or any Fidelity a. Surety Operations Executive 0( other Executive shall be and is hereby vested with fuU power and authority to appoint anyone or more SUitable persons as AtlOrney(sHn-Fact to represent and act for and on behaJl of the Company subject to the following provisions: Tne Artorney-in-FacL may oe given fUll power and autnority tor ana in the name of and on behalt of tile Company, to execute, acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonOs, recognizances, contracts, agreements 01 indemnity and othe!' conclitional or obligatory undertakings and any i'lnd all n'otlces and oocuments canceling or terminating Ole Company's liaDllily ttlereunder, and any SUCIl Instruments so executea by any such Attorney-in-Fact shall be as binding upon the Company as il siQlled by the President and sealeo and attested by the Corporate Secretary: ~B(t It FurrJIor R~eci, t~ ttle signature.of any su<;h designated per$on and tile sea/ of the Company Ilerelofore or Ilerearter affixed 10 anI' power of attomey or any cortiflcato reletrngtl11crcto oy ~imile, ana any power 01 anorney or certificate beanng faCSimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be \lillid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undenaking to wniCll It Is anacl1ecl.- (Eacll adopteo at a meeting held on February a, 2000). In Wi~n Whcrt:oI, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY ane;! OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMpANY have caused these presenrs 10 be signea oy tt1eir Senior Executive and tlleir corporate seals te be Ilereto affixed thlll 20th deyof MAY A.D.,2OO3 . CQrporille ~~ S..h /.. ~ ....-,~.. ...., AffixeQ l~/ ~ '\Ct \ F~fS~.I1 \~l I l~\ ~ i"':, \\~\ .. r.ro ./!/ '-=--- ~ State ot.Ohi~ I County ot Medi.nEl SS.: On tl11s 20th day of MAY A.D., ~ , Defore me per.sonally came Richard ,L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, who, being by me dUly sworn did d~e and say, that he resideS in Medina, Ohio; tflat ne is Semor Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS iNSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described In and ~hlcn executed tne aoove I instrument: ttlat he MOWS the seals or said Companie.s: that the seals affixed to said InstrumefH are sl.lcll corp':lrate seals, th<lt they were $0 atflxoq oy order otthe Boards ot DirectQrs of said C.C!lI'T1.. panies: and tllat he signed his name mer-eto by like order. ~' Notanal ,..~ ~ .. Sui .,.,..<;:1.\ Po ~ " I Affl.l<ed '. ~B~;)'- . f ~ -' . . William J. Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public State of Ohio . ~ III ."""'0 My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 OhiO ReVised COde) \...Jo- .' '~"'., countY of Medln8 ~3.: -<'I}-c: o'F 0.,.... I :.~_M"'''....., . I Frank A Carrino Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHI~ ~A~MeR.~ INSURANce COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregorng IS a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, eX~f~;orn~ S:~e I Companies, which Is stili In full force and erteq: and turtne. rmore, [he resolutions 01 the. Boaras O. I Directors, set out In the Power y in full tor.ce and effect. . . . Ohl thl day of In' 'wtiness Wh~reo(, j have hereunto set my nand a.nd Qttixe.d. .I.he seals of said CompanIes at Westfield Center, 0, S A.D., . .......;;~ I'.. ~..!IIi .,....;..-:.~~' Iir:/' - ~\ {~. S' 11 J( t " \i\'.~JZ \ ,,""" ~ ;'~ '.. '-....... ~~\.,' \\~~'~~C:'; I, "" ,.' ....\":..........;'\'..5' "'. /1/" '-'-\i~ :.-: SEAL :m: \~......,.......... ../5/ -~"""'If" I~' """""" ...........~..~".., /~...-:.:.~"... i ~.., - ....~ \ '''...~.r.:.C'> ~ =~:_~:~. =g: .~= \~" 1848 /~j -;~.......'I...-.,.~._.....'t~..;:.. ""'''''''' ..,....., '~...,.....I WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY I I I I By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive I ".'11'''''., \,"'.\()NAt. """ t~~~~' ...... - .~~:~~~\ .0-: SEAL :m: \~:""""",,,, ,.,.,<5/ I" .. .\' "."'lllflll""\ '-...~,. "~""~;"'~"c:.r. >-,- . -~. ~,:-"'::";;:-~""" -. . -- . ~ ' - -l ~~ "'S~:' --~~;t-".. ". ,. D J ~! -< -~,\~....1.S4B ."'~f ".., .. 4- .. ,. . ," "~"""" ~:~', ~'.~.".. .../ ~;"OdO,el~ S._~ I I . I' Genera I IPower of Atto rney CERTIFIED COpy POWER NO. 0992202 04 Westfield Insurance Co. Westfield National Insurance Co. Ohio Farmers Insurance Co. Westfield Cente r, Ohio' Know A/J Men by These Presents, That WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY. corporallons, hereinafter referred to individually as a 'Company' ana cOllectively as "Companies,- duly organized and existing under the laws of the State of Ohio, and haVing its prindpal otfice in Westfield Center, Medina County, Ohio, do by these fresents make, constitute and appoint HEOOORE J. JEDUCK, ROBERT H, BOND, JOINTLY OR SEVERALLY ~OA"IE and State of FL its true and lawful Attomey(s).in-Fact, with lull power and aulllority hereby conferred in its name, lace and stead, to execute, acknowledge and deliver any and all bond$, recognizances, undertakings, Dr other instnJmenl.s or contracts of elyship- -.. -.. -.- - - - - - - - -. - - - - -. -.. -.. -" - -. -. - - - - - - - - - -. - - - -' - -- - - -', LIMITATION: THIS POWER Of ATTORNEY CANNOT BE USED TO EXECUTE NOTE GUARANTEE, MORTGAGE DEFICIENCY, MORTGAGE _UARANTEE. OR BANK DEPOSITORY BONOS. nd to bind any of the Companies thereby as IUlly and to the same extent as il such bonds were signed by [he President, sealed with the corporate .eal of ~e applicable Company and duly attested by Its Secretary, hereby ratifying and confirming all that U',e said Attorney(s)-in-Fact may do in he premises. Said appointment IS made under and by authonty of the fOllOWing resolution adopted by the Board of Directors ot each of the WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY. WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY: I .Se Ie Resolved, that the President, any Senior Executive, any secretary or any Fidelity & Surely Operations Executive or other Executive shall e and is hereby vested with full power and authority to appoint anyone or more suitable persons as Anorney(sHn-Fact to represent and act for nd on bel'lalt at the COmpany subject to the following provisions: Tile Attorney-in-FeeL may be given lUll power and authority for and in the name of and on behalf of the Company, to execute. acknowledge and deliver, any and all bonds, recognJzances, contracts, agreements of indemnity and other conditional or obligatory undertakings and any and all lotlces and documents canceling or terminating the Company's liability thereunder, and any such Instruments so exec. uted by any such norney.in-Fact shall be as binding upon [he Company as il signed by the President and sealed and attested by the Corporate Secretary.* "Bet It FUrUler Re:so/v<<1. that ttle signature of any sud"l designated person and the seal of the Company heretofore or hereafter affixed to any ower of anorney or any certificate relating tMereto by tac:simllc, and any power- 01 anorney or certificate bearing facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be lHllid and binding upon the Company with resped to any bond or unOertakJng to whlcn it is attached,- (EaCh adopted at a meeting held on February 8, 2000), I'n WilneS3 Whereof, WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSUR. ANCE OMPANY have caused these presents to be signed by their Senior ExeculNe and their corporate sealS tc be hereto affixed this 20th deyof A Y A.D., 2003 . Corporate /'~ ,,"''-i';;'~~l>'''', . ","~\iiiiii;::..... WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY I ;tf~ .(~>'~~'" ".";~:"""'''--':::-:c..~'''' /~...---..~;... WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY l~l - \~ \ :{!f.;/ "~t~: :~_.~..un.P~"cg.\ OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY ...~..iS~.J{1 :..:s:;} -- SEAL -" ~""".:""'-~~s~_ : ~~ ~ l~' :t-: . :m: ::c:>. -~: I \~..........::_//$l \~'..... .../~/ ;~....~.~~~~...~~j ~ . '.~.... t... "'''', ....... , '4~'fl'"""""""""",, .. "', , tate at Ohio ' ",...,............. .... County ot Medina SS.: iOn this 20th day of MAY A.D., 2003 , before me personally came Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr. to me known, Who, being by me duly orn, did depose and say, that he resides in Medina, Ohio; that he is Senior Executive of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPANY, WESTFIELD ATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS INSURANCE COMPANY, the companies described in and which executed the above Instrument; that he Knows the seals of said Companies; that the sealS affixed to said instrument are such corp.xate seals; that they were so affixed IbY :~S;i~lt the Boards of Directors of said CompaOles: and that he signed hls nlld!lme tl1ereto b: like order. ~ - "..",...~ - f.~)~ late orChio -:. '" . 10 ounty 01 Medina 3S.: \, "'1 .. ~'., -", ~ F 0 f" 0 ...... ...........'-e"..,........... . I, Frank A. Carrino, Secretary of WESTFIELD INSURANCE COMPAI'lY, WESTFIELD NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY and OHIO FARMERS 'SURANCE COMPANY, do hereby certify that the above and foregOing IS a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney, executed by said Companies, which is stili In full rorce ano etfeC\: and IUrthermore, the resolutions 01 the Boards of Directors, set out In the Power of Attorney are I fuJ I force and effect. / InWi[l'I~sS Whereof, j have hereunto set my hand and aHlxed the seals or said Companies at Westfield Center, Ohio, this 20 day of OcA,)Ju A.D., 'l.OI7-J . .,.,.....~ ,...'tl'l".... "'-'_"~,.., /~~~\I~"..... ,....,~~~~.~i:~~::~.~.... .,,~~ ~;:""'" r~...""::;"-"""'4' ~ :;'0'\'" "..!J-p"" ~~~~_..::...:.~-~'\ 11Ii/ "'~\ ~-,,: ',~-~ :~.:.....flr...~..C"~ !itfS. ~J(t \:s:; ~tff EAL \'Al !~{~.~~~~ {~\ ~ 1~ ~~: S fm~ i~~ iirE \ ~:" __ l~ -;~\ :8-' ~~'. 1848 .,~~ \ ',--/ ~ ~7".. .... / \. ..... - ..-'. ! ", ...'........ .-........... .......... ....."..... ............. ............. I",." '1. ~'I ".,...., ./...'''~....f.......... I I I By: Richard L. Kinnaird, Jr., Senior Executive William J, Kahelin, A rney at Law, Notary Public My Commission Does Not Expire (Sec. 147.03 Ohio ReViSed COde) rr. LJ I ~;./Let~ S.-oq - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF \.1...0.. ~ ~ 0 -\." ,,- ) :::r 0 Cl N N eo LQ '" 10 e. r ~ 0 IV being duly sworn, deposes and says that he/she is Secretary of 1" \.. c.. ""'b '. II e. r ~.. .\: " e.cl) .::r. N u . a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: ~11q \1-+" Street & Number ~;:. E. ~CL\M~-\to City FL State Ha u Q. ~lle. County Affiant further Says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by-laws of \' L e... \J: ~ ~r ~.,:, .f., e..c:l) :L I\J t.J . (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that, ~ \.l ~ s. --to IV La ",,\ou ~OtV is Y r e. ~'. de ~ + (Officer's Name) (Title) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for e.., -\, 0 -\ e.. \eQ (" W q,-+ e... for said corporation by virtue of ~ r rD v i ~.. 0 N cJ '0 'I \~ I.AJ ~ (state whether a provision of by or a Resolution of the Board of Directors. If esolu on giv ption). Sworn to before me this 5+ h, day of J. ) ~ \1 f M loe..l" , 20 Q '7 ~;/~~ - -- Notary Pub ~~'~. KAYLCUNNINGHAM ~ ~ ~ MY COMMISSION # DD3027.... ~A.. r$ "'/IF l\\:i EXPIRES: March 23.2llO8 Type/print/stamp name of Notary Title or rank, and Serial No., if any Section VL.doc Page 8 Revised: 5/09/2007 - I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF Ko.NQ.+C!. eo ) \h u r So. t-oroJ LQ.Joo\ ber ~~ N being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is ~r c.~'. de. ~-\- ""b', v e.. r ~', f., eel ~ ""~..u ) of "\ L. c... the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, th~t such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any assoc;iation or to any member or agent thereof. ~ h Affiant , lot" ~+O"-l '-0 N Ioe r ~ON ~ Sworn to and subscribed before me this~ day of f\) 0 "P M b t c" , 20 () 1 -...) ,~"" I'tI... .".~"T.f, KA Y L CUNNINGHAM \. .; MY COMMISSION (I 00302744 lift\) EXPIRES: Man-b 2J.W08 Section VLdoc Page 9 Revised: 5/09/2007 - .1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for "f..n A L...1l)r'r-c. 'Sc..I'"e...e.N"""~ ll.~.t (;1",-\ ~1!U".OV"\ :tM9ro"e.....".d.~ t00('th~Q..!.~ I H4f!."'e.\\ s...\('"~~+ a..lVd EtLc..-t \= 0<' "\ '" <.. Pc ,hJQ..Nc..ed. Po \\ ...-\', () 1\1 LC\.., t (" 0 \ F 1.1 ~..', \,,-\-', e. ~ ( A. Pc. F .so) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked c..()~-\rl1..c.-\- ~ O~-lf)Ol.tJ3- uT Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been appr:oved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully ex'!lIlined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and. . agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: Section VL.doc Page 10 Revised: 5/09/2007 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on W c..s. -\ {'. e.. \Dl ""I. I\J S '" f' 4,,1\) ~ e. to/"\ ~Q. \I) '\- -BeBk, for the sum of \ O~o c-\ 0..1-\ 01.1. "'-\ b'tcl (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). ($ \ O,C) ~ Q.MOl.lNt b~~ The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If:c01:poratio~ give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub-contractor, materiahnan, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). NAMES: ADDRESSES: \ hu('" So1-o,.) \.-A"" he.('"~O.-.)J ~re~'Ic.lLAI+, S.53C\ d..1V~ A\Je. J c...~rde. W p CL \ Me.+\- o. \= L '3 ~ ~ Ol. \ Jo Q. .., ..., La ~ \0 0(. (' .s. O~ I S e (. r L;' Q. (~ > 5S :\ C\ do. II) lA A" e. e.. i {" L \ e.. W. , ~~ Section VL.doc Page 11 Revised: 6/18/2007 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice-President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: -r h \4 r ~-\ o~ L4M 'b~r ~D"') 'Yr Ie~. cle~-\- ~{ \" L c... "1).,,, e..r ~'''~'', eo( .iNe. . By: Thu r ~;t ON La. ",,\oe.rs 0'" Business Address of Bidder: a, ,q City and State: PtA.\ ~ L '\-\-0) F L Dated at ? 4 \ ~e:\-+o J \= L SectionVLdoc Title: ~ r ~ ~\ clc. tJ + \ 1-\-'-' ~-t. 1:. Zip Code ~ do . \ , this &th day of N' 0\1 t""' 'b I! r , A.D., 2007 Page 12 Revised: 6/18/2007 . - I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: "f',,,.IL&..~l)r~s. Sc--rLe.N~Nj QuA. (gr',\- ~Uo\l'h)"'\ J:.M.rrD"e,...~"'~~ Ekr -The.. t-Jor~&~~-t \ MAC'~hAI\ S"tr-ee. \- Cl\.,.,,,l e",,+ f\dv6loolc..u\ POl\"'''' ~elU CON~U \ FCLC.~ r,-\,~~ Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and (f\ fc. t=",) Specifications. Addendum No. -L Date: L l- 5 - t!) 1 Addendum No. --L Date: \\ . S - 0 1 Addendum No. ~ Date: ,\. l. - 01 Addendum No. ~ Date: \ \ - g . 01 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: \" Ll:.. u\ '\1 e.\';;:.', fi ed I ""I.-e.J L. 4!ame OfBidd': ..! ~ (Signature of Officer) '\ \--. \l r ~ -\-0 N \-cu.. bu ~ 0,..) _t roe.!:.\ d '- ut (Title of Officer) Nove."" ~~r ~, 6.001 (Date) SectionVL.doc Page 13 Revised: 5/09/2007 . I' I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SectionVLdoc BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECf: I-\..~ wa.l<.. E,.~... L...... ~ Q> ...1. t;.;+ <v..... 0..\ ~ "f ro" ..,A.. l'-o r TIl. Nor-\--h"Q.~k., H.... !;,.:::" ~('~:"" ~"'A €d~~ f\clV~N("e.~ ~O\\U."".DAJ ~.vho' Fo..c..~ tt.,~!. (1\ ~c..F~) CONTRACTOR: ,.. LoCo. \)', \J ~r ~ ~.r (e,cI J :t. ^'~ . BIDDER'S TOTAL $ 5J g'l7J fD 3. 'if) BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS IDS TOTAL BID BASED ON IDS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. TIllS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENlNG BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. Page 14 Revised: 5/09/2007 . I 1 I I 'I ,I I 1 1 I I I I I 1 I I I I REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL - ADDENDUM 1 PROJECT #05-0063-UT: HEADWORKS SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR THE NORTHEAST, MARSHALL STREET AND EAST ADVANCE POLLUTION CONTROL FACILITIES (APCFs) ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. UNIT PRICE TOTAL NO. UNIT OTY BASE BID NORTHEAST APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS A.l Demolition - Existing Screens and Structures I LS f770 . 0 n D A.2 Roof Removal and Modifications I LS L~~ At) o. A.3 Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with 1 LS Wash Press b:> ~ ~ "-- (:'1) AA EQuioment Purchase -Grit Classifier 1 LS u.~ . >>~IJ. IX" A.5 Concrete Channel Coating (Using Sewerguard Troweable 115 SY ;)4,r No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen) ~ R ~ C;:-..:l~ A.6 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Stair/Step , Screens with Wash Press and Grit Classifier installation, I LS Conveyer system modification and relocation, and Odor l3 fir l'At). Control Vents modifications A,7 Grit Removal From Influent Well, Mechanical Screen Channels and Mechanical Screen Channel up to Parshall 120 CY l(po. 19 ~f)IJ. Flume A.8 Mobilization & Demobilization 1 LS [2; 1_ D I) t!) . A.9 5% Contingency on Total of Item A.l through A.7 1 LS ~ L5 7 '11!~ oSlJ A.10 PLC Allowance I LS $25,000 $25,000 A.ll Northeast APCF - Repair of existing slide gates upstream 6 EA ~ ~1J.5'. and downstream of mechanical screens ~~ "'3D A Northeast APCF Headworks ImDrovements - Subtotal .. I. J. U ::2 4; ". ADDITIVE ALTERNATES 1-1 NOT USED 1-2 Northeast APCF - Replacement of existing gates upstream 6 EA /3 ~~o )( 1'1 ~Q j) and downstream of mechanical screens 1-3 Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless I LS Screw Convevor System for Mechanical Screens ~ ~ 0).50 1-4 Northeast APCF - Strip Existing Ceiling Paint and Apply 585 SY New Coating 7<J ..v..3 .:) 9 () 1.5 Northeast APCF - Prepare and Paint Walls 585 SY -:s ..:) /~ 1?7() 1-6 Northeast APCF - Purchase and Install Altuninum Roll up I EA 7 Sf" I door and railing (for ooening north of mechanical screens) 1-7 Concrete Channel Coating (Usino Soectrashield) 115 SY ~ 7. .J 9 -S'___e:- I Northeast APCF Headworks Additive Alternates Improvements - Subtotal ~...,~ yc.j~ Northeast APCF Headworks ImDrovements (Aili - TOTAL j .?qi. g~ v~, MARSHALL STREET APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS B.l Demolition - Existing Screens and Structures 1 LS I-:J/_ .lJD IJ 8.2 I Equipment Purchase - Two New Front Rake Front Return I LS ! Screens with Wash Press .;J 9, J.OIJ SectionV.doc Page 15 Revised: 11/02/2007 -- 9J1 ~ . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ITEM DESCRJPTION EST. UNIT PRICE TOTAL NO. UNIT OTY 8.3 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Front Rake Screens with Wash Press installation, and Conveyer system I LS modification and relocation ;) ~a SOD. B.4 Demolition - Existing Grit Svstem & Structures 1 LS ~, 'JII fJ B.5 Sole Source Grit Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pwnps, Grit ClaSsifier, Field I LS $1,049,311 $1,049,311 TestiDl~ of Equipment ($20,000 Allowance), ete. 8.6 Concrete Channel Coating (Using Sewerguard Troweable 275 SY 9K No. 210 as manufactured by Sauereisen) dll f5D. B.7 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit system 1 LS ~.32, 14 DD_ Eouipment and Structures B.8 Grit Removal From Mechanical Screen cIiannels and Grit 40 CY /IbD. ~ ~~D. Influent and Effluent Channels B.9 Mobilization and Demobilization I LS JJQ ~CDt), B.lO 5% Contingency on Total of Item B.I through B.8 1 LS ~,,'7 9~~1 ~ B.ll PLC Allowance 1 LS $25,000 $25,000 B.12 Marshall Street APCF - Repair of existing slide gates Jr)3/S. located in grit units upstream, downstream and bypass 3 EA c" .I ) /) oS. J channel ...... ~ k B Marshall Street APCF Headworks Improvements - Subtotal .5 -~.C"G 8 ~y ADDITIVE ALTERNATES II-I Marshall Street APCF - Purchase and Install New Shaftless 1 LS ~~. NJ() Conveyor System for Mechanical Screens 11-2 NOT USED II-3 Marshall Street APCF - Replacement of existing slide gates located in grit units upstream. downstream and bypass 3 EA /1.300. channel S -'.9fJo. 11-4 Concrete Channel Coatin!!: (Using SDectrashield) 275 SY 17, 4'.. .&-. 766 II Marshall Street APCF Headworks Additive Alternates Improvements - Subtotal 1./" ., A. ":7 c .. Marshall Street APCF Headworks Improvements lB+ID - TOTAL I~ ..,',. /. ~ J " I .. EAST APCF HEADWORKS IMPROVEMENTS C.l Demolition - Existin2 Screens I LS I~ --' A 11., C.2 Equipment Purchase - Two New Stair/Step Screens with. 1 LS Wash Press I I? 9J~/J C.3 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New StairlStep Screens with Wash Press installation, and Conveyer system 1 LS modification and relocation I'ID .s00. C.4 Demolition - Existin!!: Grit SVstem and Structures 1 LS 41",' ,.:a ~. C.5 Sole Source Grit Equipment Purchase - New Vortex Grit Collection Equipment, Grit pumps, Grit Classifier, Field 1 LS $789,681 $789,681 Testing of EQuipment ($20,000 Allowance), etc. C.6 Grit Channel Bv-Pass Pwnpin!!: I LS / I " I~nA C.7 Concrete Channel Coating (Using Sewerguard Troweable 320 SY ~ (J$_ I:"S ~-"" No. 210 as manufactured bv Sauereisen) C,8 Installation, Modifications and Repairs - New Grit systems 1 LS installation and Gate repairs i..:> 9.:) ~ C9 Grit Removal From Mechanical Screen Channels and Grit 35 CY Influent and Effluent Channels UP to Parshall Flwne 1(, D. .s "eD. C.I0 Mobilization and Demobilization ) LS l:J,' JAn, ~ . ()~ 1. t:J S- SeclionVdoc Page 16 Revised: 11102/2007 . I I I I I I ,I 'I I I I I I I I I I I I ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. NO. UNIT C.II 5% Contin e on Total ofItem C.l thro C.9 I CI2 PLC Allowance I cn East APCF - Repair of Existing Slide Gates - Two Gates Upstream of Mechanical Screens and One Gate 3 Downstream of Grit Influent Channel C East APCF Headworks 1m rovements - Subtotal ADDITIVE ALTERNATES UNIT PRICE TOTAL TY LS ~ LS EA &, J IfS. III-I II1-2 3 EA II1-3 ill CONTRACTOR: '\ L e. P"\J~{"~: ~:t'~.t '1IUL. GRAND TOTAL-BASE BID (A+B+C) $ $.. t/ f'~J ",t:;"4.fe}. ~O GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID (A+B+C) $ (Numbers) (Words) GRAND TOTAL-ADDITIVE ALTERNATES (I+n+llI) $ . '3 SV,J ~ ~ I. (Numbers) GRAND TOTAL-ADDITIVE ALTERNATES (I+II+III) $ S. F 'I7J f l'),3. 4/~ (Words) GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID PLUS ADDITIVE ALTERNATES $ 51 8'171 R03. Y"b . (Numbers) GRAND TOTAL - BASE BID PLUS ADDITIVE AL TERNA TES $ (Words) THE BIDDER'S TOTAL ABOVE IS IDS TOTAL BID BASED ON illS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED. TIllS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV.doc Page 17 Revised: 11102/2007 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I SUMMARY OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE ITEMS Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast. Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCF's) Project CLEARWATER. FLORIDA City Proiect No. 05-0063-UT Item Descri tion Location Quanti Unit 1 Grit Removal System (all Marshall Street APCF 1 Each inclusive - sole sourced and Headworks: 3-12ft. diameter re-ne otiated rice Item) grit units ro sed 2 Grit Removal System (all East APCF Headworks: 2- Each inclusive - sole sourced and 12ft. diameter grit units re-negotiated price Item) ( ro osed) 3 Screens and Northeast APCF Headworks 2 Each Wash Press Buildin 1 Each 4 Screens and Marshall St APCF 2 Each Wash Press Headworks Building 1 Each 5 Screens and East APCF Headworks 2 Each Wash Press I Each 6 Grit ClassifyinR Equipment Northeast APCF Headworks 1 Each Buildin 03720-022-01 November 2, 2007 Addendum 1 Attachment 2 . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I (ATtACHMENT TO REVISED BIDDER'S PROPOSAL) SCHED"QJ..E OF MANUFAC'fVRERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOREOUlPMENT The CONTRACTOR proposes that the items of major equipment named herein will be supplied by the Manufacturers and Suppliers set forth below as written by the Contractor. unless changes are specifically authorized by the Owner. If Manufacturers and Suppliers have not been determined, list all potential Manufacturers and Suppliers. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by Manu.facturer's name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the specifications covering the equipment. MAJOR EOUlPMENT SECTION TITL~ESCRlPTION APCF MANUFACTURER MODEL 11325 GRIT CLASSIFICATION NORTHEAST \l'l~C"O - EQUIPMENT We~o ~~'I ~..r 11330 STAIR/STEP NORTHEAST ~~<.... MECHANICAL FINE SCREEN w/W ASH -\.\ " '0 e. (" SSFLfDOQ PRESS 11330 STAIR/STEP EAST MECHANICAL FINE "",ber S~l=.s<x>o SCREEN wlW ASH PRESS 11331 FRONT RAKE FRONT MARSHALL RETURN STREET MECHANICAL FINE "\l\oe.r "l~oo SCREEN wlWASH PRESS 11332 SHAFTLESS SCREW NORTHEAST ~p,PAc.. Ud-SO CONVEYOR St..c.... Submitted By: ,- l..c.. -:D " V t..,C' .s,.', -r:~ :1:1\) ~. (Name of the individual. partnersbi':' corpomtion or joint venture) Signed By: ~ -- ?:" --=-=- ,. Name and Title: \" h \l r e.-+o~ l-..4.M \o~ r !!.. ~.... I ~r ~ !o.~ de. ..,+ Sectionv.doc: PagelS SCHEDULE OF MANUFACTURERS AND SUPPLIERS OF MAJOR EQUIPMENT . I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHABEPROCEDURES CONSTRUCTION OF HEADWORKS: SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR CITY OF CLEARWATER APCFs PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 05-0063-UT In accordance with the provisions of paragraph 6.2.b. of the General Conditions, the City of Clearwater is exercising its right to implement an Owner Direct Purchase / Sales Tax Savings Program. At the time the Contract Price is established, but not later than. concurrently with submission of the required Schedule of Values, the City of Clearwater, and the Engineer shall identify the specific items and the estimated costs of the potential 0 D P. The Contractor shall submit a separate line item cost for each ODP item. The Contractor must clearly and separately identify any contingency or allowance amount associated with any ODP items. The Contract Price must include the total cost of the Work, including the cost of the ODP item and associated sales tax. After the City of Clearwater and the Engineer have identified ODP items the Contractor shall follow the procedures set out in the contract documents. Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of Products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and finishing is the Contractor's responsibility. COMPANYNAlvlli OF BIDDER: "T\..c.. u..\lt!..(,~.~'.e..d.) 'LI\I(.... CONTACT PERSON & PHONE NO.: \\-\ur !.."'\-t)N \...a~bL'-~S.t)N (~"\\)'a';)..o(p~\ ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT AND REVIEW OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE REFERENCE DOCUMENTS WITH SIGNA TURE& DATE ~ - \\>O\JeM\oc.t i I ~oo.., Date --- Name '\ h\4r~'\-o~ \.-C4.~\oc.r_o,...,.. ~ re~"cl.~~+ 03720-022-01 O,D.P. ACKNOWLEDGMENT - - - - - - - - - - - - ~ . - - - - '. {~J' l::,{(~ ~~~ '~r ~=;~ f...J:_~ '~~~r~~J ~._.i.~~t ~~~. '..........-v=;. ~~!1 .'J::,,4i:. ':'1~* <<-'Iii,. ~"--'}J-:!:. _.....~~ ~ff; fL?il' ?\~ ~~ f;1i~~' ~'\ ~~i' ~~~ . ,.5$"1i{;;jl1-], . ~Yi? ~-;~ ~~ JJ/,~ . "-';ji4 j:,iX.Q '~~J~... rJ(:<: t, a!~ ~ ~~..~ ~~ ..........: " --';'fJ.t:~.. .",~'~;?:.... i,ijxf . ~\~ ~ :" "3:~\~- . ,__or- . ~---'- - . " .# - - - . ;1 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Forms I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ACKNOWLEDGEMENTOFO~RDmECTPURCHASEPROCEDURES CONSTRUCTION OF HEADWORKS: SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEl\fENTS FOR CITY OF CLEARWATER APCFs PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 05-0063-UT In accordance with the provisions of paragraph 6.2.b. of the General Conditions, the City of Clearwater is exercising its right to implement an Owner Direct Purchase / Sales Tax Savings Program. At the time the Contract Price is established, but not later than concurrently with submission of the required Schedule of Values, the City of Clearwater, and the Engineer shall identify the specific items and the estimated costs of the potential 0 D P. The Contractor shall submit a separate line item cost for each ODP item. The Contractor must clearly and separately identify any contingency or allowance amount associated with any ODP items. The Contract Price must include the total cost of the Work, including the cost of the ODP item and associated sales tax. After the City of Clearwater and the Engineer have identified ODP items the Contractor shall follow the procedures set out in the contract documents. Product handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of Products from elements and from damage and labor for installation and fInishing is the Contractor's responsibility. COMPANY NAME OF BIDDER: CONTACT PERSON & PHONE NO.: ACKNOWLEDGE RECEIPT AND REVIEW OF OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE REFERENCE DOCUMENTS WITH SIGNA TURE& DATE Name Date 03720-022-01 O.D.P. ACKNOWLEDGMENT I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I INSTRUCTIONS FOR ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF HEADWORKS: SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR CITY OF CLEARWATER APCFs PROJECT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT # 05-0063-UT 1. The Contractor and the City, prior to the ordering of any materials, must complete the Addendum to Agreement for Construction of the Headworks: Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for City of Clearwater APCFs project. 2. Attachment "A" is to be completed by the Contractor and submitted with the Addendum. 3. Attachments "B", "C" and "D" relate to Owner-Furnished Materials that are part of the of a Subcontractor's Work. Attachments "B" and "C" would be completed for each Subcontractor responsible for materials as part of the Subcontractor's Work. 4. Submit 2 original copies of the Addendum and Attachments to: City of Clearwater Attention: Ms. Marty Pages, Administrative Analyst P. O. Box 4748 Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 5. If you have any questions regarding this process please direct them to: Keith Bush, PW Controller Desk Phone: 727-562-4716 Cell Phone: 727-224-7872 Fax: 727-562-4755 E-Mail: Keith.Bush@mvClearwater.com Or to: Ste}:?hanie Sansom, PW Senior Accountant Desk Phone: 727-562-4744 Fax: 727-562-4755 E-mail: Stephanie.Sansom(@.mvClearwater.com 03720-022-01 Page 1 of 1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS u_____ _ _........._ I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ADDENDUM TO AGREEMENT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF HEAD WORKS: SCREENING AND GRIT REMOVAL IMPROVEMENTS FOR CITY OF CLEARWATER APCFS. CITY OF CLEARWATER PROJECT NO. #05-0063-UT CITY OF CLEARWATER CONTRACT #05-0063-UT In reference to contract # Clearwater, the Owner, and follows: dated , 2007 between City of , the Contractor, it is further AGREED as 1. The owner has reserved the right to purchase certain portions of the material for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. 2. The attachments lettered A, B, and C, attached hereto (as amended by notations thereon) and incorporated herein shall be executed by the Contractor and applicable Sub-contractors and the terms thereof shall govern the purchase of materials for the Proj ect as determined by the Owner. 3. The contract price shall be reduced by the cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax as bid by the Contractor even if the cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as bid by the Contractor. However, for purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, the original contract amount shall be used. 4. The Contractor reserves the right to authorize payments for invoiced materials, prior to Owner's authorization process, as outlined in attachment D. 5. The Contractor will assist Owner in owner's direct purchase of materials for the project. However, owner Acknowledges that Contractor's Sub-contractors nonetheless each reserves the right to purchase project materials directly, without Owner's prior approval and consequent power to eliminate reimbursement of sales tax. This addendum, upon its execution by both parties, IS made an integral part of the aforementioned agreement. CITY OF CLEARWATER: CONTRACTOR: Date: Date: City Manager/Owner Contractor ATTEST: ATTEST: 03720-022-01 Page 1 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I City Clerk (City's Corporate Seal) APPROVED AS TO FORM: Carlos Colon Assistant City Attorney 03720-022-01 Page 2 of! 0 Secretary REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT "A" FROM CITY OF CLEARWATER (OWNER) TO.:. (CONTRACTOR) OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: Headworks: Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for .City of Clearwater APCFs. City of Clearwater Proiect No. #05-0063-UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. The owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Contractor's contract. Owner-purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Contractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Contractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular material furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 5. The Contractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the 03720-022-01 Page3 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non- conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Contractor shall maintain records of all Owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of Owner-Furnished Materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any Owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. 7. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner- Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is [mal and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during the month for use by the Contractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Contractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within 30 days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written 03720-022-01 Page 4 of! 0 REFERENCE DOCU1vfENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Contractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Contractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Contractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Contractor for salvage or disposal at the Contractor's option. 12. The Contractor shall be entitled to the benefits of any discounts attributable to the early payment of vendor invoices for materials furnished by the Owner pursuant to the Specifications. 13. The Contract between Contractor and Owner is hereby amended to clarify that Owner- Furnished Material shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining the Contract Sum due Contractor. 03720-022-01 Page 5 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT "B" FROM (CONTRACTOR) TO (SUBCONTRACTOK) OWNER-FURNISHED MATERIALS PROJECT: Headworks: Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for City of Clearwater APCFs. City of Clearwater Proiect No. #05-0063-UT 1. The Contract Price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for material, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Subcontractor's Work. The Owner, being exempt from sales tax, reserves the right to make direct purchases of various construction materials included in the Subcontractor's contract. Owner-Purchasing of construction material, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. Additionally, Purchase Orders will include owner's Certification of Exemption number. 2. The Subcontractor shall provide the owner a list of all intended suppliers, vendors, and material for consideration as Owner-Furnished Materials. The Subcontractor shall submit price quotes from the vendors, as well as a description of the materials to be supplied, estimated quantities, and prices. 3. The Subcontractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished by the Owner in accordance with these Special Provisions including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery due to the negligence of the Subcontractor. However, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss during the time that the building materials are physically stored at the job site prior to their installation or incorporation into the project. The Subcontractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Subcontractor for the particular material furnished. The Subcontractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Subcontractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non-payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Subcontractor. 4. As Owner-Furnished Materials are delivered to the job site, the Subcontractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for material delivered. The Subcontractor shall assure that each delivery of Owner-Furnished Materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. 'Ibis documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Subcontractor will then forward the invoice to the Owner for payment, pursuant to Attachment A of this Contract. 03720-022-01 Page 6 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 5. The Subcontractor shall insure that Owner-Furnished Materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to incorporation into the Subcontractor's Work if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Subcontractor discovers defective or non- conformities in Owner-Furnished Materials upon such visual inspection, the Subcontractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Subcontractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Subcontractor's Work such defective or nonconforming Owner-Furnished Materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Subcontractor shall be responsible for all damages to the owner, resulting from Subcontractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidating or delay damages. 6. The Subcontractor shall maintain records of. all owner-Furnished Materials it incorporates into Subcontractor's Work from the stock of Owner-furnished Materials in its possession. The Subcontractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any owner-Furnished Materials delivered into the Subcontractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Subcontractor's Work. 7. The Subcontractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage-repair calls shall be forwarded to the Subcontractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or sub-subcontractor. 8. Notwithstanding the transfer of Owner-Furnished Materials by the Owner to the Subcontractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all Owner- Furnished Materials. 9. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Subcontractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that sales made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Subcontractor agrees to promptly notify Owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to Owner-Furnished Materials. 10. On a monthly basis, Subcontractor shall be required to review invoices submitted by all suppliers of Owner-Furnished Materials delivered to the Project during the month for use by the Subcontractor and either concur or object to the Owner's issuance of payment to the suppliers, based upon Subcontractor's records of materials delivered to the site and any defects in such materials. 11. In order to arrange for the prompt payment to the supplier, the Subcontractor shall provide to the Owner a listing indicating the acceptance of the goods or materials within 15 days of receipt of said goods or materials. The list shall include a copy of all applicable Purchase 03720-022-01 Page 7 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Orders which will include owner's Certificate of Exemption number, invoices, delivery tickets, written acceptance of the delivered item, and such other documentation as may be reasonably required by the Owner. The check will be released, delivered and remitted directly to the supplier. The Subcontractor agrees to assist the Owner to immediately obtain partial or final release or waivers as appropriate. At the end of the Project, Subcontractor will be provided with a deductive Change Order for the cost incurred by the Owner to provide all Owner-Furnished Materials. Salvage materials shall be stored or removed from the site by the Subcontractor at the Owner's direction, or may be turned over to the Subcontractor for salvage or disposal at the Subcontractor's option. 03720-022-01 Page 8 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT"C" From (CONTRACTOR) (SUBCONTRACTOR) To Project: Headworks - Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for City of Clearwater APCFs. City of Clearwater Project No. #05-0063-UT This project qualifies the Owner to utilize its sales tax exemption for the purchase of materials used in the project. In order to do this, the City of Clearwater, Florida, (Owner) must pay for the materials directly. This shall be accomplished in the following manner: 1. Subcontracts will be issued by Contractor to Subcontractors in the usual manner, including sales tax. 2. Subcontractors will prepare their material orders and forward same to Contractor so that City of Clearwater (owner) purchase orders may be placed for these materials. 3. Contractor will return to the Subcontractor a copy of the City of Clearwater (owner) purchase order on behalf of the City of Clearwater (Owner). It shall read: To: Supplier For: Material per attached Subcontractor order, 4. The material supplier will then bill the City of Clearwater (Owner) c/o "Subcontractor" c/o Contractor. Subcontractor will approve invoice and send to Contractor who will submit same to City of Clearwater (Owner) for payment. 5.City of Clearwater (Owner) will then pay the invoice directly and the Subcontractor will be issued a deductive change order for the amount of the invoice plus sales tax. It is imperative that the Subcontractor approve the invoices and forward them to Contractor by the of each month for payment by the _' Those received after the will be processed in the next month's billing cycle. 03720-022-01 Page 9 oflO REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I ATTACHMENT D PROCEDURE FOR GENERATING SUB-CONTRACTOR DIRECT PURCHASE ORDERS FOR SALES TAX CREDITS 1. General Contractor will submit requisition for materials with vendor information required (see vendor application form), item description, quantity if applicable, price, etc. Also included will be the sales tax savings amount. 2. Architect will review the requisition, and forward to the project manager for approval and preparation of electronic purchase requisition. Requisition must contain project number as well as correct account number. 3. Project Manager will then request requisition approval from the Finance Director. 4. Purchasing will issue purchase order and will mail, fax, or otherwise distribute purchase order as requested. 5. A purchase order summary report will be maintained indicating the following: purchase order number, owner Certificate of Exemption number, vendor, total amount of P.O., total tax savings, amount previously requested, amount of current request, and remaining balance of P.O. This report will be updated and issued with each group of payment requests (monthly). 6. Payment requests with invoices must have receiving paperwork with authorized signatures and must be submitted for approval as indicated below: 7. Payment authorization sequence: invoices must be submitted for approval in the following order: a. General Contractor b. Architect c. Project Manager d. Engineering/City Manager e. Purchasing/for processing only f. Finance/for processing only 03720-022-01 Page 10 of 10 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I CITY OF CLEARWATER (Headworks Screeninf! and Grit Removallmorovements for the Northeast, Marshall Street, and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCFs) Contract # 05-0063-UT Clean-vater. Florida) Contractor: CEI: PROCEDURESFORSALESTAXSAVlNGS,REQUESTS TO REQUISITION and RECEIVING/INVOICING Addendum to Al!reement for Construction: 1. See separate instructions for completing the Addendum to Agreement. Process procedures for tax savinl!s: 2. Completion of the Request to Requisition forms by Contractor. 3. Approved by CEL Approver(s): 4. Original to PW Engineering/Marty Pages for processing of P.O. requisition. 5. Based on Request to Requisition forms a schedule will be prepared for the City's Purchasing Manager to reduce the Contractor's P.O. by the amount of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers. It is important to process as many material supplier Requests to Requisition as possible at one time thereby reducing the amount of changes necessary to Contractor's P.O. Construction contract will not change and the sum of the P.O.s to the Materials Suppliers plus the Contractor's P.O will represent the total contract commitment. Before sendim! to the Purcltasine Manaeer, the schedule will be forwarded to the Construction Office, CEI and Contractor's representative for approvaL We will need the e-mail address for the Contractor's & CEl's contact person(s) for this orocess. 6. The estimated sales tax savings for each materials requisition will be deducted from the primary lines of Contractor's P.O. A related Sales Tax Savings line for each charge code will be added to the Contractor's P.O. No changes will be made to the sales tax savings lines until all materials are purchased, received, accepted and paid for unless additional materials purchases are necessary. 7. Closing of the sales tax savings line on the Contractor's P.O. can only be done through a change order (Recommendation is that it's done on the fmal C/O). Process procedures for request to requisition forms: 1. General description is a brief recap (sewer lines and manholes; water lines; etc) 2. Contractor should include their fax number as well as a contact number. 03720-022-01 Page 1 of3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 3. In the description section of the Request to Requisition include any special delivery instructions. 4. Indicate whether or not retainage is to be withheld. City's standard is 5%. 5. Include the address where the supplier is to mail invoices. 6. Where applicable, shipping and handling costs should be listed as a line item on the request to requisition. 7. City staff will complete the charge code line. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal has been received from the ODP supplier: a. On the request to requisition summarize the materials to be ordered by type of system (stormwater, streets, water, sewer, reclaimed, etc) giving the total dollar amount per for each system. Leave 2 line spaces between each system to allow for the addition of the City's charge code. b. Attach the supplier's proposal to be mailed as an attachment to the purchase order. Procedures where a detailed line item proposal is not available: c. Provide quantities and detailed descriptions of the items to be ordered, per unit and total cost as the City's P.O. will be sent directly to the Materials Supplier. d. Materials on each request to requisition should be grouped in relation to the major billing line items on Contractor's P.O. Leave 2 spaces between each group, as the City will add the appropriate charge codes. 8. The requesting official will be the Contractor's official with authority to procure materials. Contractor's authorized procurer(s): 9. The official approving that the materials requested meet the design specifications will be authorized personnel from the CEI only. Authorized approvers: NOTE: Anv materials ordered bv the contractor that are not included on the Citv's issued Durchase order or anv amounts ordered that exceed the amounts on the Citv issued Durchase order MUST be seDaratelv ordered Dursuant to a Durchase order directlv between the sUDDlier and the contractor. These materials MUST be invoiced seDaratelv from the materials sUDDlied Dursuant to the Citv issued Durchase order. Process procedures for receivin2 and invoicin2: 1. Upon receipt of materials, Contractor's representative will provide a receiving report or on the packing list, sien off and date approving the receipt. This acknowledges that the materials are in usable condition and the quantity received. 03720-022-01 Page 2 00 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 2. The Contractor will retain the original receiving report or packing slip to be compared with the Materials Supplier's invoice. 3. The Materials Suppliers will be instructed on the City's P.O. to send their original invoice to the Contractor to the attention of 4. Contractor will compare the receiving report/packing slip with the invoice and approve the payment if they are in agreement. Any discrepancies with the invoice are to be resolved between the Contractor and the Materials Supplier. If the invoice is in error it will be reissued with a new date. The Citv will pav onlv from ori2inal unaltered invoices. 5. After approval the Contractor Will forward the original receiving report or packing slip and invoice to City of Clearwater, Public Services/Construction Office, Attn: Perry Lopez. City of Clearwater Construction Division Attn: Perry Lopez 410 N. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33755 6. After approval the Construction Office will forward the original receiving report or packing slip and invoice to Marty Pages in Engineering for payment processing. 7. Steps 1 through 6 will be followed for each materials receipt and invoice. 8. Materials purchase P.O.s can be closed only upon completion of the materials acquisition and at the approval of the Contractor. 9. Upon closing of a materials purchase P.O. any unused balance will be added back to the appropriate line(s) on Contractor's P.O. CIosine: of Contractor's P.O.: 1. All Materials Suppliers' P.O.'s must be closed prior to the final change order and closing of the Contractor's P.O. 03720-022-01 Page 3 of3 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS I.l.. o >- I- ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ , , , , , , , ~ ~ ~ o PUBLIC WORKS ADMINISTRA nON REQUEST TO REQUISITION STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER General Item Description: Vendor: Street Address: City/State/Zip: Phone No: Receiving Location (Ship to): Street Address: City/State/Zip: Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: (City will complete) Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, jf applicable) Each Total Date: Date: Requesting Official Approving Official Title and Organization - Contractor TItle and Organization - CEI. Services PWA\PublicServices\Construction\Forms\1322-XXXX Request to Requisition\Revised 2/07/05 Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted C.E.&1. Firm and/or to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of Clearwater's Records Management Program. Page 1 of 2 I I I I I u.. Page 2 of 2 >- t- o PUBLIC WORKS ADMINISTRATION REQUEST TO REQUISITION (Continuation page) STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER I I I I I I I I I I I I I I Requested by: Phone Number: Date Needed by: Expense Code: Units Detailed Description Price Per Line # Quantity ($, etc.) (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) Each Total PWA\PublicServices\Construction\Forms\1313-XXXX Request to Requisition\Revised 2/07/05 Completed forms are routed for approval to contracted CE&1. Firm and/or to Engineering. Engineering will process and provide records retention according to City of ClealWater's Records Management Program. ACORDTII CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE (MMIDDIYYYY) 12/28/07 PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION M. E. Wilson Co., Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 300 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Ste 200 Tampa, FL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAlC# INSURED INSURER A: ROCKHILL INS CO 28053 TLC Diversified, Inc. INSURERB:Va11ey Forge Ins Co 20508 2719 17th Street East INSURERC: Westfield Ins Co 24112 Palmetto, FL 34221 INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES- AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. I~~ ADD'I POlICY NUMBER POlICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LIMITS S"; C ~ERAL LIABIUTY TRA3972460 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 X 5MMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY ~~EMISES lea occurence 1 $ 150,000 f-- ClAIMS MADE ~ OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $10,000 f-- X Contractual Liability PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 X $500 Prop Dmg Ded GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMIT APPUES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 n POLICY-Gtl- p'~R-r n LOC B ~TOMOBILE UABlUTY 2083116659 04/01/07 04/01/08 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 X ANY AUTO (Ea eccident) f-- f-- ALl OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ - SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY - $ X NON--OWNED AUTOS (Per eccident) - PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) ~GELlABIUTY AUTO ONLY - EAACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EAACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ A EXCESSlUMBRELLA UABlUTY ctlLOO0387-00 04/01/07 04/01/08 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 5,000,000 ::!1OCCUR D ClAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ 5,000,000 $ ==i DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND WC283116676 04/01/07 04/01/08 X I T~g~m..W~ I IOlb'- EMPLOYERS'LlABIUTY E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $500,000 ANYPROpmETO~ARTNE~ECUTIVE OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 500,000 ~~~il"t~~~:s'l~NS below E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $500,000 OTHER 2083116659 04/01/08 B Auto Physical Damage 04/01/07 ACV Camp Ded: PerSchedule Coll Ded: PerSchedule DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS IVEHICLES f EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT f SPECIAL PROVISIONS City of Clearwater as additional insured Headworks Screening and Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced Pollution Control Facilities (APCFs), Contract #05-0063-UT CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION City of Clearwater DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL ~ DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL Attn: Alice R. Eckman IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR P.O. Box .4748 REPRESENTATIVES. Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE L Z USA .J"'- ;.e:--. ACORD 25 (2001/08) JL002 7845305 @ACORD CORPORATION 1988 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08) ~ Clearwater o~ ~ CONSTRUCTION SERVICES 410 N. Myrtle Ave., 33755 PO Box 4748, Clearwater, FL 33758-4748 Phone: (727) 462-6126, Fax: (727) 462-6989' TRANSMITTAL FORM APR 07 2008 8 Official Records & Legislative Services Attn: Susan Chase, City Clerk Specialist Re: l::>ECORDS '\'.: 1 Cu~rent cekltiJdibhfi>Jtiility Insurance Date: April 3, 2008 WE ARE SENDING TO YOU ~ ATTACHED 0 UNDER SEPARATE COVER VIA THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: o Shop Drawings o Copy of Letter o Prints o Change Order o Plans o Specifications o Samples o As Requested COPIES DATE NO. DESCRIPTION 1 04/03/08 1 Attached copy of "Current Certificate of Liability Insurance" for TlC Diversified. Inc. for the "Headworks Screening & Grit Removal Improvements for the Northeast, Marshall Sl- and East APC Facilities Proiect (05-0063-Un THESE ARE TRANSMITTED AS CHECKED BELOW: o For approval & payment o As requested o o o Approved as submitted o For review and comment o o o Approved as noted o Return _ corrected prints o o ROUTE DATE RECEIVED DATE REVIEWED INITIALS & COMMENTS REMARKS: Attached Current Certificate of Liability Insurance for your Executed Contract. SIGNED: ~~~ Alice Eckman, Construction Office Specialist Please notify us if attachments are not included Thank you for your business cc: Kathy Bedini, Staff AssistanVEngineering (Copy of Certificate) .. ACORDTII CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE -I DATE (MMlDDIYYYY) j' 03/29/08 "PRODUCER 1-813-229-8021 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION M. E. Wilson Co., Inc. ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR 300 W. Platt St. ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. Ste 200 Tampa, PL 33606 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURED INSURER A: Westfield Ins Co 24112 TLC Diversified, Inc. INSURER B: Valley Porge Ins Co 20508 2719 17th Street East INSURER C: ROCKBILL INS CO 28053 Palmetto, PL 34221 INSURER D: INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. II~: r..~~: POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION A ~NERALLlABILlTY TRA3972460 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY I CLAIMS MADE 0 OCCUR ~ Contractual Liability ~ $500 Prop Dmg Ded ~'LAGGRE~ELlMIT AP~SPER: I POLICY I X I P'~R,: I I LOC 04/01/08 04/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE ~~EMISES lea o~~~~nce) MED EXP (Anvone person) PERSONAl & ADV INJURY LIMITS $1,000,000 $150,000 $10,000 $1,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 PRODUCTS-COMP~PAGG $2,000,000 n DEDUCTIBLE iii RETENTION $ 10, 000 B WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE OFFICERlMEMBER EXCLUDED? H yes. describe under SPECIAL PROVISIONS below OTHER B Auto Physical Damage WC283116676 04/01/08 04/01/09 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) $1,000,000 BODILY INJURY $ (Per person) BODILY INJURY $ (Per accident) PROPERTY DAMAGE $ (Per accident) AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC $ AUTO ONLY: AGG $ 04/01/09 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 AGGREGATE $5,000,000 $ $ $ 04/01/09 X I ~~'!}T~:'!;!~ I IO~- E.L EACH ACCIDENT $500,000 E.L DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $500,000 E.L DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $500,000 B ~TOMOBILE LIABILITY 2083116659 r--!- ANY AUTO f-- ALL OWNED AUTOS f-- SCHEDULED AUTOS X HIRED AUTOS f-- X NON-OWNED AUTOS f-- RGE LIABILITY ANY AUTO C ~ESSlUMBRELLA LIABILITY CULOO0387-00 X OCCUR 0 CLAIMS MADE 04/01/08 04/01/08 2083116659 04/01/08 04/01/09 ACV Comp Ded: Coll Ded: perSchedule perSchedule DESCRIP110N OF OPERATIONS/ LOCATIONS/VEHICLES / EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT /SPECIAL PROVISIONS City of Clearwater as additional insured Headworks Screening and Grit Removal ~provements for the Northeast, Marshall Street and East Advanced pollution Control pacilities (APCPs), Contract #05-0063-UT 01::('. t f\ ILn CERTIFICATE HOLDER . 1---';;';; '-' · ...... V. · ~ CANCELLATION USA SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING INSURER WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAlL ~ DAYS WRl1TEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, BUT FAILURE TO DO SO SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER, ITS AGENTS OR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATlVE4,/~," '. i, <"'~,'.""., /, i ~X~~ @ACORD CORPORATION 1988 City of Clearwater APR ()~~ Attn: Alice R. Eckman P.O. Box 4748 CiTY OF CtE;.. ':1'NATER PUBLIC WOR:~e '';()~ t'TRUCTION Clearwater, PL 33758-4748 ACORD 25 (2001/08) kbanks 8415991 " ~ IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ACORD 25 (2001/08)